SPADES AND CLUBS
SCWS
STUDY GUIDE
March 2012
NAME
2010 PQS updates and Officer PQS by LTJG Steinke.
2004 PQS answers by BUC (SCW) Witts.
I
Table of Contents
COMMON CORE ......................................................................................................................... 1
101 NAVAL HERITAGE AND DOCTRINE FUNDAMENTALS .................................................. 1
102 ADMINISTRATIVE/COMMAND AND CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS .............................. 11
103 GENERAL SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................. 1
104 BASIC FIRST AID AND PERSONAL HYGIENE FUNDAMENTALS ................................ 27
105 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL/HAZARDOUS WASTE........................................................... 41
(HM/HW)/ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS .................................................... 41
106 SUPPLY/LOGISTICS FUNDAMENTALS ......................................................................... 48
107 COMMUNICATIONS/COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY MATERIAL SYSTEMS ............. 55
FUNDAMENTALS ................................................................................................................... 55
108 WEAPONS FUNDAMENTALS......................................................................................... 64
109 GENERAL MILITARY TACTICS FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................ 81
110 CONTINGENCY OPERATIONS FUNDAMENTALS ...................................................... 113
111 CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, AND RADIOLOGICAL (CBR) WARFARE .......................... 122
FUNDAMENTALS ................................................................................................................. 122
112 EMBARKATION FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................... 142
113 CIVIL ENGINEER SUPPORT EQUIPMENT (CESE) FUNDAMENTALS ....................... 151
NMCB SPECIFIC ..................................................................................................................... 162
101 SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................................... 162
102 ADMINISTRATION/COMMAND AND CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS ........................... 164
103 SUPPLY/LOGISTICS FUNDAMENTALS ....................................................................... 167
104 COMMUNICATIONS/COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY MATERIAL SYSTEM .............. 171
FUNDAMENTALS ................................................................................................................. 171
105 WEAPONS FUNDAMENTALS....................................................................................... 186
106 EMBARKATION FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................... 190
107 CONTINGENCY OPERATIONS FUNDAMENTALS ...................................................... 208
108 CIVIL ENGINEER SUPPORT EQUIPMENT (CESE) FUNDAMENTALS ....................... 218
201 WARFARE MISSION AREA .......................................................................................... 231
OFFICER .................................................................................................................................. 248
101 SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS ........................................................................................... 248
102 DOCTRINE FUNDAMENTALS ...................................................................................... 251
103 READINESS .................................................................................................................. 258
104 ADMINISTRATION/LOGISTICS FUNDAMENTALS ...................................................... 260
105 COMMUNICATIONS/COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY (COMSEC) FUNDAMENTALS 264
106 GENERAL MILITARY TACTICS FUNDAMENTALS ...................................................... 266
107 CONTINGENCY OPERATIONS FUNDAMENTALS ...................................................... 268
108 EMBARKATION FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................... 270
109 CIVIL ENGINEER SUPPORT EQUIPMENT (CESE) FUNDAMENTALS ....................... 272
110 WEAPONS FUNDAMENTALS....................................................................................... 283
II
This study guide has been developed to aid you in your studies for the Seabee Combat Warfare
Specialist (SCWS) qualification. It was updated from a previous 2007 PQS study guide. The
2007/2004 PQS questions and answers were maintained with a suffix of “OLD”. These are good
notes to be familiar with because the people giving the written/oral board may be more familiar with
the PQS they qualified under and may ask these questions.
It is not all-inclusive; some sections may be outdated and it is only valid for the October 2010 PQS
version. It is YOUR responsibility to prepare for your SCWS test and oral board by studying ALL
questions in your PQS books.
For further assistance and numerous references, log on to NKO. Go to the Seabees and Facilities
Engineering community/learning center home page. In the left column, “Career Management/PQS”
About 2/3 of the way down the page “PQS Listing and Reference Library” Most references are here.
Non-Resident Training Course Enrollment Procedures
Courses required for the SEABEE COMBAT WARFARE Program:
Naval Construction Force (NCF) / Seabee Petty Officer 1 & C (NAVEDTRA 14233)
Seabee Combat Handbook Volume 1 and 2 (NAVEDTRA 14234/14235)
Naval Safety Supervisor (NAVEDTRA 14167)
You can find the courses at: https://www.advancement.cnet.navy.mil/index.asp?window=login
Enter your last name, SSN and Date of Birth, OR NKO login and password and then click “login”.
Then scroll down and click on the “NRTC Enrollment Web Site” on the left side of the page. The
next web page should pop up with “STUDENT SERVICES”. Click on it. Enter your last name, SSN
and Date of Birth, and then click “submit.” Update your information if needed (If not click update
data anyway). Then click next. Now you should be able to click on the “Enroll in up to 4
Additional Courses”. Now click on “I Plan To Complete the Course, Continue with
Enrollment”. Here is where you will find the courses to complete before submitting your request
chit to enroll in the SCW Program.
III
COMMON CORE
101
COMMON CORE
101 GENERAL SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 5100.23F, Navy Occupational Safety and Health (NAVOSH) Program
Manual
[b] COMFIRSTNCDINST 5100.2B, Naval Construction Force Occupational Safety and Health
Program
[c] Industrial/Construction Standards 29 CFR 1910/1926
[d] NAVEDTRA 14026, Construction Electrician Basic
[e] NAVEDTRA 14167, Naval Safety Supervisor
[f] OPNAVINST 3500.39A, Operational Risk Management_______________________
101.1 Explain the responsibilities of the following personnel as applied to safety: [ref. e, ch. 1]
 Commanding Officer
o Responsible for the safety and health of all military and civilian personnel, the safe
use and condition of equipment, and the protection of all government property
o Ensures compliance with established procedures and work practices
o Ensures OSH councils and committees are formed at appropriate command levels
o Ensures compliance with current instructions and regulations
o Ensures all work places receive a safety inspection at least annually
o Establishes a Hazard Abatement Program
o Establishes NAVOSH education and training programs
o Coordinates occupational health support with the cognizant Naval Hospital or
Regional Medical Center
o Reviews and signs the Annual Safety Report
 Executive Officer
o Chairman of Occupational Safety and Health (OSH) Counsel, assumes the duties
of C.O in his/her absence
o Acts as Chairman for the OSH Policy Committee Meeting
o Enforces the CO’s safety policies and procedure
 Safety Officer
o Advises the CO on matters pertaining to safety, manages the command safety
program, investigates mishaps, monitors projects, shops, and special evolutions for
compliance with safety standards
o Organizationally on the immediate staff of the CO. A full time assignment.
o Maintains complete and accurate records on the accident, injury, occupational
illness rate of unit and submits monthly mishap summaries to Division
o Develops accident prevention and loss of control measures and programs
o Conducts safety and accident investigations, analyzes reports of occupational
injuries and or property damage to identify factors or trends
o As required, prepares specific safety rules and regulations for approval by the CO
o Instruction verification
o Reviews and approves all project general and specific safety plans
o Organizes and conducts safety inspections and surveys to identify violations,
hazards, and deficiencies in operations, facilities, and equipment
o Records safety and health violations through an aggressive Hazard Abatement
Program
o Coordinates actions and follows up on corrective measures taken
o Maintains liaison with planning and design officials
o Assists supervisors in developing and conducting safety training. Provides
consultation services, advice, and guidance
o Technical authority in the procurement of PPE
1
COMMON CORE
o





2
101
Conducts hazard analysis of project/shop operations and develops safe working
standards and conditions
o Consults and maintains liaison with key personnel during various planning
evolutions
o Submits minutes of OSH Policy and Safety Supervisor committee meetings to the
CO for review
o TRAINS, EDUCATES, TRACKS, INSPECTS, FOLLOWS UP
Department Head/Company Commander
o Responsible for safety within their areas of responsibility enforces safety
standards. Are assigned as members of the OSH Counsel
o Ensures all safety regulations are complied with
o Promotes and strengthens the safety program through all levels of supervision by
establishing internal training procedures
o Plans all work with regards to safety and the safety related equipment or materials
needed
o Supervises and monitors staff to ensure full compliance with all safety rules and
regulation
o Picks the right person for the job at hand and ensures they are trained
o Reviews work procedures and takes positive action to correct all hazards
o Ensures proper tracking of all training and the complete thorough investigation of all
mishaps with timely submissions
Supervisor
o Responsible for the safety of their personnel, develop safety plans, enforce safety
standards, ensure adequate PPE is available
o Be familiar with safety rules and regulations for jobs and facilities in your area
o Enforces safety rules immediately corrects any unsafe act or noted deficiency
o Inspects jobs and work areas for hazards and unsafe work habits
o Educates and trains personnel, sets the example
o Reports all mishaps in a timely manner
o Investigates all mishaps, determines the basic causes, and takes corrective actions
to prevent repetitive mishaps
o Ensures PPE is available and properly being worn at all work sites
o Knows personnel limitations, assigns the right person to the task at hand
o Posts appropriate signs and warnings
Crew Leader
o Key people in a successful and aggressive safety program. Responsibilities
include but are not limited to
o Being familiar with safety rules and regulations
o Enforcing safety rules and correcting unsafe acts
o Educating and training personnel
o Reporting all mishaps and near misses
o Ensuring the correct personal protective equipment is available
Safety Petty Officer
o Monitors safety within their Company/Department/Detail. Initiate preliminary
mishap investigation within their area of responsibility
o Principle advisor to Company Commander/Department Head/Det OIC
o Normally an E-6 or above, must have attended the Safety Managers Course
All Hands
o Responsible for their own safety and the safety of their “Shipmates”. Everyone
should be aware of the hazards to which they are exposed and precautionary
measures to prevent personal injury or property damage
o Reports to work well rested and emotionally prepared for the task at hand
o Understands and follows safety and health precautions pertinent to work areas
COMMON CORE
o
o
o
o
101
Reports to immediate supervisor any unsafe conditions or acts
Cautions those who may be endangered by suspected, known, unusual or
developing hazards
Reports any mishaps to your immediate supervisor
Uses all PPE required to complete the task
101.2 Explain the functions of the Safety Council, Enlisted Safety Committee, and Safety Petty
Officer Committee. [ref. e, ch. 1]
 Safety Council
o The Safety Council convenes quarterly to develop recommendations for policy in
safety matters and to analyze progress of the overall safety program. The council
consists of the commanding officer or executive officer (chairperson), the unit
safety officer (recorder), and safety representatives from each department.
 Enlisted Safety Committee
o The Enlisted Safety Committee makes recommendations about the command’s
safety program to the Safety Council. The safety committee convenes to exchange
information; improve communications; review conditions, mishaps, and injuries; and
suggest improvements. It makes written safety recommendations to the Safety
Council and the commanding officer. These meetings convene monthly to enhance
interdepartmental communication in mishap prevention at division and work center
levels.
101.3 Discuss the purpose of a mishap investigation and who’s responsible for conducting
the investigation. [ref. e, ch. 4]
 The purpose of a mishap investigation is to determine the primary and contributing causes
of the mishap. From those causes we can then plan corrective action to prevent a
recurrence of the mishap. To limit mishap losses, we must analyze the frequency of
potential mishaps and identify mishap causes. Investigation of mishaps is the responsibility
of all levels of supervision, from the first-line supervisor to the commanding officer. Division
officers, department heads, or representatives appointed by the commanding officer
usually investigate serious injury or major property damage mishaps. First- and secondline supervisors investigate non-disabling injury or minor property damage mishaps.
101.4 Explain the different types of eye protection and when are they required. [ref. e, ch. 5]
 All Navy activities that expose personnel to eye hazards shall have a sight conservation
program with the following as a minimum:
o Identification and evaluation of eye hazard
o Prescription protective eye wear program
o Procurement and maintenance of safety glasses
o Training for employees
o Effective program enforcement
 Types of Eye Protection
o Goggles
o Safety glasses
o Permanent walls
o Temporary/moveable shields
o Signs must be posted in all eye hazard areas
 Different types of eye protection and uses
o Safety goggles: protect from flying particles and dust
o Chemical goggles: Protect from splashing liquids, (acids, solvents, etc)
o Safety glasses: protect from flying particles (impact, debris)
o Welding glasses/goggles: Protect form Ultraviolet radiation (arc flash)
3
COMMON CORE
o
101
Over-spectacle glasses (plano’s): Protect from flying particles and impact worn
over prescription glasses
101.5 Discuss the Hearing Conservation Program and when personnel are required to be
enrolled. [ref. a, ch. 18, pp. 18-1 thru 18-6]
 Intended to prevent hearing loss related to exposure to high noise levels
 Noises greater than 84 dba and peak noises greater than 140 dba require hearing
protection. (ear plugs or ear muffs)
 Noises greater than 104 dba require double hearing protection. (ear plugs and muffs)
 Personnel are enrolled in the Hearing Conservation Program when they are exposed to
noises greater than 84 dba for an 8-hour workweek.
 Personnel enrolled in the program must have a baseline hearing test (audiogram) and
annual testing while in the program
 When a person is removed from the program they must be tested for documentation of
hearing capability
 Goal is to prevent occupational hearing loss and ensure auditory fitness for duty in the
military and civilian workforce
o Meeting the goal
 Noise Measure and Analysis
 Survey work environments
 Engineering Control
 Reduction of noise at the source
 Hearing Protective devices
 Single hearing protection is required when exposed to 84 dba or one time decibel peaks of
140 dB or greater
 Double hearing protection is required when exposed to steady decibel levels exceeding
104 dB
 Audiometer
o Baseline completed at MEPS
o Yearly testing on personnel exposed to 84db daily
o Five years for personnel not exposed to 84 dB daily
o Education
o Every one will receive yearly training
101.6 Explain the different types of hearing protection and when are they required. [ref. a, ch.
18, pp. 18-8 thru 18-9]]
 Insert type: Ear plugs, disposable foam or issued triple flange.
 Circumaural type: Ear muffs
o Required for continuous noise levels greater than 84 dba and peak noise levels
greater than 140 dba
 Combination: Ear plugs and ear muffs
o Required for continuous noise levels greater than 104 dba
101.7 Explain why it is necessary to properly use and maintain Personal Protective Equipment
(PPE). [ref. a, ch. 20, p. 20-1]
 If the PPE isn’t properly used, cared for, and maintained it will not provide the expected
protection it was designed for.
 Maintenance and use of PPE
o Personnel Protective Equipment (PPE) should be maintained in a condition that
allows proper use of the equipment
o Scratched lenses, dirty, missing components, etc. can lessen the effectiveness of
the equipment and deter usage
4
COMMON CORE


101
When PPE is not used properly people may be injured.
Types of protection
o Head protection: protection from impact of falling and flying objects
o Foot protection: protection of foot and toe from falling objects such as construction
material handling
o Eye protection: protection from flying particles or chips, and splashing from liquids
o Hand protection: to protect fingers and hand from sharp objects. Shock absorbing
gloves for jack hammers
o Electrical protection: rubber protective equipment rated for certain voltages for
electrical workers
o Long sleeves: to protect arms from flying debris and sparks
o Life lines: protection from falling heights greater than 6’
o Aprons: protection from splashes or sparks at mid section
o Respiratory protection: protection from particles, fumes, mists, dusts and vapors
101.8 State the purpose of temporary electrical power sources and explain source inspection
and certification requirements. [ref. b, ch. 24, p. 24-1]
 Types of Temporary Power:
o Generators, 5kw has to be grounded unless states as double insulated otherwise
on the generator
o Resistance level must be below 25 ohms to ground for normal set-up, 15 ohms in
hazardous atmospheres and 5 ohms in explosive atmospheres
o Existing power, checked for proper grounding
o Existing power pole, run through a spider box to reduce current. Must also be
grounded
o All temporary electrical power sources shall only be permitted during emergencies,
periods of construction, remodeling, repair to or demolition of structures or similar
activities
o All temporary sources shall be inspected, certified safe and tagged with the
inspector’s name, company, and date prior to the first uses.
o All sources shall be re-inspected every 14 days after initial inspection and certified
safe for continued use on the attached tag
o The inspection of temporary power sources shall also be kept in a logbook. This
log will contain the same information as the tag, plus it will also contain the exact
location of the tag (s).
o The primary purpose of the inspection is to ensure that proper grounding is
established and that this source can be utilized without endangering the worker
 Temporary electric power is defined as any electric power sources used for construction,
renovation, contingency, or emergency operations. Any electric power source we use with
hand tools and equipment is considered “temporary power”.
o Temporary power sources are inspected to insure:
 Proper voltage
 Proper polarity
 Adequate ground
 All generators must be grounded to earth with a minimum of 25 ohms resistance or comply
with the National Electric Code when 25 ohms or less can not be achieved
101.9 Explain when Ground Fault Circuit Interruption (GFCI) protection is required. [ref. c, 29
CFR 1926, Subpart K, p. 248]
5
COMMON CORE









101
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCI’s) are required to be used with all electric hand
tools (drills, saws, concrete vibrators, etc)
GFCI’s detect a change in the flow of electricity and interrupt the circuit before any harm
can be done to personnel. GFCI’s must trip at less than .5 milliampres
GFCI’s must be tested monthly to ensure proper function
GFCI’s must be plugged directly into to power source and all power drawn from them.
All 120 colt, single phase 15 and 20 ampere receptacle outlets on construction sites or
shops shall have an approved class A, group I, GFCI unit with a trip level between 3 and 5
mili-amperes
Receptacles on two wire, single phase portable or vehicle mounted generators, rated not
more than 5 kw, where the circuit conductors of the generator are insulated form the
generator from a and all other grounding surfaces do not requires GFCI protection
The CTR electrician shall ensure that all GFCI’s function correctly, are in good repair and
maintains a GFCI inspection log.
No repairs to GFCI are authorized
GCFI’s that are damaged or fail to function correctly will be returned to the manufacturer
for repair and/or replacement
101.10 Explain the electrical and power equipment inspection requirements. [ref. d, ch. 3, p.
248]
 All tools (electrical, power, hand, etc) will be inspected daily by the operator prior to use.
This includes PPE, extension cords, air hoses, hydraulic components etc.
 Any tool or equipment found defective or damaged must be removed from service until
repaired or replaced
 Powder activated tools must be inspected monthly by a qualified technician with inspection
documented and maintained
 The following tests hall be performed on cord sets, receptacle not part of the permanent
wiring of a building or structure, and cord and plug connected equipment required to be
grounded.
 All equipment grounding conductors shall be tested for continuity and shall be electrically
continuous
 Each receptacle and attachment cap or plug shall be tested for correct attachment of the
equipment-grounding conductor. The equipment grounding conductors shall be connected
to its proper terminal
 Required times of inspections
o Before the first use
o Before equipment is returned to service after any repair
o Before equipment is used after any incident which can be reasonably suspected to
have caused damage
o At intervals not to exceed on month
 Equipment which has not met the requirements of this paragraph shall not be issued for
used and stored in CTR
101.11 Discuss lockout/tag-out requirements for the following:
a. Program [ref. b, ch. 24, p. 24-3]
Commanding Officer shall designate a Lockout/Tagout Program Manager. Lockout/Tagout
Program Manager shall be properly trained
The command Lockout/Tagout program shall include the following minimum requirements.
(1) Notification of affected personnel.
(2) Preparation for shut down.
6
COMMON CORE
101
(3) Mechanical or equipment shut down.
(4) Mechanical or equipment isolation.
(5) Lock and tag application
(6) Release of stored energy.
(7) Verification of isolation.
(8) Release of Lockout/Tagout.
b. Procedures [ref. a, ch. 24, p. 24-2]


All potential energy sources must be secured prior to working on equipment and machinery
Locks and tags are installed to prevent accidental activation of the equipment or energizing
the power source while work is being performed
 Damaged or unsafe equipment or machinery should be locked or tagged out of service to
prevent use until repairs are made
 Only qualified personnel are authorized to perform lockout/tagout. The lockout/tagout log
is maintained in the Safety Office.
 A tag by itself without a lock is not authorized. The purpose of a tag is to identify the
purpose of the lockout and the person responsible for the lock control.
 Required when you will be working on any items that will store energy as:
o Electrical equipment
o Hydraulic
o Steam
 Lockout devices
o Locks
o Lockout device Tags
o Red tags (danger tags)
101.12 Define “Confined space” and discuss the hazards associated with it. [ref. a, ch. 27, p.
366]
 Confined spaces are spaces with:
o Limited access or egress (not equipped with regular doors or intended for frequent
entry)
o Poor to no ventilation
o Potential to contain harmful gasses or vapors
o Low or high oxygen concentration < 19.5% or > 23.5 %
 Hazards associated with confined spaces
o Suffocation
o Poisoning
o Explosion
o Electrocution
o Entrapment
o Typical injuries (cuts, abrasions, falling slipping, etc)
 Hazards
o Oxygen Deficiency below 19.5 %
o Flammable gases or materials
 Confined Space Program Manager
o Only person who can certify a confined space entrance
o Lists PPE required to enter a confined space
o Constantly monitors work space during job
 Only Gas Free Engineers are authorized to certify a confined space for entry
 Once all personnel exit the space for any duration, the space must be re-certified
 All confined spaces with potential hazards require a permit for entry
7
COMMON CORE
101
101.13 Explain who is authorized to certify a “Confined space” as safe for entry/work. [ref. a,
ch. 27, p. 367
 A qualified gas-free engineer must conduct an inspection to ensure safe working
conditions, proper oxygen levels and no harmful gasses or vapors and is the only
individual authorized to permit entry by personnel
101.14 Discuss the three basic types of respirators and explain their use, care, and selection.
[ref. a, ch. 15 p. 192]
 Types of Respirators
o Supplied Air Respirator
 Used in oxygen deficient spaces or where hazardous gases are present
o Self Contained Breathing Apparatus (SCBA)
 Used in oxygen deficient spaces or where hazardous gases are present.
Usually when the workers will be on the move
o Air Purifying Respirators
 Used to clean the air you are breathing only. Cannot filter out hazardous
gases or provide oxygen to breathe.
 Care
o Inspected prior to each use.
o Cartridges shall be changed when they are no longer effective
o Disposable respirators shall be damaged to prevent further use prior to disposal
 Cleaning
o Wipe after each use with alcohol swab
o Wash monthly with warm soapy water
o Maintenance
o Fixed by RPPM only
 Storage
o Stored in dry, clean, labeled and air tight bag
o Stored laying flat
o Replacement criteria
 Filter replacement schedules will be determined by the RPPM.
Replacement depends on the filter type, type of chemical and exposure
level to the chemical, temperature, and humidity.
 Selection
o Type of hazards you will be exposed to
o Permissible Exposure Limit as set by OSHA
o Threshold Limit Value as set by the American Council of Government Industrial
Hygienists (ACGIH)
o MSDS sheet requirements
o NIOSH Chemical Guide handbook
o Industrial Hygienist department recommendation
o Three Basic types
 Air Purifying
 Purifies air by filtration (does not provide oxygen)
 Supplied air
 Uses a respirator face piece in conjunction with a remote air source,
air hose restricts movement, unlimited time limit
 Self Contained Breathing Apparatus
 Completely self contained allows freedom of movement in harmful
environments, has a time limitation
 Use of respirators
8
COMMON CORE
o
o
101
Respirators are used in atmospheres containing harmful fumes, vapors, and gases.
Additionally, may be used in atmospheres without sufficient oxygen (supplied air
and SCBA)
Respirators must be applicable to the environments in which they are to be used.
101.15 Discuss the importance of the Industrial Hygiene and Work Place Monitoring Program.
[ref. a, ch. 8 p. 126]
 Industrial Hygiene (IH) personnel recognized evaluates and makes recommendations to
control potential workplace hazards.
 Assess potential health risks faced by Navy personnel
 Establish and document historical records of exposure levels for Navy personnel
 Ensure and demonstrate compliance with NAVOSH exposure criteria
 IH performs work place monitor provides:
o Descriptions of the operations, tasks and work practices which take place in each
workplace
o Lists of hazardous materials used in each work place
o Lists of the physical hazards, noise hazards, and sources of non-ionizing radiation.
o Existing administrative controls, environmental controls and/or PPE required in
each shop
 IH workplace monitoring
o Conducted annually or when a change occurs
o Workplaces are monitored by the IH to determine levels of exposure to hazards
o Workplaces should be re-evaluated annually to determine any changes in hazard
potential.
o Workplaces should be monitored when new equipment or processes are
introduced.
101.16 Discuss the basic reporting procedures required when an unsafe/unhealthful working
condition report is submitted. [ref. a, ch. 10 pp. 143 thru 144]
 Reporting Procedures
o Report to the Chain of Command
o If Chain of Command does not resolve the problem, report to the Safety Office.
o If you desire not to verbally report to the Safety Office, you may submit a “Report of
Unsafe/Unhealthy Working Conditions” OPNAV 5100/11.
o Once the Safety Office receives the report they have up to 72 hours to investigate
the situation.
o Alleged imminent danger situations will be investigated within 24 hours.
o The Safety Officer will reply in writing to the person submitting the report within 10
working days.
 Unsafe/Unhealthful Working Conditions
o Normally conducted by the Safety Officer
 Detecting unsafe or unhealthy working conditions at the earliest possible
time, then making prompt corrections of those hazards at the lowest
possible level are essential to properly resolving unsafe or unhealthful
conditions.
 Investigation time limits
 24 hours on IDLH, immediately dangerous to life and health
 3 days for serious situations
 Health hazard are referred to Medical
 Response
 10 working days to originator in writing
 List what is being done
9
COMMON CORE

101
 Who to appeal to findings to
Appeals
 Copy of 5100/11
 Written response
 Letter stating why you are not happy with the response
OLD.17 Explain the importance of properly grounding portable electrical power and distribution
systems. [ref. d, ch. 3]
 Electrical distribution systems require grounding to provide over current protection to the
equipment, should the equipment be struck by lightning the grounding method provides a
path to ground for the energy instead of through the distribution system
 All electrical distribution grounding system grounds must read less than 25 ohms to ground
resistance or be in accordance with the National Electric Code
 Protects human life by providing the least path of resistance to ground for electrical current
 Protects equipment from damage due to prolonged over current conditions
 Protects the distribution systems electrical from sustaining severe damage
101.17 Discuss the four general classes of fires and what types of extinguishers are used on
each. [ref. e, ch. 18 p. 187]
Table 1 Class of fires
Class
What’s burning
Extinguishing methods
Class A:
Combustible materials such as wood, paper,
clothing, rubber and many plastics
Class B:
Petroleum products, oils, greases, tars, oil
base paints, lacquers and flammable gases
Electrical
water, antifreeze, soda-acid,
foam, aqueous film forming
foam (AFFF
Halon, AFFF, Dry chemical,
CO2, Foam,
Deenergize, Dry chemical,
CO2, Halon
No known extinguishing
method, clear the area and
let it burn out
Class C
Class D:
Metal (magnesium, phosphorous, titanium,
zirconium, sodium, lithium and potassium)
101.18 Discuss the purpose of safety stand-downs. [ref. e, ch. 1, p. 13]
 Safety Stand-downs are to provide specific safety information and training for specific hazards,
evolutions, and activities
 Safety Stand-downs are usually before know potentially dangerous times such as holiday
seasons, prior to exercises, etc
 Additionally, Safety Stand-downs are scheduled after catastrophic mishaps to prevent similar
mishaps
 Provides a forum to release specific safety information or guidance to a large audience
 Used to focus personnel on specific hazards of their jobs and work conditions
 Re-enforces safety as the number one priority required in the performance of their jobs
 Provides time for personnel to reflect on past and current work safety practices and standards
101.19 Discuss the concept of ORM. [ref. f, encl. 1, p. 1]
 ORM is a decision making process that enhances operational capability. Naval Warfare
Publication 1 states, "Risk management and risk assessment are formal, essential tools of
operational planning. Sound decision making requires the use of these tools both in battle and
in training." ORM, described in enclosure (1), is a method for identifying hazards, assessing
risks and implementing controls to reduce the risk associated with any operation.
 Reduction of operational loss.
10
COMMON CORE





101
Lower compliance/auditing costs.
Early detection of unlawful activities.
Reduced exposure to future risks.
Time critical Risk Management
o A – Assess the situation
o B – Balance resources
o C – Communicate to others
o D – Do and Debrief the even
Three levels of ORM
 In Depth
o In depth risk management is used before a project is implemented, when there is
plenty of time to plan and prepare. Examples of in depth methods include training,
drafting instructions and requirements, and acquiring personal protective
equipment.
 Deliberate
o Deliberate risk management is used at routine periods through the implementation
of a project or process. Examples include quality assurance, on-the-job training,
safety briefs, performance reviews, and safety checks.
o Time Critical
o Time critical risk management is used during operational exercises or execution of
tasks. It is defined as the effective use of all available resources by individuals,
crews, and teams to safely and effectively accomplish the mission or task using risk
management concepts when time and resources are limited. Examples of tools
used includes execution check-lists and change management. This requires a high
degree of situational awareness.
101.20 Explain the following as they apply to ORM: [ref. f, encl. 1, pp. 2 thru 3]
 Identifying hazards [p. 2]
o Begin with an outline or chart of the major steps in the operation (operational analysis).
Next, conduct a Preliminary Hazard Analysis by listing all of the hazards associated
with each step in the operational analysis along with possible causes for those
hazards.
 Assessing hazards [p. 2]
o For each hazard identified, determine the associated degree of risk in terms of
probability and severity. Although not required, the use of a matrix may be helpful in
assessing hazards described further in paragraph d).
 Making risk decisions [p. 2]
o First, develop risk control options. Start with the most serious risk first and select
controls that will reduce the risk to a minimum consistent with mission accomplishment.
With selected controls in place, decide if the benefit of the operation outweighs the risk.
If risk outweighs benefit or if assistance is required to implement controls,
communicate with higher authority in the chain of command.
 Reject the risk. If overall risks exceed benefits or value, do not take the risk.
 Avoid the Risk. It may be possible to avoid specific risks by “going around”
them or doing the mission or task in a different way.
 Delay an Action. If there is no time deadline or other benefit or value to speedy
accomplishment of a mission or task, it may be possible to reduce the risk by
delaying the task.
 Transfer the Risk. Risk may be reduced by transferring all or some portion of
that mission or task to another individual, unit, or platform that is better
positioned, more survivable, or more expendable.
11
COMMON CORE
101



Compensate for the Risk. To ensure the success of critical missions or tasks
and compensate for potential losses assign redundant capabilities.
Implementing controls [pp. 2, 3]
o The following measures can be used to eliminate hazards or reduce the degree of risk.
These are listed by order of preference:
 Administrative Controls - Controls that reduce risks through specific
administrative actions, such as:
 Providing suitable warnings, markings, placards, signs, and notices.
 Establishing written policies, programs instructions and standard
operating procedures (SOP).
 Training personnel to recognize hazards and take appropriate
precautionary measures.
 Limiting the exposure to a hazard (either by reducing the number of
personnel/assets or the length of time they are exposed).
 Engineering Controls - Controls that use engineering methods to reduce risks
by design, material selection or substitution when technically or economically
feasible.
 Physical controls - Personal Protective Equipment - Serves as a barrier
between personnel and a hazard. It should be used when other controls do not
reduce the hazard to an acceptable level.
Supervising [p. 3]
o Conduct follow-up evaluations of the controls to ensure they remain in place and have
the desired effect. Monitor for changes, which may require further ORM. Take
corrective action when necessary.
101.21 Discuss the four principles of ORM. [ref. f, encl. 1, p. 4]
 Accept risk when benefits outweigh the cost.
 Accept no unnecessary risk.
 Anticipate and manage risk by planning.
 Make risk decisions at the right level.
101.22 Define Hazard Severity and Mishap Probability in relation to the Risk assessment Code.
[ref. f, encl. 1, pp. 5 thru 6]
Table 2 Severity of Risk
Category Description
I
Loss of the ability to accomplish the mission. Death or permanent total disability. Loss
of a mission-critical system or equipment. Major facility damage. Severe environmental
damage. Mission-critical security failure. Unacceptable collateral damage.
II
Significantly degraded mission capability or unit readiness. Permanent partial disability
or severe injury or illness. Extensive damage to equipment or systems. Significant
damage to property or the environment. Security failure. Significant collateral damage
III
Degraded mission capability or unit readiness. Minor damage to equipment, systems,
property, or the environment. Minor injury or illness
IV
Little or no adverse impact on mission capability or unit readiness. Minimal threat to
personnel, safety, or health. Slight equipment or systems damage, but fully functional
and serviceable. Little or no property or environmental
damage
12
COMMON CORE
101
Table 3 Probability of Risk
Category
A
B
C
D
Description
Likely to occur, immediately or within a short period of time. Expected to occur
frequently to an individual item or person; or continuously over a service life for an
inventory of items or group.
Probably will occur in time. Expected to occur several times to an individual item or
person; or frequently over a service life for an inventory of items or group.
May occur in time. Can reasonably be expected to occur some time to an
individual item or person; or several times over a service life for an
inventory of items, or group.
Unlikely to occur, but not impossible
Table 4 Risk Assessment Matrix
13
COMMON CORE
102 1
102 NAVAL HERITAGE AND DOCTRINE FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] Naval Doctrine Publication 1, Warfare
[b] Naval Doctrine Publication 5, Planning
[c] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
[d] NWP 4-04.1, Seabee Operations in the MAGTF
[e] http://www.arlingtoncemetery.net/rdstethe.htm
[f] Blue Jackets’ Manual, 23rd Edition
[g] NAVEDTRA 38200-A, Petty Officer Indoctrination Course
[h] NTRP 4-04.2.1 Doctrinal reference for NCF
[i] P 3-34 (Feb 07), Engineering Doctrine for Joint Operations___________________________
102.1 Discuss the three circumstances that led to the formation of the U.S. Navy. [ref. a, ch. 1,
pp. 5 thru 6]
 General George Washington initiated America’s first sea-based offensive against the British.
Washington’s armed vessels provided significant support to colonial efforts, demonstrating the
value of military operations at sea
 The initial continental fleet was comprised from converted merchantmen
 As Congress continued to commission ships, notable leaders such as John Paul Jones helped
to develop a proud and capable Navy.
 Early fleets were manned by Marines as part of their ships’ crews.
 In essence, the first Marines were soldiers detailed for sea service.
 Congress continued to provide for Marines as long as there was one Navy ship still at sea.
13 October 1775, Navy’s official birthday. George Washington announced that he had taken
command of three armed schooners under Continental authority to intercept any British supply ships
near Massachusetts.
Post Revolutionary War
 Both the Continental Navy and Marine Corps were disbanded.
1790
 A fleet of “ten boats for the collection of revenue” was authorized and became commonly
known as the Revenue Marine.
27 March 1794
 Congress authorized the Department of War to construct six frigates, for the protection of
American merchantmen against the Barbary corsairs.
 3 years later the USS United States, USS Constellation and USS Constitution were
commissioned.
1798
 Four years later, in response to renewed aggression by France during its war against Great
Britain, Congress finally established the Department of the Navy, authorized the Marine Corps,
and began the first significant buildup of naval forces as we know them today.
Payments in ransom and tribute to the Barbary states amounted to 20% of United States government
annual expenditures in 1800
First Barbary War was the United States First expeditious
Three maritime services of today
 Navy
 Marine Corps
 Coast Guard
1
COMMON CORE
102 1
102.2 Identify and explain the four qualities that represent the characteristics of the Naval
Forces. [ref. a, ch. 1, p.8
 The qualities that characterize most modern naval forces as political instruments in support of
national policies are the same as those that define the essence of our naval services today.
These qualities are READINESS, FLEXIBILITY, SELF-SUSTAINABILITY, and MOBILITY.
 These qualities permit naval forces to be expeditionary in nature.
 Naval expeditionary forces draw upon their readiness, flexibility, self-sustainability, and mobility
to provide the National Command.
102.3 State and discuss the seven principles of planning to Naval operations. [ref. b, ch. 1, p.
12]
 Naval planning is structured using the following seven principles: relevance, clarity, timeliness,
flexibility, participation, economy of resources, security, and coordination. These enduring
principles are illustrated in excerpts from the Navy War Instructions of 1944 chapter
"Command and Operations."
 Relevance –
o First relevance criterion determines whether a mission warrants any expenditure of
resources. Objectives and missions which do not complement plans of senior
commanders and the National Command Authorities are irrelevant
o second relevance criterion determines practicality. Even if an objective or mission
supports the objectives of higher authority, it is irrelevant if it cannot be accomplished
by available forces.
 Clarity - Clear, direct plans are easily understood and are more likely to be successfully
executed than complex plans
 Timeliness - Complete and distribute plans expeditiously to allow subordinate and supporting
commanders adequate time to plan for, train to, and execute their responsibilities.
 Flexibility - A plan must allow subordinate commanders the initiative to seize opportunity and
avoid unseen hazards.
 Participation. Widely distribute plans as early as possible to allow participation of assigned
and supporting commands and to facilitate their planning efforts
 Economy of Resources Plans must provide for maximum economy in the use of resources.
Avoid unnecessarily assigning, moving, or holding in reserve forces which can be applied to
the primary objective. Control of scarce resources must be centralized at the lowest level at
which their capabilities can be effectively directed and coordinated for the overall benefit of the
force. Economy does not imply that commanders should assign only a marginal sufficiency of
resources to the task, but rather that commanders should use all forces and support needed to
ensure decisive victory at the least cost.
 Security Protect plans from compromise to prevent an enemy from preparing an effective
response. Adequate security may be achieved through a variety of means including: limiting
distribution, isolating forces with detailed knowledge, and practicing complete communications
security.
 Coordination Military operations are complex endeavors tied together by the focus of effort
expressed in the commander's intent. At any instant, diverse forces may act independently to
support this focus of effort. Such actions may support either a single mission or several
consecutive missions. Planners must provide sufficient coordinating instructions to
synchronize both simultaneous and consecutive action, ensure that separate operations and
forces avoid interference, and provide support where and when needed

2
Naval planning is fundamental to leadership. Planning provides the discipline to focus on the
objectives, intentions, capabilities, and resources required to accomplish assigned missions.
COMMON CORE
102 1
Planning also requires commanders to estimate the capabilities of a potential adversary and to
evaluate options.
102.4 Discuss the purposes of the U.S Naval Forces. [ref. f, ch. 2, pp. 17 thru 24]
 Strategic Imperatives,
 Limit regional conflict with forward deployed, decisive maritime power
 Deter major power war
 Win our nations wars
 Contribute to homeland defense in depth
 Foster and sustain cooperative relationships with international partners
 Prevent or contain local disruptions before they impact the global system







Core Capabilities
Forward Presence
Deterrence
Sea Control
Power projection
Maritime Security
Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster response
The United States Navy serves as a seaborne branch of the Military of the United States. 10
U.S.C. § 5062 prescribes the Navy's three primary areas of responsibility:



"The preparation of naval forces necessary for the effective prosecution of war"
"The maintenance of naval aviation, including land-based naval aviation, air transport essential for
naval operations and all air weapons and air techniques involved in the operations and activities of
the Navy"
"The development of aircraft, weapons, tactics, technique, organization, and equipment of naval
combat and service elements".
102.5 Discuss the Sailor’s Creed and its origin. [ref. f, ch. 1, p.10]
The first version of the Sailor's Creed came from an idea in 1986 by Admiral James B. Watkins, Chief
of Naval Operations, to form a group that would create a Code of Ethics for the Navy. The result of
this meeting at the Naval War Collegewas the eight point The Navy Uniform, and was later scaled
down to a shorter version called The Sailor's Creed.
The current “Sailors Creed” was written by a “Blue Ribbon Recruit Training Panel” in 1993 at the
direction of Chief of Naval Operations Admiral Frank Kelso, who personally participated in the final
edit of the working group's proposal. Admiral Kelso then directed that every recruit be given a copy
and required to commit it to memory. In 1994, Chief of Naval Operations Admiral Jeremy Boorda
approved a minor change which made the creed inclusively descriptive of all hands. The change
involved replacing the word “bluejacket” with "Navy," which describes the lowest enlisted rate, E-1,
through the highest officer rank, O-10. After 1997 another change to the text occurred when the words
"my superiors" were replaced with "those appointed over me."
102.6 Define the Navy’s Core Values. [ref. f, ch. 1, pp. 9 thru10]
3
COMMON CORE
102 1
Honor: "I will bear true faith and allegiance ..." Accordingly, we will: Conduct ourselves in the highest
ethical manner in all relationships with peers, superiors and subordinates; Be honest and truthful in
our dealings with each other, and with those outside the Navy; Be willing to make honest
recommendations and accept those of junior personnel; Encourage new ideas and deliver the bad
news, even when it is unpopular; Abide by an uncompromising code of integrity, taking responsibility
for our actions and keeping our word; Fulfill or exceed our legal and ethical responsibilities in our
public and personal lives twenty-four hours a day. Illegal or improper behavior or even the
appearance of such behavior will not be tolerated. We are accountable for our professional and
personal behavior. We will be mindful of the privilege to serve our fellow Americans.
Courage: "I will support and defend ..." Accordingly, we will have: courage to meet the demands of
our profession and the mission when it is hazardous, demanding, or otherwise difficult; Make
decisions in the best interest of the navy and the nation, without regard to personal consequences;
Meet these challenges while adhering to a higher standard of personal conduct and decency; Be loyal
to our nation, ensuring the resources entrusted to us are used in an honest, careful, and efficient way.
Courage is the value that gives us the moral and mental strength to do what is right, even in the face
of personal or professional adversity.
Commitment: "I will obey the orders ..." Accordingly, we will: Demand respect up and down the chain
of command; Care for the safety, professional, personal and spiritual well-being of our people; Show
respect toward all people without regard to race, religion, or gender; Treat each individual with human
dignity; Be committed to positive change and constant improvement; Exhibit the highest degree of
moral character, technical excellence, quality and competence in what we have been trained to do.
The day-to-day duty of every Navy man and woman is to work together as a team to improve the
quality of our work, our people and ourselves.
102.7 Discuss the conditions that led to the creation of the Seabees. [ref. d, ch. 1, p.1.1]
 Prior to 1941, the Civil Engineer Corps used private contractors to accomplish all overseas
construction.
 The contractors, in turn, hired steelworkers, electricians, carpenters, draftsman, and mechanics
from private industry.
 The Navy realized that, in the event of war, civilian contractors and construction workers could
not be used very well outside our own country.
 As World War II drew near, there was an urgent need for more overseas bases.
 It became clear there was an urgent need for a combat trained Military Construction
Organization.
 The first constructions units were organized early in January 1942.
102.8 Discuss the significance of March 5, 1942 as it pertains to the Seabees. [ref. c, ch. 1 p.
1.1]]
 The name Seabees is derived from the first construction battalions (CB’s) that were organized
early in January 1942.
 Officially, permission to use the name “Seabee” was granted on 05 March 1942.
102.9 Discuss the significance of the following personnel:

4
Admiral Ben Moreell [ref. d, ch. 1, p. 1.1]
o Father of the Seabee’s: Rear Admiral Ben Moreell, Chief of the Bureau of Yards and
Docks, decided to activate, organize and man construction battalions after the attack of
COMMON CORE
102 1
o
Pearl Harbor, on 7 December 1941. He requested specific authority to carry out his
decision.
On 5 January 1942 he gained the authority for the Bureau of Navigation to recruit men
for the construction trades for assignment to the Naval Constructions Regiment
composed of three Naval Construction Battalions. This was the beginning of the
renowned Seabees.

CM3 Marvin Shields [ref. d, ch. 1, pp. 1 thru 5]
o Medal of Honor recipient. He is the first Seabee in history to receive the Medal of
Honor for his heroic efforts in defense of a Special Forces Camp and Vietnamese
District Headquarters at Doug Zoai.

SW2 (DV) Robert Stethem [ref. e]
o Purple Heart and Bronze Star recipient
o Executed in June 1985 during the hijacking of a TWA jet in Lebanon after being singled
out by terrorists for being in the military. “Throughout his ordeal, Petty Officer Stethem
did not yield, instead he acted with fortitude and courage and helped his fellow
passengers to endure by his example” VADM David Robinson
102.10 Discuss the significant contributions made by the Seabees during the following: [ref. h,
app. b, p. b-1]
 World War II
o Created by Admiral Ben Moreell in 1942, the Navy’s Seabees were founded on the
premise that experienced armed construction workers were critically needed in the
combat areas of World War II. The construction accomplishments of the Seabees
throughout the Pacific theater, in particular, are quite legendary. Using 20-ton
bulldozers as wands, Seabees magically reshaped the coral-pocked face of many a
Pacific island. Landing shortly after the assault waves, they blasted reefs to make
channels for the fleet; leveled hills and laid down landing strips; lashed together
pontoons to create artificial docks; and brought to many a remote Pacific island its first
roads, storage facilities, and hospitals. On more than one occasion, the Seabees used
their bulldozers to entomb nests of enemy snipers and machine gunners menacing
Marine or Army forces.
o During the war’s Pacific island-hopping campaigns, over 10,000 Civil Engineer Corps
officers and 240,000 enlisted men served in the Seabees, mostly in NCBs that were
components of the five Marine engineer regiments employed from 1942 to 1944. From
the construction and defense of Guadalcanal’s Henderson Field to the Normandy
invasion, Seabees participated in most of the major Navy, Marine, and Army assaults,
fighting in more than 400 locations in all theaters by the end of the war.
o As a prelude to Guadalcanal, Seabees on Espiritu Santo took only 20 days to carve a
6,000-foot airstrip from virgin jungle. Joining the 1st MarDiv in their assault on Cape
Gloucester, Seabees bulldozed paths for attacking American tanks. In the Admiralties,
Seabees transformed Manus and Los Negros into the largest advanced bases in the
Southwest Pacific. At Rabaul, Seabees built a strategic, two-field air base, immense
storage and fuel dumps, a floating dry-dock, miles of roads, and a fast torpedo boat
base. On Leyte Island, it was the Seabees who installed and operated pontoon barges
and causeways that brought General MacArthur and his forces ashore. At Tarawa,
Seabees landed with the Marines and, in a mere 15 hours, returned a shellpocked
airfield to operational status. On Iwo Jima, Seabees landing with the Fifth Amphibious
Corps built fighter airstrips as well as an emergency landing field critically needed by
returning damaged bombers. Seabee- installed pontoons on Okinawa enabled the
5
COMMON CORE
102 1
o

Korea
o

6
amphibious assault to move forward. Once ashore, 55,000 Seabees built port facilities,
vast road networks, airfields, POL farms, storage dumps, hospitals, ship repair
facilities, a seaplane base, and Quonset villages.
In the Pacific theater alone, the Seabees built 111 major airstrips, 700 square blocks of
warehouses, hospitals for 70,000 patients, storage tanks for 100 million gallons of
gasoline, and housing for 1.5 million servicemen. Although the Seabees were known
as a Naval Reserve organization during the war, it became clear afterwards that the
Seabees, having more than proved their worth, would be a valuable addition to the
regular Navy.
By June of 1950, the Seabees all but disestablished as only 3,300 men remained on
active duty. The Korean War, however, demanded the kind of civil engineering support
that only Seabees could provide, and so they were mobilized and expanded to a force
of 14,000 men. Seabees supported Marines in the famous Inchon and Wonsan
amphibious assaults by constructing vital pontoon causeways within hours of the initial
landings. As with their World War II predecessors, airfield construction was a specialty
of the Seabees as they were soon found constructing, repairing, and maintaining the
airfields’ of the Marine Air Groups, such as K-3 at Pohang, K-18 at Kimpo (Seoul), and
K-2 at Taegu. Seabee relations with Marines were further cemented by a group of nine
Seabees who kept open a 21-mile stretch of road between an isolated Marine intercept
squadron and its sole source of supplies. Working around the clock in below-zero
temperatures, they kept their promise to rebuild any damaged bridge within 6 hours.
o Also during the Korean War, Seabees constructed the Cubi Point Naval Air Station in
the Philippines by cutting a mountain in half to make way for a nearly 2-mile-long
runway, blasting coral to fill a section of Subic Bay, filling swampland, moving 150-foot
trees, and relocating a native fishing village. Twenty million man-hours and 5 years
went into what was then the largest and most impressive Seabee project.
Vietnam
o During the Vietnam War, Seabees were employed extensively from the DMZ in the
north to the Mekong Delta Region in the south, constructing Marine logistic complexes
at Danang, Chu Lai, and Quang Tri to Special Forces camps and Army fire bases in
the remote regions, as well as roads, bridges, airfields, warehouses, and hospitals
elsewhere. At the initial Marine landings in Vietnam in 1965, there were nearly 10,000
active duty Seabees. At the War’s peak, the Seabee strength grew to 26,000 men
organized in twenty-one naval construction battalions, two naval construction
regiments, two amphibious construction battalions, two maintenance units, and many
civic action teams.
o At Chu Lai, the first Seabee battalion arrived in May 1965 to construct a Marine
expeditionary airfield within 23 days. Shortly thereafter, it was expanded by adding a
parallel taxiway, four cross taxiways, parking aprons, two cantonments, warehouses,
hangars, and many other critical facilities. At Phu Bai, the Seabees created an
advanced base from a low peninsula jutting 1,500 feet into the South China Sea by
raising, widening, and surfacing it into a causeway for cargo-laden landing ships.
During 1968ís Tet Offensive, Seabees built and fought in direct support of Marine and
Army forces by reconstructing two vitally needed concrete bridges. Seabee civic action
projects paved roads that provided access between farms and markets; supplied fresh
water through hundreds of Seabee-drilled wells; provided medical treatment to
thousands of villagers; and constructed numerous schools, hospitals, utility systems,
and other community facilities.
o In June of 1965, two Seabees were killed when Viet Cong troops attacked and overran
a Special Forces camp at Dong Xoai. One of the dead, Construction Mechanic Third
Class Marvin G. Shields, was posthumously awarded the Congressional Medal of
COMMON CORE
102 1



7
Honor for carrying a critically wounded man to safety and destroying an enemy
machine gun emplacement at the cost of his life. CM3 Shields was the first and only
Seabee ever awarded the nation’s highest distinction for heroism.
Post Vietnam
o The Seabees distinguished themselves with the largest peacetime construction effort
on the British Indian Ocean Territory of Diego Garcia. From 1971 to 1983, they built a
remote forward logistic base and naval communications station thousands of miles
from CONUS in support of U.S. military operations throughout the Southwest Asian
Theater. The mission of the initial contingent, consisting of NMCB and PHIBCB
personnel, was to build a temporary Seabee camp; water and electrical distribution
systems; messing, laundry, refrigeration, and storage facilities; and a 3,500-foot
airstrip. By 1983, the Seabees had completed 220 projects with a construction value
well in excess of 220 million dollars. The early, austere airstrip has been expanded
three times to a final 12,000-foot length with expanded taxiways, parking aprons, and
several new hangars. Immense POL storage facilities for both the Navy and Air Force
were also constructed, as were a fuel pier, general storage buildings, and expanded
personnel support facilities. The need for pre-positioned materials to support a rapid
deployment force and a more active U.S. presence in Southwest Asia spurred the
growth of the forward logistic support site on the island. As a result, Diego Garcia today
is home to one of the MPF’s three MPSRONs.
Persian Gulf War
o During Operations Desert Shield and Desert Storm, nearly 5,000 Seabees from 6
NMCBs were employed in-theater. The Seabees constructed troop bed down facilities
for 42,000 personnel, vast storage areas, aircraft parking aprons comprising millions of
square feet, ASPs covering hundreds of acres, EPW camps housing up to 40,000 men,
many ISBs, and hundreds of miles of roads. Base camps were constructed for the 3 rd
MAW; MAGs 11, 13, 16, and 26; and the 1st and 2nd MarDivs. In Bahrain, troop bed
down and storage facilities, a munitions transfer road, and a 60,000-square foot aircraft
parking apron were built for the Marines, Army, and Air Force. Major Seabee tasking
included a headquarters complex for I MEF and a 15,000-man troop bed down camp
for II MEF. The latter project (the largest wartime, multi-battalion Seabee project since
Vietnam) consisted of six 2,500-man modules with each module providing berthing,
showers, latrines, galley, office space, roads, and parking areas. PHIBCB personnel
offloaded Marine Corps equipment and supplies from MPF shipping. CBU personnel
erected and maintained a 500-bed Navy Fleet Hospital at Al Jubail. It was the Seabees
who built and maintained the 200-mile, four-lane main supply route near the Kuwaiti
border critical to launching and sustaining the famous “Hail Mary” ground attack plan
into Iraq. Seabees supported I MEF in preparation for the assault into Kuwait by
providing water and constructing roads and facilities for the Marine division assembly
areas. Just before the assault, Seabees dug in the 1st MarDiv’s command element as
the division moved into attack positions.
o Once the assault began, Seabees moved into Kuwait and prepared positions for I
MEF’s CE. Before they were finished Seabee projects included tent camps for 42,000
personnel, three galleys, and 10 aircraft parking aprons, 5 ASPs, two EAFs, two
hangars, and several EPW camps. Desert Shield/Desert Storm also saw the largest
mobilization of selected Reserve Seabees since Vietnam as three Reserve NMCBs
and a Reserve naval construction regiment CE served together with their active
counterparts in theater and at other locations worldwide, thus exemplifying the “One
Navy, Total Force” concept.
Military Operations Other Than War
COMMON CORE
102 1
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

Mount Pinatubo in the Philippines Within 100 days, the Seabees demolished more than 50
heavily damaged structures and removed 250,000 tons of ash, cleared 900,000 square yards of
aircraft paving and 75 miles of roads, restored 35 miles of overhead power distribution lines,
cleaned and restored 750 air conditioning and refrigeration units, and erected 25 replacement
buildings
Haitian and Cuban Migrant support 1341 strong back tents, 67 block buildings, 17 miles piping,
53 miles of electrical cable, 11,700 cubic yards of concrete.
Hurricane Andrew repairing 270 schools
Bosnia and Crotia support
Tsunami recovery. Demolished 9 unsafe buildings, removed 1300 cubic yards of debris from
schools
Pakistan Earthquake
Hurricane Katrina
Global War on Terror
o Nearly 3000 Seabees in theater during Iraqi Freedom. Constructed 20 acre airfield
parking apron, 10 acre and 20 acre areas for AM-2 matting, 1200 person camp in
Kuwait. Maintained 11 breach lines for the Marines. 14,400 person prison camp over
42 acres. Port clearing. 5000 person Camp Patriot, including elevate causeway to
ofload supplies.
102.11 Identify and explain the purpose of the following ratings: [ref. f, ch. 3]
Table 5 OF-7 Rates
BU:
Perform construction, maintenance, and repair of wood, concrete, masonry
structures, and concrete pavement.
CE:
Install, operate, service, and overhaul electrical generating and distribution
systems.
CM:
Perform maintenance, repair, and overhaul of automotive, material handling,
and construction equipment.
EA:
Perform construction surveying, drafting, planning, estimating, and quality
control
EO:
Perform operation of automotive material handling, weight handling, and
construction equipment.
SW:
Perform fabrication, assemble, erect, position, and join structural materials
8
COMMON CORE
102 1
UT:
102.12

Perform maintenance, and repair of plumbing, heating, steam, compressed air,
fuel storage, water treatment and distribution systems, air conditioning,
refrigeration equipment, sewage collecting and disposal facilities.
State the purpose of the Civil Engineer Corps (CEC). [ref. c, ch. 1p. 1-1]
The CEC is composed of dedicated staff corps officers who are specialists in the field of civil
engineering. A Civil Engineer is a professional engineer who performs a variety of engineering
work in planning, designing, and overseeing construction and maintenance of structures and
facilities, such as roads, airports, bridges, harbors, pipelines, power plants, and water and
sewage systems.
102.13 Discuss the different units and capabilities of the following Army engineering
categories: [ref. i]
 a. Combat Engineer [pp. I-5 thru I-7, fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex A]
Focused on support to combat maneuver organizations at the tactical level and are designed to
participate in close combat as necessary
 b. General Engineer (Construction Engineering) [pp. I-5 thru I-7, fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex
A]
Comprised of bridging, support, and construction capabilities. Capable of constructing,
rehabilitating, repairing, maintaining, and modifying infrastructure. Through augmentation
baseline construction units can perform specialized task.
 c. USACE [pp. I-5 thru I-7, fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex A]
United States Army Corps of Engineers. Provides for technical and contract engineering support,
integrating its organic capabilities with those of other Services, civil engineering, and all other
sources of engineering-related reachback support.
o Field Force Engineering, Forward Engineer Support Teams (FESTs):
 FEST-A – planning/design, real estate acquisition and disposal, and contracting
 FEST-M – C2 for USACE teams, technical expertise (LNOs)
 d. Specialized [p. IV-6, fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex A]
Provides for general and geospatial engineering capabilities at the operational and strategic levels
and for specific augmentation to the tactical level. Smaller than the core engineer units. Includes:
 Explosive Hazards Support
 Construction Support
 Infrastructure Support
 Geospatial Support
 United States Army Corps of Engineers-related Support
102.14 Discuss the different capabilities of the following Air Force engineering units: [ref. i,
Fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex C]
 a. Red horse: Rapid Engineer Deployable Heavy Operational Repair Squadron, Engineer.
Organized and deployed for austere, independent operation to execute heavy horizontal and
vertical construction. Deploys the entire squadron to a single area with the capability of its C2 hub
supporting multiple detachments.
 b. Prime Beef: Prime Base Engineer Emergency Force. Site surveys; bare-base construction;
utility installation and maintenance; geospatial evaluations for airfield and bed-down facilities.
 c. Specialized: Air Force Civil Engineer Support Agency (AFCESA). Provides engineering
technical and contract support and training. Specialized airfield assessment and maintenance
teams; airfield damage repair; CBRN operations; EOD support.
9
COMMON CORE
102 1
102.15 Discuss the different capabilities of the following Marine Corps engineering units: [ref.
i, Fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex D]
 a. ESB Engineer Support Battalion Organic to the MAGTF logistics combat element (LCE) and
provides combat engineering and general engineering support. Combat engineering support;
standard & non-standard bridging; EOD; bulk water and fuel systems; water purification; engineer
surveys; construction and maintenance of base camps; laundry and shower services; mobile
electric power; road construction; obstacle emplacement; breaching operations; and expeditionary
airfield construction.

b. MWSS Marine Wing Support Squadron Organic to the aviation combat element (ACE) and
each Marine Air Wing (MAW). Internal airfield communications; weather services; expeditionary
airfield services; aircraft rescue and fire fighting; EOD; motor transport; field messing; medical
services; CBRN defense; and security. These functions allow the ACE to project its assets ashore
and generate sorties at a rate beyond that capable from sea-based platforms.

c. CEB --- Combat Engineer Battalion Organic to the ground combat element (GCE) and
enhances the mobility, countermobility, and survivability of the division through combat and limited
general engineering support. Engineering recon; placing obstacle systems; breaching operations;
mine & countermine operations; demolitions; assault bridging; bridge construction and repair;
limited roadway construction and maintenance; temporary vertical & horizontal construction; and a
provisional infantry unit.
10
COMMON CORE
103
103 ADMINISTRATIVE/COMMAND AND CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NWP 4-04 Naval Civil Engineer Operations 2007.
[b] NTRP 4-04.2.1 Doctrinal Reference for Naval Construction Forces
[c] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
[d] JP 1-02 DOD Dictionary
[e] SECNAV M 5510.30 Personnel Security Program
[f] SECNAV M 5510.36 Information Security Program
[g] NAVFAC P-1105 Seabee Skills Assessment Manual
[h] http//www.necc.navy.mil [k] OPNAVINST 3100.6G, Special Incident Reporting
103.1 Discuss the following functional elements as they relate to Naval Civil Engineering
Forces [ref. a, ch. 2, p. 2-1]
 Naval Construction Division –
o Provides combat-ready engineer forces and provides planning and operational support for
Seabee employment.
o Makes recommendations to a JFC or Marine Corp component commander on the proper
employment of Seabees,
o Sourcing and organizing Seabee Units and forces
o Conduct training
 Naval Facilities Engineering Command SYSCOM of 1NCD
o Technical support, assistance in planning and designing infrastructure, environmental
assistance, real estate acquisition and contract construction.
 Naval Amphibious Construction Battalion,
o Not under 1NCD but 75% of the officers are CEC. 50% of the enlisted are OF-7.
o Ship to shore transportation of bulk fuel, water, supplies, materials, and equipment in
support of amphibious, logistics over the shore (LOTS), JLOTS and MPF operations.
 Combatant Command Staff Engineer
o Each of the unified CCDRs has a resident CEC officer on their staff except for U.S.
Transportation Command. The primary role of these officers is to contribute to strategic
and operational-level contingency planning processes toward development of an ESP for
specifically identified areas and operations. When a crisis situation arises, planners
immediately tailor the OPLAN for the specific situation. Combatant command staff
engineers:
o Function as conduits to relay engineer requirements and acquire services from 1NCD,
NECC, and NAVFAC.
o Serve as the single points of contact providing the CCDR with mission capabilities,
organizational structure, equipment, and proper employment of the NCF and NAVFAC.
o Help identify the amount and type of naval construction forces necessary to provide the
capabilities required by a joint force commander’s (JFC) campaign plan.
o Request augmentation for the planning process from NAVFAC and 1NCD. A NAVFAC
contingency engineering management team staffed by Navy CEC officers from NAVFAC’s
cognizant FEC and/or 1NCD may be requested to support the CCDR’s planning effort.
103.2 Discuss the following as they apply to the operational chain of command
[ref. a, ch. 2, p. 2-2]
 Commander Fleet Forces Command (CFFC)
 United States Fleet Forces Command supports both the Chief of Naval Operations and
Combatant Commanders worldwide by providing responsive, relevant, sustainable Naval
forces ready-for-tasking. The command provides operational and planning support to
Combatant Commanders and integrated warfighter capability requirements to the CNO.
Additionally, U.S. Fleet Forces Command serves as the CNO's designated Executive Agent for
Anti-Terrorism/Force Protection (ATFP), Individual Augmentees (IA), and Sea Basing.
11
COMMON CORE





12
103
In collaboration with U.S. Pacific Fleet, U.S. Fleet Forces Command organizes, mans, trains,
maintains, and equips Navy forces, develops and submits budgets, and executes readiness
and personnel accounts to develop both required and sustainable levels of Fleet readiness.
Additionally, the command serves as the unified voice for Fleet training requirements and
policies to generate combat-ready Navy forces per the Fleet Response Plan using the Fleet
Training Continuum (FTC).
Navy Expeditionary Combat Command (NECC) Echelon III TYCOM,
o Serves as the single functional command for the Navy’s expeditionary forces and as a
central management for th readiness, resources, manning, training and equipping of
those forces. Expeditionary forces are organized to accomplish specific objectives in
other countries.
o NECC is a scalable force spanning the full range of military operations from Theater
Security to Major Combat. Made up of dedicated, ready Sailors, NECC forces are high
impact, operating around the globe, building partnerships, and helping increase partner
navies capability to promote peace and prevent war. However, when called upon, they
also become primary enabelrs for a Combat Commander to win a crisis or war effort.
o NECC is a force provider for integrated maritime expeditionary missions. The
subordinate units are a core expeditionary force providing “smart power” applying just
the right power, at the right time, at the right place.
Commander First Naval Construction Division (1NCD) / Naval Construction Forces Command
(NCFC) 1NCD provides combat construction forces to fulfill operational and forward engagement
requirements of combatant commanders (CCDRs) and component commanders; to conduct contingency and
crisis action planning in support of OPLANs and contingencies; to provide contributory engineering support
to naval shore activities; and to exercise C2 over NCR and Seabee readiness groups (SRG) by providing
them planning, training, and resources to organize, train, operate, and maintain Seabee units.
Naval Construction Regiment (NCR) An NCR when employed with subordinate units is a flexible
organization structured to accomplish the full range of general engineering tasks and limited
combat engineering tasks in a mid- to high-level-intensity conflict. It provides engineering C2 at
the Marine expeditionary force (MEF) level and provides a range of engineering expertise
beginning with contingency planning and going through force projection to a fully developed MEF
area of operation. The NCR contains specialized engineer units, construction equipment,
professional expertise, and C2 assets required to support MEF operations. The mix and type of
units attached to the NCR are determined by the supported command’s organization and mission.
The NCR consists of a CE and multiple task-organized Seabee units and may have other Service
or HN engineer units under its control.
Seabee Readiness Group (SRG) An SRG plans and delivers training, mobilization, and logistical
support to 1NCD units to ensure that they achieve and maintain high operational readiness. One
SRG is located at each of the two NCF homeports. These homeports are located at Port
Hueneme, California, and Gulfport, Mississippi. The SRG is the personnel receiving and
processing activity for deployed 1NCD units and also supports reserve personnel mobilization.
1NCD uses SRG resources to support contingency operations; reception, staging, onward
movement, and integration requirements; and NCR(CE) staff individual augmentation
requirements.
COMMON CORE
103
Figure 1 FIRST NCD Chain of Command
103.3 Define command and control (C2). [ref. a, ch. 3, glossary 3]
 The exercise of authority and direction by a properly designated commander over assigned and
attached forces in the accomplishment of the mission. Command and control functions are
performed through an arrangement of personnel, equipment, communications, facilities and
procedures employed by a commander in planning, directing, coordinating and controlling forces
and operations in the accomplishment of the mission
103.4 Discuss the mission of the following: [ref. a, ch. 2, p. 2-4]
 1st Naval Construction Division
o The 1NCD has been established to exercise command and administrative control over
assigned Regiments and Seabee Readiness Groups and reports to
COMLANTFLT/COMUSFLTFOR, COMPACFLT, and USEURCOM.
 Naval Construction Regiment (NCR)
o Exercises administrative and operational control of two or more NMCB’s or other NCF
units. The NCR assists the NMCBs in achieving the highest possible state of readiness
to meet their disaster recovery, contingency, and wartime missions of military
construction support of the armed forces.
13
COMMON CORE








103
Seabee Readiness Group (SRG)
o The SRG provides NMCB’s, while at home port, training to achieve the highest
possible state of readiness to meet their disaster recovery, contingency, and wartime
missions of military construction support of the armed forces.
Naval Mobile Construction Battalion (NMCB)
o Primarily designed for construction and military support operations to build advance
base facilities in support of the armed forces. Functions include projects or repair and
operations of facilities and lines of communications during emergencies or under
conditions that demand immediate action.
Construction Battalion Maintenance Unit (CBMU)
o CBMU 202 and CBMU 303 are active duty commands with Command Elements (CE)
and active and reserve detachments located in several fleet concentration areas.
o Provide camp setup and camp maintenance support to Navy and Marine Corps forces
ashore.
o Continue CBU Fleet Hospital Mission.
o Conduct construction readiness training (CRT) and Disaster Recovery/Consequence
Management (DR/CM) in support of Navy activities ashore.
o Provide Forward Operating Base (FOB) facility and logistics support to designated
Marine Expeditionary Force (MEF), and MEF Engineer Group (MEG) Command
Elements, and Naval Special Warfare (NSW) Squadrons.
Amphibious Construction Battalion (PHIBCB)
o Commissioned naval units whose main function is to provide military and amphibious
construction support to the armed forces in military operations. Provides ship to shore
transport of fuel, materials, and equipment ISO amphibious ready group, MEF, and
MPF operations.
Underwater Construction Team (UCT)
o Specially trained units that construct, maintain, and repair underwater facilities. Each
UCT is capable of performing underwater construction tasks and surveying the sea
bottom to select the site for an underwater facility.
Civic Action Team (CAT)
o A small, highly mobile, air transportable construction unit that can be tailored to
accomplish a variety of constructions tasks.
o Team carry enough food, tool kits, and automotive and construction equipment to be
self-sufficient in the field while performing their construction tasks.
Naval Construction Force Support Unit (NCFSU)
o Provides logistical support for a Naval Construction Regiment and other supported
Naval Construction Force units. Also provides augment construction, engineering, and
specialized equipment support for a NCR and other units.
NCFSU equipment is maintained both in the active force and in the Reserve
Deployment for Training (DFT)
o Typically a small detachment of Seabees from the MB element that participates in
specialized/technical construction projects for periods less then the entire deployment
cycle.
o
103.5 Describe the duties and responsibilities of the following staffs and departments ref. b,
ch. 5, pp. 5-12 thru 5-18]

14
Command Staff
o The command section is responsible for the effective and efficient flow of information,
which aids the CO in mission execution and command functions. The NMCB command
COMMON CORE
o
o
o












15
103
section comprises the CO, executive officer (XO), command master chief, and the
following staff who report directly to the CO:
1. Safety Officer. The battalion safety officer is a Navy CPO and usually of a Seabee
rating.
2. Marine Adviser. A Marine Corps gunnery sergeant, usually possessing an infantry
MOS, is assigned as a personal adviser to the battalion CO.
3. Ombudsman. The battalion’s ombudsman is a volunteer who assists the CO.
Executive and special staff
X1 Chaplain. The battalion chaplain is a Navy chaplain corps lieutenant who serves as a
principal assistant in promoting the religious programs of the unit.
X2 Dental Officer. The battalion dental officer is a Navy dental staff corps lieutenant who
serves as a principal assistant in promoting the dental readiness program of the unit. The
dental section provides general dentistry services to the battalion and assists the medical
section in treating combat casualties.
X3 Legal Officer. The battalion legal officer is a Navy legalman PO1 who serves as a principal
assistant.
X4 Medical Officer. The battalion medical officer is a Navy medical staff corps lieutenant who
serves as a principal assistant. The medical section provides routine sick call; administers
immunizations; conducts preventive medicine programs, such as the hearing conservation
program, asbestos surveillance program, radiation health program, and tuberculosis-screening
program; and runs the battalion aid station (BAS) during contingency operations.
Career Counselor. The battalion career counselor is a Navy counselor CPO or PO1 who
serves as a special assistant.
Public Affairs Officer. The battalion PAO is usually a collateral duty assigned by the XO to a
Navy CEC junior officer who serves as a special assistant. The PAO is responsible for
developing and implementing public affairs programs and promoting Seabee achievements of
the unit.
3M Coordinator. The battalion 3M coordinator is usually a Navy Seabee master chief or SCPO
with a secondary NEC of 9517 who serves as a principal assistant in promoting and
overseeing the 3M program management for the battalion.
S-1 Administrative
o The battalion administrative and personnel Officer is the senior assistant to the XO for
administrative details and personnel administration. It’s normally divided into two
sections.
 Admin: Reports, Directives, Mail, Classified Material, Clerical Pool, Legal and
Officer Records.
 Personnel: Enlisted Service Records, Personnel Accounting and Check in/out.
S2 Intelligence
o Responsible for a staff of trained intelligence specialists that conduct full-spectrum
intelligence operations in support of the command. Principally focused on providing
intelligence support to operations, battalion intelligence specialists are critical advisers
to assist in reducing risk, critical vulnerabilities, and potential impact of weather and
terrain on operations, and in dissemination of the adversary’s intentions.
S-3 Operations
o Lead by LCDR
o Responsible to the CO to manage the construction and disaster preparedness
programs. He is granted direct supervisory authority over the utilization of the
battalion’s construction resources; personnel, equipment and materials.
o Project planning, construction resources, quality control and engineering departments.
S-4 Supply
COMMON CORE
103
o
Led by a LCDR. Responsibilities are to procure, receive, store, issue, ship, transfer
and account for supply tines, equipage, repair parts and construction materials.
Operates the enlisted dining facility and disbursement and accounting for funds for
battalion purchases and military pay.
 S-6 Communications Officer
o It is Naval Construction Force (NCF) policy that the command and control of Computer
and Information Systems (CIS) used for the transmission of all forms of
communications, e.g., voice, digital, or signal, is the responsibility of a unit's
commanding officer (CO). The CO delegates the day-to-day leadership and
management of CIS to an appointed CIS Officer, known as the COMMO.
 S-7 Training
o Responsible for the formulation and administration of the formal military and technical
training programs in accordance with 1NCD program instructions and the unit’s mission
readiness requirements. Battalion training is accomplished through formal schools,
MTTs (military and contractor), and unit-driven training provided at the battalion and
company levels. The department includes the following programs:
a. Command indoctrination
b. Seabee combat warfare (SCW) qualification
c. Specialized construction battalion training schools
d. Formal schools
e. General military training
f. Officer and senior enlisted training
g. Physical readiness
h. Weapons, armory, and ordnance management
103.6 Describe the duties and responsibilities of the following personnel [ref. c, ch. 1, p. 112]




16
Company Commander
o Responsible for morale and welfare of the men and women assigned to the company.
o Training and readiness of the company.
o Economical use of materials and funds.
o Safety
o Recreation
o Discipline of the men and women within the company.
o Directives, correspondence and reporting.
Company Chief
o He/She is the primary administrative assistant and technical advisor to the company
commander.
Platoon Commander
o An O1 or O2 Normally, he is the project supervisor. He is responsible for the training,
discipline, control, and tactical deployment of his platoon. The rifle platoon commander
carries out the orders of the company commander and controls his platoon through his
squad leaders. In combat, the rifle platoon commander positions himself where he can
readily control his squad leaders and, at the same time, remain in contact with his
company commander. The rifle platoon commander is generally linked with the
company commander by either radio or field telephone or both. He is armed with the
service pistol.
Platoon Chief
o Normally a CPO who is responsible for the training, discipline, control, and tactical
deployment of the platoon. The Platoon Commander is also responsible for the overall
planning, scheduling, safety, quality controls, and project management of those
projects assigned to the platoon by the Company commander. He is armed with the
service pistol.
COMMON CORE




103
Right Guide
o Normally a PO1 who performs the administrative functions the platoon commander
may direct. The Right Guide is also responsible for the supply and timely re-supply of
the platoon in combat and often performs similar tasks on the job site.
Squad Leader
o Generally a PO1 who carries out the orders of the platoon commander and is
responsible to him for discipline, appearance, training, control, and conduct of the
squad at all times. In combat, he has the important responsibilities of fire discipline,
fire control, and maneuvering the squad.
Fire Team Leader
o Generally a PO2 who carries out the orders of the squad leader and is responsible for
the effective employment of the fire team. His primary responsibility is to control the
fire team in combat. In addition the fire team leader is responsible for the care and
condition of the weapons and equipment of the fire team.
Grenadier
o The grenadier, generally a third class petty officer (E-4), carries out the orders of the
squad leader and is responsible to him for the effective care, maintenance, and
employment of his weapon-the M203 grenade launcher. In combat, the grenadier
always moves with or is close to the squad leader. Usually, another E-4 in the squad is
trained to replace the grenadier should he become a casualty. On the jobsite, the
grenadier has no special authority unless specifically designated.
103.7 State the missions for the following NECC commands: [ref. h, http//www.necc.navy.mil]
a. Naval Expeditionary Combat Command
40,000 HQ in Little Creek VA. Established in Jan
2006.
 Serves as the single functional command for the Navy’s expeditionary forces and as central management
for the readiness, resources, manning, training and equipping of those forces. Expeditionary forces are
organized to accomplish specific objectives in other countries.
 NECC is a scalable force spanning the full range of military operations from Theater Security to Major
Combat. Made up of dedicated, ready Sailors, NECC forces are high impact, operating around the globe,
building partnerships, and helping increase partner navies’ capability to promote peace and prevent war.
However, when called upon, they also become primary enablers for a Combat Commander to win a crisis
or war effort.
 NECC is a force provider for integrated maritime expeditionary missions. The subordinate units are a core
expeditionary force providing “smart power,” applying just the right power, at the right time, at the right
place. This may cover a variety of missions such as:
o Effective waterborne and ashore anti-terrorism
o Force protection
o Theater security cooperation and engagement
o Humanitarian assistance/disaster relief contingencies
o Supplementing other Governmental agencies for homeland security, upon request
 NECC forces are trained in combat skills for self defense. These forces seamlessly blend Active and
Reserve Components, with reserve units training and deploying like their active duty counterparts. Using
operational reserve forces, the Reserve Component is fully capable of providing the same capability and
capacity as their active duty counterparts. All NECC Active Component forces can produce an initial surge
capability within 48 hours.
 NECC is an agile, responsive and expeditionary global force provider. Supplying a continuum of capability
from the blue to green and brown water environments, NECC is an essential part of the Navy team to
deliver core capability through expeditionary forces.
b Naval Construction Force 9000 reserve 7600 active duty
 Seabees provide a wide range of responsive military construction in support of operating forces,
including roads, bridges, bunkers, airfields and logistics bases. NECC’s Seabee units are adaptive
17
COMMON CORE
103
to mission requirements, scalable and agile. Seabees provide responsive military support for
disaster preparation and recovery, including furnishing assistance to civilian agencies. In addition,
Seabees complete civic action projects that complement nation-building programs and are known
for their worldwide humanitarian efforts. Seabees can protect their projects and themselves
wherever they go. Seabees are responsible for a wide variety of military construction and
humanitarian efforts in times of peace or war, for example:
o Repairing runways
o Building detention facilities
o Constructing aircraft runways and parking aprons
o Constructing munitions storage areas and large
o scale camp sites
o Erecting bridges and constructing roads
o Renovating schools and municipal facilities
o Repairing piers and wharves
o Providing border outposts, expeditionary camps, community outreach centers, medical
clinics and
o community clean-up
c. Maritime Expeditionary Security Force 4158 Reserve, 2442 Active,
• Supplies highly trained, scalable and sustainable security teams capable of defending mission critical assets
in the near-coast environment. Expeditionary Security units provide worldwide maritime and in-shore
surveillance, security and anti-terrorism force protection, ground defense, afloat defense, airfield/aircraft
security and a wide range of secondary tasks from detention operations to law enforcement.
d. Explosive Ordinance Disposal 307 reserve, 2223 Active duty
• Conducts counter-IED operations, renders safe explosive hazards and disarms underwater explosives such
as mines. EOD specialists can handle chemical, biological and radiological threats and are the only military
EOD force that can both parachute from the air to reach distant targets or dive under the sea to disarm
weapons. EOD’s Mobile Diving and Salvage Units clear harbors of navigation hazards, engage in
underwater search and recovery operations, and perform limited underwater repairs on ships.
e. Expeditionary Diving
• Underwater Construction Team diver
o The Seabee community offer dive training in support of underwater construction,
inspection and repair of ocean facilities such as wharves, piers, underwater pipelines,
moorings and boat ramps. Seabee divers maintain various construction ratings and
perform dive operations as a secondary mission.
https://www.seabee.navy.mil/index.cfm/50063
• Submarine SCUBA diver
o Personnel within the submarine force community can attend SCUBA training and become
certified to dive to 60 feet of seawater. Normally, 4 divers are attached to each submarine
to perform inspection and limited underwater repair.
• 3) Diving Medical Technician
o Hospital Corpsmen attend specialized dive training to provide and assist emergency care
treatment of dive related illnesses such as decompression sickness and trauma. Medical
technicians ensure all dive qualified personnel maintain a high level of physical and mental
readiness to minimize the risk of injury due to underwater environment.
f. Riverine
• Establishes and maintains control of rivers and waterways for military and civil purposes, denies
their use to hostile forces and destroys waterborne hostile forces as necessary. The Riverine force
combats sea-based terrorism and other illegal activities, such as transporting components of
weapons of mass destruction, hijacking, piracy and human trafficking.
g. Expeditionary Intelligence 67 reserve, 192 active duty
• Delivers flexible, capable and ready maritime expeditionary intelligence forces that respond rapidly to
evolving irregular warfare area intelligence requirements. Intelligence teams supply expeditionary
warfighters with timely relevant intelligence to deny the enemy sanctuary, freedom of movement and use of
18
COMMON CORE
103
waterborne lines of communication while supported forces find, fix and destroy the enemy and enemy
assets within the operational environment.
h. Expeditionary Logistics 3243 reserve, 406 active duty
• Delivers worldwide expeditionary logistics with active and reserve personnel to conduct port and
air cargo handling missions, customs inspections, contingency contracting capabilities, fuels
distribution, freight terminal and warehouse operations, postal services and ordnance reporting
and handling.
i. Maritime Civil Affairs 127 reserve 172 active duty
• Is an enabling force working directly with the civil authorities and civilian populations within a Combatant
Commander’s maritime area of operations to lessen the impact of military operations imposed during peace
time, contingency operations and periods of declared war.
Security Training Command
• Supports the efforts of the Combatant Commanders’ Theater Security Cooperation by delivering timely,
focused, and customizable training to designated host nations. Security Force Assistance draws training
expertise from NECC forces and DoD to support in training delivery. Host nation training also supports
critical regional stability by helping improve the nation’s capabilities in exercising maritime sovereignty.
j. Combat Camera
• Generates video and still documentation of combat operations, contingencies, exercises and Navy
events of historical significance. COMCAM is a visual information acquisition unit, dedicated to
providing rapid response aerial, surface and subsurface visual documentation of wartime
operations.
k. Expeditionary Combat Readiness
• Coordinates and oversees all administrative processing, equipping, training, deployment and re-deployment
of Sailors assigned as Individual Augmentees, In-Lieu of forces and to Provisional Units committed to Joint
and Maritime Operations.
103.8 Discuss the following levels of security clearances. When does Personnel Security
Investigation (PSI) expire for each: [ref. f, ch. 4, p. 1]
 All reports will cover the most recent 10 years or since the 18 th birthday which ever is shorter.
At least the last 2 years will be covered
a. Top Secret (TS)
o The highest level of classification of material on a national level. Such material would cause
"exceptionally grave damage" to national security if made publicly available.
o Must be updated every 5 years Not available to non citizens.
b. Secret (S)
o Such material would cause "grave damage" to national security if it were publicly available
o Must be updated every 10 years
c. Confidential (C)
o Such material would cause "damage" or be "prejudicial" to national security if publicly available.
o Must be updated every 15 years
103.9 Discuss the procedures required for the following [ref. e, ch. 9, p. 1-9]
 Determine clearance eligibility,
o Commanding officers will determine those position functions under their control that
require access to classified information, and may authorize access to the incumbents
of such positions who have officially been determined to be eligible by
 Grant access
o Commanding officers may grant access to classified information to any individual who
has an official need-to-know, established security clearance eligibility, and about whom
there is no known un-adjudicated disqualifying information.
 Grant interim security clearance
o In the absence of adverse information, commanding officers may grant temporary
access (also referred to as interim clearance or interim access) to individuals pending
19
COMMON CORE

103
completion of full investigative requirements and pending establishment of security
clearance eligibility by the DON CAF.
Adjust or suspend access
o Commanding officers will determine whether, on the basis of all the facts, to suspend
or limit an individual's access to classified information, or reassign the individual to
nonsensitive duties pending a final eligibility determination by the DON CAF.
o Member must be notified in writing within 10 days of the reason
o Must remove the access authorization in JPAS and access rosters
103.10 Explain what the Joint Clearance and Access Verification System (JCAVS) is [ref. e,
app. e, p. 1]

JPAS has two applications. The Joint Adjudication Management System (JAMS) and the Joint
Clearance and Access Verification System (JCAVS).
 JPAS is the application that supports the central adjudication facilities in recording and maintaining
security eligibility determinations and provides the capability to communicate with command
security personnel.
 JCAVS is the application that supports command security personnel providing capabilities such as
communication links with the CAFs, e-QIP links to submit investigation requests, and records
keeping capabilities. JCAVS provides data such as civilian position sensitivity levels, PSI history,
status of current adjudicative actions, security clearance eligibility and access determinations,
non-disclosure execution dates, indoctrinate dates, to assist in local command program
management.
 JPAS is linked to other systems such as Defense Central Index of Investigations (DCII) and the
Automated Data Warehouse and DSS’ internal management systems to comprise “System X,”
DoD’s automated tool supporting the reengineered DoD PSP.
 JPAS provides program management reports to JCAVS and JAMS users and to DSS program
managers, as required, using preprogrammed formats supported by system data.
103.11
Discuss the control measures for classified information [ref. f, ch. 7, p. 139]
 Commanding officers shall ensure that classified information is processed only in secure facilities,
on accredited Information Technology (IT) systems, and under conditions which prevent
unauthorized persons from gaining access.
 Top Secret must be individually serialized and entered into a command top secret log.
o Physical inventory at least annually.
o
OLD.5 Define operational and administrative control. [ref. d, ch. 1]
 OPCON is defined as the authority to assign tasks, to designate objectives, and to give any
specific directions necessary to accomplish a mission. If required, a specific date for mission
completion may be specified.
 ADCON is defined as the coordination of training, project selection, logistic support, movement
of personnel and equipment, furnishing services, supplies, and materials for assigned units.
103.12 Discuss the National Military Commands chain of command structure under two
distinct branches [ref. a, ch. 3, p.3-1; ref. a, ch. 4 p. 4-3]
 a. Operational Chain Of Command
o The first branch is the operational chain of command. The Navy’s operational chain-ofcommand branch runs from the President to the Secretary of Defense (SecDef) to the
combatant commander (and to the subordinate unified commander or commander, joint
task force, when designated). The Navy component commander is under the combatant
commander. The Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff transmits orders to the
combatant commanders as directed by the President
20
COMMON CORE
o

The chain of command of the Naval Construction element is assigned to. i.e. MAGTF >
Marine corp component commander > Commander Joint Task foce.
b. Service Chain Of Command
o The service chain of command prepares service forces and their administration and
support. The Secretary of the Navy is responsible for the administration and support of
U.S. Navy and Marine Corps forces assigned or attached to each of the combatant
commands. The Secretary exercises ADCON through the CNO and the commander of
the Navy component command assigned to a combatant command and through the
Marine Corps Commandant and the Marine Corps component commander assigned to
a combatant command.
Figure 2 Operational vs service chain of command
21
103
COMMON CORE
103
Figure 3 Operational Chain of command paths.
103.13 Discuss the levels of authority (control) [ref. a, ch. 3, p. 3-2, glossary 3]
 a. Type Commander (TYCOM) perform vital administrative, personnel, and operational
training functions for a "type" of weapon system (i.e., naval aviation, submarine warfare,
surface warships) within a fleet organization.NECC Functional command based on
commanding Naval Expeditionary Combat Command. Controls the units during their training
cycles until they move to their OPCON
 b. Combatant Command (COCOM)
o Unique to combatant Commander, Provides input for budget and planning, assigns
subordinate commanders, develops and maintains relationships within the DOD,
convenes court martials, Directive authority for logistics.
o Cannot be transferred or delegated.
 c. Operational Control (OPCON)
o command authority inherent in COCOM and must be delegated for commanders to
exercise at any echelon at or below the combatant command. Authority to organize and
employ commands and forces to accomplish missions.
 d. Tactical Control (TACON)
o Limited to the detailed and local direction and control of movements and maneuvers
necessary to accomplish the commanders assigned mission and tasks.
 e. Support
o When one organization aids, protects, complements or sustains another force.
o Such as CSE supporting a Convoy, must ensure each side knows who is in control at
what point.
 f. Administrative Control (ADCON)
o Organization, resources and equipment control, personnel management, unit logistics,
training, readiness, mobilization, discipline.
 g. Coordinating Authority
22
COMMON CORE
103
o

Relates more to planning, coordinate special functions involving two or more forces.
Doesn’t have authority to force agreement. Such as coordinating fire support. You can
ask for fire support but you don’t have authority to make them provide support.
Direct Liaison Authorized (DIRLAUTH),
o That authority granted by a commander (any level) to a subordinate to directly consult
or coordinate an action with a command or agency within or outside of the granting
command. Direct liaison authorized is more applicable to planning than operations and
always carries with it the requirement of keeping the commander granting direct liaison
authorized informed. Direct liaison authorized is a coordination relationship, not an
authority through which command may be exercised.

103.14 Discuss the following in relation to Support Authority (Control) [ref. a, ch. 3, pp. 3-7 thru
3-8]
 Supported Commander
o The superior commander being supported. Typically a MAGTF, UCC, or LCE
commander depending on size of the NCE
 Supporting Commander
o The commander of the supporting command. Typically the NCR, Battalion or
detachment commanders.
 General Support
o A Seabee element provides general construction/engineering support to the
component or the component element as a whole, not to a particular subordinate unit.
The Seabee element responds to the requirements of the component command as
tasked by the NCE Operations Officer in coordination with the component command
staff engineer.
 Mutual Support
o Seabee elements receive a mutual support mission when their assigned tasks, their
position relative to other component command engineer elements, and their
capabilities allow them to coordinate their activities in order to assist each other to
respond to the construction /engineering requirements of the component command.
These Seabee elements are tasked by the NCE Operations Officer in coordination with
the component command staff engineer. An example of this support is execution of
combat engineer or general engineering tasks by units engaged in a specific combat
operation, such as the construction of the Diyala gap crossing during Operation IRAQI
FREEDOM. Both Marine Engineers and Seabees supported this mission.
 Direct Support
o A Seabee element provides direct construction/engineering support to one unit. The
Seabee element is required to respond to the supported unit’s construction/engineering
requirements. As a second priority, the Seabee element will respond to the
construction/engineering requirements of the component command as tasked by the
NCE Operations Officer in coordination with the component command staff engineer.
These Seabee elements may be assigned to the supported unit or operate with
independent logistics support.
 Close Support.
o A Seabee element with a close support mission provides construction/engineering
support on projects and objectives with the supported force through coordination with
the NCE Operations Officer and provides force protection, movement, and
communications tasks through coordination with the supported force. An example of
close support is the combat engineer task execution of units engaged in the combat
operation conducted in Fallujah, Iraq.
103.15 Discuss the following plans and orders [ref. d, pp. 396, 218, 580]
23
COMMON CORE




103
Operation Plan (OPLAN) is a detailed statement of a course of action to be followed to
accomplish a future mission.
Operation Order (OPORD) , may be oral, dictated, or in written form. The most important
determining factor of the form and the method of issuing an OPORD is time available for its
preparation and distribution.
Warning Order (WARNO) is to give advance notice that a unit is to be moved. If time permits,
the order is usually issued about 90 days in advance of the departure date. This time period
allows subordinate units time to prepare for the move.
Fragmentary Order (FRAGO) to make adjustments or changes of a previous order.
Previous PQS questions (2004, 2007)
OLD.2 Discuss the following as they apply to the administrative chain of command:
 Secretary of the Navy (SECNAV) [ref. a, app. A]
o Civilian in charge of the Department of the Navy.
o Under the direction and control of the SECDEV.
o Responsible for the policies and control of the Department of the Navy.
 Chief of Naval Operations (CNO) [ref. a, app. A]
o Senior military officer of the DON and outranks all other naval officers, unless another
naval officer is serving as the chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff.
 Commander US Atlantic Fleet, Pacific Fleet, and Naval Forces Europe [ref. p]
o Depends on where the unit is home-ported or deployed.
o For Gulfport it is COMLANTFLT
 Commander Fleet Forces Command (CFFC) [ref. p]
o Concurrent Commander of COMLANTFLT
o Responsible for overall coordination, establishment, and implementation of integrated
requirements and policies for manning, equipping, and training Atlantic and Pacific fleet
units during inter-deployment training cycle.
 Commander First Naval Construction Division (1NCD)/Naval Construction Forces Command
(NCFC) [ref. p]
o Reports to COMLANTFLT and COMUSFLTFORCOM
 Naval Construction Regiment (NCR) [ref. p]
o Reports to 1NCD
 Seabee Readiness Group (SRG) [ref. p]
o Reports to 1NCD
o Provides military training to homeported NMCBs
OLD.7 State the purpose and discuss the contents of the Enlisted Distribution Verification
Report (EDVR). [ref. e, ch. 1]
 It’s a monthly statement of a commands enlisted personnel account. It’s distributed by the
Enlisted Personnel Management Center (EPMAC). This document lists all personnel assigned.
 Summary by distribution community of the present and future manning status of the activity.
 Common reference for communicating manning status between an activity and its Manning
Control Authority (MCA)
 Statement of account for verification by the Personnel and Pay Services Unit Identification.
 Permanent historical record of an activity’s enlisted personal account.
OLD.8 Explain the use of the following:
 Naval message [ref. f, ch. 4]
o Written documents to pass or receive information to and from other units, which requires
an immediate response.
24
COMMON CORE

103
E-mail [ref. g, sec. D]
o Lets individuals and activities exchange information by computer. You may use it for
informal communication in place of telephone calls or to transmit formal correspondence
within DOD
OLD.9 Explain what each of the following enlisted service record pages are and what entries are
made on each: [ref. h]
 Page 2: Emergency Data.
o Multipurpose form for both officer and enlisted members.
o Part 1 serves as an application of dependency allowances and is used to record
military spouse data. Part II provides an immediately accessible, up-to-date record of
emergency data for casualty reporting and notification of the next of kin.
 Page 4: Enlisted Qualification History
o Consists of chronological history of your occupational and training related qualifications
and your awards and commendations.
 Page 13: Administrative remarks
o Serves as a chronological record of significant miscellaneous entries that are not
provided for elsewhere in the service record. Also used to provide more detailed
information to clarify entries on other pages of the service record.
OLD.10 Discuss the purpose and general rules for the following types of counseling: [ref. i, ch. 4]
 Personnel
o Often things can be resolved by the member’s Chain of Command but drugs/alcohol,
behavioral disorders and psychological problems need to be referred.
 Performance
o Required for:
 advancement in rate
 qualification for retention and reenlistment
 selection for responsible assignments
 selection for special training
 awards type of discharge received
 Individual rights
o submit input
o make a statement
OLD.11 Explain the use of a report and disposition of offense(s) (NAVPERS Form 1626/7). [ref. j, ch.
5]
 Used to:
o Report offenses
o Advises rights to accused
o Serves as preliminary inquiry
o Records XOI results
o Records CO’s mast results
OLD .12 Discuss the purpose of the following:
 Operation Report (OPREP)
o Significant event likely to draw national attention. Will likely have impact on Navy
Operations, and/or fatalities in the line of duty.
 Logistical Requirements (LOGREQ)
o Reports are used by a command to report logistical requirements to higher
headquarters. Format for the report will be issued by the higher unit in the operation
 Status of Resources and Training System (SORTS)
25
COMMON CORE
103
Is a unit reporting format utilized to summarize a unit’s training and operation readiness
to higher headquarters and the theater commanders. (CINC)
Situation Report (SITREP)
o Used if local interest is expected and minimal impact to Navy Operations will result
from the incident. Event not likely to draw national attention (auto accident)
o

OLD.13 Explain the difference between a security clearance and access. [ref. b, ch. 1]
 Clearance - Administrative action that an individual can be trusted with classified materials.
 Access - No one has a right to have access to classified information solely because of rank,
position, or security clearance. Access is based on persons need to know.
OLD.14 Discuss the Seabee Skills Assessment Program (SSAP). [ref. n, ch. 1]
 Continuously updating a member’s skill including, individual general skills, individual rating
skills, military skills, and crew skills (construction skills)
OLD.15 Describe the command relationship between a NCF unit and a Marine Air/Ground Task Force
(MAGTF) unit. [ref. o, ch. 1]
 The NCF unit is placed under the OPCON of the MEF Commander. The OPCON relationship
is both mission and situation-dependent, and should be determined through an appropriate
engineer staff planning process. The normal employment of the NCF, as based on precedentsetting contingencies, is for the NCF element to be structured as a major subordinate element
within the MAGTF organization.
OLD.16 Discuss your responsibilities and conduct required as a combatant under the Laws of Armed
Conflict. [ref. d, ch. 1]
 Combatants carry weapons and participate in military operations. Noncombatants (civilians,
medical, and chaplains) do not.
 Do not attack enemy troops who are wounded, sick, or surrender. Provide medical care to
captures enemy troops.
 Do not take personal property away from captured enemy troops.
 Captives may perform work, but nothing that assists your war effort.
 Use only the appropriate level of force required to affect the mission, and avoid protected
property, e.g., religious sanctuaries.
 Do not alter your weapon to cause more suffering.
26
COMMON CORE
104
104 BASIC FIRST AID AND PERSONAL HYGIENE FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVEDTRA 14295, Hospital Corpsman
[b] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1_____________________
104.1 State the sequence to examine an injured person. [ref. b, ch. 10, p. 10-1]]
 Identify obvious wounds visible at first glance. Take note of them, and then continue with the
ABC survey. (It doesn’t make sense to work hard to put a tourniquet on a severed limb if the
victim is not breathing because of an obstructed airway.)
 Check that the Airway is open and unobstructed.
 Check for signs of Breathing (for example; coughing, moaning, talking): Lack of oxygen can
lead to brain damage or death in 4-6 minutes.
 Check for Bleeding: Life cannot continue without an adequate Circulation of blood to carry
oxygen to tissues.
 Do a check from head to toe looking for obvious and hidden wounds. Remember to look for
exit wounds and small wounds on the back.
 When you are finished, start over again at Airway, and then move to Breathing and Circulation.
 If there are any signs of chemical or biological agent poisoning, you should immediately mask
yourself (if not already masked), then the casualty. If it is nerve agent poisoning, administer
the antidote, using the casualty’s injectors. In a chemically contaminated area, do not expose
the wounds.
104.2 State the reason for not moving an injured person unless absolutely necessary. [ref. b,
ch. 10 pp. 10-1, 10-8]
 As a general rule, make your initial examination in the position and place you find the victim.
Moving the victim before this time could gravely endanger life, especially if there are skull
fractures or spine injuries.
 If the situation is such that you or the victim is in danger, you must weigh this threat against
the potential damage caused by premature transportation. If you decide to move the victim,
while supporting the neck and head, do it as quickly and as gently as possible to a safe
location where proper first aid can be administered.
104.3 Describe the signs, symptoms, and treatment of shock. [ref. b, ch. 10 pp. 10-23 thru 1026]
 Shock is a serious condition that results from a lack of oxygen to important body systems. The
most common cause is a lack of circulating blood from blood loss. It is important to realize that
the signs of shock may not appear at the onset of the injury, so it always important to
constantly reevaluate your patient.
 Signs/symptoms
o Cool, clammy skin
o Paleness
o Restlessness or nervousness (line moved down)
o Thirst
o Pulse is weak and rapid
o Enlarged pupils
o Increased breathing that can be shallow and irregular
o Blotchy or bluish skin, especially around the mouth
o Nausea or vomiting
 Treatment
o Keep victim calm
o Try to prevent the victim from seeing their injuries if possible.
27
COMMON CORE
o
o
104
If victim is conscience and no internal injuries are suspected, you should give the victim
small amounts of warm water.
If possible, keep the victim warm and elevate their feet 6-12 inches so that they’re
higher than the patient’s head.
104.4 Explain why you should not give an unconscious person anything by mouth. [ref. b, ch.
10, p. 10-1]
 Giving an unconscious person any food or drink can obstruct their airway, decreasing their
ability to breath, and may cause choking or vomiting.
104.5



Describe the three types of bleeding. [ref. b, ch. 10, p. 18]
Capillary bleeding is slow and the blood oozes from the wound.
Venous bleeding is dark red and flows in a steady stream.
Arterial bleeding is bright red and “spurts” from the wound.
104.6 Explain the four methods for controlling bleeding. [ref. b, ch. 10, p. 19]
 Direct pressure
o The first method to use when controlling bleeding. In almost every case bleeding can
be stopped by direct pressure on the wound.
o Use a sterile dressing when available and tie a knot directly over the wound. Do not tie
the knot too tight and cut off circulation.
 Elevation
o Raising an injured limb above the level of the heart helps to control the bleeding.
Elevation should be used together with direct pressure.
o CAUTION: do not elevate a limb when you suspect a fracture.
 Pressure points
o Bleeding from a cut artery or vein can often be controlled by applying pressure to the
appropriate pressure point.
o The object of the pressure is to compress the artery against the bone, thus slowing
down the flow of blood to that area.
 Tourniquet
o Should only be used as a last resort for severe, life threatening bleeding that cannot be
controlled by any other method.
o Realize that when you apply a tourniquet there is a good possibility that the effected
limb will be amputated.
o Always use a wide piece of material, about 2”, when applying a tourniquet and always
apply it as close to the wound as possible. This will improve their chances of a better
recovery.
o Once you apply a tourniquet, DO NOT loosen or remove it! This could cause further
complications from the release of blood clots from the area.
104.7 Discuss the major pressure points of the body. [ref. b, ch. 10, pp. 10- 20 thru 10-22]
 Pressure point: a point where a main artery lies near the skin surface and over a bone or firm
tissue.
 There are 11 principal pressure points on each side of the body.
o underside of jaw- for facial bleeding
o collar bone- for bleeding on upper arm/shoulder
o biceps- for bleeding between middle of upper arm/elbow
o wrist- for bleeding of hand (radial and ulnar)
o pelvis- for bleeding from the thigh (iliac artery)
o ankle- for bleeding from the foot
o in front of ear- for bleeding from the temple/scalp
28
COMMON CORE
o
o
o
o
104
knee- for bleeding from between the knee/foot
hip- for bleeding from the upper thigh (femoral artery)
neck (carotid artery)
front of elbow joint (brachial artery)
104.8 Describe the first aid treatment for a sucking chest wound. [ref. a, ch. 4, p. 4-38]
 This is a penetrating injury to the chest that produces a hole in the chest cavity, causing the
lung to collapse and preventing normal breathing.
 It is imperative the wound be sealed with an airtight dressing to prevent air from entering the
chest cavity through the wound. Any material that will form an airtight barrier can be used if it
is large enough to cover the wound.
 If the victim’s condition deteriorates when you apply the seal, IMMEDIATELY replace it with a
regular dressing.
 After the wound is sealed and dressed, the victim should be placed on their side with the
wounded side down unless there is suspected spine or neck injuries.
 Watch the victim closely for shock and treat accordingly.
 Do not give victim anything to drink. Transport to treatment facility IMMEDIATELY
104.9 Describe the first aid treatment for a person with a suspected spinal injury. [ref. b, ch.
10, p. 10-39]
 Do not move the victim unless it is absolutely essential.
 Do not bend or twist the victim’s body, do not move the head forward, backward, or sideways
and do not under any circumstances allow the victim to sit up
 First aid procedures
o If possible, before the patient is moved their neck must be immobilized and they need
to be secured to a spine board or firm, flat piece of wood. To move them onto the
spine board properly you must use the logroll technique. To do this, roll the patient on
their side using 2-3 people while another person maintains inline neck and head
stabilization, then place the spine board against the patient’s back, and roll them back
down onto the board. Slide them into position and secure them properly to the board.
o Minimize shock
o Prevent further injury to the spinal cord
o Keep the victim comfortably warm
104.10 Describe the three degrees of burns. [ref. b, ch. 10, p. 10-30]
 Most commonly result from exposure to fire, chemicals, or electricity. The severity of burns
depends on the depth, size and location. Burns are most serious when they are located on the
face, neck, hands, and feet.
 First degree burns
o Characterized by redness, mild swelling, and pain
o Usually the result of spending too much time in the sun, short contact with chemicals,
or minor scalding by hot water or steam.
 Second degree burns
o Are deeper than first degree burns and have blisters.
o Usually they result from deep sunburns or flash burns from gasoline fires.
o Most painful type of burns because the nerve endings are still intact.
 Third degree burns
o The most serious burn because it involves the full thickness of the skin, which may be
charred in more severe cases.
o These burns can even extend into the bone.
104.11 Describe the first aid treatment for the following burns:
29
COMMON CORE


104
White phosphorous burn [ref. b, ch. 10, p. 10-32]
o A special category of burn is that caused by contact with white phosphorus.
o First aid for this type of burn is complicated by the fact that white phosphorus particles
ignite upon contact with air.
o Treatment
 Partially embedded particles must be continuously flushed with water while the
first aid provider removes them with whatever tools are available, such as
tweezers or pliers.
 Deeply embedded particles that cannot be removed must be covered with a
saline soaked dressing.
Chemical burn on arm
o Flush the area immediately with a lot of cool running water for 5 to 10 minutes to wash
away any chemicals.
o Remove clothing and jewelry from the victim on which chemicals have spilled.
o Flush again with water and gently pat it dry with sterile gauze. Do not rub the area.
o Transport the victim to a medical facility.
o




Warning: Do not attempt to neutralize any chemical unless the chemical is positively
known and what substance will effectively neutralize it.
Alkali burns caused by dry lime
o Mixing water and lime creates a very corrosive substance. Dry lime should be
removed by brushing the material from the skin and clothing unless massive amounts
of water are available for rapid and complete flushing.
Acid burns caused by carbolic acid
o Wash the affected area with alcohol because carbolic acid is non water-soluble. Then
wash the area with large quantities of water.
o If alcohol is not available, flushing with water is better than no treatment at all
Flash burn to eyes [ref. a, ch. 8, p. 8-2]
o Flash burns are divided into two classes: direct and indirect
o Direct burns, usually called flash burns, are the result of thermal, infrared radiation
emitted by a nuclear explosion.
o Indirect burns are the result of fires caused by an explosion.
o Keep away from bright light, patches to block light.
Apply cold compresses and transport victim to the nearest medical treatment facility.
Chemical burn to eyes [ref. b, ch. 10, p. 10-31]
o Symptoms
 Blindness may persist for 20 to 30 minutes
 Eyes are irritated and feel like they have sand in them.
o Treatment
 - Apply cold compresses and transport victim to the nearest medical treatment
facility.
104.12 Describe the symptoms and treatment of: [ref. b, ch. 10, p.25]
 Heat stroke
o Symptom
 Headache, nauseam dizziness, or weakness
 Breathing may be deep and rapid and change to shallow and almost absent
 Flushed, very dry and hot skin, constricted pupils and a fast, strong pulse
o Treatment
 Heat stroke is a true medical emergency.
 The longer the victim goes without proper treatment the more likely they are to
suffer from brain damage or death.
30
COMMON CORE
104



The main objective is to get the body temperature down as quickly as possible.
Move the patient to a shaded area, loosen their clothing and wet them down.
Apply cool compresses to the back of their neck and underarms.
 Get the victim to a medical treatment facility as soon as possible and continue
cooling measures during transport.
Heat exhaustion
o The most common heat related condition resulting from prolonged exposure to hot
conditions. Heat exhaustion involves a serious disturbance of blood flow to the brain,
heart and lungs.
o Symptoms
 Victim may appear ashen gray; skin will be cold, moist, clammy, normal or
subnormal temperature.
 Pupils may be enlarged
 Victim may experience symptoms such as weakness, fatigue, headache, loss of
appetite, and nausea.
o Treatment
 Loosen clothing and apply cool wet cloths to the head, armpits, groin, and
ankles.
 Do not chill the victim
 Transport the victim to a medical facility as soon as possible.
 Care for the victim as if in shock.
 Move the victim to an air-conditioned space if possible.
Heat Cramps
o Heat cramps usually affect people who work in hot environments or who engage in
strenuous exercise without acclimating themselves to the conditions. May result from
drinking ice water or other cold drinks too quickly or in too large a quantity after
exercise.
o Symptoms
 Excessive sweating which can result in painful cramps in the muscles of the
abdomen, legs, and arms
 Muscle spasms caused by heat cramps usually last only a few minutes
o Treatment
 Move to a cool place
 Give plenty of water to drink
 Gently massage muscles to relieve the spasms
 If symptoms do not improve treat for heat exhaustion and transport to a medical
facility
104.13 Explain how heat casualties in the field may be prevented. [ref. a, ch. 4, p. 4-61]
 It’s the commands responsibility
 Prevention centers on water and salt replacement
 Do not consume alcoholic beverages
104.14 Describe frostbite and immersion foot. [ref. b, ch. 10, pp. 10-27 thru 10-29]
 Frostbite
o Frostbite occurs when ice crystals form in the skin or deeper tissues after sustained
exposure to a temperature of 32 degrees F or lower
o Depending upon the temperature, altitude, and wind speed, the exposure time necessary
to produce frostbite varies from a few minutes to several hours.
o The areas most commonly affected are the face and extremities
o Symptoms
 Affected skin reddens ant there is an uncomfortable coldness.
 Area becomes numb due to reduced circulation
31
COMMON CORE
104



Ice crystals form, the frozen extremity appears white, yellow-white, or blotchy blue
and white
 The surface of the skin feels hard, but the underlying tissue is soft
 WARNING: Never rub frostbitten area or heat a frostbitten area with open fire.
Superficial frostbite
o The skin and region just below the skin are affected
o Surface feels hard but the underlying tissue is soft, allowing it to move over body ridges
o Treatment
 Thaw with body heat or warm water
 Hands: Place hands under the armpits, against the abdomen, or between the
thighs
Feet: Feet can be warmed by using the armpit or abdomen of a buddy
 Other areas: Warm with warm water immersion, skin to skin contact, or warmwater bottles
Immersion foot, which may also occur in the hands, is a cold injury resulting from prolonged
exposure to wet, cold temperatures just above freezing
o It is often associated with limited motion of the extremities and water-soaked clothing
o The temperature does not need to be below 32 degrees F to cause injury
o Symptoms
 Early stages, the feet and toes turn pale and feel cold, numb and stiff
 Walking becomes difficult
 The feet will swell and become painful
 If not treated the flesh dies and amputation of the extremity may be necessary
o Treatment
o Do not rub or massage the injured part
o Remove wet clothing
o Do not rupture blisters or apply salves or ointments
o Clean with soap and water, dry thoroughly, elevate and keep extremity exposed to dry air
o Evacuate by litter
104.15 Describe the signs and symptoms of hypothermia. [ref. b, ch. 10, pp. 10-27 thru 10-28]
 Hypothermia is a decrease in the body’s core temperature. It can be caused by continued
exposure to low or rapidly dropping temperatures, cold moisture, snow, and/or ice
 Symptoms
o Several stages of progressive shivering
o Feelings of sluggishness, drowsiness and confusion
o Victim may become unconscious
o Victim may go into shock
o The lower extremities may freeze




Treatment
o Victim must be warmed quickly
o Move victim to warmth
In the field
o Place nude victim in a sleeping bag with two volunteers stripped to their underwear to
provide body to body heat transfer
o This WILL SAVE LIVES in the field
HYPOTHERMIA IS A MEDICAL EMERGENCY
THE VICTIM NEEDS HEAT!
104.16 Explain how cold injuries can be prevented. [ref. a, ch. 4, p. 4-62]
32
COMMON CORE


104
Cold weather injuries can be prevented by becoming accustomed to a cold climate, by wearing
warm layered clothing, and by maintaining good discipline and training
Wearing dry gloves, stocking cap well insulated boots, and keeping the body well hydrated will
help the body maintain its normal temperature.
104.17 Describe the symptoms and first aid treatment for a joint dislocation. [ref. a, ch. 4. p. 454]
 Description
o A bone that has been forcibly displaced from its joint is dislocated
o Dislocation are usually caused by falls or blows but are occasionally caused by muscle
exertion. The joints that are most frequently dislocated are the shoulder, hip, finger,
and jaw
 Symptoms
o Rapid swelling and discoloration
o Loss of ability to use the joint
o Sever pain and muscle spasms
o Possible numbness
o Possible loss of pulse below the joint
 Shock
o Treatment
o Loosen the clothing around the injured part
o Place the victim in the most comfortable position possible
o Support the injured part by means of a sling, pillow, bandages, splints, or any other
device that will make the victim comfortable
o Get medical help as soon as possible
104.18 Explain when and why a cold pack or heat pad would be used on a sprain. [ref. a, ch. 4,
p. 4-56]






Treat all sprains as fractures until ruled out by X-rays
Try to rest the effected joint as much as possible over the next few days.
Apply cold packs for the first 24 to 48 hours to reduce swelling and to control internal
hemorrhage
Apply a snug, smooth, figure eight bandage to control swelling and to provide immobilization
When at rest, keep the effect joint above the level of the heart.
After a few days rest the patient should begin range of motion exercises to prevent decreased
joint flexibility.
104.19 Describe the procedure for treating insect bites. [ref. a, ch. 5, p. 5-9]
o Monitor vital signs
o Remove stingers, in a “shaving” motion
o Place ice cube or analgesic-corticosteroid cream or lotion over the wound site
o People with severe allergic reactions should be evacuated
OLD.19 Describe the procedure for removing ticks. [ref. a, ch. 11]
 The best method for removing ticks is to coat them with petroleum jelly, baking powder paste,
or clear nail polish
 The tick should be pulled off with a pair of tweezers by grabbing the tick by its mouth parts and
slowly working it out of the patient’s skin. This can be very time consuming, so exercise
patience.
 Care should be taken not to crush the tick or break off the head or embedded mouth parts
while still in the skin
33
COMMON CORE
104
104.20 Describe the first aid treatment for snake bites. [ref. a, ch. 5, p. 5-11]
 The most important first aid treatment for venomous snakebites is reducing the circulation of
blood through the bite area.
 This will delay absorption of the venom, prevent aggravation of the local wound, and maintain
the victim’s vital signs
 Wrap a constricting band 2 to 3 inches above the fang marks, or above the nearest joint, but
away from the swelling
 A second constricting band should be placed 2 to 3 inches below the wound
 Make sure the victim still has a pulse distal to the constricting band. Constricting bands slow
the flow of blood but do not act as a tourniquet.
 Treat for shock
o Use a splint to immobilize the victim’s affected extremity, keeping the involved area at
or below the level of the heart
o Cover the wound to prevent further contamination
o Telephone the nearest medical facility so proper anti-venom can be made available
o Transport the victim (and the dead snake) to a medical facility as soon as possible.
104.21 Describe the first aid treatment for fractures. [ref. b, ch. 10, p. 10-33]]
 If there is any possibility that a fracture has been sustained, treat the injury as a fracture until
an accurate diagnosis can be made.
 Rough handling of the victim may convert a closed fracture into an open fracture, increase the
severity of shock, or cause extensive damage to the blood vessels, nerves, muscles, and
other tissues around the broken bone.
 Do not move the victim until the injured part has been splinted
 Always splint fracture in the position found unless there is no pulse distal to the fracture. In
that case, you may adjust the fractured limb slightly to return blood flow. If this does not work
continue splinting in position found.
 To fully immobilize a fracture you must splint the joint above and below the fracture. If this is
not accomplished the fracture will still be able to move causing further injury and pain.
 Never apply force or traction
 If the victim is to be transported a short distance, or treatment by a medical officer will not be
delayed, it is best to leave the clothing on and place emergency splinting over it
 If the fracture is an open fracture you must control the bleeding before you can deal with the
fracture.
 Treat for shock
104.22 Describe how to reinforce a compress dressing. [ref. a, ch. 4, p. 4-33]

Battle dressings may be reinforced by applying additional sterile dressings over the battle
dressing and covering the entire dressing with an elastic bandage.
104.23 Explain the following methods for carrying a casualty: [ref. b, ch. 10, pp. 10-12 thru 1018]
34
COMMON CORE
35
104
COMMON CORE
36
104
COMMON CORE
37
104
COMMON CORE
38
104
COMMON CORE
104
104.24 State the four general rules that apply when using a stretcher. [ref a, ch. 3, p. 3-18]
o Use standard stretchers when available, but be ready to improvise safe alternatives.
o When possible, bring the stretcher to the casualty.
o Always fasten the victim securely to the stretcher.
o Always move the victim FEET FIRST so the rear bearer can watch for signs of breathing difficulty.
104.25 Explain the importance of personal hygiene and cite examples. [ref. b, ch. pp. 10-40 thru
10-43]
 Because of close living accommodations in the field, personal hygiene is extremely important.
Disease and sickness can spread rapidly and affect an entire battalion in a short period.
 Good practices
o Daily bath or shower prevents body odor and is absolutely necessary for maintaining
cleanliness and preventing common skin diseases
o Using medicated powders and deodorants helps keep the skin dry
o Socks and underwear should be changed daily
o The importance of washing you hands at appropriate times can not be overemphasized
104.26 Explain three methods of purifying water in the field. [ref. b, ch. 10, p. 10-43]
 Boiling
o Used when disinfecting compounds are not available. To purify a canteen of water by
boiling, follow the steps listed below:
 Boil the water at a rolling boil for at least 15 – 20 seconds
39
COMMON CORE



104
Let the water cool before drinking it. Once the water has cooled, it must be
consumed
Iodine Tablets
o Check tablets for physical change. If the tablets are stuck together, crumbled, or have
a color other than steel gray, do not use them
o Fill canteen with the cleanest, clearest water available.
o Add one tablet per 1 quart canteen of clear water, 2 tablets if the water is cloudy
o Place cap loosely and wait 5 minutes
o Shake canteen, allowing leakage to rinse the threads around the neck of the canteen
o Tighten the cap and wait an additional 20 minutes before using the water for any
purpose
Calcium hypochlorite ampoules
o Fill the canteen with the cleanest, clearest water available, leaving an air space of at
least 1” below the neck of the canteen
o Add one ampoule of calcium hypochlorite to a canteen cup half full of water; stir with a
clean stick until power has dissolved
o Fill the canteen cap half full of the solution in the cup, and add it to the water in the
canteen, place the cap on the canteen and shake it thoroughly
o Loosen the cap slightly; invert the canteen to allow the treated water to leak onto the
threads around the canteen neck
o Tighten the cap and wait at least 30 minutes before using the water
OLD.26 Describe proper litter bearer procedures. [ref. a, ch. 3]
 The military uses a number of standard stretchers. The following discussion will familiarize
you with the most common types. When using a stretcher, you should consider a few general
rules:
o Use standard stretchers when available, but be ready to improvise safe alternatives.
o When possible, bring the stretcher to the casualty.
o Always fasten the victim securely to the stretcher.
o Always move the victim FEET FIRST so the rear bearer can watch for signs of
breathing difficulty.
o Be sure to use proper lifting techniques so as not to become a victim yourself. When
raising or lowering the patient, the litter bearer at the patient’s head calls the lift.
Extra – What is the rule of thumb for number of Combat Life Savers (CLS) per people?
1 CLS per 6 people
Extra – What is the rule of thumb for number of Corpsman per people?
1 Corpsman per 75 people or Det site.
40
COMMON CORE
105
105 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL/HAZARDOUS WASTE
(HM/HW)/ENVIRONMENTAL SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 5100.23G, Navy Occupational Safety and Health (NAVOSH) Program Manual
[b] NAVEDTRA 14233, Naval Construction Force/Seabee 1 & C
[c] NAVEDTRA 14167, Naval Safety Supervisor
[d] OPNAVINST 5100.19D, Naval Occupational Safety and Health (NAVOSH) Program Manual for
Forces Afloat
[e] COMFIRSTNCDINST 5100.2B Naval Construction Force Occupational Safety and Health Program
Manual
[f] OPNAVINST 5090.1B CH-4 Environmental and Natural Resource Program Manual
[g] 29 CFR Part 1910 General Industry Standards________________________________________
105.1 Describe the difference between Hazardous Material (HAZMAT) and Hazardous
Waste (HW). [ref. c, ch. 5, pp. 5-7 thru 5-9]
 HAZMATs are stand-alone homogenous products that have one or more properties that have
been designated as being harmful to the individual and/or the environment. When proper
handling procedures are followed, there is minimum risk to the user.
 Hazardous Wastes tend to be a mixture of unused or spoiled HAZMATs and are difficult to
classify, hence they are commonly more dangerous then stand-alone HAZMATs and require
specialized training to recover and dispose.
105.2 State the purpose and information contained on the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS).
[ref. b, ch. 7; ref. c ch. 5]
 A document generated by the manufacturer of the material
 Communicates to the users the chemical, physical, and hazardous properties of that material
 In compliance with OSHA hazard communication, standard key information contained includes
the following:
o Name, address, and emergency contact for the manufacturer
o Physical/Chemical Characteristics
o Fire and Explosive Hazard Data
o Reactivity Data
o Health Hazard Data
o Precautions for Safe Handling and Use
o Control measure
105.3 What are the six categories of HAZMAT? [ref. c, ch. 5, p. 5-7]
Category
A
B
41
Hazard Level
High
Industrial Operations
Heavy Equipment Operation and Maintenance
Toxic/Hazardous Materials Handling
Construction
Other: Exposures to heat, cold, diving salvaging heights or other
high-risk work
Moderate
Supply/Transportation
Medical
Mechanics
RDT&E: Engineers, test mechanics and laboratory personnel
involved in the research, development, evaluation and test of
systems
COMMON CORE
C
Low
105
Administrative, Clerical, Classroom
D
Shipboard Personnel
E
Operating Forces
F
Students
105.4 Explain the storage procedures for incompatible material. [ref. d, ch. C23-4 thru C237,appendix. C23-F]
 Stored according to the type of HAZMAT, certain storage procedures must be applied
 Do not mix flammables and toxic materials, or flammables and corrosives together
 The safest practice is to draw only the amount of material that can be used that day
 Storing hazardous materials on the job site requires the use of approved containers
 Containers must be placed a minimum of 50 feet away from any ignition device or source
 Plan for the delivery of proper storage equipment before hazardous materials are delivered to
the job site
105.5 Explain the general procedures to be followed when a Hazardous Material/Hazardous
Waste (HM/HW) spill is discovered. [ref. f, ch. 10, pp. 10-10 thru 10-19; ref. g, 29 CFR 1910.120]
 The unit must respond immediately
 Must have an approved response team, equipment, and disposal plan.
 Reports must be made and tests conducted to ensure no contamination remains
 Disposal of contaminated soils, etc. must follow strict guidelines
105.6 State the PPE required when handling HM/HWat levels A, B, C, D
[ref. g, 29 CFR 1910.120, app. b]
o Level A - To be selected when the greatest level of skin, respiratory, and eye protection is
required.
1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or positive
pressure supplied air respirator with escape SCBA, approved by the National Institute for
Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH).
2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protective suit.
3. Coveralls.(1)
4. Long underwear.(1)
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and shank.
8. Hard hat (under suit).(1)
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and boots (depending on suit construction, may be worn over
totally-encapsulating suit).
o Level B - The highest level of respiratory protection is necessary but a lesser level of skin
protection is needed.
1. Positive pressure, full-face piece self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or positive
pressure supplied air respirator with escape SCBA (NIOSH approved).
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; one or twopiece chemical-splash suit; disposable chemical-resistant overalls).
3. Coveralls.(1)
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
42
COMMON CORE
105
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank.
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable).(1)
8. Hard hat.(1)
9. [Reserved]
10. Face shield.(1)
o III. Level C - The concentration(s) and type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and the
criteria for using air purifying respirators are met.
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying respirators (NIOSH approved).
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing (overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; disposable
chemical-resistant overalls).
3. Coveralls.(1)
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel toe and shank.(1)
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable).(1)
8. Hard hat.(1)
9. Escape mask.(1)
10. Face shield.(1)
o IV. Level D - A work uniform affording minimal protection: used for nuisance
contamination only.
1. Coveralls.
2. Gloves.(1)
3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe and shank.
4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (disposable).(1)
5. Safety glasses or chemical splash goggles.(1)
6. Hard hat.(1)
7. Escape mask.(1)
8. Face shield.(1)
Footnote(1) Optional, as applicable.
 Ensure all personnel understand the following:
o What hazard materials are present
o What PPE is required for protection from each specific danger
 Example: Face shield, goggles, gloves, apron, and boots.
105.7 What are the 9 different Hazard classification codes? [ref. h, sec. 173.2]
o Class 1 – Explosives
o 1.1 — Explosives with a mass explosion hazard. (nitroglycerin/dynamite)
o 1.2 — Explosives with a blast/projection hazard.
o 1.3 — Explosives with a minor blast hazard. (rocket propellant, display fireworks)
o 1.4 — Explosives with a major fire hazard. (consumer fireworks, ammunition)
o 1.5 — Blasting agents.
o 1.6 — Extremely insensitive explosives.
o Class 2 – Gasses
o 2.1 Flammable Gas: Gases which ignite on contact with an ignition source, such
as acetylene and hydrogen.
o 2.2 Non-Flammable Gases: Gases which are neither flammable nor poisonous. Includes
the cryogenic gases/liquids (temperatures of below -100°C) used for cryopreservation and
rocket fuels, such as nitrogen and neon.
o 2.3 Poisonous Gases: Gases liable to cause death or serious injury to human health if
inhaled; examples are fluorine, chlorine, and hydrogen cyanide.
43
COMMON CORE
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
105
Class 3 Flammable Liquids
o Packing Group I, if they have an initial boiling point of 35°C or less at an absolute pressure
of 101.3 kPa and any flash point, such as diethyl ether or carbon disulfide;
o Packing Group II, if they have an initial boiling point greater than 35°C at an absolute
pressure of 101.3 kPa and a flash point less than 23°C, such as gasoline
(petrol) and acetone; or
o Packing Group III, if the criteria for inclusion in Packing Group I or II are not met, such
as kerosene and diesel.
Class 4 Flammable Solids
o 4.1 Flammable Solids: Solid substances that are easily ignited and readily combustible
(nitrocellulose, magnesium, safety or strike-anywhere matches).
o 4.2 Spontaneously Combustible: Solid substances that ignite spontaneously
(aluminium alkyls, white phosphorus).
o 4.3 Dangerous when Wet: Solid substances that emit a flammable gas when wet or react
violently with water (sodium, calcium, potassium, calcium carbide).
Class 5 Oxidizing agents
o 5.1 Oxidizing agents other than organic peroxides (calcium hypochlorite,ammonium
nitrate, hydrogen peroxide, potassium permanganate).
o 5.2 Organic peroxides, either in liquid or solid form (benzoyl peroxides,cumene
hydroperoxide).
Class 6 Toxic and Infectious substances
o 6.1a Toxic substances which are liable to cause death or serious injury to human health if
inhaled, swallowed or by skin absorption (potassium cyanide, mercuric chloride).
o 6.1b (Now PGIII) Toxic substances which are harmful to human health (N.B this symbol is
no longer authorized by the United Nations) (pesticides,methylene chloride).
o 6.2 Biohazardous substances; the World Health Organization (WHO) divides this class into
two categories: Category A: Infectious; andCategory B: Samples (virus cultures,
pathology specimens, used intravenous needles).
Class 7 Radioactive substances
Class 8 Corrosive substances
o 8.1 Acids: sulfuric acid, hydrochloric acid
o 8.2 Alkalis: potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide
Class 9 Miscellaneous.
o
OLD.7 Discuss the disposal limitations for the following:






44
Trash
o Rubbish and debris and other debris which can normally be disposed of in a normal
landfill
Garbage
o Food waste which can be disposed of in a normal landfill
Plastic
o Recycled through DRMO at most military bases
Sewage
o Only properly disposed of through a sewage treatment plant
Oily waste
o Recycled through DRMO
Paint/mineral spirits
o Disposed of through DRMO as hazardous waste
COMMON CORE


105
Metal
o Turned in to DRMO for recycling
Wood
o Landfill or DRMO for recycling
OLD.8 Describe required training for all hands with respect to the HM/HW Program.
[ref. a, ch. 6]



Management personnel
o Receive sufficient training to ensure that an aggressive and continuing OSH program is
implemented throughout the activity
Supervisory personnel
o Receive training that enables them to recognize unsafe and unhealthy working
conditions and practices in the workplace
o Training shall also include the development of skills necessary to mange the activities
OSH program at the work unit level
Non-supervisory personnel
o Training shall include specialized job-safety and health training appropriate to the work
performed.
105.8 Describe the purpose of secondary labeling of HAZMAT when removed from the original
container. [ref. a, ch. 7]
 To inform the user by means of words, pictures, symbols, or combination thereof of specific
physical and health hazard(s), including target organ effects, of the chemicals(s) in the
container(s).
105.9 Define the following terms:
 HAZMINCEN [ref. d, ch. C2303]
o Central Hazardous Materials Center of an installation
o Responsible for procurement and inventory management activities.
 CHRIMP- [ref. f, ch. 3]
 Consolidated Hazardous Material Reutilization Inventory Management Program
o This program allows unused HAZMAT to be stored and reissued for future use.
o All HAZMAT within a unit is controlled by one central HAZMAT coordinator.
o When HAZMAT is received, the coordinator inventories it with a bar code, and then
issues it to the requestor
o If there is any HAZMAT remaining after the requester is through, it is turned back into
the coordinator for possible reissue.
o When a new request is generated for that same HAZMAT the unused portion the
coordinator is storing is reissued.
o Purpose
 Reduce costs
 Protect navy and other personnel from unnecessary exposure to Hazardous
Waste and Material
 Minimizes the Navy’s long-term risk for liability associated with HW disposal
 Comply with all Federal, state and local environmental statutes, laws, and
regulations.

 HICS- [ref. f, ch. 3] Hazardous Inventory Control System
o Prepares reports for administration purposes of the HAZMAT inventory. A combined
program with CHRIMP
45
COMMON CORE

105
Both CHRIMP and HICS are being replaced with Hazardous Substance Management System
(HSMS). This program provides the same functions.
105.10 Discuss the aspects of portable containment of oils spills on water. [ref. b , ch. 7]
 An oil slick on the surface of the water blocks the flow of oxygen from the atmosphere into the
water.
 Booming of spills has proved to be effective in containing spills of liquids on relatively calm and
current-free waters.
 Following containment of oil spills on water, various methods of removing the confined liquid
have been used.
 Absorbents, such as straw, plastics, sawdust, and peat moss are spread on the surface of the
spill and then collected and burned on shore.
 Skimming devices operate on a different principal and must include pumps and separators.
o Skimmers scoop up the oil and water and send them through on oil separator and
rollers to which only the oil adheres.
o The oil is then removed by scraping and compression.
105.11 Discuss the potential environmental impact of the following: [ref. b, ch. 7]
 Oil spills
o Completely remove all contaminated soil from the site to a facility or landfill that is
designed to receive such material
 Grubbing operations
o Large scale clearing in initial stages of a project can produce damaging side effects
o Increased soil erosion
o Reduction of atmospheric oxygen
o Destruction of wildlife habitat
o Preventative measures
 Save as much vegetation as possible
 Construct shallow trenches around the project
 Burn only when necessary and after obtaining a burn permit
 Do not use petroleum-based fuels to start fires.
 Asbestos
o Fibrous material used extensively from the 1930’s to the 1960’s
o Dangerous to the lungs.
o Covered by OPNAVINST 5100.23
o THE NCF DOES NOT DO ASBESTOS WORK
 Polychlorinated Biphenyl’s (PCB)
o Group of toxic chemicals used extensively as insulators and coolers in electrical
equipment, especially transformers
o Causes irritation to eyes, skin, and lungs, also suspected of causing cancer.
o Accumulate in the environmental and are absorbed into human fat tissues.
o Actions
 Secure the site
 Notify the activity environmental coordinator and the EPA branch or division
 Hazardous warning labels
o A diamond shaped symbol with 4 segments
o The three upper parts reflect hazards relative to health, fire and reactivity.
o The lower part reflects the specific hazard peculiar to the material
o The four hazards the labels are designed to illustrate are:
 Health Hazard- The ability of the material to either directly or indirectly cause
temporary or permanent injury or incapacitation
 Fire Hazard- The ability of the material to burn when exposed to heat source.
46
COMMON CORE

o
47
105
Reactivity Hazard- The ability of the material to release energy when in contact
with water
 Specific Hazard- This term relates to a special hazard concerning the particular
product or chemical, which was not, covered by other hazard items.
The degree of hazard is expressed by a numerical code:
 4 = extremely dangerous
 3 = dangerous hazard
 2 = moderate hazard
 1 = slight hazard
 0 = no hazard
COMMON CORE
106
106 SUPPLY/LOGISTICS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVEDTRA 14326, Storekeeper Basic
[b] NAVEDTRA 14233, Naval Construction Force/Seabee 1 & C
[c] NAVSUP P- 485 (Rev. 3), Afloat Supply Procedures Manual, Vol. I
[d] NAVSO P-3013-2, Financial management of Resources
[e] OPNAVINST 5100.19D, Navy Occupational Safety and Health (NAVOSH) Program Manual for
Forces Afloat
[f] COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBINST 4400.3, NCF Supply Manual
[g] NAVSUP P-485 (Rev. 3), Navy Supply procedures, Vol. II
[h] NAVFAC P-300 Management of Civil Engineering Support Equipment
[i] NAVSUP P-485, Naval Supply Procedures, Vol. III
[j] Army Field Manual 4-0, (FM 4-0) ch 6. Supply and Field Services ___________
106.1 Explain the importance of the Consolidated Shipboard/Shore based Allowance List
(COSAL/COSBAL) in relation to the commands mission and sustainability. [ref. a, ch. 1]
 Coordinated Shipboard/Shore-based Allowance List (COSAL)
 The COSAL is a supply document that lists the material support required to achieve maximum,
self-supporting capabilities for an extended period of time.
106.2 Discuss the following processes in reference to the COSAL/COSBAL: [ref. f, ch. 2]
 Validating & updating
o Completed monthly with the automated shore interface and during every turnover.
o Information on the equipment identification plate is checked against the COSAL
o Discrepancies are noted on an OPNAV 4790/CK form and submitted to 3MC
o COSAL is changed to reflect correct equipment and the APL, stock, and TOA are
updated as appropriate.
106.3 What are the 11 Classes of Supply? [ref. j, ch. 6] PQS is wrong, only 10 classes.
Table 6 Classes of supply
Class I
Class II
Class III
Class IV
Class V
Class VI
Class VII
Class VIII
Class IX
Class X
48
Subsistence, including health and welfare items.
Clothing, individual equipment, tentage, tool sets and tool kits, hand tools, administrative,
and housekeeping supplies and equipment (including maps). This includes items of
equipment, other than major items, prescribed in authorization/allowance tables and
items of supply (not including repair parts).
POL, petroleum and solid fuels, including bulk and packaged fuels, lubricating oils and
lubricants, petroleum specialty products; solid fuels, coal, and related products
Construction materials, to include installed equipment and all fortification/barrier
materials
Ammunition of all types (including chemical, radiological, and special weapons), bombs,
explosives, mines, fuses, detonators, pyrotechnics, missiles, rockets, propellants, and
other associated items.
Personal demand items (nonmilitary sales items).
Major items: A final combination of end products which is ready for its intended use:
(principal item) for example, launchers, tanks, mobile machine shops, vehicles
Medical material, including medical peculiar repair parts
Repair parts and components, including kits, assemblies and subassemblies, reparable
and nonreparable, required for maintenance support of all equipment.
Material to support nonmilitary programs; such as, agricultural and economic
development,
not included in Class I through Class IX.
COMMON CORE
.
OLD.3



106
Explain how frequently ordered parts affect demand processing. [ref. c, ch. 6]
Every time a part is ordered, SNAP II records the date and quantity.
SNAP II periodically reviews the frequency parts are ordered.
If a part gets requested very frequently, the quantity kept in stock will eventually be increased.
106.4 Discuss the purpose of the Material Obligation Validation (MOV) Program. [ref. d, ch. 2]
 It ensures the requirements for the material still exist and the quantity requested is still
required.
 Checks that priorities assigned in the requisition are still valid.
 Cancels material no longer needed. (FEX material that was not received in time and is no
longer needed)
 Corrects files: Open purchase was made, but receipt was never turned in, so requisition is still
open. Internal MOV requires end users to provide copies of receipt to clear the outstanding
requisition on file.
 Frequency
o External MOV is initiated by the Inventory Control Point quarterly.
o Internal MOV is completed by the Supply Officer for each department on a monthly
basis
106.5 Discuss the following:
OPTAR [ref. c, ch. 9, par. 9002; ref. d, ch. 4, par. 4000,
 Has three components and Travel log
o Requisition/OPTAR log is similar to a checkbook, every grant and requisition is
recorded here.
 Operations funding is broken down into:
o CCG01 – Consumables
o CCG02 – Repair Parts
o CCG03 – Camp maintenance
 Travel Log- Tracks deployment per diem and TAD travel
BOR [ref. c, ch. 9, par. 9125; ref. d, ch. 4, par. 4107]
106.6 Discuss the following:
 Departmental budget Report [ref. g, ch. 4]
o All OM&N money is allocated in categorized funds (01,02,03) which are centrally
controlled by supply
o The supply officer can choose to divide these funds into departmental budgets in
accordance with program manager instructions.
o He cannot mix the different pots of money.
 Defense Reutilization Marketing Office (DRMO) [ref. c, ch. 3]
o Material in one of the following three categories may be turned into DRMO
 Items that need inventory manager disposal authority.
 Items that do not need inventory manager disposal authority.
 Scrap or waste.
o All materials turned in must have a completed DD Form 1348-1 with the S-4 signature.
o Excess material that has been turned into DRMO may be drawn out by any Navy unit
which has an allowance or mission requirement for the material. It requires screening
and authorization by the supply officer
106.7 State the criteria for which a requisition cancellation request is warranted [ref. c, ch. 3,
par. 3565]
o Single line item cancellation requests will be submitted to the last known source holding
49
COMMON CORE
106
the applicable requisitions.
Single line item cancellation requests will not be submitted under the following
circumstances:
(1) When a CONUS activity has received notice of shipment (DI AS _), DD 250, etc., advising that
shipment from a contractor's facility or a depot has occurred.
(2) When an overseas activity has received shipment status and:
(a) The line item value of the cancellation is less than $200, or
(b) The material has been shipped by air mail or parcel post, or
(c) The material was shipped more than:
1. 10 days by air shipment to APOE.
2. 45 days by surface shipment to WPOE
OLD.7 State how credit is distributed for erroneously ordered parts when they are turned back in to
supply. [ref. d, ch. 7]

Navy Stock System Purchases:
o When materials are ordered wrong or the received material is the wrong part, then the
parts may be returned to supply.
o The refund money goes to the TYCOM (NCB).
o The only way the unit (NMCB) may get the money back is by requesting additional
funds from the TYCOM (NCB) at the end of the fiscal quarter/year, using the return as
justification.
106.8 Define the following: [ref. c, ch. 5, par. 5125]
 Minor Property
o All Navy-owned property bought for immediate use on shore establishments that costs
$300 - $5000 or costs more than $5000 but has a useful life expectancy less than 2
years.
o Also, regardless of cost, all classified, sensitive, or highly pilferable equipment is
considered Minor Property.
 Plant Property
o Includes property used for the purpose of cutting, abrading, grinding, shaping, forming,
joining, testing, heating, treating, or otherwise altering the physical, electrical, or
chemical properties of materials components or end items.
o Navy-owned property that costs $5000 or more.
o Two categories:
 Class 3- useful life expectancy of two or more years
 Class 4- industrial plant equipment.
106.9 Discuss what qualifies as a controlled item. [ref. g, app. 9d]
 Controlled equipage
o Equipment requiring special management control. Two general categories:
 Material which is essential for the protection of life- life preservation, gas
masks, firearms, etc.
 Items of high cost that are easily converted to personal use- computers, fax
machines, cameras, etc
o Inventoried bi-annually and at every turnover
o Requires a custodial signature
106.10 Explain the purpose of the Allowance Change Request (ACR). [ref. b, ch. 6]
 An ACR (NAVSUP 1220-2) is used to change the quantity on an allowance list. Typical
reasons for an ACR include:
50
COMMON CORE
106
o
o
o
o


material failure rates other than expected
New operating areas or conditions
Mission assignments require additional support
Technical improvements in equipment, systems or repair parts that can provide
additional capabilities
An ACR is submitted through the 3M organization to Navy Inventory Control Point (NAVICP)
Before submitting an ACR, ensure that a similar request has not been previously denied.
106.11 Discuss the following forms:
 NAVSUP 1250-1: [ref. c, ch. 3, par. 3021, 3027] Supply request form used for NSN materials
 NAVSUP 1250-2: Requisition/consumption reporting document for procuring non-NSN
material
 DD 1348: [ref. c, ch. 4, par. 4116] DOD SINGLE LINE ITEM REQUISITION SYSTEM
DOCUMENT will be used both as a requisition and receipt document for most materials
transferred between non-automated ships
 DD 1348-1A [ref. c, ch. 4, par. 4114] ISSUE/RECEIPT RELEASE DOCUMENT (IRRD)
Material release document (supplying to someone else, transfer to DRMO, return material
 DD 1149: [ref. c, ch. 4, par. 4119] Requisition invoice/shipping document used for Fuels, open
purchase items, services, or shipping.
 DD 200:ref. c, ch. 5, par. 5128] Survey form as well as a report for lost, stolen, or damaged
items.
 DD 250 Material inspection and receiving report
106.12 Define the acronyms and state the responsibilities for the following functional outlets:
[ref. f, app. A]





51
ARP- Automotive Repair Parts
o Receives, stores, and issues repair parts for CESE and material handling equipment
o Validates and updates CESE COSAL
o Financial records, reports, and requisition files are normally maintained by Supply.
CTR- Central Tool Room
o Manages all hand tools, power tools, tradesman’s tool kits, and other special tools
o Assets are kept under strict security because items are highly pilferable and can be
easily converted to personal use.
o Inventory management measures include maintenance of separate records for
individual items, scheduled physical inventories, and scheduled preventative
maintenance.
CSR- Central shipping and receiving outlet in the battalion.
o Receives all shipments that are not project related (ARP, consumables, etc)
o Manages and issues administrative and consumable items in the TOA.
o Typically located in Supply spaces
MLO- Material Liaison Office
o Manages all project funds and materials
o Receives, issues, and inventories project materials
o Maintains records and accounting
o Submits reports of expenditures for project materials at the main body site.
o Details manage their own materials
o Supply Officer is overall responsible for project materials at all sites, including main
body.
Organizational Gear and Clothing
o Any clothing or equipment issued to an individual by a military activity, for which there
is a requirement above and beyond authorized military uniforms. NCF organizational
COMMON CORE
106
clothing and equipment includes items such as Personal Gear Issue (PGI),
Camouflage Utility Uniforms (CUU), Desert Utility Uniforms (DUU), foul weather gear,
jackets, boots, hard hats, coveralls, etc.
o Chemical, Biological, and Radiological Operating Space Item Management System
(CBR-OSIMS) data base tracks all gear issued to each person.
o Priority uniform issue
a. Initial issues
b. CBVETS
c. New affiliates
d. Replacement Issues (surveyed boots & uniforms)
e. Activation (Priority per mission requirements.)
Will not be replaced due to weight gain or loss, or improper use or negligence.
Table 7 Personal Gear Issue components
Organizational Clothing
2 - Cap, Working 8pt
3 - Blouse, Working NWU
3 - Trouser, Working NWU
1 – Parka NWU
1 - Liner Desert and
woodland
2 - Boots
1 -Riggers belt coyote Tan
2 - Cap, Boonie
2 – pair, blousing straps
2 – Neckerchief
8 – pair block socks
6 – brown t-shirts
2 - Cap, Working 8pt
3 – long sleeve crew neck
shirt
Infantry Equipment
1 – Weapons cleaning kit
1 - Goggles
1 – multi tool
1 – fighting load bearing
vest
1 - Entrenching tool w/
pouch
1 – flashlight w/ filter
1 – 3 day assult pack
6 – D-rings
1 - Insect head net
1 - canteen cup w/ stand
1 – canteen w/ pouch
1 – large field pack
1 - Individual equipment
belt
1 3 liter camelbak
Weapon accessories
1 – M9 lanyard
1 – M9 holster
1 – M9 single pouch
1 – M9 double pouch
1- M-16 3 point sling
3 - M-16 double pouch
1 single buttstock pouch
General Support
1 - Helmet, w/cover and
ear plug case
1 - tent
1 - sleeping bag with mat
1 – IMAK
1 – CBR suit w/ 2 canisters
MTV / E-SAPI
106.13 Define the following abbreviations and acronyms: [ref. f, app. P]



52
NSN- National Stock Number
o A 13 digit stock number used to identify an item of material in the Federal Supply
System
o Assigned by the Defense Logistics Service Center, Battle Creek, Michigan
COG- Cognizance Symbol
o Two position alpha-numeric code
o Identifies the Navy inventory manager, or cognizant authority, of the specific category
of material that item falls under
o Example- The COG for all CESE is 2C
 All CESE falls into the same category of material, which means all CESE has
the same cognizant inventory manager.
APL- Allowance Parts List
o Lists all the repair parts installed in the equipment or component to which it applies.
o Also lists the equipment or components operating parameters and capabilities.
COMMON CORE




106
o Each piece of equipment or component has separate APL
o APL’s are filed in Part II of the COSAL
AEL- Allowance Equipage List
o Lists all the equipment a specific unit or platform is supposed to have.
o Camp Maintenance Guilder Shop would have an AEL
o Possible entry on a ship AEL would be life rings.
NC- Not Carried
o Material the supply department does not stock
NIS -Not in Stock
o Material the supply department carries, but is out of when requested
SIM- Selected Item Management
o Inventory Control
 If a part is requested two or more times in a six month period, it is identified for
SIM
 All SIM items are inventoried quarterly
 Non-SIM items are inventoried semi-annually.
106.13 Discuss the purpose of a Report of Deficiency (ROD) (SF-364) and the Quality
Deficiency Report (QDR) (SF-368), including the situation requiring its submission. [ref. c , ch.
4, para. 4270, 4274]]
 Report of Deficiency (SF-364)
o Used to record shipping or packaging discrepancies
 Material shipped to a wrong activity
 Erroneous material or unacceptable substitutes
 Items not received or are received in damaged condition (at least $100 per line
item)
 Wrong quantity shipped (at least $100 per line item)
 Technical data markings are missing or incomplete
 Quality Deficiency Report (SF-368)
o Documents deficiencies with the quality of the product due to design flaws. Two
Categories
 Category one: Quality deficiency which will cause death or serious injury or
illness; would cause loss or major damage to weapon system; directly restricts
combat readiness of a unit; or causes production line stoppage.
 Category two: All other quality deficiencies
106.15 Describe the functions of a supply department organization. [ref. c, ch. 1, par.1050]

53
NEXT PAGE
COMMON CORE
106
Figure 4 Supply Department break down
OLD.15 What form is utilized for inventory and accountability of individual 782 infantry 5 equipment?
[ref. b, ch. 6]

54
COMCBPAC/COMCBLANT Form4400/5
COMMON CORE
108
107 COMMUNICATIONS/COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY MATERIAL SYSTEMS
FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] Navy Electronic Key Management System (EKMS 1)
[b] MCRP 3-40.3 (series) FMFM 3-36 Radio Operators
[c] TM 11-5820-890-10-8 Operators manual, SINCGARS GROUND COMBAT NET-RADIO, ICOM
[d] PUB. No. 10515-0103-4100, AN/PRC -150 MANPACK Radio Operators manual
[e] PUB No. 10515-0109-4100, AN/PRC -117F Operators manual
[f] MCWP 6-22 Communications and Information System
[g] NAVEDTRA 14235, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 2
107.1 Discuss Communications Security (COMSEC) and the role of the Electronic Key
Management System (EKMS series) Local Element. [ref. a, ch. 4, pg 86]
 Communications security
o COMSEC or CMS is a mission that provides security to naval communications and
communications material
o CMS is an acronym for the system that provides measures to deny unauthorized
persons information of value which may be gained by the possession or study of naval
telecommunications.
o Custodian duties/responsibilities
 The mission of the CMS is to ensure the proper distribution, handling, control,
and security of COMSEC material in use throughout the navy.
 EKMS generates and distributes electronic key material for all NSA encryption systems whose
keys are loaded using standard fill devices, and directs the distribution of NSA produced key
material
 EKMS performs account registration, privilege management, ordering, distribution and
accounting to direct the management and distribution of physical COMSEC material for the
services
107.2 What is meant by the term Two-Person Integrity (TPI)? [ref. c, ch. 3]
 Personnel are not normally permitted to work alone in areas where top secret information or
information controlled under special access program procedures is used or stored and is
accessible to those employees.
107.3 Discuss the following terms:
a. Controlled Cryptographic Item (CCI) [ref. a, ch. 5]
b. Physical Security [ref. a, annex A]
c. Practice Dangerous to Security (PDS) [ref. a, ch. 10]
d. Emergency Action Plan / Emergency Destruction Plan (EAP/EDP) [ref. a, Annex M]
e. Data Transfer Device (DTD) [ref. a, Annex AC]
f. COMSEC Incident [ref. a, ch. 9]
107.4 Explain the three different types of “Supersessions” [ref. a, ch. 2]
 Regular supersession [ref. g, ch. 2]
o Supersession based on a specific, pre -determined supersession date for each edition
of material. For example, each edition of a monthly keytape is superseded on the first
day of the month after its implementation; each edition of ten -day material is
superseded on the 11th, 21st, and the 31st of the month.
 Irregular supersession [ref. g, ch. 2]
o Supersession that is not pre-determined but which occurs as a result of use. Editions
and individual segments of irregularly superseded COMSEC material are to be
destroyed after the material has been used operationally, when the controlling authority
directs supersession, or, in the case of maintenance key, it may be used until the key
55
COMMON CORE

108
becomes unserviceable. Irregular supersession is normally associated with one -time
pads, test key, maintenance key, publications, and equipment.
Emergency supersession [ref. g, ch. 2]
o An unplanned change of supersession, usually as a result of a compromise.
107.5 Explain the function and the contents of Communications Electronic Operating
Instruction (CEOI). [ref. f, ch. 6]
 The CEOI contains the technical guidance required to establish and maintain communications
support of operations. The CEOI amplifies the CIS SOP by providing detailed guidance for the
coordination and control of communications means and functions
 Call sign assignments.
 Frequency assignments.
 Radio guard charts (app. M).
 Radio net identifiers.
 Telephone directory names and numbers.
 Identification and marking panel codes.
 Signal panel message instructions.
 Pyrotechnic and smoke codes.
 Ground-to-air signals.
 Sound warning signals.
107.6 Define the following terms:
a. Essential Elements of Friendly Information (EEFI) [ref. f, ch. 1 & app. o]
 EEFIs are specific facts about friendly intentions, capabilities, and activities needed by adversaries
to plan and execute effective operations against our forces.
b. Commander’s Critical Information Requirements (CCIRs) [ref. f, ch. 1]
 CCIRs are the information regarding the enemy and friendly activities and the environment
identified by the commander as critical to maintaining situational awareness, planning future
activities, and facilitating timely decision making.
 CCIRs comprise priority intelligence requirements (PIRs), friendly force information requirements
(FFIRs), and essential elements of friendly information (EEFIs).
c. Command, Control, Communications, Computers and Intelligence (C4I) [ref. b, ch. 3,
appendix n]
 Are a key element in facing the broad range of missions and operations envisioned for a post-Cold
War future. C4I systems have traditionally been viewed as the combination of communications,
warning, intelligence, command, and information systems necessary for military decision making
and force management. These systems provide the command and control (C2) foundation for
optimal effectiveness of the forces. However, C4I now includes other areas such as
counterintelligence, Corporate Information Management (CIM), and information warfare.
d. Communications Information System Officer (CISO) [ref. f, ch 1]
 S6 or COMMO
 The CISO is responsible to the commander for all matters concerning the planning and
employment of CIS within the command. As a general or executive staff officer, the CISO serves
as an advisor, planner, supervisor, and coordinator .
107.7 What is the primary tactical radio used by the NCF and what man-pack is used in infantry
operations: [ref. b, ch 2]
o single-channel ground and airborne radio system (SINCGARS). SINCGARS is a family of
lightweight combat radios that serves as the primary means of communications for command and
control and fire support on the battlefield.
o AN/PRC-119, typically used in infantry operations, and vehicle-mounted variants
56
COMMON CORE
108
Table 8 Comms gear information
RT-1694
RT-1523
RT-1796
Characteristics HF, fixed channel, frequency
hop,
Frequency
1.6 – 59.9999MHz
Antennas
AS 2259 NVIS Dipole
manpack.
10 ft whip
VHF, LOS, Frequency
Hop capable
30-87.975 MHz
3 ft tape
10 ft whip
OE 254
Presets
Configuration
Manpack
75
VHF/UHF, SATCOM voice,
data, , freq hopping
30-512 MHz
4’ blade VHF
8.7’ Whip, VHF
13” VHF/UHF
SATCOM RF-3080 AT001
SATCOM 12006-9002-01
X-wing
110
AN/PRC 150
AN/PRC-119
AN/PRC 117
Power
12 volts in
20 watts output.
10’ whip – 50 miles
AS 2259 250-350 miles
12 volts in
20 watts output.
5 miles
12 volts in
20 watts output.
UHF – LOS
VHF 5- 10 miles
SATCOM 300 miles
Vehicle
AN/VRC 104
AN/VRC-90
AN/VRC 103
Power
50 Watts
24 VDC/ 120 VAC
50 watts output
Range
AS 3900 10’ whip 20-30
miles
24 VDC/120 VAC in
50 Watts out
AS 3900 10’ whip 15
miles
Base station
AN/GRC 231
AN/GRC-92
Radio
Transmitter
Range
57
COMMON CORE
Power
400 Watts output.
Range
108
24VDC / 120 VAC in
400 Watts out Max
power
OE-254 32-36 miles
107.8 Identify the following capabilities for the “Radio” Receiver-Transmitter (RT) 1523:
(AN/PRC-119): [ref. c]
a. Characteristics VHF, LOS
b. Frequency range 30 – 87.975 MHz
c. Configuration
d. Antennas AS 3900, OE 254
e. Power sources Batteries, 24 volt vehicle, 120 volt.
 With a 9:1 duty cycle, (9 minutes listening, one minute transmission) at 70 degrees F., a new
manpack main power battery (BA-5590) has a service life of approximately 10-30 hours
depending upon RT version and level of usage
107.9 Identify the following capabilities for the “Radio” Receiver-Transmitter (RT) 1694
(AN/PRC-150): [ref. d]
a. Characteristics: High Frequency, Line of Sight Wireless Message Terminal (email). 200 preset
channels, 75 system presets.
b. Frequency range: 1.6-59.9999 MHz 1.6 MHz – 29.99 in skywave and 20.0-59.999 in FM
mode.
c. Configuration Manpack, Mobile, Fixed site. Fixed channel, frequency hopping, automatic link
establishment.
d. Antennas OE-505 3m whip HF up to 500 miles.
e. Power sources AC or AC/DC 2 BB-390 Ni-MH rechargeable, 2 BB-590 Ni-Cd rechargeable or
2 BA-5590 Li-MH or 2 BB-490 Lead Acid batteries.
107.10 Identify the following capabilities for the “Radio” Receiver-Transmitter (RT) 1796
(AN/PRC 117): [ref. e]
a. Characteristics VHF/UHF, SATCOM voice, data, , freq hopping
b. Frequency range 30-512 MHZ
c. Configuration Manpack, Mobile, Fixed site. Fixed channel, frequency hopping, automatic link
establishment.
d. Antennas 4’ blade VHF 8.7’ Whip, VHF, 13” VHF/UHF, SATCOM RF-3080 AT001, SATCOM
12006-9002-01 X-wing
e. Power sources
107.11 Explain the function of the following communication assets:
58
COMMON CORE
108
a. Satellite Signals Navigation set (AN/PSN 11) [ref. c, ch. 3]
 PRECISION LIGHTWEIGHT GPS RECEIVER (PLGR)
 Replaced with (AN/PSN 13) Defense Advanced GPS Receiver (DAGR)
 GPS devise using Satellites to find position.
 Also used for accurate time for comms gear.
Table 9 PLGR vs DAGR
b. Data Transfer Device (AN/CYZ-10) [ref. c, ch. 3]
 Portable, hand-held fill device, for securely receiving, storing, and transferring data between
compatible cryptographic and communications equipment. It is capable of storing 1,000 keys,
maintains an automatic internal audit trail of all security-relevant events that can be uploaded to
the LMD/KP, encrypts key for storage, and is programmable
 Replaced KYK-13 and KYX-15, KOI-18 paper tape reader
 Replaced by AN/PYQ-10 Simple Key Loader
 AN/PYQ-10 Simple Key Loader SKL is a ruggedized, portable, hand-held fill device, for securely
receiving, storing, and transferring data between compatible cryptographic and communications
equipment.
107.12 Discuss the proper use of the phonetic alphabet, numerals, and prowords. [ref. b, app.
c, d, e]
Verbal Procedures: During combat activities, thunderstorms, or other high- background noise levels,
voice communications may require spelling certain words phonetically.
 Phonetic alphabet: Phonetic spelling provides clarity and emphasis to ensure the information
is received correctly.
 Numbers are transmitted digit by digit except that exact multiples of hundreds and thousand
may be spoken as such.
 Pro-words: Difficult words or groups within the text of the message may be spelled out using
the phonetic alphabet and should be started with the proword “I spell phonetically” or “Figures
to follow”
 Precedence Prowords
o Flash (Z)
o Immediate (O)
o Priority (P)
o Routine (R)
59
COMMON CORE






108
Read Back: Means to transmit the entire transmission back exactly as you received it.
Say Again: All of your last transmission.
Roger: Means I have received your last transmission satisfactorily.
Over: This is the end of my transmission to you and a response is necessary.
Figures: Numeral or numbers to follow.
I say again: I am repeating transmission or portion indicated.
107.13 Explain Line Of Sight (LOS): [ref. b, ch 1-7; ref. c, glossary]
 The direct wave is that part of the radio wave which travels directly from the transmitting antenna
to the receiving antenna. This part of the wave is limited to the line of sight (LOS) distance
between the transmitting and receiving antennas, plus the small distance added by atmospheric
refraction and diffraction of the wave around the curvature of the Earth. This distance can be
extended by increasing the height of the transmitting antenna, the receiving antenna, or both.
107.14 Discuss the purpose of a retransmission (RETRANS) site: [ref. b, ch 6-10; ref. c]
 HF radios do not require or rely on line of sight as much as VHF radios because operating
frequencies are lower, and power output is greater. The problem is that HF radios are not
organic to small units. To overcome this, the VHF signals must be retransmitted.
 Retransmission stations in aerial platforms can provide the most effective means if they are
available. Organic retransmission is more likely to be used. The antenna should be hidden or
blended in with surroundings. This will help prevent the enemy from using it as a landmark to
“home in” his artillery bombardment. Antennas can be concealed by water towers, existing
civilian antennas, or steeples
OLD.3 Discuss the following terms:
 Encryption
o Encryption is the process of converting intelligible information into an unintelligible form
for transmission
 Access
o Having a “security clearance” means that your are eligible for access to information up
to the level shown.
 Classification
o Information is classed when it requires protection in the interest of National Security.
 Compromise
o Any breach or possible breach of Security or classified material is known as a
compromise and must be dealt with immediately.






60
Need to know
o Having access means that you are eligible for accessing material at a certain
classification level.
Restricted area
Exclusion area
o Where access to the area means access to classified information because the
equipment cannot be covered.
Limited area
o An area with classified information a visitor could gain access to.
Controlled area
 Next to or surrounds an exclusion or limited area. All of these areas are clearly marked by
signs reading “SECURITY AREA – KEEP OUT”
Clearance
 Before a person is allowed access to classified information, he or she must have a security
clearance.
COMMON CORE
108
OLD.5 Define the following terms:
 Minimize
o A condition wherein normal message and telephone traffic is drastically reduced in
order that messages connected with an actual emergency shall not be delayed.
 EFFI- Essential elements of friendly information
o A code that allows us to notify one another of a security breach that has occurred over
the circuit.
 BEADWINDOW
o Term used to identify an EEFI violation. Example: “BEADWINDOW Three” indicates to
the transmitting station that the radio operator has violated security. BEADWINDOW
procedures are incorporated into the OPORD.
OLD.6 Discuss the following with respect to the communication equipment in the TOA:
Table 10 Frequency Band distances
Figure 5 wave ranges

HF
o
o


61
High Frequency 3 – 30 Mhz
The range of the ground wave decreases as frequency increases, and the sky waves are
greatly influenced by ionospheric considerations.
VHF
o
o
Very High Frequency 30 – 300 Mhz
UHF
o
o
Ultra High Frequency 300 Mhz – 3000 Mhz
There is no usable ground wave and only slight refraction of sky waves by the
ionosphere at the lower frequencies. The direct wave provides communications if the
transmitting and receiving antennas are elevated high enough above the surface of the
Earth
The direct wave must be used for all transmissions. Communications are limited to a
short distance beyond the horizon.
COMMON CORE
108
OLD.7 Define the following classification categories: [ref. c, ch. 5]
 Security classifications: Designations are keyed to the anticipated degree of damage to
national security that could result from unauthorized disclosure/compromise.
o Confidential
 Identifiable damage
o Secret
 Serious damage
o Top Secret
 Exceptionally grave damage
OLD.8 Define the term emergency destruction as it applies to: [ref. c, ch. 3]
 Communication equipment
 CMS

COMSEC material that must be destroyed in an emergency is divided into three categories:
Keying material; COMSEC documents; and COMSEC equipment. An emergency plan
consists of both precautionary destruction and complete destruction.
o
o
PRECAUTIONARY DESTRUCTION: When precautionary destruction is ordered,
COMSEC material must be destroyed as follows:
 Keying Material: Superseded keying material must be destroyed first, then
keying material that becomes effective in 1 or 2 months.
 Nonessential Classified COMSEC Documents: This material includes
maintenance, operating, and administrative manuals.
COMPLETE DESTRUCTION: When complete destruction is ordered, COMSEC
material must be destroyed as follows:
 Keying Material: Keying material is always destroyed first in the following order:
superseded, effective, then reserve. Superseded keying material that has been
used to encrypt traffic is the most sensitive of the three categories. If
superseded keying material falls into enemy hands, all past intercepted traffic is
subject to compromise and analysis. Superseded keying material must be
destroyed within 12 hours after supersession. Effective keying material is
destroyed after superseded keying material. Reserve keying material is keying
material that will become effective within the next 30 days. Reserve keying
material is destroyed after effective keying material. Keying material must be
stored in priority order for destruction. Top Secret material must be destroyed
ahead of Secret material, and Secret material destroyed ahead of Confidential
material. This applies to all categories of keying material.
 COMSEC Documents: COMSEC documents are destroyed next. COMSEC
documents include crypto equipment maintenance manuals, operating
instructions, general publications, status publications, CMS-holder lists and
directories. COMSEC documents contain information on the types of crypto
equipments we use, the level of technology we have attained, and the way our
COMSEC operations are organized and conducted.
 COMSEC Equipment: COMSEC equipment is destroyed last. In emergencies,
the immediate goal regarding crypto equipment is to render the equipment
unusable and unrepairable. The operating and technical manuals for crypto
equipments provide details on the techniques for rapid and effective
destruction.
OLD.9 Describe the general characteristics and operator maintenance for AN/PSN-11 Global
Positioning System (GPS). [ref. k, ch. 3]
62
COMMON CORE


108
The AN/PSN-11 Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver is a highly accurate Satellite Signals
Navigation Set (hereafter referred to as PLGR). The PLGR computes accurate position
coordinates, elevation, speed, and time information from signals transmitted by the GPS
satellites. The PLGR selects satellites that are 10 degrees or more above the horizon
(elevation angle) during initial acquisition. If less than four satellites are available at 10
degrees or more, and elevation angle of 0 degree is used for acquisition. The PLGR is
operated stand-alone using prime battery power and integral antenna. It can also be used with
an external power source and external antenna.
The only authorized operator maintenance on the PLGR is the change out of batteries.
OLD.10 Discuss the three methods of communications in the defense area and which is most
dependable. [ref. b, ch. 11]
 Wire (telephone) and messengers
o Normally the primary means of communications in a defense. These two methods are
more secure than radio and provide a better method of secure communications.
o Two or more wire lines should be installed over different routes to connect two units.
This allows communications to be quickly reestablished if one line becomes inoperative
or is discovered by the enemy.
 Visual and sound
o Signals may be used to supplement wire communications, but only when they do not
compromise security.
OLD.11 Discuss the factors that affect the capabilities of radio communications. [ref. b, ch. 11]
 Field radios are for line-of-site communications; any obstruction between the transmitting
station and the receiving station may disrupt or block communication.
 Factors such as a valley, densely wooded areas, towers, low lying areas, and sources of
electrical interference are common obstructions that have an adverse effect on radio
communications.
OLD.12 Explain the purpose and use of the STU III/STE telephone. [ref. d, ch. 1]
 Purpose: To allow secure voice communication when required
 Use: Use as authorized as per unit SOP and equipment requirements.
OLD.13 Discuss the characteristic, shipping, handling, and storage of the following batteries: [ref. e;
ref. l, Group 21]
 All Batteries are considered Hazmat. DO NOT puncture, burn, or expose to high heat. Always
check for leakage and proper battery voltage prior to use. Never leave batteries in equipment
while in storage. When palletized for shipment the boxes are on the outside edges of the
pallet where they can be easily accessed in case of leaks or fire. An MSDS sheet and an
inventory accompany each box. Two person lift usually applies due to weights in excess of
100 pounds.
 NiCad: Nickel Cadmium rechargeable battery
 Lithium: Non-rechargeable long life battery
 Alkaline: Non-rechargeable average life battery
OLD.14 Explain which radios are used with the following antennas:
 OE-254 [ref. i]
o AN/PRC-119
 RF-1912 (TR-72) [ref. h]
o AN/PRC-150
 AS-2259 [ref. h]
o AN/PRC-150
63
COMMON CORE
108
108 WEAPONS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
[b] NAVEDTRA 14324, Gunner’s Mate
[c] Seabee Battle Skills Guide Vol. 1
[d] NTRP 3-07.2.2
[e] Construction Battle Skills Guide, Book 1, All Hands 2005 Edition
[f] TM-SW215-BC-MMO-010, Operator’s and Maintenance Manual for AN/PVS-12A,
Night Vision, Crew Served Weapons
[g] FM 3-22.09, M16A1 and M16A2 Rifle Marksmanship
[h] TM-SW215-B4-MMO-010, Operator’s and Maintenance Manual for AN/PVS-12A, Night Vision,
Individual Weapon
[i] Construction Battle Skills Guide, Book 4, Crew/Team Skills 2005 Edition.
[j] TM 9-1010-230-10 Operators Manual Machine Gun, 40mm, MK19, MOD3
[k] TM 9-1005-213-10 Operators Manual Machine Gun, Cal. 50; Browning M2 Heavy Barrel Ch.1, sec. II
Pg. 1-5
[l] FM 3-22.68
[m] MCWP 3-15.1 Machine Guns and Machine Gunnery_________________________________
108.1 State the four rules of weapon safety. [ref. c, ch. 1]
 Rule 1 – Treat every weapon as if it were loaded.
 Rule 2 – Never point a weapon at anything you do not intend to shoot.
 Rule 3 – keep finger straight and off the trigger until you are ready to fire.
 Rule 4 – Keep weapon on SAFE until you intend to fire.
108.2 Define the four weapon conditions: [ref. c, ch. 1]
 Condition one
o Magazine is inserted, a round must be chambered, and the safety is on.
 Condition two
o Magazine is inserted, a round is chambered, the weapons action is closed, and the
hammer is forward. This condition applies to weapons with external hammers except
for the M9 service pistol.
 Condition three
o Magazine is inserted, chamber is empty, the action is closed and safety is on.
 Condition four
o All ammo is removed, chamber is empty, the action is closed and the safety is on.
108.3 What weapons systems are in the NCF: [ ref. l, ch. 3, ref b, ch. 3]
108.3 Discuss the precautions required when handling a weapon. [ref. b, ch. 3]




Ensure the weapon is safe by clearing it. This will depend on the type of weapon.
In general, make sure the weapon is on safe.
The chamber is empty and no magazine is inserted.
The weapon is pointed in a safe direction.
108.4 Define the following terms associated with the M16A3 and the M9. [ref. a, ch. 3]
 Malfunction
o The failure of a weapon to function satisfactorily, usually because of excess friction
caused by dirt, improper lubrication or carbon buildup.
o Immediate action- you must stop and clean the weapon to correct this problem
 Misfire
64
COMMON CORE
108
o


108.5








A complete failure to fire, NOT a delay in firing that may be caused by a faulty firing
mechanism or a faulty element in the propelling charge explosive train.
o Immediate action
 Strike the forward assist to be sure the extractor has engaged a round
 Tap upward on the magazine to ensure it is fully seated.
 Pull the charging handle to the rear.
 If round is ejected, release handle, strike forward assist and attempt to fire.
 If round is not ejected, check for a round in the chamber, if it is clear, release
handle, strike forward assist and attempt to fire.
 If a round is stuck in the chamber it must be removed before attempting to
reload/ re-chamber.
Cook off
o The functioning of any or all of the explosive components of a cartridge chambered in a
hot weapon due to the heat from continual firing of that weapon
o Immediate action
 Attempt to remove the cartridge before ten seconds elapse.
 If a cartridge is chambered in a hot weapon and can neither be fired or
removed, keep the weapon pointed in a safe direction.
 Allow for a minimum of 15 minutes to elapse before taking any further action.
Stoppage
o Any interruption in the cycle of functioning caused by faulty action of the weapon or
ammunition.
o Immediate action
 Strike the forward assist to be sure the extractor has engaged a round.
 Tap upward on the magazine to ensure it is fully seated.
 Pull the charging handle to the rear.
 If round is ejected, release handle, strike forward assist and attempt to fire.
 If round is not ejected, check for round in the chamber, if it is clear, released
handle, strike forward assist and attempt to fire.
 If a round is stuck in the chamber it must be removed before attempting to
reload/re-chamber.
State the eight steps of operation in a firing cycle. [ref. b, ch. 3]
Feeding: the feeding action places a round in the receiver just to the rear of the chamber.
Chambering: takes place as the moving bolt strips the round and forces it into the chamber.
Locking: holds the bolt in the forward position for a short period of time to prevent the loss of
gas pressure.
Firing: the firing pin actually strikes the primer of the cartridge
Unlocking: after the round is fired, the bolt unlocks and moves rearward.
Extracting: the process of pulling the empty case back out of the chamber. As the bolt moves
rearward extraction occurs.
Ejecting: as the casing is extracted, ejection occurs as it is thrown out of the weapon.
Cocking: the retraction of the firing mechanism against spring pressure so that there will be
sufficient energy to fire the next cartridge.
108.6 Explain the differences between semiautomatic and automatic operation. [ref. a,ch.3]
 A semiautomatic weapon unlocks, extracts, ejects, cocks and reloads automatically. The trigger
must be pulled each time to fire a round.
 An automatic weapon unlocks, extracts, ejects, cocks and reloads automatically. An automatic
weapon will fire as long as the trigger is pulled and rounds are available to fire.
65
COMMON CORE
108
108.7








Define the following terms: [ref. a]
Trajectory: The flight path the bullet takes from the weapon to the target.
Breech: The rear end of the barrel.
Bore: The actual hole in the barrel. It may be rifled or not.
Chamber: The enlarged part of the bore at the breech that holds the cartridge.
Muzzle: The front or forward end of the barrel.
Muzzle velocity: The speed at which the bullet travels when it leaves the muzzle.
Maximum range: The greatest distance a round will travel
Maximum effective range: The greatest distance at which a weapon may be expected to fire
accurately to inflict damage or casualty.
108.8





Discuss small arms ammunition by using color codes:
Orange or red: Tracer rounds
Violet: Blank rounds
Black: Armor piercing
Aluminum: Armor piercing, incendiary.
Green: Standard ball ammunition
108.9 State the maximum range, maximum effective range, employment, rates of fire, and
types of ammunition of the following weapons: [ref i]


66
9mm pistol
o semi-automatic
o Magazine fed
o Recoil operated
o Double action or single action firing pistol
o Current issue sidearm
o Capabilities/Characteristics
o Length: 8.54in
o Weight: 2.12lbs
o Weight fully loaded (15rnd mag): 2.54lbs
o Magazine capacity: 15 rounds
o Muzzle velocity: 1230/fps
o Max effective range: 50m
o Ammunition: fires 9mm Ball ammunition
o Safety Features
 The M9 pistol has only ONE safety.
 It has THREE SAFETY FEATURES.
 Ambidextrous safety: Allows for safe operation of the pistol by right and
left handed users. Lowers the hammer safely without causing an
accidental discharge
 Firing Pin Block: Prevents any motion of the firing pin and is only
overcome by pulling the trigger
 Half Cock Notch: Prevents accidental discharge. If the cocked hammer
should fall forward due to a mechanical failure, this would catch on the
sear before the hammer would strike the firing pin.
M-16 rifle
o Lightweight, Gas operated, Air cooled, Magazine fed, Shoulder fired, Semi-automatic
or fully automatic
o Modes of fire
COMMON CORE
108

o
o
o
o
Semiautomatic Fire Mode: When a single shot is fired the trigger must be pulled
each time.
 Automatic Fire mode: Rifle will continue to fire as long as the trigger is held
back
Selector Level
 Safe Position: Rifle will not fire
 Semi position: The trigger must be pulled each shot
 Auto: Rifle will continue to fire as long as the trigger is held back
Capabilities/Characteristics
 Length w/flash suppressor: 39in
 Length of barrel w/flash suppressor: 21in
 Weight: 7.8lbs
 Weight fully loaded (30 round ma): 8.79lbs
 Magazine capacity: 20/30 rounds
 Muzzle velocity: 3100/fps
 Max range: 3534m
 Max effective range: Point Target 550 and Area Target 800m
Rates of Fire
 Sustained: 12 to 15 rounds per minute
 Rapid: 150 to 200 rounds per minute
 Cyclic: 700 to 800 rounds per minute
Ammunition
 5.56 Ball: Standard round
 5.56 Tracer: Used to mark targets or cause incendiary effects
 5.56 Blank: Training round
 5.56 Dummy: Totally inert training
The U.S. Army M16A1 was essentially the same weapon as the M16 with the addition of a forward assist and
corresponding notches in the bolt carrier.
The development of the M16A2 rifle was originally requested by the United States Marine Corps as a result of
[43]
M16A2 the USMC's combat experience in Vietnam with the XM16E1 and M16A1.
The Marines were the first
branch of the U.S. Armed Forces to adopt the M16A2 in the early/mid 1980s with the United States
Army following suit in the late 1980s
The M16A3 was a fully automatic variant of the M16A2 adopted in small numbers around the time of the
[45]
introduction of the M16A2, primarily by the U.S. Navy for use by SEAL, Seabee, and Security units.
It
features the M16A1 trigger group providing "safe", "semi-automatic", and "fully automatic" modes.
The M16A4, now standard issue for front-line U.S. Marine Corps and some U.S. Army units, replaces the
combination fixed carry handle/rear iron sight with a MIL-STD-1913 Picatinny rail, allowing for the rifle to be
[45]
equipped with a carry handle and/or most military and consumer scopes or sighting systems.
Military issue
rifles are also equipped with a Knight's Armament Company M5 RAS handguard, allowing vertical grips, lasers,
tactical lights, and other accessories to be attached, coining the designation M16A4 MWS (or Modular Weapon
System) in U.S. Army field manuals.
108.10 Discuss loading/unloading procedures for the following weapons:


67
9mm pistol
o Keep safety in “safe” position until ready to fire.
o Keep muzzle down range and clear of all troops
o Before loading, make sure bore, chamber, and ammunition are clean and dry.
o Hold the pistol at the raised pistol position, or place the rifle butt against the thigh
o Then, remove the magazine by pressing the magazine catch or release button.
o To make absolutely certain the chamber is empty, pull back the slide or bolt and
inspect the chamber and verify visually. If it is dark, feel to check. Opening the slide or
bolt will eject any round that may have been in the chamber.
M-16 rifle
o Loading
COMMON CORE
108



o
Ensure weapon is on safe
With the bolt locked to the rear, insert a magazine
Release the bolt catch and allow the bolt to go forward. This chambers a round
from the magazine.
 The weapon is now loaded and in condition one.
Un-loading
 Ensure the rifle is on safe
 After the last shot the bolt should lock to the rear. If so, just remove the
magazine and inspect the chamber.
 If the bolt does not lock to the rear, pull the charging handle rearward and lock
the bolt rearward using the bolt catch.
 Repeat the second step to complete the unloading process
108.11 Describe and discuss the six types of grenades: [ref. a, ch. 12]
 Fragmentation
o M67
o Grenades designed to inflict personnel casualties and damage to light equipment by
projecting high velocity fragments from the detonated grenade case
o Kill radius of 5 meters
o The effective casualty-producing radius is about 15 meters
o 4-5 second delay fuze.
 Illumination
o Used to illuminate terrain in night time operations
o Once pin is pulled, GRENADE MUST BE THROWN!
o Grenades used mainly to light up the terrain.
o The MK 1 is the only illuminating grenade currently available.
o It provides about 55,000 candlepower for a period of 25 seconds.
 Chemical
o Used for incendiary, screening, signaling, training, and riot control purposes
o Grenades that are chemical filled munitions designed to be thrown by the individual or
projected from the service rifle using a special adapter.
o ABC-M25A2, riot control hand grenade is the most commonly used.
 Filled with a type of tear gas chemical that causes irritation and watering eyes.
 Has a 2 second delay fuse.
 Incendiary
o AN-M14 incendiary Thermite grenade is used to ignite combustible materials and to
destroy all types of equipment.
o This TH grenade is cylindrical in shape and weights 32 ounces.
o Contains filler of 26.5 ounces of Thermite mixture
o It uses an igniting delay fuse that sets fire to the Thermite
o The Thermite burns for 40 seconds at a temperature of about 4,300 deg F
o Can ignite combustible materials, burn through ¼” steel and welds together iron
machinery parts.
 Smoke
o Grenades that are cylindrical in shape and weigh about 27 ounces.
o They can be thrown about 40 yards with an effective casualty radius of nearly 30 yards
 M15 WP grenade
 M34 WP grenade 25 meter effective casualty radius
 M8 Smoke grenade produce red, green or yellow smoke for 1-1.5 minutes.
o
 Practice/training (M57)
o Used to train personnel in the care, handling, and use of grenades prior to using actual
service grenades.
68
COMMON CORE
108
o

These grenades are used for training personnel in the care, handling, and use of hand
grenades before using service grenades.
o Practice grenades simulate the functioning of service grenades to provide realism in
training.
Concussion
o MK3A2 - is designed to produce casualties during close combat while minimizing
danger to friendly personnel. The grenade is also used for concussion effects in
enclosed areas, for blasting, and for demolition tasks. The shock waves (overpressure)
produced by this grenade when used in enclosed areas are greater than those
produced by the fragmentation grenade. It is, therefore, very effective against enemy
soldiers located in bunkers, buildings, and fortified areas.
o 8 Ounces TNT
o Effective casualty radius of 2 meters in open areas.
108.12 Discuss hand grenade safety procedures. [ref. a, ch. 12]
 All personnel handling casualty producing grenades must wear proper protection
 Never attempt to de-fuse hand grenades
 Do not remove the safety pin until ready to throw
 Do not attach grenades to clothing or equipment
 Riot control grenades should not be thrown within 5 meters of personnel
 Smoke grenades should not be used in closed areas
 Wait 5 minutes before approaching a dud
 Wait 30 minutes before approaching a chemical grenade
108.13 Discuss the characteristics and purpose of the Claymore mine. [ref. a, ch. 12]
 A directional, fixed-fragmentation mine that is designed primarily for use against massed
infantry attacks
 It is equipped with a fixed plastic, slit type sight, adjustable legs and two detonator wells




69
Placement
o This mine should be positioned so as to afford all friendly personnel, within 100 meters
to the rear and sides of the mine, the opportunity to take adequate cover.
Arming
o After the M18A1 mine is positioned and properly aimed, it is armed by first opening the
blasting cap assembly and unrolling the wire from either the firing position or the mine.
o The wire is secured by wrapping a few turns of wire around a leg of the mine and
burying it, if possible.
Safety requirements
o Before attaching the firing device directly, the circuit should be checked for continuity
with the test set provided to ensure that the mine will function at the desired time
o The firing device has a safety bail with two positions
o In the upper (safe) position, it acts as a block between the firing handle and the
generator.
o In the lower (fire) position, it allows the generator to be activated.
o The instructions provided with the M7 bandoleer should be carefully followed by
anyone using these mines.
Range/Coverage
o When detonated, the M18A1 mine will project steel spheres over a 60 degree fan
shaped pattern approximately 6 feet high and 50 meters wide to an optimum effective
range of 50 meters
o 100m is moderately effective
o 250m is dangerous
COMMON CORE

108
o 100m behind the mine is the danger area
Method of firing
o M18A1 mine can be in either an uncontrolled or a controlled role. An uncontrolled
mine is essentially a booby-trap. This use by Seabees is not authorized. In a
controlled role, the operator detonates the mine as the enemy approaches within the
killing zone
o By using either an electrical or a non-electrical firing system, the operator can control
detonation.
o In almost all cases, mines employed by Seabees will be fired electrically with the M57
firing device.
108.14 Describe the characteristics of the 7.62mm M240B machine gun. [ref. l ch.3]
 Air-cooled, Belt-fed, Gas-operated, Fully Automatic weapon, Fires from open bolt Position and
is Crew served
o Length................................49 inches
o Weight ...............................27.6 pounds
o Maximum range ................3,725 meters
108.15 Discuss loading/unloading procedures of the 7.62mm M240B machine gun. [ref. ref. l
ch.3]
 The M240B machine gun is loaded from the closed bolt position. The M240B is fired,
unloaded, and cleared from the open bolt position. The safety must be placed on “F” before
the bolt can be pulled to the rear. Before belted ammunition can be used, it must be linked with
the double link at the open end of the bandoleer. It must be free of dirt and corrosion.
 Loading – Two methods, raised cover and closed cover
o Raised cover method – preferred method
 Gunner ensure the bolt is to the rear and the safety lever is on safe (S)
 Gunner raises the cover
 Team leader places the first round of the bandoleer and places it over the feed
aperture
 Gunner then closes the cover and places the safety lever on fire (F)
 Weapon is now loaded and ready to fire
o Closed cover method – alternate method
 Gunner ensures bolt is forward safety lever is on fire (F) and the cover remains
closed
 Team leader takes a bandoleer of ammunition and inserts the first round into the
feedtray
70
COMMON CORE



108
The weapon is now loaded
Gunner pull bolt to the rear and slides cocking handle forward – The weapon is now
ready to fire
Unloading
o Gunner ensures bolt is to the rear and the safety is on safe (S)
o Gunner raises the cover
o Team leader removes the ammunition and links from the feedtray
o Gunner then raises the feedtray and visually inspects the receiver and chamber to
ensure no rounds remain
o Once the feedtray, receiver and chamber have been cleared of all ammunition and
links the weapon is considered to be unloaded
108.16 State the following capabilities/ nomenclature of the 7.62mm M240B machine gun:
Proper employment [ref. l ch.3]
o Analyze the operation order using METT-T SALUTE DRAW-D and KOCOA
o Consider the characteristics of the machine guns to be employed
o Consider employment of the machine guns in defense
o Consider employment of machine guns in the offense
o Direct the employment of the machine guns
o Place CSW per PICMDEEP –
 Pairs,
 Interlocking Fields of fire
 Coordination of Fire
 Mutual Support
 Defilade
 Enfilade
 Entrenchment
 Protection
FPL/PDF [ref. l ch.5]
 Assignment of a Final Protective Line (FPL)
i. Position machine guns to the flanks to provide fire across the unit's front.
ii. Ensure the position provides interlocking grazing fires within an assigned sector
iii. Ensure that FPL dead space can be covered by alternate weapons (munitions,
M203 grenade launchers, mortars, claymore mines)
 Assignment of a Principal Direction of Fire (PDF)
i. Ensure the position covers likely avenues of approach and obstacles
Maximum effective range [ref. l ch.3]
 Maximum effective range: 1,100 meters with tripod and T&E
i. Area
1. Tripod..................................................1,100 meters
2. Bipod...................................................800 meters
ii. Point
1. Tripod..................................................800 meters
2. Bipod...................................................600 meters
3. Suppression...............................................1,800 meters
Safeties M240B [ref. l ch.3]
 The safety mechanism is located on the pistol grip just behind the trigger well. When the
safety is pushed to the right, the letter “S” is visible indicating the weapon is on safe. When
pushed to the left, the letter “F” is visible on the safety indicating the weapon is on fire. The
safety can only be engaged when the bolt is in the rear position. On the “S” position, the
bolt cannot be released to go forward
71
COMMON CORE
108
Ammunition types
o 7.62 mm ball
o 7.62 mm tracer
o 7.62 mm armor-piercing (not authorized for training)
o 7.62 mm blank
o 7.62 mm dummy
Rates of fire [ref. l ch.3]
o Sustained ..............................100 rounds per minute fired in 6- to 9-round bursts and 4
to 5 seconds between bursts (barrel change every 10 minutes)
o Rapid......................................200 rounds per minute fired in 10- to 13-round bursts and
2 to 3 seconds between bursts (barrel change every 2 minutes)
o Cyclic ………………………….650 to 950 rounds per minute in continuous bursts
(barrel change every minute)
Types of mounts [ref. l ch.3]
o M122A1 Tripod: provides a stable mount for the M240B, and it permits a higher degree
of accuracy and control. The tripod is recommended for marksmanship training and
defensive employment. The M122A1 tripod consists of the tripod and flex-mount with
T&E mechanism. Weight of M122A1 tripod with/flex-mount is 20 pounds.
o Bipod Assembly: used to fire from the prone position. The butt stock in conjunction with
the gunner’s non-firing hand provides support for the weapon when firing in the bipod
mode. The gas cylinder holds the bipod in place.
108.17 Name the members of a gun team and state what they are responsible for carrying into
a combat situation. [ref. a, p. 1-17]
 Team leader
o Usually a PO2, responsible for effective employment of the gun
o Responsible for changing the barrels during firing
o Carries spare barrel kit, M122 tripod, one bandoleer of ammo and armed with a 9mm
pistol
 Gunner
o Usually a PO3. Actually fires and maintains the gun
o Carries the gun, one bandoleer of ammo and armed with a 9mm pistol
 Ammo 1
o Usually a CN, acts as the supply person for the team
o Caries one box of ammo, spare barrel case with T&E. Armed with an M16
 Ammo 2
o Usually a CA
o Carries two boxes of ammo. Armed with an M16
108.18 Describe the characteristics of the MK 19 40mm machine gun. [ref. j]
 Air-cooled, Belt-fed, Blow-back operated, Automatic weapon, Fires from open bolt position and
is crew-served
108.19 Discuss loading/unloading procedures of the MK 19 40mm machine gun. [ref. j]
 Loading
o Keep the weapon pointed down range
o Make sure the bolt is forward. If not take the weapon off safe and ease the charging
handles forward
o Open the cover
o Insert the first round through the feed throat
o Place the first round into the feeder. Female link first
o Push the round across the first pawl
72
COMMON CORE

108
o Move the slide assembly to the left
o Close the cover
o Unlock and grasp the charging handles and charge weapon
Un-loading
o Place weapon on safe
o Open cover
o Remove remaining rounds and inspect chamber
o Once clear, close cover
o Place weapon on fire and use charging handles to “ride” bolt forward or press trigger
sending bolt forward
108.20 State the following capabilities/nomenclature:
a. Proper employment [ref m, ch. 6, sec. I]
o Conduct a leader's reconnaissance of the assigned area.
o Consider placing firing positions in areas where the mission can be accomplished.
o Look for mounted firing positions.
o Choose dismounted firing positions when the terrain prevents vehicles from moving
into position or if the vehicle cannot be concealed.
o Identify firing positions.
o Move vehicle into position
o Ensure that the machine guns are properly laid.
o Ensure that the firing positions are properly prepared and occupied
Ensure that range cards are prepared for each position.
b. FPL/PDF [ref m, ch. 6, sec. I]
o NOTE: The MK19 heavy machine gun does not fire an FPL.
o Assign a Principal Direction of Fire (PDF)
 Assign a PDF only when the terrain does not allow for effective FPL fires.
 Ensure the PDF covers the most likely avenues of approach.
 NOTES: The PDF may fall within the sector of fire or comprise one of its
boundaries.
o Location of machine guns must be changed daily/nightly or whenever needed.
c. Arming range [ref. j]
o M383 HE round: 18 to 36 meters
o M918 TP round: 18 to 30 meters
d. Maximum effective range (area target) [ref. j] 2212 meters
e. Maximum effective range (point target)] [ref. j] 1500 meters
f. Rate of fire [ref. j] 325 to 375 rounds per minute
g. Safety [ref. j] Thumb switch with “Safe” and “Fire” positions
h. Ammunition types [ref. j]
o M383 HE: High explosive, designed to inflict personnel casualties. Arming distance of
18 to 36 meters. 15 meter casualty radius
o M430 HEDP: High explosive, dual purpose
o M385E4 / M385A1: Training Practice with propellant. Maximum range 2200 meters
108.21 Describe the characteristics of the .50 caliber M2 machine gun. [ref. k, ch I, sec II, p. 1-5]
 Air-cooled, Belt-fed, Recoil-operated, Can be set for automatic or semi automatic fire, and is
crew served
 The weapon has no safeties
108.22 Discuss loading / unloading procedures of the .50 caliber M2 machine gun.. [ref. k, ch I,
sec. II, p. 1-5]
 Loading automatic mode
o Make sure the gun is clear
73
COMMON CORE


108
o Close the bolt
o Close feed cover
o Lock down the bolt latch release
o Insert ammo
o Cock the gun (the gun is now “half-cocked”)
o Re-cock the gun (the gun is now “fully cocked”)
Loading semi-automatic mode
o Make sure the gun is clear
o Close the bolt
o Close feed cover
o Rotate bolt latch release lock in the up position to the right
o Insert the ammo
o Cock the gun (the gun is now “half-cocked”)
o Re-cock the gun (the gun is now “fully cocked”)
o To fire another round you must push the bolt release allowing the bolt to go home
Un-loading
o Place the gun in single shot mode
o Pull the slide handle to the rear and lock bolt rearward
o Open the feed cover
o Clear all remaining links or rounds
o Inspect chamber insuring it is clear
o Press the bolt latch release and ride the bolt forward
o Close the feed cover and pull the bolt to the rear
108.23 State the following capabilities / nomenclature of the .50 caliber M2 machine gun.
a. Proper employment [ref m, ch. 6, sec I]
o Conduct a leader's reconnaissance of the assigned area.
o Consider placing firing positions in areas where the mission can be accomplished.
o Look for mounted firing positions.
o Choose dismounted firing positions when the terrain prevents vehicles from moving
into position or if the vehicle cannot be concealed.
o Identify firing positions.
o Move vehicle into positions.
o Ensure that the machine guns are properly laid.
o Ensure that the firing positions are properly prepared and occupied. If you must use a
hide position, perform the following steps.
o Ensure that range cards are prepared for each position
b. FPL/PDF [ref m, ch. 6, sec I]
o FPF
 Ensure that the FPL achieves the maximum flanking fire.
 Ensure that the FPL obtains the maximum grazing fire. Grazing fire should
parallel the expected long axis of the enemy assault waves.
 Ensure interlocking fires are used to cover any gaps in the FPL and to provide
mutual support between adjacent units.
 Employ obstacles to slow down the enemy when reaching the FPL, if possible.
o PDF
 Assign a PDF only when the terrain does not allow for effective FPL fires.
 Ensure the PDF covers the most likely avenues of approach
c. Maximum range [ref k, ch. 1, sec II, p. 1-9] 6800 meters (M2 Ball)
d. Maximum effective range [ref k, ch. 1, sec II, p. 1-9] 1800 meters
e. Direction of feed [ref k, ch. 1, sec II, p. 1-9]
 Load so double end loop on ammo belt clicks into the feedway.
74
COMMON CORE
108
f. Rates of fire [ref k, ch. 1, sec II, p. 1-9]
o Sustained: 40 rounds (or less) per minute
o Rapid: 40 rounds (or more) per minute
o Cyclic: 450 – 550 rounds per minute
108.24 Discuss setting headspace and timing on the .50 caliber machine gun. [ref. k, ch. 2, sec
III, p. 2-39]
 Head space
o Distance between the bolt face and the base of the seated cartridge.
o Correct when:
 Recoiling groups are fully forward
 No independent rearward movement between the bolt, barrel and barrel
extension
o Must be checked and set before the gun is fired
o When barrel is replaced
o When correct setting is in doubt
 Headspace gauge
o Tool used to check and set headspace
o Has a “GO – NO GO” reading
 Headspace adjustment
o Insert the “GO” side of the gauge between the bolt and rear of the barrel (T-slot)
o The gauge should enter freely up to the center ring
o Remove the gauge and place the “NO-GO” side in the T-slot
o If the “NO-GO” side does not enter, the headspace is set correctly
 Headspace too tight
o The “GO” side of the gauge cannot enter freely
o Pull back on the charging handle
o While holding it back, unscrew the barrel one notch (click)
o Ease the bolt forward
o Recheck the headspace with the gauge
 Headspace too loose
o If it is too loose the “NO-GO” side of the gauge will enter freely
o To adjust if follow the same procedures as if it were too tight, but tighten the barrel
 Timing
o Ensures that firing takes place when the recoiling parts are between .020 and .116
inches out of the battery (fully forward)
 Correct when:
 Recoiling parts are locked together
 Firing takes place just before the recoiling parts are in the battery
 The gun fires on the “FIRE” gauge and WILL NOT on the “NO-FIRE”
gauge
o Timing adjustment
 Check with the “FIRE” (.020 in) and “NO-FIRE” (.11 in) gauges
 Must be checked and/or set each time headspace is adjusted and whenever
timing is questionable
o Timing adjustment steps
 Check headspace first
 Ensure gun is cocked and bolt is forward
 Raise the extractor
 Retract the bolt far enough to insert the “FIRE” gauge
 Place it between the extension and the trunnion block
 Allow the barrel extension to close on the gauge
75
COMMON CORE
108


o
o
108.25





Depress the trigger, the firing pin should release
Retract the bolt far enough to remove the “FIRE” gauge, cocking the gun and
allow the bolt to go forward
 Retract the bolt far enough to insert the “NO-FIRE” gauge, place it in the same
position
 Depress the trigger, the firing pin should not release
Timing late
 The firing pin will not release when the “FIRE” gauge is in place. If this happens
perform the following
 Remove “FIRE” gauge
 Remove backplate assembly
 Locate and turn the trigger bar adjusting nut one notch to the right
 Reinstall the backplate assembly
 Reinsert the “FIRE” gauge and test again
Timing early
 The firing pin will release when the “NO-FIRE” gauge is in place IF this happens
perform the following:
 Perform the same steps as if it were late except turn the trigger bar
adjusting nut on the notch to the left.
Describe the characteristics of the 40mm M203 grenade launcher. [ref. i]
Light weight, Single shot, Breech loaded, Pump action, Shoulder fired weapon Attaches to the
M16 rifle
Length of Launcher: 15 5/16 in
Total weight unloaded: 3 lbs.
Total weight loaded: 3.5 lbs.
Total weight with M16: 11 lbs
108.26 State the following capabilities/nomenclature of the 40mm M203 grenade launcher.: [ref.
i]
a. Proper employment
o Place the weapon in condition 4
o Ensure that the M203 grenade launcher is assembled and functioning for firing.
o Select the correct ammunition.
o Place the weapon in condition 4.
o Use proper firing techniques.
o Field zero the M203 grenade launcher.
o Estimate range to target.
o Respond to fire commands.
o Engage targets effectively.
o Place the weapon in condition 4.
b. Ammunition type
o HE round
 Designed to inflict personnel casualties. 5 meter casualty radius with a danger
radius of 30 meters. Arms within 14 meters to 27 meters.
o HE air burst
 Lands on the deck and bounces up 2 meters to explode. Arms within 14 meter
to 27 meters.
o HEDP
 High explosive, can penetrate 2” of steel. 5 meter casualty radius
o TP Training rounds with flash signature. Danger radius of 20 meters
c. Maximum effective range (area target): 350m
d. Maximum effective range (point target): 150 m
76
COMMON CORE
108
e. Maximum range: 400m
 M203 Loading
o Press barrel latch and slide the barrel forward until the barrel stop is engaged
o Insert casing into chamber
o Slide barrel assembly sharp rearward until barrel locks
o Move safety rearward.
 M203 Unloading
o Press barrel latch and move barrel forward
o Expended casing is automatically extracted and ejected
108.27 Describe the characteristics of the M500 12-gauge shotgun. [ref. h, p. R3-19]
 Manually operated, Single shot Magazine feed (tubular) Pump action, Shoulder fired weapon
 Ammunition type: 12 gauge, 2 – 2 ¾” in 00 buck, military round
 Max Effective Range: 50 meters
108.28 Discuss loading/unloading procedures of the M500 12-gauge shotgun. [ref. h, p. R3-20]
 Single load
o Ensure the weapon is on safe
o Press the action lock lever and slide the barrel (fore-end) rearward
o Insert round into the barrel chamber
o Slide the barrel closed
o Weapon is now loaded
 Magazine load
o Ensure weapon is on safe
o Slide barrel (fore-end) forward
o Insert round into the magazine
o Weapon is now loaded without a round in the chamber
o Open and close barrel to chamber a round
 Unloading
 Open barrel to eject round to unload
108.29 State the following capabilities/nomenclature of the M500 12-gauge shotgun: [ref. h, p.
R3-20]
a. Length: 39”
b. Safeties: Single on top (M-870 is on side)
c. Ammunition type: 12 gauge, 2 – 2 ¾” in 00 buck, military round
d. Effective range: 50 meters
108.30 Describe the use and purpose of the range card as it relates to each weapon system.
[ref. n, ch 4, ref i]
 Cards are the basis for the fire plan at the company level. Each crew served weapon will have
one
o All supporting fires, security sectors and defensive coordination are planned using the
machine gun’s fire as the base from which to build
o Two cards are prepared, one for the gun and the other goes to higher HQ
o Cards should be passed on to relieving units
o Patrols can use your card to locate FPL’s and identify dead space
o Cards must be neat and prepared using universal format
 Weapons symbols
o Single dot for the gun and a solid arrow extending out along the FPL or PDF.

77
Magnetic Orientation Line and Location Grid Coordinates
COMMON CORE
108
o





A means for other to positively locate you gun position. The line is drawn from a prominent
terrain feature that is located behind friendly lines. The grid coordinates are recorded next
to the dot in the machine gun symbol
Sector Limits
o Drawn as broken lines ending in arrowheads. If using an FPL only one sector limit will be
drawn because one will be the same as the FPL.
Grazing fire
o If an FPL is used, a heavy shaded are is drawn along the inside of the FPL. This will
indicate the limits of grazing fire obtainable. Any dead space is shown by breaks in the
shading. Record the near and far limits of the dead space in meters or record the range
next to the ends of the shaded areas
Terrain features
o Draw only those terrain features that significantly add to the clarity of the range card. If the
feature is drawn, draw it to the correct perspective.
Location of friendly troops or equipment
o Draw any friendly positions or equipment that is either in or near the sector limits of the
machine gun
Targets
o Draw targets to perspective and label then with a number
o The number one target will either by the FPL or the left sector limit
o If the FPL is on the right sector limit, number all other targets sequentially from right to left
o All other times number from left to right
o One method is to record data directly on the sketch along the leading line to the target
o The other method is to use the data block of the card
108.31 Discuss the integration of the weapons systems into an overall defensive fire plan. [ref.
n, ch 4, ref i]
 Automatic Rifleman
o M16 rifle, backbone of the defense of the squad. Positioned first by the squad leader.
The remainder of the fire team is positioned around the AR.
 Rifleman
o M16 rifle, positioned so they can cover the entire fire team sector. The position must
provide support and protection for the AR
 Grenadier
o M203 grenade launcher, positioned to cover dead space in the defense
 M240B
o Support the rifleman in the offense and defense. Provide heavy volumes of controlled
fire. Provide FPF’s. Cover likely avenues of approach. Provide grazing fire.
 M2 .50 Cal Machine Gun
o Provide protection for motorized movement. Destroy lightly armored vehicles. Defend
against low-flying hostile aircraft
 MK19 40mm Grenade Launcher
o Used to provide direct and indirect firing. Role is similar to the M60E3 and M2.
 AT-4
o Used against armored personnel carriers. Can be used to disable a battle tank
(mobility kill) if struck properly.
108.32 Discuss the use and purpose of the following Night Observation Devices (NOD): [ref. c]
a. AN/PVS-7C (night goggles)
o Hand held or head mounted night vision system that enables walking, driving, weapon
firing, short range surveillance, map reading and vehicle maintenance in both
moonlight and starlight.
78
COMMON CORE
108
o Range- min 9.8”
b. AN/PVS-12A (M240B, M16, M14)
o The AN/PVS-12A, Night Vision Individual Weapon Sight System provides the infantry
and support weapons with high performance observation, target acquisition and aiming
capabilities during night operations. The Sight is capable of focusing on targets from 82
feet to infinity. The AN/PVS-12A is submersible, which permits the transportation of
the AN/PVS-12A unprotected in two (2) atmospheres (66 feet) of seawater. The Sight
is a high performance night vision system for nighttime target acquisition. The Sight
uses a GEN III, 18 mm image intensifier tube configured in accordance with MIL-I49428. Mounting hardware, which can easily be changed to other type mounts, are
provided for attachment to the M16 and M14 Rifles
c. AN/PVS-20 (MK19, M2)
o The AN/PVS-20, Night Vision Individual Weapon Sight System provides the infantry
and support weapons with high performance observation, target acquisition and aiming
capabilities during night operations. The Sight is capable of focusing on targets from 82
feet to infinity. The AN/PVS-20 can be used on the M2 .5 Cal. Machine Gun, and Mk38
Mod 0 25mm Machine Gun System. Mounting brackets and reticule cells are available
for each type of weapon. The Sight may also be used as a tripod mounted observation
device.
108.33 Explain the various class of fire: [ref. e, pp. 3-30 thru 3-31]
a. Grazing
o Not less than 1m above and no higher than 68” above the ground. Can exist for 700m
over level or evenly sloping ground
b. Plunging
o Fire that strikes the ground from above at a considerable level. Beaten zone is
considered the danger space.
c. Overhead
o Fire delivered over the heads of troops. Usually plunging fire overhead, but can also
be over the heads of troops in fighting positions.
d. Fixed
o For targets requiring only one aiming point. Continuous as long as target remains in
the zone of fire
e. Traversing
o Distributed in width by changing the horizontal direction of the gun. Firing a burst each
time the gun changes direction
f. Searching
o Distributed in depth by changing the elevation of the gun. Used against deep targets,
firing a burst each time elevation changes
g. Combined searching and traversing
o Distributed in width & depth by changing the elevation direction of the gun.
h. Swinging traverse
o Delivered against targets to wide to cover the traversing hand wheel. Also used on
targets moving so rapidly across the gunner’s front they cannot maintain effective fire
using the traversing hand wheel . Cannot be fired from bipod or vehicles.
i. Free
o Delivered from the tripod mount against targets requiring rapid and major changes in
direction and elevation. Can also be used from a vehicle mount when the target cannot
be covered adequately by aiming points. Cannot be fired from bipod mount.
79
COMMON CORE
80
108
COMMON CORE
109
109 GENERAL MILITARY TACTICS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[[a] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
[b] NAVEDTRA 14235, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 2
[c] Blue Jackets’ Manual, 23rd Edition
[d] Convoy Operations Hand Book MCRP 4-11.3F
[e] Construction Battalion Battle Skills Guide, Book 1
[f] Construction Battalion Battle Skills Guide, Book 2
[g] Construction Battalion Battle Skills Guide, Book 3
[h] Naval Warfare Publication 3-07
[i] JP-1 Doctrine for the Armed Forces U.S. (May 2007) ch.1 _______
109.1 Describe the key components of a standard battle load. [ref. a, ch. 2]
 Fighting load carrying equipment
o Pistol belt
o Suspenders
o Field pack
o Two ammo pouches
o Canteen cover
o Entrenching tool (E-tool) cover
o Bayonet or K-bar scabbard
o First Aid Kit
 Bivouac equipment
o Canteen and cup
o First Aid packet
o E-tool
o Bayonet or K-bar
o Mess kit
o Poncho & liner
o Shelter half
 Protective equipment
o Hat and mosquito net
o Helmet and liner
o Camouflage cover
 Special issue equipment
o Items that are not essential for a combat load, extra protection or comfort
o Flack jacket
o Sleeping bag
o Sleeping mat
o Cot w/insect bar frame
o Insect bar
109.2 Describe the construction and the elements of the following dug-in emplacements: [ref. a,
ch. 7]
 Hasty/skirmisher’s position
o Shallow pit that provides limited protection while firing from the prone position
o Made quickly by scraping soil to build a shallow ridge, or parapet, between the rifleman
and the enemy
o Trench is body-length
 An improved one man fighting position
o Made as small as possible to present smallest target to the enemy
o Constructed with a water sump, firing step, grenade sump and parapet
81
COMMON CORE
109
o

Built as wide as the occupants shoulders, and as tall as the occupant standing on the firing
step
o Provides protection form tanks passing over
An improved two man fighting position
o Essentially two, one-person positions
o Close proximity to buddy provides security
o Allows one to rest while others sleeps
o Since the position is longer than a one-person position, it provides less protection from
tanks, bombing, strafing and shelling.
109.3 Explain the characteristics of the following: [ref. a, ch, 7]
o Camouflage
 General rules
o Take advantage of all available natural concealment
o Camouflage by altering the form, shadow, texture, and color of objects
o Camouflage against both ground and air observations
o Camouflage in constant and continuous
 Fighting position
o Before beginning construction, not the terrain and vegetation. The goal is to camouflage
the position to this same appearance.
o Obtain material from a wide area
o Do not use more material than needed
o Cover excavated soil with vegetation or dump in streams, ravines or under brush
o Inspect the position form the enemy’s viewpoint
o Vary your route to avoid making paths to the position
 Personal equipment
o Field uniforms and equipment are colored to blend in with terrain. Faded or shiny items
need to be surveyed or darkened with paint.
o When op paint is not available, use mud, charcoal, or crushed grass.
o Alter the outline of your helmet with a cloth cover or foliage
 Individual
o All exposed skin, even dark skin, reflects light.
o Apply face paint sticks whenever possible, using the following combinations:
 Loam & light green for light skin personnel in other than snow regions
 Sand & dark green for dark skinned personnel in other than snow regions
 Loam & white for all personnel in snow regions
 Applying paints
o Paint shiny areas (forehead, cheeks, nose, chin, hands, wrists, neck) with the darker color
o Paint shadow areas (around eyes, under nose and chin) with the lighter color.
o Use the buddy system to check application
o When paint is not available, use burnt cork, charcoal or lampblack
 Vehicles
o If possible, park under natural cover
o Park so the vehicle shape will disappear into natural surroundings
o When cut foliage is used ensure it is placed as it grows. The undersides of leaves are
lighter than the top.
o Replace as soon as it begins to wither
 Drape nets/Camouflage Nets
o Easily assemble and provide adequate concealment against direct observation
o Can be detected by photographic observation because the artificial camouflage does not
blend in with the background completely.
82
COMMON CORE





109
Buildings
o Vary rooflines with wooden framework, then cover with burlap or fine-mesh netting
o Erect superstructures over new building to make it resemble surrounding native buildings
o For existing structures
 Cover with screens of garnished netting
 Paint disruptive patterns over netting, roof, and gable-end walls
 When the slope of a roof is greater than 30 degrees, netting must cover the whole
building.
 Paint roofs to match surrounding terrain
Supply points
o Pick spots with good natural overhead cover. Minimize changes to the appearance of the
terrain.
o Avoid large concentrations of materials
o Unload and disperse supplies as quickly as possible
o Supply point access roads
 Access roads and tracks running in and out of the point can be concealed by
slinging netting between trees.
 Control traffic to avoid large convoys
 Control debris, such as empty boxes, so it does not accumulate and give the
position away.
Water points
o Must camouflage storage tanks, pumps, purification equipment, and personnel
o Place burlap covers or foliage over shiny surfaces.
o Conceal open areas where vehicles or personnel will have to traverse to get to a water
point
o Institute a water supply schedule to avoid a concentration of waiting vehicles or personnel
Cover
o Protection from enemy fire
o A hill is natural cover
o A parapet is artificial cover
Concealment
o Protection from observation
o Bushes, grass, and shadows are natural concealment
o Burlap, tents, or nets are artificial concealment
109.4 State what action should be taken if you are caught in the light of a ground or overhead
flare. [ref. a, ch. 4]


Overhead flares
o When an overhead flare goes off, immediately seek cover as low as possible and do not move
until the light burns out
Ground flares
o Move quickly and quietly out of the light
109.5 State the eleven general orders of a sentry. [ref. c, ch. 7]
1. To take charge of this post and all government property in view.
2. To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on the alert, and observing everything that
takes place within sight or hearing.
3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce.
4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guard house than my own.
5. To quit my post only when properly relieved.
6. To receive, obey and pass on to the sentry who relieves me, all orders from the Commanding
Officer, Command Duty Officer, Officer of the Deck, and Officers and Petty Officers of the Watch only.
83
COMMON CORE
109
7. To talk to no one except in the line of duty.
8. To give the alarm in case of fire or disorder.
9. To call the Officer of the Deck in any case not covered by instructions.
10. To salute all officers and all colors and standards not cased.
11. To be especially watchful at night, and, during the time for challenging, to challenge all persons on
or near my post and to allow no one to pass without proper authority.
109.6 Discuss the military aspects of terrain as it applies to a defensive force using the acronym
KOCOA. [ref. b, ch. 5]


Various combinations of weather and topography give certain qualities to an area. These qualities
known as the Military Aspects of Terrain and must be closely evaluated.
Reconnaissance
o Physical reconnaissance is most reliable, but additional resources include:
 Arial reconnaissance and photographs
 Maps of the area
 Terrain models provided by higher authority
 Intelligence reports
 Patrolling
 Friendly natives, undercover agents, or captured prisoners
o Use the acronym KOCOA to remember aspects
 K- key terrain features
 Any area that provides a marked advantage over the enemy
 Terrain that provides superior observation and fields of fire
 Obstacles that could prevent enemy movement, such as possession of
roads, bridges, and rivers
 Terrain needed for future operations, such as an airfield
 O- observation and Fields of Fire
 Observation is the key to:
o Deliver effective fire on enemy
o Control troop maneuvers
o Prevent surprise by enemy
 Fields of Fire are areas where weapons can be fired effectively upon the
enemy
 Need to extend to the range of the weapon
 If clearing is necessary, ensure fire lanes do not disclose the defensive
position
 C- Cover and Concealment
 Apply principals previously discussed to guard position
 O- Obstacles
 Obstructions used to stop or disrupt enemy movement
 Natural obstacles are rivers, mountains, lakes, etc
 Artificial obstacles include mine fields, barbed wire, trenches, etc
 A- Avenues of Approach
 Suitable route of movement to an objective
 Often the weak spots in a defense
 Must be effectively covered with weapons fire and barricades
 May be used by the defending force to launch a counterattack
109.7 Discuss the use and care of the following [ref. a, ch. 5]
 Topographic map
84
COMMON CORE
109
o

Portrays terrain and landforms in a measurable form as well as the horizontal positions of
the features represented
o Vertical positions, or relief, are normally represented by contours.
o Care of maps
 Fold the map properly
 Carry it in a waterproof packet
 Use light lines when marking
Lensatic compass
o Use Defining an Azimuth
 Compasses are used to describe direction
 The most common military method of describing direction is through azimuths
 An azimuth is a horizontal angle, measured in a clockwise manner from a north
base line.
o Azimuth
 Azimuths are described in terms of degrees or mils
 One circle has 360 degrees or 6400 mils
o Use Center Hold Method
 Open the cover of the compass so it forms a straight edge with the compass base
 Pull the eyepiece as far to the rear as possible, perpendicular to the compass
base.
 Align the slot in the eyepiece with the hairline sighting wire in the cover and with
the target
 Read the azimuth by glancing down at the dial through the lens.
o Use Compass to Cheek Method
 Open the cover of the compass so it forms a right angle with the compass base
 Pull the eyepiece up to form a 45-degree angle to the compass base.
 Place the compass to the cheek so the user can align the slot in the eyepiece with
the hairline sighting wire in the cover and with the target
 Read the azimuth by looking down at the dial through the lens.
o Night Method
 Compass features at night use
 Luminous markings
 Bezel ring three degrees or 53 1/3 mils per click
 Using the Bezel ring
 Set the azimuth before it gets dark
 Turning the ring to the left increases the azimuth
 Left decreases the azimuth
o Care
 Use non-permanent markers when possible. Handle the compass with care
 The dial is set at a delicate balance and shock could damage it
 Close and return the compass to its case when not in use
 Never take readings near metal or communications gear
OLD.7 Explain the procedures for basic land navigation using a map and lensatic compass
 With a Compass Rose (picture of compass card)
o Place map on a flat surface
o Place an open Lensatic compass on the map’s compass rose with the sighting wire lying
directly over the map’s magnetic north line.
o Turn the map and compass together until the north arrow of the compass is aligned with
the index line of the compass
o The map is now orientated
85
COMMON CORE
109.8





109
State the five basic colors used and how they applied to a military map
Black: Man-made features and cultural areas
Blue: water features such as lakes and rivers
Green: vegetation
Red-Brown: all relief features such as contour lines
Red: main roads, built up areas and special features, enemy positions
109.9 Describe the grid system on all military maps
 Military Grid System
o Provides a uniform system for referencing and making measurements
o Grids are two sets of equally spaced, parallel, straight lines intersecting at right angles,
forming a series of squares
o Each grid line is a unit of measure, permits linear and angular measurement
o Grid is drawn over a geographic projection
 Reading a Grid Square
o Each grid line is labeled on the edge by two digit numbers called Principle Digits.
 A grid square is identified by the two sets of principle digits that compose the
square.
o The rule for reading grids is read right first then up
o Use a coordinate scale, or protractor, to get a grid coordinate of a point not on a grid
square
o Ensure the map scale and coordinate scale match
o Place the zero-zero point of the scale at the loser left corner of the grid square
o Keeping the horizontal line of the scale on top of the bottom horizontal grid line, slide it to
the right until the vertical line of the scale touches the point being measured
o Read the coordinates RIGHT and UP and add them after the respective set of principle
digits
 Scales
o Graphic Scale: Denotes the size of each grid. Found in the legend printed on the map
o Ratio Scale: A comparison between map distance and ground distance.
109.10 Explain resection and intersection. [ref. a, ch. 5]
 Resection:
o Locating the unknown position of the user by sighting on two or three known features is
called resection. Resection can be done with or without a compass.
 Intersection
o Locating an unknown point by successively occupying at least two, but preferably three,
known positions and sighting on the unknown point is called intersection. It is used to
locate features that are not defined on the map or which are not readily identifiable. The
two methods of intersection are the map and compass method and the straightedge
method.
109.11 State the twelve patrol planning and preparation steps: [ref. a, ch. 4]
 Patrol leader uses 12 steps to plan a patrol
1. Study the mission
2. Plan use of time
3. Study the terrain and situation
4. Organize the patrol
5. Select personnel, weapons, and equipment
6. Issue the warning order
7. Coordinate
8. Make reconnaissance
9. Complete detailed plans
86
COMMON CORE
109
10. Issue patrol order
11. Supervise, inspect, rehearse, and re-inspect
12. Execute the mission
OLD.11 Explain the procedures to use the AN/PSN-11 (plugger) for basic land navigation. [ref. d, ch. 4]

Navigation (nav) is using the PLGR to find your present position, relative to other points. The
PLGR provides azimuth, range, and steering information in a variety of formats.

NAV Display Modes. There are four nav display modes that may be accessed and selected (see
display at right). The nav display mode selected determines the type of information shown on the
nav displays. Changing the nav display mode changes the format of the nav displays. The nav
information displayed for each nav display mode selected (except CUSTOM) is shown. This gives
the user the most useful information for a certain mission profile: SLOW, 2D FAST, 3D FAST, or
CUSTOM.

SLOW NAV Mode. In SLOW nav mode, the PLGR performs two-dimensional (2D) nav. SLOW
nav mode is used for land or sea nav, when the user can not maintain the minimum speed
necessary (approximately 1.5 kph) for GPS to compute navigation parameters that depend on
velocity.

2D FAST NAV Mode. In 2D FAST nav mode, the PLGR performs two-dimensional (2D) nav. 2D
FAST nav mode is used for land or sea nav, when the user can maintain the minimum speed
necessary for GPS to compute navigation parameters based on velocity. Since these users travel
horizontally, TTG2 and MMD2 are based on horizontal range.

3D FAST NAV Mode. In 3D FAST nav mode, the PLGR performs three-dimensional (3D) nav. 3D
FAST nav mode has an APPROACH sub-mode. 3D FAST nav mode is used for air nav, when the
user can travel in three dimensions and can maintain the minimum speed necessary for GPS to
compute navigation parameters based on velocity. Therefore, TTG3 and MMD3 are based on
slant range.
109.12 Utilizing BAMCIS, describe the planning process for issuing a five-paragraph order. [ref. f,
Task 2-3]
 Begin planning
o Issue the Patrol Warning Order
 Arrange for reconnaissance and coordination
o Acquire the necessary maps and aerial photos for a map or photoreconnaissance.
o Coordinate with other units the movement of the patrol within, through, and beyond friendly
lines.
o Provide patrol information, including
 Size
 Routes
 Time of departure and return
 Challenge and password
 Call signs and frequencies
o Request information on the following:
 Known or suspected enemy activity
 Friendly positions and activity
 Locations of FOs, LPs and OPs.
 Signals for firing the final protective fires (FPF)
87
COMMON CORE
109







Call signs and frequencies
Challenge and password, and the running password
Verify locations of the point of departure (POD), point of return (POR), and the
assembly area.
o Request that a guide be provided for crossing friendly lines, if necessary.
o Coordinate the plan for reentry
o Request ammunition, special equipment, water, and rations.
o Coordinate the method for casualty evacuation.
o Collect intelligence about the enemy.
Make the reconnaissance
o Study the terrain on the map and/or aerial photographs and identify:
 Terrain features that could be navigation aids
 Danger areas and obstacles
 Tentative checkpoints and rally points
Complete the plan
o Assign each fire team and individual a specific duty.
 Ensure that at least one Seabee is assigned as a navigator.
 Ensure that at least two Seabees are assigned as pace counters.
o Finalize the route selection
 Make frequent changes to the route if the patrol is to be conducted daily or
periodically.
o Finalize procedures for the following:
 Patrol formation and order of movement
 Departure and reentry of friendly lines
 Actions at checkpoints, rally points, danger areas, and upon enemy contact
o Ensure that arms and ammunition have been obtained.
o Ensure that patrol members have the required uniform and equipment.
o Determine the procedures for handling enemy prisoners of war (EPWs).
o Determine the type of signals to be used.
o Identify communication security measures, call signs, frequencies, code words, and
reporting times used for communications with the higher authority.
o Determine the challenge and password for use within the patrol.
o Determine your position as the patrol leader (PL) and the position of the assistant patrol
leader (APL) within the patrol.
Issue the Patrol Order
Supervise preparations
o Check with team leaders to verify that assigned tasks are being accomplished.
o Conduct initial and final inspections.
o Conduct rehearsals.
109.13 Discuss the five-paragraph order. [ref. a, ch. 11]
 Efficient way of stating concept of operations and orders to subordinates. Remember the acronym
SMEAC.
o Situation
 Divided into three categories
 Enemy Forces
o Size, location, capabilities, and recent activities
 Friendly forces
o Mission of higher, supporting and adjacent units
o Identify who is providing security
 Attachments
o Types and size of attachments
o Time they attach
88
COMMON CORE
o

89
109
Mission
 States mission in clear and concise statements
 Mission is unit specific- what we are to accomplish
o Execution
 Assigns definite tasks to each element of the command, organic or attached, that
contributes to carrying out the whole mission
 No restrictions are set on the number of paragraphs, although information is
typically divided into three areas
 Concept of operation
 Brief summary of the tactical plan the unit is to execute
 Tasks
 Or missions, for each unit, to include the reserve if applicable
 If this is the squad leaders SMEAC, each fire team would be tasked in this
section
 Coordinating instruction
 Actions upon contact, MOPP level, route, etc
o Administration and logistics
 Addresses all administrative, supply, or transportation concerns
 Beans- distribution of food
 Bullets- quantity of ammo and re-supply information
 Band-Aids- location of corpsman, med-evac plan
 Bad guys- POW handling instructions
o Command and signal
 Chain of command and communications information given in two parts
 Communications instructions- typically an annex of standard reports, but also
includes passwords and countersigns, radio call signals, frequencies, etc
 Chain of command- gives precedence of command and location of command
posts.
Below is a sample of a 5 paragraph order:
COMMON CORE
90
109
COMMON CORE
109
109.14 Define and discuss the following reports: [ref. b, ch. 2]
91
COMMON CORE


109
SALUTE report is an initial report of enemy activity. It is used when enemy is spotted but not
engaged or when a firefight first breaks out.
o Size of the enemy unit
o Activity of the enemy
o Location of the enemy unit
o Uniform worn by the enemy
o Time of each activity noted
o Equipment used or carried by the enemy
SPOT
o Detailed report of an enemy engagement
o Always follow a SALUTE up with a SPOT report after engagement has ended
o Report includes
 All information contained in a SALUTE
 Friendly and enemy KIA or WIA
 POW’s and enemy equipment
109.15 Describe the purpose of a security and reconnaissance patrol
 Security Patrols
o Provide physical security
 Reconnaissance patrols
o Defensive technique used to
 Detect enemy movement toward the unit’s position
 Locate or observe an enemy position
 Discover enemy avenues of approach
 Supplementary patrol information
o What are the two categories of patrols and what is their purpose?
 Reconnaissance and Combat
 Reconnaissance patrols are typically conducted to gather information about
a location, characteristics of friendly or hostile positions and installations,
terrain, and obstacles.
 Combat patrols are assigned missions that usually include engaging the
enemy. They are fighting patrols. Combat patrols are employed in both the
offensive and defensive combat operations.
o What are the three types of reconnaissance patrols and describe the purpose of each?
 Route, Area, and Zone
 Route reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain detailed information of a
specified route and all terrain from which the enemy could influence
movement along that route.
 Area reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain detailed information
concerning the terrain or enemy activity within a prescribed area such as a
town, ridge line, woods, or other features critical to operations.
 Zone reconnaissance is a directed effort to obtain detailed information
concerning all routes, obstacles, terrain, and enemy forces within a zone
defined by boundaries.
o What are the different types of combat patrols?
 Raid, Contact, Ambush, Security, and Urban
 Raid patrols are a surprise attack on an enemy force or installation with the
attacking force withdrawing after accomplishment of the mission.
 Contact patrols establish and/or maintain contact to the front, flanks or rear.
 Ambush patrols are a surprise attack from a concealed position upon a
moving or temporarily halted target.
92
COMMON CORE
109


Security patrols are assigned missions that may or may not require them to
engage the enemy. They are in the proximity of defensive positions, on the
flanks of advancing units, or in rear areas.
Urban patrols are overt in nature, with their presence readily apparent to the
local populace.
109.16 Discuss the acronym SAFE as it applies to establishing a defense. [ref. g, p. 3-17]
 Commander’s Intent dictates the priorities
o Considers four defensive principles of war
 Surprise
 Security
 Unity of command
 Mass
o Applies these to the unit’s mission and situation to develop priorities. In general, priorities
follow the acronym “SAFE FILM AS”.
A. Security (Secure the area)
(1) Post local security: Observation/listening posts,
 Patrols/Convoys
(2) Always plan for the worst scenario and conduct reconnaissance.
B. Automatic Weapons: Select and prepare automatic and crew served weapon positions
(Your defense should be built around your crew served weapons). Ensure mutual
support from adjacent units, use the concept of "Talking Guns", and set-up interlocking
fields of fire to ensure coverage of gaps. Camouflage positions.
C. Fields of Fire: Clear fields of fire for crew served weapons and determine ranges to
probable target locations, prepare range cards. Recon forward of defensive positions,
“see what enemy sees.”
D. Emplacements: Prepare and dig weapons emplacements and individual positions.
E. Fire support. Plan, coordinate, and plot indirect fire support in daylight if possible.
Priority for all indirect weapons (organic and inorganic) shall be coverage of dead space
in the machine gun FPLs. M-203’s and on call fire support points will be located.
F. Install tactical, protective and supplementary wire (in that order).
G. Lay and bury communication wire (use radios as a last resort – minimize
transmissions). If enough communication wire is available, lay redundant strands of
communication wire.
H. Make other obstacles (execute a barrier plan).
I. Alternate fighting positions. Select and prepare alternate fighting positions.
J. Supplementary fighting positions. Select and prepare supplementary fighting positions.
K. Prepare defensive fire plan sketches.
L. Continue to camouflage and improve positions.
109.17 What are the three echelons of a defense? [ref. b, ch. 4, p. 4-1 thru 4-2]
 Forward Defense Area (FDA)
o Area where frontline defensive positions are dug
 Security Area
o Area in front of FDA
o Security patrols roam this area
o Listening/observation posts are placed here
 Reserve Area
o Area behind FDA that reserve forces occupy
109.18 Define and discuss the following:
 Call for fire for indirect weapon support [ref. a, ch. 14, p. 4-16 thru 4-20]
o Request for indirect fire, as in mortars or artillery support, is termed “Call for Fire”
93
COMMON CORE
109



Observer requesting support calls into Fire Direction Control (FDC)
FDC plots the request on a firing board and transposes the information into
firing data
 FDC announces this data to the mortar crew as fire commands
 There are six elements of a call for fire:
 Observer identification
 Target location
 Method of engagement
 Warning order
 Target description
 Method of fire and control
Close Air Support [ref. d, app. b]
o What are the three types of missions when you call for fire?
 Polar, Grid, and Shift.
o Target Location



o
Shift used for observer to target direction, left/right lateral shift, add/drop range
shift, and up/down vertical shift (if greater than 30 meters).
Call for Fire Examples
 The following table lists types of missions and examples of calls for fire for
each.
Table 11 Call for fire types
94
Grid is used for a 6- or 8-digit coordinate (an 8-digit grid preferred).
Polar is used for observer to target direction, distance, and up/down
vertical shift (if greater than 30 meters).
COMMON CORE
109
Figure 6 Call for fire format card

Describe how close air support is requested.
o Typically, close air support (CAS) briefings are presented in the “9-line brief” format. This
format is used when detailed coordination is required. However, if Marines need immediate air
support and they are unfamiliar with the 9-line brief, they should establish communication with
the aircraft and then talk it on to the target.
o The CAS briefing form (9-line briefing form) shown is used to pass data to the pilot.
o Omit data not required; do not transmit line numbers. Units of measure are standard unless
otherwise specified.
o *Denotes minimum essential information required in a limited communication environment.
Bold denotes read-back items when requested.
Terminal controller: “________________________, this is ________________________”
(aircraft call sign) (terminal controller)
*1. IP/BP: “_____________________________________________________________”
*2. Heading: “________________________” (magnetic). “Offset ___________ (left/right)”
*3. Distance: “__________________________________________________________”
*4. Target elevation: “__________________________________________” (in feet MSL)
*5. Target description: “___________________________________________________”
*6. Target location: “_____________________________________________________”
(latitude/longitude or grid coordinates or offsets or visual)
7. Type mark: “________________________” Code: “_________________________”
(WP/laser/IR/beacon) (actual code)
Laser to target line: “____________________________________________degrees”
*8. Location of friendlies: “_______________________________________________”
Position marked by: “__________________________________________________”
9. “Egress ____________________________________________________________”
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Remarks (as appropriate): “________________________________________________”
(Threats, Hazards, Weather, Restrictions, Ordnance Delivery, Attack Heading, Danger Close, SEAD)
95
COMMON CORE
109
Time on target: “TOT _____________________________________________________”
OR
Time to target: “Stand by ____________________ plus _________________ . . . Hack.”
Line 1. IP/BP. Initial point is used for fixed-wing aircraft. It is the 5–15 nautical mile run-in to the target. A
battle position is used for rotary-wing aircraft. It is 3,000–5,000 meters from the target. It is a large area
(1000 x 1000 m or >) from which a rotary-wing aircraft engages the target. In some instances, an informal
airspace coordination area (ACA) may have to be established to allow the rotarywing aircraft to run-in
closer (500–1500 meters) to the target.
Line 2. Heading. The heading is given in degrees magnetic from IP (or center of the BP) to the target.
The Offset (left or right) indicates the side of the IP to target line that aircrews can maneuver in while in
the target area. Saying degrees magnetic after the number is not necessary—degrees magnetic is
understood.
Line 3. Distance. The distance from the IP/center of the BP to the target. It is given in nautical miles to the
nearest tenth (e.g., 12.3 nautical miles) to fixed-wing aircraft and in meters to the nearest hundred (e.g.,
3200 meters) for rotary-wing aircraft. Saying nautical miles after the number is not necessary—nautical
miles are understood.
Line 4. Target elevation. The target elevation is given in feet above mean sea level. If the map contour
interval is in feet, take the elevation directly from the map. If the map contour is in meters, convert it to
feet.
Line 5. Target description. The target description contains the number, type of target, and degree of
protection. It is a brief, concise description of the target. It includes target activity and configuration that
may assist its identification. For example, 4 APCs on road, stationary. . . . Bunker complex. . . . Tank
column in open, moving north to south.
Line 6. Target location. The target location is a 6-digit grid coordinate. Target location can be given as a
UTM grid coordinate or as latitude and longitude. Any Marine Corps CAS aircraft can accept a UTM grid
coordinate.
Line 7. Type mark. The type of mark used: e.g., WP (white phosphorus), RP (red phosphorus), laser
(include 4-digit code), illumination on the deck, HE, mirror flash. If no mark is available, the pilot is guided
onto the target using available references (e.g., roads, streams, open areas, prominent terrain).
Line 8. Location of friendlies. Cardinal direction (north, south, east, west) and distance (in meters) from
the target to the nearest friendly position, which is frequently the forward air controller’s position.
Example: SW 1500.
Line 9. Egress. Instructions the aircraft will follow to exit the target area after engaging the target. It
includes direction to turn out of the target area and a control point to which the aircraft will fly. Use the
word “Egress” before giving egress instructions.
Example: Egress east, then south to Georgia.
Remarks. If applicable, additional threats, hazards, weather, final attack heading, artillery gun target lines,
etc., can be given here.
Time on target. Time on target (TOT) is the synchronized, universal clock time when ordnance will hit the
target. There is no time “HACK” for TOT. TOT is the preferred towing method. The Naval Observatory
96
COMMON CORE
109
(DSN 762-1401) or a global positioning system (GPS) can provide a common time reference. If neither is
available, the terminal controller can still execute a TOT mission by synchronizing time using a watch as
a reference. It is passed to the aircraft as a number of minutes past the hour (e.g., 1624 would be 24 and
communicated as Time on target 24).
o
Fire commands for direct weapon support [ref. a, ch. 3]
 Instructions used to direct and control fire of a squad
 Used when a squad leader decides to fire on a target
 Use the acronym ADDRAC
 Alert- alert the unit that a command is coming
 Direction- indicate the target’s location
 Description- Give a very brief description of the target
 Range- To the target to be engaged
 Assignment- Tell who is to fire on the target
 Control- (fire control) give the signal to open fire
109.19 Discuss the elements of a fire plan sketch. [ref. b, ch. 2, p. 2-3; ch. 4, pp. 4-2 thru 4-14]
 Fire plan sketch has three combat positions:
 Primary firing position
 Backbone of the defense, receives the full force of the enemy’s attack
 Alternate firing position
 Fall back position used if the primary position is in danger of being over run
 Should have the same sector of fire as primary
 Supplementary firing position
 Sector of fire covers the flank or rear

97
Supplementary fire plan information: NEXT PAGE
COMMON CORE
109
109.20 Discuss sectors of fire and fire discipline [ref. b, ch. 4]
 Area assigned to an individual, unit, or crew served weapon to defend
o Pie shaped section with edges called lateral limits
o Lateral limits extend from the firing position to an easily identifiable terrain feature
 Sectors of fire
o Two stakes are placed near the firing position to indicate lateral limits during darkness
o Sectors of fire interlock to ensure mutual support by adjacent units
 Fire Discipline
o The ability to efficiently apply fire on a target
o Dependent on the ability of the leader, the discipline and control of the crew and
includes:
 The ability to select and designate targets.
 Preserve element of surprise by opening fire at the desired moment only
 Regulate the rate of fire
 Shift from one target to another
 Adjust and cease-fire
109.21 State the 6 articles of the code of conduct [ref. c, ch. 4]
o Article I. I am an American, fighting in the forces which guard my country and our way of life. I am
prepared to give my life in their defense.
98
COMMON CORE
109
o
Article II. I will never surrender of my own free will. If in command, I will never surrender the
members of my command while they still have the means to resist.
o
Article III. If I am captured I will continue to resist by all means available. I will make every effort to
escape and to aid others to escape. I will accept neither parole nor special favors from the enemy.
o
Article IV. If I become a prisoner of war, I will keep faith with my fellow prisoners. I will give no
information or take part in any action which might be harmful to my comrades. If I am senior, I will
take command. If not, I will obey the lawful orders of those appointed over me and will back them
up in every way.
o
Article V. When questioned, should I become a prisoner of war, I am required to give name, rank,
service number, and date of birth. I will evade answering further questions to the utmost of my
ability. I will make no oral or written statements disloyal to my country and its allies or harmful to
their cause.
o
Article VI. I will never forget that I am an American, fighting for freedom, responsible for my
actions, and dedicated to the principles which made my country free. I will trust in my God and in
the United States of America.
OLD.23 Discuss the duties and responsibilities of the following members of a squad:
 A squad is composed of 14 people
o 1 squad leader
o 1 grenadier
o 3 fire team leaders
o 3 automatic riflemen
o 3 riflemen #1
o 3 riflemen #2






99
Squad leader
o PO1 with an M16, but only fires in critical situation
o Responsible for the training, appearance, discipline and readiness of the squad
o Controls fire discipline, fire control, and maneuvering
Grenadier
o PO3 armed with an M203
o Responsible for the employment and care of the 203
o Remains close to the squad leader in combat
Fire team leader
o PO2 with an M16, but only fires in critical situations
o Leads and controls fire team
o Acts as the assistant squad leader
Automatic rifleman
o PO3 with a fully automatic M16
o Backbone of the fire team, provides heavy fire power
o Acts as the assistant fire team leader
Rifleman number 1
o E3 with an M16 whose primary duty is to carry extra ammo for the automatic rifleman
o Protects flank and acts as a scout
o Takes control of the automatic rifle if automatic rifleman becomes a casualty
Rifleman number 2
COMMON CORE
o
o
o
109
E3 or E2 with an M16
Acts as point man and occasionally a scout
Protects the flank of the fire team
109.22 Describe the procedures for handling detainees/Enemy Prisoner of War (EPW) [ref. a, ch. 1,
pp. 1-21 thru 1-25; ref. e, p. 1-147 thru 1-154]
 Potentially a valuable source of information
 Remember the 6-S’s in handling EPW’s
o Search: for weapons and documents
o Secure: ensure escape is impossible
o Silence: do not allow EPW’s to talk to each other
o Segregate: into groups by rank, gender, and status (deserter, civilian, EPW, etc)
o Speed: timely deliver of information obtained from EPW’s is essential
o Safeguard: protect EPW’s from harm
109.23 Describe force protection/threat conditions. [ref. h, ch. 3, p. 3-42]
 THREATCON ALPHA. This condition applies when there is a general threat of possible
terrorist activity against personnel and facilities. The nature and extent of which are
unpredictable, and circumstances do not justify full implementation of THREATCON BRAVO
measures. However, it may be necessary to implement certain measures from higher
THREATCONS resulting from intelligence received or as a deterrent. The measures in this
THREATCON must be capable of being maintained indefinitely.
 THREATCON BRAVO. This condition applies when an increased and more predictable threat
of terrorist activity exists. The measures in this THREATCON must be capable of being
maintained for weeks without causing undue hardship, affecting operational capability, and
aggravating relations with local authorities.
 THREATCON CHARLIE. This condition applies when an incident occurs or intelligence is
received indicating some form of terrorist action against personnel facilities and is imminent.
Implementation of measures in this THREATCON for more than a short period probably will
create hardship and affect the peacetime activities of the unit and its personnel.
 THREATCON DELTA. This condition applies in the immediate area where a terrorist attack
has occurred or when intelligence has been received that terrorist action against a specific
location or person is likely.
109.24 Discuss who defines rules of engagement, how it applies and who is responsible for
enforcing. [ref. h, ch. 1, p. 1-6]
 Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff defines rules of engagement
 Applies to US forces
o During military attacks against the US and
o During ALL military operations, contingencies, and terrorist attacks occurring outside
US territory
o Not to be confused with Rules for Use of Force (peacetime operations within US
territory)
 Everyone is responsible for enforcing ROE.
109.25 Describe circumstances when deadly force would normally be authorized [ref. h, ch. 3, p.
3-19]
 Deadly force is only used as a last resort
 Authorized under the following conditions:
o Self defense or defense of others when lesser means will not work
o Defense of property vital to national security
100
COMMON CORE
o
o
109
Defense of property dangerous to others (weapons, ammunition, etc)
To prevent the escape of a prisoner likely to cause death or serious bodily injury to
another
109.26 Describe the three classes of wire entanglement [ref. a, ch. 8]
 Tactical wire
o Used to hamper enemy aggression
o Placed along the front of the defensive line
 Protective wire
o Prevents close surprise attacks
o Placed around each fighting position at hand grenade range (35-50 meters)
 Supplementary wire
o Placed to conceal the exact line of tactical wire
109.27 State the purpose of the following: [ref. a, ch. 8]
 Triple standard concertina fence
o Consists of two lines of concertina serving as the base, with a third resting on top
o On average, a platoon can place 984 foot section in an hour
 Double-apron fence
o Two types
 4 and 2 pace fence, which is more common and more effective, and 6 and 3
pace fence
 A 984 foot section usually requires 1 ½ hours for a platoon to complete
 Low wire entanglement
o A 4 and 2 pace double apron fence constructed with medium pickets instead of long
pickets in the fence center line
o Used when concealment of the barrier is essential
 Tanglefoot
o Used to slow enemy movement
109.28 Discuss the following actions when isolated in an enemy area: [ref. a, ch. 6]
 Evasion
o Know the enemy’s location!
o Look for signs of group movement, such as crushed grass, cigarette butts, footprints,
broken branches, etc
o Look for workers in the field, indicates no immediate threat
o Absence of children in a village, indicative of pending action
o Absence of young men in a village, may mean the village is under enemy control
o Be patient, cautious, and avoid overconfidence
o Conserve strength by avoiding exhaustion
o Retain items of identification such as dog tags. If captured without them, you may be
treated as a spy.
o Evasion Travel Tips
 Use firearms only in an emergency
 Avoid people as long as possible
 When you approach friendly lines, make sure you identify yourself as friendly.
 Survival
o Size up the situation
o Undue haste makes waste
o Remember where you are
o Vanquish fear and panic
o Improvise
101
COMMON CORE

109
o Value living
o Act like the natives
o Learn the basic skills
Escape
o If you are captured, try and escape as soon as possible. Your physical condition will
be at its best
o Fall back on the Code of Conduct
109.29 Discuss the following basic fire team formations [ref. a, ch. 4]
 Column
o Used when speed and control are governing factors
o Favorable for fire and maneuver to either flank
o Vulnerable to fire from the front because it’s own fire in that direction is limited.
 Wedge
o Used when the enemy contact is possible, but not certain
o Provides all around protection, flexibility and is easy to control
 Skirmishers (right or left)
o Used when assaulting a known enemy position
o Because the fire teams are in line, it provides maximum fire power to the front
o Hard formation to control
 Echelon (right or left)
o Used primarily to protect an exposed flank
o Permits heavy firepower to the front and the direction of the echelon
o Hard formation to control and slow moving
OLD.34 Discuss the fundamentals of a successful ambush.
 Surprise attack from a concealed position upon a moving or temporarily halted target.
 Success of an ambush is contingent upon:
o Early warning of target approach
o Holding fire until target is in the kill zone
o Open fire at proper time
o Lifting or shifting supporting fires
o Initiation of the correct action if the ambush is compromised
o Timely and orderly withdrawal from ambush site
109.35 Describe immediate actions for enemy contact during the following. [ref. b, ch. 5]
Convoy [ref. b, ch. 5]
 Drivers attempt to drive through the killing zone.
 Personnel return fire immediately.
 When vehicles are clear of the killing zone, they are halted. Occupants dismount and take
immediate offensive action against the enemy positions.
 Subsequent vehicles approaching the killing zone halt short of the zone. Occupants debark
and take immediate offensive action against the enemy positions.
 If hardened vehicles are forced to halt in the killing zone, all available weapons are used to
return fire immediately. Occupants remain in the vehicle. On the first perceptible slackening of
enemy fire, occupants dismount. When riding in a “soft” vehicle and caught in a killing zone,
occupants dismount immediately. In both cases, occupants dismount under the covering fires
of the four corner sentries, who initially remain aboard. The occupants then deploy to the side
directed by the vehicle commander and take the enemy under fire to cover the dismount of the
four sentries.
 After dismounting, if no cover is available, an immediate frontal assault against the enemy is
employed. The most logical course of action after dismounting is to take cover, immediately
102
COMMON CORE
109
establish a base of fire, and use a maneuver element against the enemy ambush positions.
Speed of execution is critical.
Patrol [ref. a, ch. 4]
 Chance contact, where you come across the enemy unexpectedly
o Break contact and continue with mission. Patrol leader will call out direction and
distance to break contact towards.
o Fire and movement. One group fires while the other moves off, alternating until
withdrawn.
 Ambush
o Point – forces are deployed to support the attack of a single killing zone
o Area Ambush, forces deployed for multiple point ambushes
o Near Ambush, little room to maneuver or seek cover
 Seabees in the killing zone, without order or signal, assault the ambush
position.
 People not in the killing zone maneuver against the attack force as directed.
o Far ambush
 People in the killing zone without order or signal return fire while seeking cover
 People outside the killing zone maneuver against the ambush force.
 Break contact or continue to assault the position.
109.31 Discuss challenge and password. [ref. a, ch. 11]
 The commanding officer directs the use of the countersign. Sentries of an interior guard may
use the countersign, but countersigns are primarily for use by sentries or persons defending
tactical areas.
 When a countersign is prescribed, the highest headquarters within a zone or area devises it.
The authority to designate a countersign may be delegated to subordinate units for their
immediate use when necessary; however, these units must notify higher headquarters of such
action without delay. Only one countersign can be used within a command during a specified
period.
 The choice of words or sounds for the countersign is made with care. When possible, words
are selected that are difficult for the enemy to pronounce. The word selected for the secret
challenge, or countersign must not suggest the word selected for the password. Doing this
minimizes the possibility of an unauthorized person guessing the password. (For example, the
secret challenge, ATOMIC, suggests the password BOMB.)
 The initiative for use of the countersign rests with the challenging sentry. Positive recognition
of each person claiming authority to pass is the main consideration of the sentry. When he
does not visually recognize the challenged person or party, he uses the countersign to make a
positive recognition. When there is any doubt as to the authority of the challenged person to
pass, even if he gives the correct password, he is detained for further action by the corporal of
the guard. When the sentry recognizes the challenged person or party before using the
countersign and there is no doubt the person or party has authority to pass, the sentry does
not use the countersign.
 Mutual identification is essential. If the person challenged does not recognize the secret
countersign, he should not give the password.
 When a secret challenge and password are prescribed, the secret challenge is given by the
sentry after the person is advanced to be recognized. The person challenged should then give
the password. Both the secret challenge and the password are given in a low tone in a
sentence to prevent them from being heard by others. For example, a sentry observes a
person approaching his post during the time for challenging. When the person is still far
enough away from the sentry’s post for the sentry to take effective measures should the
person rush him after being challenged, he commands, “HALT! WHO GOES THERE?” After
receiving an answer (such as, “Lieutenant Jones, Company B“) indicating the person is
103
COMMON CORE
109
friendly and may be authorized to pass, the sentry says, “Advance, and be recognized.” When
Lieutenant Jones reaches a point where the secret challenge, spoken in a low tone, can be
heard only by him, the sentry again commands, “HALT!” then he gives the secret challenge or
countersign, in the form of a sentence in a low tone (for example, “LOOK AT THE BLUE
SNOWFLAKE IN THE MUD”). After receiving the correct password from Lieutenant Jones (for
example, “MY BROTHER BOUGHT A ROOSTER FOR HIS WIFE YESTERDAY”) and
otherwise satisfying himself that the Lieutenant is authorized to pass, the sentry says,
“Advance, Lieutenant Jones” and salutes, if appropriate. If Lieutenant Jones is one of a party
challenged and is the person advanced according to the procedures discussed here, the
sentry then tells Lieutenant Jones to bring up his men and identify each individual before he
passes.
109.32 Describe the procedures to establish a LZ. [ref. b, ch. 3]
 LANDING ZONE/SITE/POINTS
o A helicopter landing zone (LZ) is a specified ground for landing helicopters to embark
or disembark troops or cargo. A landing zone is designated by a code name. It may
include one or more landing sites.
o Depending upon the terrain and the size of the Seabee unit, you can divide the LZ into
several landing sites. A landing site is a specific location within a landing zone in which
a single flight of helicopters may land to embark or disembark troops or cargo. Landing
sites are designated by color, such as landing site red. A landing site contains one or
more landing points.
o A helicopter landing point is an area within a landing site where an individual helicopter
can land. Landing points are designated by two-digit numbers, such as landing point
12. For pathfinder purposes, the landing points are identified by the use of smoke or air
panels. For night operations, you can mark the landing points with some type of lowintensity light. A general rule is to position landing points ten times as far from an
obstacle as the obstacle is high (10:1 ratio).
o NOTE: In most cases, a Seabee unit will be required to construct a landing zone with
one landing site and one landing point for resupply, troop movement, or medical
evacuations.
 PREPARATION OF THE LANDING ZONE
o When planning the preparation of an LZ, you should take several factors into
consideration. First, you should know what type of helicopters will be using the landing
zone. The Combat Operation Center (COC) can provide this type of information.
Second, you must consider the Seabee unit’s position in relation to the enemy.
Security troops must establish a 360-degree perimeter around the landing zone to
defend the LZ. A third factor is the time it will take to prepare the landing zone. And a
fourth factor considered is the equipment needed to prepare the LZ.
o Approaches and Exits
 The ground approaches to the LZ and exits from the LZ must be free of major
obstacles that might obstruct landing or takeoffs, such as tall trees, telephone
poles, or power lines. Approaches and exits should also be clear of
obstructions that are 10 meters or higher, extending at least 50 meters in the
direction of approach and exit paths. The rule of thumb for determining the
distance required between the landing point and a high obstruction is a 10:1
ratio. This means that the distance a landing point is located from a tree is ten
times the height of the tree.
o Ground Obstacles
 Obstacles on the ground, such as stumps or rocks, should not exceed 1 foot in
height on level ground and should be less on sloping ground.
o Gradient (Slopes)
104
COMMON CORE
109

Ground slope has a considerable effect on selecting a landing site or landing
point within the LZ. A helicopter cannot land safely in locations where the
ground slopes more than 14 degrees. When pilots land on a slope, they prefer
to land uphill because of the tail down attitude of the helicopter.
o Surface Conditions
 Mud, excessive dust, and loose debris are considered undesirable surface
conditions for helicopters. Mud causes a helicopter to become bogged down.
Excessive dust reduces visibility and compromises the location of the site.
Loose debris is dangerous because they are sucked up into the rotor blades or
turbine intakes, causing serious damage.
 Shallow water, less than 18 inches deep and with a firm bottom, can be used
as a landing site.
o Winds
 When the wind at ground level exceeds 10 knots, the helicopter must land into
the wind.
 LANDING SITE DIMENSIONS
o Landing site dimensions vary, depending on the number of landing points required. For
each landing point, a fuselage safe circle is cleared of all obstacles, such as stumps,
rocks, or bushes. Clear a rotor safe circle of all obstacles that could obstruct the rotor
blades. When there is to be more than one landing point within the landing site,
separate the landing points so the helicopters can simultaneously land safely in the
landing site.
109.33 What information is contained in a nine-line medical evacuation request? [ref. d, app. b]







105
Line 1. Location of the pick-up site.
Line 2. Radio frequency, call sign, and suffix.
Line 3. Number of patients by precedence:
A - Urgent
B - Urgent Surgical
C - Priority
D - Routine
E - Convenience
Line 4. Special equipment required:
A - None
B - Hoist
C - Extraction equipment
D - Ventilator
Line 5. Number of patients:
A - Litter
B - Ambulatory
Line 6. Security at pick-up site:
N - No enemy troops in area
P - Possible enemy troops in area (approach with caution)
E - Enemy troops in area (approach with caution)
X - Enemy troops in area (armed escort required)
* In peacetime - number and types of wounds, injuries, and illnesses
Line 7. Method of marking pick-up site:
A - Panels
B - Pyrotechnic signal
C - Smoke signal
D - None
E - Other
COMMON CORE


109
Line 8. Patient nationality and status:
A - US Military
B - US Civilian
C - Non-US Military
D - Non-US Civilian
E - EPW
Line 9. NBC Contamination:
N - Nuclear
B - Biological
C - Chemical
* In peacetime - terrain description of pick-up site
109.34 Discuss the purpose of combat hand and arm signals in the field. [ref. b, ch. 11]

Signals are used to transmit commands or information when voice communication is difficult or
impossible or when silence must be maintained. Leaders should repeat signals to their units
whenever necessary to ensure prompt and correct execution of orders. A leader giving arm
and hand signals should remember that these are an order of command. The signal is given
smartly. Leaders must be aware of their location to ensure the signal can be seen by the
intended unit. When a movement is to be executed by particular unit(s), a signal appointing
the unit(s) precedes the signal for the actual movement. If a movement is to be executed in
unison, the signal for the movement should be followed by the signal READY. After the
READY signal is acknowledged, the movement is executed at the same time that the arm is
lowered. Signals requiring a change of direction have no connection with the direction in which
the person giving the signal is facing. The direction of movement is shown by the direction in
which the arm of the signaler points.
Column formation: Raise either arm to the vertical position. Drop the arm to the rear,
describing complete circles in a vertical plane parallel to the body. The signal may be used to
indicate either a troop or vehicular column.
Echelon left/right: The leader may give this signal either facing towards or away from the unit.
Extend one arm 45 degrees below the horizontal, palms to the front. The lower arm indicates
the direction of echelon. (Example: for echelon right, if the leader is facing in the direction of
the forward movement, the right arm is lowered; if the leader is facing the unit, the left is
lowered.) Supplementary commands may be given to ensure prompt and proper execution.
106
COMMON CORE
109
Skirmishers left/right: Raise both arms lateral until horizontal, arms and hands extended
palms down. If it is necessary to indicate a direction, move in the desired direction at the
same time. When signaling for fire team skirmishers, indicate skirmishers right or left by
moving the appropriate hand up and down. The appropriate hand does not depend on the
direction the signaler is facing. Skirmishers left will always be indicated by moving the left
hand up and down; skirmishers right, the right hand.
Wedge formation: Extend both arms downward and to the side at an angle of 45 degrees
below the horizontal, palms to the front.
Fire team: The right arm should be placed diagonally across the chest.
Squad: Extend the hand and arm toward the squad leader, palm of the hand down; distinctly
move the hand up and down several times from the wrist, holding the arm steady.
Platoon: Extend both arms forward, palms of the hands down toward the leaders (or units) for
whom the signal is intended, and describe large vertical circles with hands.
107
COMMON CORE
109
Close Up: Start the signal with both arms extended sideward, palms forward, and bring palms
together in front of the body momentarily. When repetition of this signal is necessary, the
arms are returned to the starting position by movement along the front of the body.
Open Up/extended: Start the signal with the arms extended in front of the body, palms
together, and bring the arms to the horizontal position at the sides, palms forward. When
repetition of this signal is necessary, the arms are returned along the front of the body to the
starting position and the signal is repeated until understood.
Halt/Stop: Carry the hand to the shoulder, palm to the front; then thrust the hand upward
vertically to the full extent of the arm and hold it in that position until the signal is understood.
Dismount/Take cover: Extend the arm sideward at an angle of 45 degrees above the
horizontal, palm down, and lower it to side. Both arms may be used in giving this signal.
Repeat until understood.
108
COMMON CORE
109
Hasty Ambush Left/Right: Raise fist to shoulder level and thrust it several times in the desired
direction.
109.35 Describe what is on the Convoy Commander’s checklist. [ref. d, app. a]
109
COMMON CORE
109
Table 12 Convoy commanders checklist
Mission Requirements
Movement Plan (cont)
Current Intelligence/Situation
Column Length
Task Vehicles: Type and Quantity
Blocking, Bracing, and Cargo
Restraints
Personnel
Organic Capability
Cargo by Type, Class, and Size
Evacuation
Security Vehicles: Type and
Rate of Movement/Speed
Quantity
(Speedometer Multiplier)
Maintenance Vehicles
Slowest Vehicle
Materials Handling Equipment
Report to HHQ at Destination
Command and Control Vehicles:
Materials Handling Equipment
Type and quantity
Required
Lighting/Blackout Conditions/NVGs
Control of Vehicles and Operators
Reconnaissance
Required Delivery Time
Map and Photo
Time and Place
Physical
Maximum Catch-up Speed
Route Selection
Loading
Road
Time and Place
Bridges and Tunnels
Report to
Grades and Curves
Type/Class Cargo
Traffic Density
Outsize Loads
Requirements for Route Preparation Materials Handling Equipment
or Repair
Required
Liaison and Coordinate
Backload and Turn Around
Units along Route
Staging
Units Being Moved
Location
Supporting Units
Vehicle Checks
Highway Control
Cargo Checks
Agencies/Movement
Shippers/Cargo Handlers
Time to Start Point
Engineer/explosive ordnance
Convoy Clearance/Movement
disposal requirements
Credit
Convoy Organization
Start Point
Size of Serials/March Units
Location/Grid Coordinates
Type of Column
Identification Characteristics
Positions of Control Personnel
Distance, Time, and Rate of
Escorts Guides
Movement
Serials/March Units
Locations/Grid Coordinates
Vehicles
Identification Characteristics/
Positions of Security and
Alphanumeric Designators
Supporting Units
Guides and Markers
Organization for Command
Positions
Vehicle Marking
Posting and Pickup
Operating Gaps
Halts
Movement Plan
Purpose
Controlled Route
Time Duration
Operator Briefing
Locations
Road Movement Table
Maintenance
Special Permits or Authorization
Trail
Checkpoints
Enroute Support
Trip Distance
Medical Support
Required Start Time
Organic Capability
Unloading
Evacuation
Report Requirements
Release Point
110
Security Enroute
Action in Event of Attack
Air Attack
Artillery Attack
Ground Attack
Sniper
Air Support Procedures
Fire Support Procedures
Use of Lights/Blackout Restrictions
Service Support
Fuel
Location/Times
Types and Quantity
Accompanying Convoy
Messing/Rations
Locations/Times
Units on Route
Prescribed Loads
Communications
Convoy Control Net
Serial/March Unit Commanders
Parent Unit/Headquarters
Alert/Broadcast Net
Security/Tactical Nets
Fire and Air Support Nets
Medical Evacuation
Visual Signals
Sound Signals
Interpreter Requirements
Convoy Commander’s AfterAction Report
COMMON CORE
109
109.36 Explain how convoy road routes are classified. [ref. d, I-9]

Usually, classification is carried out during hasty route reconnaissance. When technical
difficulties are encountered, routes are classified by military engineers whose findings are
based on information contained on route reconnaissance reports. Route classification is
established for favorable conditions of light and weather.
Table 13 Route route classification







Type X is an all-weather route that, with reasonable maintenance, is passable throughout the
year to maximum capacity traffic.
Type Y is a limited, all-weather route that, with reasonable maintenance, can be kept open in
all weather but is sometimes open to less than maximum capacity traffic.
Type Z is a fair-weather route that quickly becomes impassable in adverse weather and cannot
be kept open by maintenance short of major construction
Weight classification
o Average traffic routes—Class 50.
o l Heavy traffic routes—Class 80.
o l Very heavy traffic routes—Class 120.
Obstructions
o Overhead obstructions less than 14 feet
o Widths below the prescribed type of flow
o Gradient of 7% or more
o Curves with radius of 100 feet or less
o Ferries and fords
Example
7 m/Y/50/4.6 (OB). This formula describes a limited all-weather route (Y) with a minimum
traveled way of 7 meters, a military load classification of 50, an overhead clearance of 4.6
meters, and an obstruction. The route width is not suitable for double flow, wheeled or tracked
traffic. This width constriction would be indicated as (OB) in the route classification formula if
the route were to be used for double flow traffic.
109.37 What factors determine the speed at which a convoy will move? [ref. d, I-14 thru 15]



111
Speed and Safety. Convoy commander will dictate normal speed and
catch-up speed during the convoy brief. The rate of speed is determined by
METT-TC and:
(a) Physical condition and level of training of the vehicle operators.
(b) Types of and mechanical condition of the convoy vehicles.
(c) Speed of the slowest vehicle based on capability, type, or weight of load.
(d) Degree of urgency the convoy requires.
COMMON CORE
109
(e) Condition of the roads (dust, mud, snow, and ice).
(f) Physical characteristics of the roadway along the route (grades, sharp turns, congestion).
(g) Weather conditions.
109.38 Discuss the effectiveness and employment of early warning devices and pyrotechnics. [ref. a,
pp. 12-11 thru 12-13]


112
Illuminate and to give warning of attacking or infiltrating enemy troops. Normally, it is placed
in the path of, and activated by, an advancing enemy. Trip flares are usually available to an
individual or small unit and can provide temporary close-in illumination. Trip flares are not
suitable for producing continuous illumination and have little, if any, application in other than
defensive operations.
The M49 trip flare resembles a hand grenade in size and shape, except that it is provided with a
bracket for attachment to a tree or post and a trigger mechanism for firing.
COMMON CORE
110
110 CONTINGENCY OPERATIONS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] https://abfcview.navfac.navy.mil
[b] COMCBPAC/COMCBLANT Instruction 10914.2, Maintenance Management Program for Naval
Construction Force (NCF) Camps
[c] NAVEDTRA 14265, Utilitiesman Basic, Vol. 1
[d] NAVEDTRA 14259, Utilitiesman Advanced
[e] NAVEDTRA 14233, Naval Construction Force/Seabee 1 & C
[f] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Volume 1
[g] NWP 4-04, Naval Civil Engineer Operations (2007)
[h] JFOB, Joint Forward Operating Base Force Protection Handbook
110.1 Discuss Engineer Support Plans (ESP). [ref. g, ch 4, p. 4-1, par. 4.2]
 An appendix to the logistics annex or separate annex of an operation plan that identifies the minimum

essential engineering services and construction requirements required to support the commitment of
military forces
Navy and Marine Corps service component commanders identify the engineering mission support for
logistics and force-level requirements. ESPs that guide engineers’ efforts are then developed as an
appendix to Annex D (Logistics) of OPLANs or operation order (OPORD). A detailed discussion of
ESP development is beyond the scope of this publication. For additional information on
ESPdevelopment, refer to JP 3-34.
110.2 Discuss the Request for Forces (RFF) process. [ref. g, ch. 4, p. 4-1, par. 4.3]
 Each MEF has a resident CEC officer on staff as an NCF LNO. These LNOs and engineer staff officers are
primary points of contact to initiate a request for naval civil engineering forces support. Designated
commanders forward requests to their service component command. Once validated, the request is
forwarded to the combatant commander and then to U.S. Joint Forces Command for sourcing after final
validation.
110.3 Discuss the difference between Contingency planning and Crisis Action planning. [ref. g,
ch. 4, p. 4-2, par. 4.7.1 and 4.7.2]
 Contingency planning is performed in a continuous cycle that usually begins with the publication of a new
CPG (Contingency Planning Guidance) and is designed to develop joint OPLANs, CONPLANs (with and
without TPFDD), or functional plans to support.
 It is accomplished per the joint operational planning process (JOPP) in seven steps: initiation, mission
analysis, course of action (COA) development, COA analysis and wargaming, COA comparision, COA
approval, and plan or order development.
 CAP is based on current events and conducted in time-sensitive situations and emergencies using assigned,
attached, and allocated forces and resources. Crisis action planners base their plan on the actual
circumstances that exist at the time planning occurs and, where possible, an existing OPLAN.
110.4 Discuss the following as it relates to General Engineering planning tools and
considerations. [ref. g, ch. 4, p. 4-6]
a. ESP (par. 4.9.1)

The ESP identifies the minimum essential facilities and engineering capabilities needed to support the
commitment of military forces. Based on service component input, unified commanders are responsible for
preparing the ESP. Civil engineer planners consider the following issues when preparing input for an ESP:
a. HN restrictions imposed on the use of bases and installations.
b. Assumptions regarding the availability of critical HNS.
c. Major construction resources to be allocated.
d. Anticipation of sustainment of Class IV resources. ESP should consider whether or not the Class
IV items will need to be contracted locally vice shipped from other sources. Consider use of
LOGCAP, AFCAP, and NAVFAC GCC program management and contract support team
requirements.
e. Desired standards of construction (initial or temporary).
113
COMMON CORE
110
f. A provision for force withdrawal, such as base denial and movement of relocatable residual





114
assets.
b. ABFC (par. 4.9.3)
The ABFC system, known as the NAVFAC P-437, has two volumes. The first volume is a list of
components, facilities, and assemblies. The second volume contains drawings. It includes standard
designs, bills of material, weight, cube, construction man-hour analysis, and fuel requirements.
c. Facilities (par. 4.9.4)
The unified commander is responsible for the coordination of planning, programming, and construction of
facilities to meet the requirements of service component forces. Facility requirements are consistent with
operational requirements, duration of need, and forces to be supported. Initial or temporary construction
standards and facility requirements, as required by the mission, determine the types of materials and
construction techniques used in constructing facilities in support of contingency operations.
d. Real Estate (par. 4.9.5)
The unified commander is responsible for coordinating real estate requirements of the service component
forces. Navy and Marine Corps component commanders conduct real estate activities such as determining
requirements for their forces; selecting, acquiring, maintaining, and disposing of property; claims
processing; and records maintenance. Civil engineer planners consider aspects of acquisition and/or leasing
real estate in support of engineer operations.
e. Environment (par. 4.9.6)
Naval civil engineer planners consider the effect of the planning of operations on the environment in
accordance with HN agreements; environmental laws and regulations; and U.S. federal, state, and local
environmental laws and standards. Environmental considerations are found in Annexes L and Q of an
OPORD and/or OPLAN. Environmental considerations include:
a. Policies and responsibilities to protect and preserve the environment
b. Certification of local water sources by appropriate medical personnel
c. Solid and liquid waste management
(1) Open dumping and burning
(2) Gray water disposal
(3) Pesticide disposal
(4) Human waste disposal
(5) Hazardous material disposal.
d. Hazardous materials management, including the potential use of pesticides
e. Protection of indigenous animals and vegetables
f. Archaeological and historical preservation
g. Contingency spill plans.
f. HN Support (par. 4.9.7)
Unified commanders obtain authority for negotiations with HNs through channels of the Joint Staff, the
SecDef, and the Department of State. Marine Corps and Seabee engineer planners identify requirements for
HNs and forward their requests through the commander, joint task force (CJTF) or the service component
commanders to the unified commander. The types of HN logistic support that engineer planners request,
subject to agreements and restrictions, include:
a. Petroleum, oils, and lubricants
b. Transportation
c. Telecommunications
d. Civilian labor
e. Rear area protection
f. Facilities
g. Contracting
h. Equipment acquisition
i. Supplies
j. Services
k. Health services support
l. Waste disposal.
COMMON CORE
110
110.5 Discuss the following logistics support considerations for Seabee units. [ref. g, ch. 4, p. 411]
a. Supply (par. 4.11.1)
o Supply is the receipt, storage, issue, and resupply of materiel for conducting operations. After
depletion of Seabee-deployed stocks, the supported JTF resupplies for Class I, III, IV, V, VIII, and
IX materials. The JTF shall also source the air or sealift required to move Class VII and IX supplies
that are obtained through NFELC and distributed through JTF logistic channels. The logistics staff
sources Class IV materials from the supported CJTF or from the unified commander. Class VI
supplies are normally sourced through outside management agencies like the Navy Exchange Store.
b. Maintenance (par. 4.11.2)
o Maintenance consists of actions necessary to preserve, repair, and ensure continued operations and
effectiveness. Seabee units use the material and maintenance management system and are organized
through intermediate (first and second) levels of maintenance on organizational CESE. Seabees also
conduct organizational (Echelon II) maintenance on assigned communications and weapons
systems (less optics) and electronic assets. Support for maintenance above these levels is required.
c. Transportation (par. 4.11.3)
o Transportation is the movement of units, personnel, equipment, and supplies from their point of
origin to their final destination. Seabee units have organic transportation assets to move equipment
and supplies within the theater. They may request augmenting transportation from the supported
JTF for movement of Class IV materials to their project sites or to displace the unit in a single
movement.
d. General Engineering (par. 4.11.4)
o General engineering is deliberate and oriented in CSS. Seabees have a robust capability to conduct
general engineering. BDR, maintenance of facilities, and vertical and horizontal construction are
examples of the engineering operations conducted by the Seabees. Seabees have limited combat
engineering capability and limited engineer reconnaissance capability. Refer to Appendix A for a
list of engineer tasks within the range of Seabee capabilities. Seabees:
1. Do not clear mines
2. Do not place mines
3. Do not conduct explosive ordnance disposal
4. Do not conduct explosive demolition.
e. Health Services (par. 4.11.5)
o Health services maintain, preserve, and restore the combat power of the force in war and peace.
Only NMCB units have a robust organic medical capability. The NMCBs are billeted with a
medical officer, dental officer, and independent duty corpsman plus additional corpsmen. Those
medical assets support first-responder-capability care. This includes routine and limited emergency
medical and dental support at the point of initial injury or illness. Limited ancillary capability
consists of preventive medicine, first aid/buddy aid, pharmacy, ophthalmic, medical laboratory, and
radiology. Seabee units also conduct a Combat Live Saver training program
f. Medical Treatment Facilities (par. 4.11.5.1)
o Seabee units have an organic medical treatment facility with limited patient treatment capabilities
located in each NMCB. They are capable of only initial treatment and stabilization for serious
injuries prior to medical evacuation. Although the NMCB aid station has an assigned medical staff,
the medical equipment organic to the Seabee unit is for a small detachment operated by one
corpsman to perform organic medical and limited dental care.
g. Medical Evacuations (par. 4.11.5.2)
o Health service support to Seabee units attached to a JTF is provided in the same manner in which
medical care is provided to other JTF elements. Seabees follow established procedures for the
medical evacuation of casualties.
h. Other Services (par. 4.11.6)
o Seabee organizations require support in field exchange services, security, legal services, civil
affairs, and graves registration. Although NMCBs are self-sufficient upon deployment, the situation
115
COMMON CORE
110
dictates whether or not augmentation CSS from the supported JTF is required in the following
areas: disbursing (U.S. Navy interface), exchange services, legal services, mortuary services, postal
services, security support, and civil affairs support.
110.6 Explain the following construction standards. [ref. g, ch. 5, p. 5-1]
a. Initial/Expedient (par. 5.2.1)
o Naval civil engineering forces apply the initial/expedient construction standard for facilities
construction in a tactical environment when response times are at a premium for rapidly deploying
engineering resources to limited support locations. Naval civil engineering forces primarily use and
tailor P-437 ABFC designs to site-specific locations that require austere facilities intended for
immediate operational use.
b. Temporary (par. 5.2.2.1)
o Naval civil engineering forces apply the temporary construction standard for facilities construction
when a location requires that it extend the efficiency of operations for use for as long as 24 months
and when the naval civil engineering forces are required to provide sustained operations. When
mission requirements dictate, the temporary construction standard replaces the initial/expedient
construction standard. Naval civil engineering forces conduct temporary-construction-standard
readiness training through fleet exercises to ensure proficiency in temporary construction missions,
such as knowing temporary construction standards for:
1. Building or modular systems and the ABFC standard design system
2. Expeditionary airfield construction
3. Electrical power generation and distribution systems
4. Fortifications
5. Forward arming and refueling points
6. Roads
7. Soil stabilization
8. Sewage disposal
9. Troop housing
10. Water storage and distribution.
c. Permanent (par. 5.2.3.1)
o Naval civil engineering forces build permanent-construction-standard facilities for HN, supporting
stability and security operations for U.S. forces with increased efficiency for long-term sustained
operations. Naval civil engineering forces must conform to either military, industrial, or commercial
construction standards chosen by the directing authority when constructing permanent facilities.
Naval civil engineering forces conduct permanent construction- standard readiness training during
peacetime deployments. They participate in fleet exercises and conduct contributory support
projects at commands to ensure proficiency in permanent construction missions. Permanentconstruction-standard training includes instruction in the following areas:
1. Asphalt paving
2. Bridging, nonstandard
3. Buildings
4. Concrete runways
5. Port facilities and navigational structures
6. Roads
7. Steel frame and block buildings
8. Steel structures
9. Utility distribution and storage systems.
110.7 Explain the three types of engineering Battlespace Functions that are assigned to the
Seabees: [ref. g, ch. 5, p. 5-2, par. 5.3]
 General Engineering Operations
116
COMMON CORE
110
o


Naval civil engineering forces execute general engineering operational tasks with Navy
organic components or through contracting and acquisition options.
Combat Engineering Operations
o Specific naval civil engineering forces have a role to “fight as infantry.” This role is limited
to Seabee units to conduct only defensive operations. Seabees have a limited capability
for combat engineering operations, which are secondary task assignments, such as
mobility, countermobility, and survivability tasks.
Geospatial Engineering Operations (Topography)
o Some naval civil engineering forces have a very limited organic capability in geospatial
engineering operations. Contracted engineering services for geospatial engineering
operations are acquired through the planning process.
Figure 7 Types of Military engineering
110.8 Discuss the following operational situations. [ref. g, ch. 5, p. 5-8]
a. Joint (par. 5.5.1)
 Naval civil engineering forces train to know how other service and coalition engineers and
nongovernmental organizations operate, and how naval civil engineering operations fit into the
joint environment.
b. Maritime Prepositioning Force (MPF) (par. 5.5.2)
 The rapid establishment of a combat-ready MAGTF ashore is accomplished by
combining the rapid movement of the MAGTF fly-in-echelon (FIE), made up of MPF
117
COMMON CORE
110
enablers and main party personnel, through strategic airlift with MAGTF equipment and
supplies loaded aboard a forward-deployed MPSRON. There are three MPSRONs in
the maritime prepositioning force. To assist the MAGTF with the off-load and staging of
the prepositioned sets on each MPSRON, a Navy support element (NSE) is required,
to which PHIBCBs are an integral part.
c. Counteracting Restriction to Movement (par. 5.5.4)
 When a unit exceeds the ability to maneuver around natural and artificial terrain,
engineers advise unit commanders about counteracting restrictions to movement in a
range of operational situations and environments. In their evaluation, engineers
consider the unit’s tactical situation, mission assignment, operational environment,
engineering capabilities, and equipment availability. They weigh the impact of the
tactical situation on engineer tactics, required equipment, and speed of mission
accomplishment in order to formulate recommendations to the unit commander.
d. Jungle (par. 5.5.3)
 Engineering operations in the jungle include road construction, stream crossing, expeditionary
airfield construction, water treatment, mine warfare, and mapping.
e. Mountain (par. 5.5.5)
 Engineer training that supports mountain operations includes cable and rope rigging,
demolition of rock formations, mountain climbing, mountain road clearing and
construction, employment of helicopters, expedient stream crossing, and bridge
construction. Seabees use mountainous terrain engineering and construction
capabilities, such as organic pioneering/heavy timber tool kits, CESE assets, and
quarry-blasting capability.
f. Cold Weather (par. 5.5.6)
 Seabees do not train for this type of environment; however, UCTs do conduct arctic
dive training operations. Seabees would need to be outfitted with cold weather gear.
CESE and tool kits would need to be outfitted with special fuel and petroleum, oil and
lubricants additives to function successfully in this environment.
g. Desert (par. 5.5.7)
 Seabee engineers supply special well-drilling and pumping equipment to supplement
JTF water purification and storage capabilities. Engineers build sand berms in desert
operations to protect against enemy attack and to deny enemy observation of troops.
Warfare in the desert requires little road construction. Flat, sandy desert terrain gives
vehicles nearly unrestricted mobility, especially tracked vehicles. The rainy season
requires bridging for gully crossing.
h. Gap Crossing (par. 5.5.8)
 Seabees do not have standard bridging assets in their TOA. Hasty, deliberate, and
retrograde gap-crossing operations require advanced planning for training,
coordination, and equipment. C2, planning, unit relationships and responsibilities, and
participation by various units are different with each type and size of crossing
operation. Deliberate gap crossing. Seabees have a robust bridging capability and are
able to adapt construction tactics and procedures to fit various situations. Because of
their pile-driving capability, Seabees can build a cofferdam to narrow a gap in order to
fit an available standard bridge set.
i. Military Operations in Urban Terrain (MOUT) (par. 5.5.9)
 Buildings in urban terrain are readily made into fortresses by reinforcing structures with local
material. Cellars, sewers, subway tunnels, thick masonry walls, and reinforced concrete floors
and roofs provide excellent cover and concealment. Obstacles created using craters, demolished
walls, overturned or derailed railroad cars, steel rails, autos, and rubble are excellent for
channeling troop movement easily covered by machinegun fire and artillery.Seabees support
construction projects in urban and populated areas even though they are not an offensive force.
A.Clearing rubble, removing obstacles, and widening roads after hazardous explosives
(mines, IEDs,
118
COMMON CORE
110
UXO) clearing operations have been conducted.
b. Securing subterranean avenues of approach, including sewers, subway systems, and
cellars.
c. Assessing the need for unique items such as rope ladders, grappling hooks, bridging
across buildings, nonexplosive obstacle construction/emplacement, and survivability
enhancements.
110.9 Discuss the following Joint Forward Operating Base (JFOB) site selection and layout
considerations. [ref. h, ch. 5]
a. General (p. 5-6)
 Regulations of the region
 Critical assets. Identify assets that need to be protects
 Procedural and operational considerations.
o Deliveries such as mail, construction material, trash, services
o Restricted areas
o Access controls.
 Occupancy requirements, space
o Available real estate and terrain
o Existing natural or man made features
 Dispersion and Standoff requirements.
 HN security requirements, restrictions, sensitivities
 Multinational force protection /security requirements
 Financial considerations, funding limitations for force protection.
 Construction considerations. Indigenous and other construction materials, equipment,
funding, labor, contractor support
 Safety considerations.
 Ammunition storage.
 Shelters and bunkers
b. Perimeter Security (p. 5-7)
 Layered defense. Perimeter security devices, (barriers, ECP, light, intrusion detection,
surveillance systems.
 Design the JFOB perimeter to do the following
o Provide an adequate blast standoff distance for a VBIED
o Limit or block sightlines form potential vantage points.
o Maximize the threat ingress/egress time across the site
o Enhance visual observation
 Perimeter Barriers, block sightline, screens, non-critical structures, hedges, HESCO’s
 Minimize access points
 Eliminate lines of approach/ access roads perpendicular to the JFOB,
 Eliminate potential hiding places near JFOB (clear fields of fire)
 Restrict parking near standoff zone

c. Critical Assets (p. 5-8)
 Locate critical assets in the interior of the JFOBS
 Deny aggressors a clear line of sight of critical assets.
 Create defensible space around clustered, functionally compatible critical assets that have
similar threat levels the reduce the area to be protected. However critical nodes such as
COC’s JOC’s
 Use of available space. Asset dispersion helps prevent against indirect fire but standoff
distance from perimeter provides better protection from VBIED’s.
 Locate an asset so that it is not accessible to direct of strait line vehicular access.
119
COMMON CORE
110



Minimize exterior signage showing where critical assets are.
Locate trash receptacles away from critical assets
Design structures that conceal assets, restrict access to assets and eliminate hiding
places
d. Utilities (p. 5-9)
 Provide secure access to power heat, gas, water, electrical. When possible provide
underground (concealed)
 Provide redundant utility systems.
 Provide redundant or looped electrical with quick connects for back up systems.
 Install a public address/mass notification systems.
 Secure all utility and maintenance penetration, concrete trenches, storm drains, duct
systems that go into the JFOB.
 Protect water treatment and storage facilities
 Minimize sins identifying critical utility complexes.
 Locate storage tanks and facilities for POL’s down slope from all other facilities.
e. Occupied Structures (p. 5-10)
 Locate high occupancy structures in the interior of the JFOB
 Avoid placing large numbers of personnel in one structure
 Maximize the distance between the perimeter fence and occupied structures
 Incorporate structural hardening techniques
 Minimize window area in structures to reduce risk of glass fragmentation.
 Construct doors that open outward.
 Lay out structures to conceal assets
 Design pedestrian traffic flow within structures to provide unobstructed observation or
people approaching controlled areas.
f. Commercial/Service Access (p. 5-10)
 Locate commercial and service vehicle delivery loading/off load areas off site.
 Provide signage that clearly marks separate entrances for deliveries, visitors, and
employees.
 Avoid having driveways within or under facilities.
110.10 Explain the fundamentals of a tent camp layout in relation to the following: [ref. f, ch. 10]


Latrines from messing facilities / Latrines from water supplies
o Latrines must be 100 yards from the nearest natural water source and food service
areas. The site should be reasonably near the user, but 50 feet from sleeping areas.
Garbage pits from water supplies / Garbage pits from messing facilities.
o A garbage pit must be at least 100 yards away from a water source and 30 yards away
from messing facilities.
110.11 Discuss the purpose of leach fields. [ref. d, ch. 10, p. 10-37]



Used to dispose sewage and gray water into the ground
Constructed of 4 to 6 inch perforated pipe
Laid out in a herringbone pattern with the laterals at right angles to the main distribution pipe.
110.12 Discuss the following as it pertains to camp maintenance: [ref. e, ch. 6]

120
Trouble desk
o The purpose of the camp maintenance desk is to receive all customer service calls.
COMMON CORE
110
o




The trouble desk coordinates the maintenance calls and tasks with the people who
provide the maintenance service.
o The trouble desk attendant enters all customer trouble calls into the trouble desk log
and fills out Emergency Service Authorization (ESA) forms.
Three types of work
o Emergency Service work
 All work requiring immediate action or any minor work requiring less than 16
man-hours and $100 in material costs is classified as emergency service work.
o Specific Job Order
 Orders are written to cover work for which individual job costs are desired
 Specific job orders take more than 16 man-hours to complete
o Standing Job Order
 Standing job orders are large repetitive jobs that require over 40 man-hours to
complete
Operators Inspection
 Performed by the operator assigned to the equipment
 The main purpose for using operating logs is to continuously record data on equipment
performance.
Control Inspection
o A control inspection reviews all camp facilities to determine the maintenance required
during a deployment to preserve or improve the condition of the camp structures and
property.
Maintenance inspection (p. 6-18)
110.13 Discuss the following: [ref. c]
 Potable water
o Water that does not contain pollution, contamination, or infective agents ad is
considered satisfactory for drinking
 Chlorination
o Chlorination is the most common method of disinfecting potable water.
o Water from systems where sanitary, physical, operating, defects, or other special
hazards are known to exist must be chlorinated to specific bacterial levels. Residual of
at least 2.0 ppm
 Super Chlorination
o Super Chlorination is the application of chlorine in dosages far in excess of the chlorine
demand for disinfecting.
o Super Chlorination is accomplished by chlorinating the water in a container or
distribution system to at least 100 parts per million (ppm)
110.14 Discuss the three parts of the Advanced Base Functional Component (ABFC) system and
explain their relationships. [ref. e, ch. 4, p. 4-1]
 Part 1, Component Site Plan
o Component is defined as a grouping of personnel and materials that has a specific
function or mission at an advanced base.
o Example: NMCB is a component
 Part 2, Facility Drawings
o Lists and describes by assembly number that assembly requirement for each facility
o Example: 250 Man Tent Camp
121
COMMON CORE

110
Assembly drawings
o Lists line-item requirements by nation Stock Number (NSN) for each assembly.
o Example: Tent 16 x 32
110.15 Describe the ABFC View Program and how it facilitates contingency planning. [ref. a]
 The ABFC View Program is a web-based database that consists of Navy wide TOA’s. They
can be viewed as components, facility, or assemblies. The database structure allows the user
to view all or just a piece of a component or facility, which allows for rapid task tailoring during
contingency planning.
111 CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, AND RADIOLOGICAL (CBR) WARFARE
FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] TM EE168-DB-OMP-010, Operator’s and Unit Maintenance Manual (including Repair
Parts and Special Tool List) for Alarm, Chemical Agent, Automatic, M-22
[b] NAVEDTRA 14057, Damage Controlman
[c] NAVEDTRA 14235, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 2
[d] TM 3-4240-346-109, Chemical Biological Mask Type, M-40A
[e] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
[f] FM 3-4, NBC Protection
[g] NAVMED P-5041, Treatment of Chemical Agent Casualties and Conventional Military
Chemical Injuries
[h] FM 3-3, Chemical and Biological Contamination Avoidance
[i] FM 3-5, NBC Decontamination
[j] Multiservice Tactics, Techniques, and Procedures for Nuclear, Biological, and
Chemical (NBC) Protection
[k] TM SS200-AP-MMO-010, Operator Manual for Joint Service Lightweight Integrated
Suit Technology (JSLIST) Chemical Protective Ensemble
[l] FM 3-7, NBC Field Handbook___________________________________________
111.1 Explain the following: [ref. e, ch. 9]
 Chemical warfare
o Intended for use in military operations to kill, seriously injure, or incapacitate man
due to its physiological effects.
o U.S. Policy: We will not use chemical weapons for any reason. (Chemical Warfare
Convention)
o Three types of antipersonnel agents
 Casualty (nerve, blister, blood, choking)
 Incapacitating (Depressants and stimulants)
 Harassing (tear and vomiting gases)
o Delivery of Chemical Weapons
 Direct dispersal (opening up a bottle upwind)
 Bursting type:
 Ground Burst
122
COMMON CORE



111
 Air Burst (artillery shells)
 Spray (air delivery).
 Thermal (rockets, explosives or pyrotechnics to deliver)
Biological warfare
o The intentional release of living organisms or substances produced by living
organisms to cause death or disease to man, domestic animals, crops, etc.
o They cause diseases such as typhoid fever, cholera, and influenza.
o Warfare types: bacteria, rickets, viruses, and fungi.
o U.S. Policy: We will not use biological weapons for any reason.
Radiological warfare
o The employment of nuclear weapons to destroy property and personnel
o Nuclear weapons produce explosions of great force and heat and release nuclear
radiation. Their primary purpose is the mass destruction of property and personnel.
Routes by which agents enter the body
o Skin
o Through secondary means such as water and food
o Eyes and linings of the mouth and nose
111.2 Describe the purpose of the following: [ref. b, ch. 9]


MCU-2/P (protective mask)
o Protects face, eyes, nose, throat and lungs from CBR agents or contamination
o Offers no protection against carbon monoxide or ammonia
o Filters the air removing particles of dust that may be radioactive or otherwise
contaminated
o Purifies the air of many poisonous gases
Chemical protective JSLIST ensemble (ref. b, ch. 9, p. 9-4)
o Provides protection against persistent (liquid) nerve, blister, and biological agents.
o Contact with petroleum, oils, and lubricants degrade protection.

Figure 8 Comparison of JSLIST over predessors.


123
Atropine/Pralidoxime Chloride (Oxime) (ref. e, ch. 9, p. 9-8)
o Used to counteract the effects of and relieve the symptoms of nerve agents only.
IM143/PD Pocket dosimeter (ref b, ch. 11, p. 11-5)
o Size and shape of a fountain pen.
COMMON CORE
o
111
Measure exposure to radiation over a period of time.
111.3 Describe the operation and maintenance of the protective mask: [ref. d]


Operation and maintenance remain the same as the MCU-2P. Only differences are the
face shield, the universal secondary skin found on the M-40, and eyeglass inserts.
MCU-2P Mask Maintenance [ch. 3]
o Remove the canister. Keep that dry.
o Clean with warm soapy water
o Air dry before storing in carrier
o Replace damaged or worn parts
o Pre-fit mask prior to storing in mask carrier
o Test drinking tube
o Conduct negative pressure test
111.4 Explain the three types of anti-personnel agents and their physical symptoms [ref. e, ch.
9, p. 9-1]
CASUALTY AGENTS are highly poisonous and are intended to kill or seriously injure. Included in
this group are nerve, blister, choking, and blood agents.
NONLETHAL INCAPACITATING AGENT,
An agent that produces temporary physiological or mental effects, or both, which will render individuals
incapable of concerted effort in the performance of their assigned duties
HARASSING AGENTS include tear and vomiting gases that cause temporary disability.
Pepper spray, CS gas, CN (mace).
124
COMMON CORE
Class of
agent
Nerve
Asphyxiant /
Blood
Agent Names
Cyclosarin(GF)
Sarin (GB)
Soman (GD)
Tabun (GA)
VX
VR
Someinsecticides
Novichokagents
Most Arsines
Cyanogen chloride
Hydrogen
cyanide
Mode of Action
Inactivates enzyme acetylcholinesterase, preventing
the breakdown of the neurotransmitter acetylcholine in
the victim's synapses and causing
both muscarinic and nicotinic effects
Arsine: Causes intravascular hemolysis that may lead
to renal failure.
Cyanogen chloride/hydrogen cyanide:
Cyanide directly prevents cells from using oxygen.
The cells then uses anaerobic respiration, creating
excess lactic acid and metabolic acidosis.
Sulfur
mustard(HD, H)
Vesicant
/Blister
Choking
/Pulmonary
Nitrogen
mustard (HN-1, HN2, HN-3)
Lewisite (L)
Phosgene
oxime (CX)
Chlorine
Hydrogen
chloride
Nitrogen
oxides
Phosgene
Tear gas
Pepper spray
Lachrymatory
agent
Incapacitating
Agent
15 (BZ)
Vapors: seconds to minutes;
Skin: 2 to 18 hours
VX is persistent and a
contact hazard; other
agents are nonpersistent and present
mostly inhalation
hazards.
Confusion
Nausea
Patients may gasp for air
Seizures prior to death
Immediate onset
Non-persistent and an
inhalation hazard.
Metabolic acidosis
Skin erythema with large fluid blisters that heal slowly
and may become infected
Mustards: Vapors: 4 to 6 hours,
eyes and lungs affected more rapidly;
Skin: 2 to 48 hours
Lewisite: Immediate
Persistent and a contact
hazard.
Airway irritation
Similar mechanism to blister agents in that the
compounds are acids or acid-forming, but action is
more pronounced in respiratory system, flooding it
and resulting in suffocation; survivors often suffer
chronic breathing problems.
Causes severe stinging of the eyes and temporary
blindness.
Causes atropine-like inhibition of acetylcholine in
subject. Causes peripheral nervous system effects
that are the opposite of those seen in nerve agent
poisoning.
Inhibit protein synthesis
Eye and skin irritation
Dyspnea, cough
Immediate to 3 hours
Non-persistent and an
inhalation hazard.
Powerful eye irritation
Immediate
Non-persistent and an
inhalation hazard.
May appear as mass drug intoxication with erratic
behaviors, shared realistic and distinct hallucinations,
disrobing and confusion
Skin: Up to 36 hours after skin
exposure to BZ. Duration is typically
72 to 96 hours.
Sore throat
Chest tightness
Wheezing
Bronchospasm
Hyperthermia
Ataxia (lack of coordination)
Mydriasis (dilated pupils)
Dry mouth and skin
Latent period of 4-8 hours, followed by flu-like
signs and symptoms
Progress within 18-24 hours to:
Inhalation: nausea, cough, dyspnea, pulmonary
edema
Ingestion: Gastrointestinal hemorrhage
with emesis andbloody diarrhea;
eventual liver and kidney failure.
125
Persistency
Mild respiratory distress to marked airway damage
Ricin
Abrin
Miosis (pinpoint pupils)
Blurred/dim vision
Headache
Nausea, vomiting, diarrhea
Copious secretions/sweating
Muscle twitching/fasciculations
Dyspnea
Seizures
Loss of consciousness
Possible cherry-red skin
Possible cyanosis
Rate of action
Tearing, conjunctivitis, corneal damage
Non-living biological
proteins, such as:
Cytotoxic
proteins
Signs and Symptoms
Severe skin, eye and mucosal pain and irritation
Agents are acid-forming compounds that damages
skin and respiratory system, resulting burns and
respiratory problems.
111
Inhaled: 30 minutes to 20 hours;
4-24 hours; see symptoms. Exposure
by inhalation or injectioncauses more
pronounced signs and symptoms than
exposure byingestion
Extremely persistent in
soil and water and on
most surfaces; contact
hazard.
Slight; agents degrade
quickly in environment
COMMON CORE
126
111
COMMON CORE
111
OLD.4 Explain the six types of chemical warfare agents and their physical symptoms
 Nerve Agents
o VX, Sarin (GB), Soman (GD), and Tabun (GA) [V and G Agents]
o Used as a quick-action casualty agent. When absorbed into the body though
inhalation or through the skin, they disrupt the nervous system.
o Symptoms
 Runny nose
 Tightness of chest with difficulty in breathing
 Contraction of pupils (Miosis)
 Nausea, cramps, headache, coma and convulsions
 Symptoms can take place in 30 seconds when the dose is sufficiently heavy
 Blister Agents
o Mustard (H), Arsenicals [Lewisite (L)], Urticants [Phosgene Oxime (CX)]
o Used as a delayed-action casualty agent
o Symptoms
 Eyes
 Redness and inflammation
 Watery
 Skin
 Skin starts to turn red after several hours
 Blisters appear on the skin
 Throbbing pain and swelling may be observed




127
Blood Agents
o Hydrogen Cyanide, Cyanogen Chloride, Arsine
o Used as a quick-action casualty agent
o Symptoms
 Range from convulsions to coma
 Interfere with the ability of oxygen-carrying cells to transfer oxygen to other
body tissues
 Irritating effect on nasal passages
Choking Agents
o Phosgene (CG), Diphosgene (DP), Chlorine (CL)
o Used as a delayed-action casualty agent
o Symptoms
 Low Concentrations
 Produce an action on the respiratory system that results in the
accumulation of fluid in the lungs
 Higher concentration
 Produce death for the same reason, but the upper respiratory tract
may be involved as well
Vomiting Agents
o Symptoms
 Cause violent, uncontrollable sneezing, cough, nausea, vomiting, and a
general feeling of body discomfort.
Tear Agents
o Symptoms
COMMON CORE


111
Act primarily on the eyes, causing intense pain and considerable flow of
tears
High concentrations affect the upper respiratory tract and lungs and cause
nausea and vomiting
111.5 Describe the following types of nuclear explosions [ref. b, ch. 10]
 Air burst (p. 10-3)
o Fire ball does not touch the earth
o All materials in fireball vaporized
o Maximize blast and thermal effect over large area
 High altitude burst (p. 10-3)
o A high altitude burst is one in which the weapon is exploded at such an altitude
(above 30 km) that initial soft x-rays generated by the detonation dissipate energy
as heat in a much larger volume of air molecules. There the fireball is much larger
and expands much more rapidly. The ionizing radiation from the high altitude burst
can travel for hundreds of miles before being absorbed. Significant ionization of the
upper atmosphere (ionosphere) can occur. Severe disruption in communications
can occur following high altitude bursts. They also lead to generation of an intense
electromagnetic pulse (EMP) which can significantly degrade performance of or
destroy sophisticated electronic equipment. There are no known biological effects
of EMP; however, indirect effects may result from failure of critical medical
equipment.
 Surface burst (p. 10-3)
o Fireball touches earth
o Surface material vaporized and lifted in the air
o Produces large amount of fallout
o Range of blast less than air burst
 Underwater burst (p. 10-3)
o Practically all thermal radiation absorbed
o Large base surge is formed which billows up several hundred feet
 Underground burst (p. 10-4)
o A subsurface burst is an explosion in which the point of the detonation is beneath
the surface of land or water. Cratering will generally result from an underground
burst, just as for a surface burst. If the burst does not penetrate the surface, the
only other hazard will be from ground or water shock. If the burst is shallow enough
to penetrate the surface, blast, thermal, and initial nuclear radiation effects will be
present, but will be less than for a surface burst of comparable yield. Local fallout
will be very heavy if penetration occurs.
111.6 Describe the following effects of nuclear explosions
 Air Blast (p. 10-5)
o Primary blast injuries result from the direct action of the air shock wave on the
human body
o Secondary blast injuries are caused mainly by collapsing buildings and by timber
and other debris flung about by the blast
 Thermal Radiation (p. 10-6)
o Primary burns are a direct result of the thermal radiation from the bomb
o Secondary burns are the result of fires caused by the explosions
o Flash blindness
 Nuclear radiation (p. 10-6)
o Alpha particles
 Heaviest of all known radiation
 +2 charge
 Range of 0 to 3” in the air.
128
COMMON CORE


111
 Internal hazard will not penetrate skin/clothing
 Taken through ingestion
o Beta particles
 Enter through the skin or ingestion, carried in contaminated dust, dirt, or
bomb residue
 -1 charge
 Range of 6 to 10’ in the air
 Is an internal/external hazard. Requires more protection than Alpha.
o Gamma Rays
 Pure energy which can penetrate every region of the body.
 No charge
 You cannot stop Gamma. You can only reduce intensity and exposure
levels by shielding with something heavily dense like lead.
o Neutrons
 Have the greatest penetrating power of the nuclear radiation hazards
 It can be stopped by 1 to 2 feet of water, cadmium, wax, oil, or polyethylene.
Electromagnetic Pulse (EMP) phenomenon (p. 10-6)
o An EMP is an intense burst of radio-frequency radiation generated by a nuclear
explosion
o The strong, quick-rising surges of electric current induced by EMP in power
transmission lines and long antennas could burn out most unprotected electrical
and electronic equipment.
Fallout (p. 10-7)
o The residual radioactive material propelled into the upper atmosphere following
a nuclear blast, so called because it "falls out" of the sky after the explosion
and shock wave have passed. It commonly refers to the radioactive dust and ash
created when a nuclear weapon explodes. This radioactive dust, consisting of
material either directly vaporized by a nuclear blast or charged by exposure, is a
highly dangerous kind of radioactive contamination. It can lead to the contamination
of aquifers and devastate the effected ecosystem years after the initial exposure.
111.7 Define Mission Oriented Protective Posture (MOPP) and discuss the levels [ref. f, ch. 2,
pp. 2-1 thru 2-3)
MOPP
MASK
LVL
OVERGARMENT
OVERBOOTS
WITH HOOD
GLOVES_
1
WORN, OPEN OR
CARRIED
CARRIED
CARRIED
CLOSED BASED ON
TEMPERATURE
________________________________________________________________________
2
SAME AS MOPP 1
WORN
CARRIED
CARRIED
________________________________________________________________________
3
SAME AS MOPP 1
WORN
WORN, HOOD
CARRIED
OPEN OR CLOSED
BASED ON TEMP
__________________________________________________________________________
4
WORN, CLOSED
WORN
WORN, HOOD
WORN
CLOSED
129
COMMON CORE
111
OLD.8 Describe the correct procedures for inspecting, maintaining, and donning the CPO chemical
protective ensemble [ref. k, ch. 2, pp. 2-1 thru 2-11]







130
Inspect and Maintain CPO
o CPO inspection
o Ensure the bag is solid and not soft when squeezing the bag.
o Expiration date
o Tears
CPO Maintenance
o Keep dry
o Store in bag when not worn
o Avoid POL’s
o Maximum number of washes is 6.
Gloves and Boots
o Inspect for wear and tears
Donning the CPO Chemical Protective Overgarment
o Don the trousers and tighten the waist by using the hook and pile fasteners
o Bring the straps over your shoulders and cross them across your chest. Insert
straps into the belt loops and secure them snugly
o Don the smock
o Secure bottom of smock with hook and pile fasteners
Donning the overboots
o Attach the laces to the toe loop, making sure that the laces are centered
o Put a lace through each of the holes on the sides of the boot and pull them up snug
o Cross the laces over the instep
o Put one lace through each of the holes at the heal, inserting them from inside to
outside and pulling the laces snug
o Again cross the laces over the instep
o Thread the laces through the holes on the side again from inside to outside
o Cross the laces over the instep one more time and pull them snug
o Wrap the laces behind the ankle and back to the front. Tie the laces securely
Notes
o Trousers are worn over the boots
o White cotton undergloves and black, butyl rubber chemical protective outer gloves
are worn under the sleeves
o The use of M9 tape at the wrists and ankles is a common procedure to protect
against loosening of hook and pile seals and to provide additional sealant
protection
Donning the Mask
o Open mask carrier with left hand
o Hold bottom of mask carrier with your left hand while removing the mask with your
right hand
o Slide your thumbs inside the facepiece under all of the head harness straps. Grasp
the top of the facepiece and thrust your chin forward
o Hold your head still while you raise the mask to your out-thrust chin and bring the
harness over the back of your head.
o Center the head pad
o Grasp the tab ends of the lower straps and tighten them.
o Close the outlet valve with the heel of your hand. Breathe out forcibly to clear the
mask.
o Test the mask for fit and for possible leakage by placing your palms over the
canisters. When you inhale normally, the mask should collapse against your face.
COMMON CORE
111
111.9 Describe the colors and markings of the NATO biological, chemical, and radiological
marker signs [ref. e, ch. 9, p. 9-19]
 All signs measure 11” across the top and 8” along the sides of the triangle. The signs come
in the STANAG 2002 marking kit.
o CHEMICAL
 Yellow triangle with “GAS” written in 2” red block letters
 Write the date, time and agent name (if known) on the front of the triangle
o BIOLOGICAL
 Blue triangle with the letters “BIO” in red 2” block letters
 Write the date, time of detection and name of agent if known on the front of
the triangle
o RADIOLOGICAL
 White triangle with the word “ATOM” written in 2” black letters
 Write the dose rate, date/time of reading and the date/time of burst (if
known) on the front of the sign
111.10 Describe the color the M-9 chemical agent detector tape turns after it comes in contact
with a liquid or blister agent [ref. e, ch. 9, p. 9-6)
 Detects the presence of liquid nerve and blister agents
 Spots or streaks on the tape appear pink, red-brown, red-purple, or any shade of red,
indicate it has been exposed to a chemical agent
111.11 Describe the colors that M-8 paper turns after it comes in contact with a liquid nerve or
blister agent. [ref. b, ch. 9, p. 9-11]
 This paper turns colors when the paper touches a chemical agent.
o V-type nerve agent turns the paper dark green
o G-type nerve agent turns it yellow
o Blister agent turns it red.
 Person who reads it must not be colorblind.
111.12 Explain the following as it applies to nerve agents: [ref. g, sec. F]
 Symptoms
o Contraction of Pupils (Miosis)
o Unexplained runny nose
o Unexpected sudden headache
o Drooling
o Tightness in chest/difficulty in breathing
o Localized sweating/muscle twitching in contaminated area of the skin
o Stomach cramps
o Nausea
 Contents of Nerve Agent Antidote Kit (NAAK) MK1
o Auto-injectors
o 1ea Atropine (Green plastic needle end, yellow safety cap)
o 1ea 2PAM Chloride (Black needle end, gray safety cap)
o 3 NAAK Kits plus 1 CANA are issued to each person. CANA is only used during
buddy aid and when convulsions are present. If it has flanges, it’s CANA.
 Treatment (self and buddy aid)
o Treatment self
 Don the protective mask
 Remove a NAAK from the protective mask carrier
 Inject the meaty part of the thigh with the first injector from the kit (atropine)
hold against the thigh for at least 10 seconds
131
COMMON CORE
111

o
Follow immediately with second injector of 2-pam chloride and hold for at
least 10 seconds.
 Bend needle to from a hook and place on the protective outergarment
 Massage injection site if time permits
 Wait 10 – 15 minutes before administering second series of injections (no
more than two)
Treatment buddy
 Mask the casualty
 Using the casualties NAAK administer three sets of injections immediately
and in rapid succession in the thigh muscle of the leg.
 Hook the expended auto-injectors to the overgarment pocket flap of the
casualty
 Administer the back pressure arm-lift method of artificial ventilation if
breathing is difficult or has ceased
 Administer CANA after third set if he’s undergoing convulsions
111.13 Describe the steps and procedures in utilizing the M-295 and M-291 decontamination
kits. [ref. i, ch. 2, p. 2-1 thru 2-2]
 M291 Skin Decontamination kit (Replaces the M258A1)
o Wallet-like pouch with 6 decon packets
o Black, reactive, and absorbent resin powder
o Attached strap for inserting finger. Pat powder onto skin.
 M-295 is a large version of the M291 and is used for equipment decon
111.14 State how long the Joint Service Lightweight Integrated Suit Technology (JSLIST) suit
will provide protection from chemical agents once it is removed from the packaging under the
following conditions: [ref. k, par. A]
 Wash/wear life for chemical protective readiness:
o Uncontaminated environment (whichever comes first).............. 6 launderings/45
days of wear/120 calendar days after removal from factory vacuum-sealed bag
 Wear life for chemical protective readiness, once chemically
contaminated...................................................................... 24 hours
111.15 Discuss laundering procedures for the JSLIST. [ref. k, par. A]
 For mission-ready JSLIST chemical protective overgarment, the following cleaning
precautions must be adhered to, or chemical/biological exposure in real-life scenarios may
result:
o Do not starch, bleach, dry clean, or steam press any items.
o Do not attempt stain removal on mission-ready items, as it may result in damage to
clothing (stain removal only authorized on training items).
o CAUTION: Prior to laundering and drying, make sure all slide fasteners are
engaged and all hooks are fastened to prevent rips and tears during laundering.
o Laundering. Approved laundering methods are as follows:
 Field laundering. Refer to FM 10-280 (Appendix A, Formula II), Mobile Field
Laundry Clothing Exchange and Bath Operations. Navy personnel refer to
NAVEDTRA 10176 (Formula III), Ship’s Serviceman 3.
 Machine (home)/hand laundering. Use permanent press wash cycle, or
hand wash using warm water 90-110°F (32-43°C) and mild non-phosphate
laundry detergent.
 Stain removal. Stain removal is only authorized for training items; it is not
authorized for mission-ready items. Refer to FM 21-15 (Chapter 2 and
Appendix D), Care and Use of Individual Clothing and Equipment, for
instructions on stain removal.
132
COMMON CORE
o
o
111
Drying. Approved drying methods are as follows:
 Field tumble drying. Use FM 10-280 (Appendix A, Formula II), ), Mobile
Field Laundry Clothing Exchange and Bath Operations. Shipboard
personnel refer to Naval Ships’ Technical Manual, Chapters 470 and 655,
concerning dryers installed on specific ship classes.
 Machine (home) drying. Tumble dry, at low temperature 110-120°F (4348°C) and remove immediately from dryer.
 Hang drying. To drip dry, remove from water and place on rust-proof
hanger. Do not puncture JSLIST chemical protective overgarment when
hang drying on a clothesline, on rust-proof hangers, or for the purpose of
identification, since puncturing will compromise CB protection.
Record of laundering. Always mark the next laundering record box on the clothing
garment label (see Chapter 1), with an indelible marker, after any laundering. For
field laundry, the laundry operation personnel are responsible for marking the
garment.
111.16 Discuss the following types of decontamination: [ref. c, ch. 6]
 Immediate
o Skin decon
o To include yourself and your weapon
o Operator spray down
 Operational
o Allows a force to fight longer and sustain its mission while contaminated.
o Removal of gross contaminants
o MOPP gear exchange
o Jiffy (Dahlke Decon)
 Thorough
o Detailed troop and equipment decon
o Reduce contaminants to a negligible risk
111.17 Discuss the procedure for setting up a personnel decontamination line. [ref. l, ch. 3 p.
3.1]
 The PDS is set up in a secure, uncontaminated area upwind from the contaminated site.
o Personnel from both the decontamination and the supported unit operate the PDS
under the supervision of the Chemical, Biological, and Radiological Defense
Officer.
o Removing contaminated MOPP gear, decontaminating the Protective mask and
weapon are the major actions in the Detailed Troop Decontamination (DTD). The
web gear is buried since it can not be fully decontaminated.
o The CBR Team is responsible for setting up, operating, and closing the DTD in a
thorough decon site.
o The CBR office recommends to the COC the general location of the DTD within the
decon site
 8 Station 17 personal, CBR6, S4 rep, HM, 12 attendants, 2 monitors.
o 1 Individual Gear decon Contamination control line
o 2 Overboot and hood decon
o 3 Overgarment removal
o 4 Overboot and glove removal, Liquid control line
o 5 Monitor
o 6 Mask removal
o 7 Mask Decon Point, Vapor control line
o 8 Reissue point
133
COMMON CORE
111
o
111.18 Discuss the procedure for setting up a detailed equipment decontamination line. [ref. l,
ch. 3 p. 3-1]
 Stations should be 30 – 50m apart
 Station 1: Initial wash
o Remove gross contamination and dirt from vehicles.
 Station 2: Decontaminant Application
o Need an ample supply of HTH Bleach.
o Vehicle is divided into 4 parts. A member of the scrubbing team is assigned to
each part of the vehicle starting at the top and working toward the undercarriage.
 Station 3: Interior Decon
 Station 4: Rinse

Decontamination Site Considerations
o Ample water supply (adjacent to streams lakes that are not contaminated)
O Good drainage to control the contamination that washes off.
O Off the main route (Avoid spreading of contamination)
O Upwind from the contaminated area.
111.19 Discuss the duties and responsibility of the following CBR team: [ref. i, ch. 4; ref. j, ch.
4]
 Personal DECON [ref i, ch. 4, p. 4-6]
o Set up and operate the Detailed Troop Decontamination
134
COMMON CORE
o
135
111
COMMON CORE
136
o
111
COMMON CORE



137
Vehicle DECON [ref i, ch. 4, p. 4-18]
Set up and operate the Detailed Equipment Decontamination/Jiffy Decon
111
COMMON CORE

111
Survey/monitor team [ref h, ch. 5, p. 5-1]
o Find/Identify contamination or monitor movement/levels of existing contamination.
111.20 State the purpose and the optimum location of the M-22 chemical alarm. [ref. a, ch. 2,
sec 1, p. 2-1]
 Purpose
o The ALARM, CHEMICAL AGENT, AUTOMATIC: M22 detects and senses chemical
Warfare nerve (G or V-Series) and blister (H-Series) agents in the air and provides
a visual and audible warning via the built-in display and audible alarm or the ABCAM42 Alarm Unit. The M22 bar-graph display indicates the concentration levels of
the hazardous agent vapors detected by agent class.
o Basic Components
 M88 Detector Unit, M42 Remote Alarm, the M28 Power Supply or Battery
(BA5590) and the M281 Mounting Kit
o Optimum Location
 M88 – Placed Upwind
138
COMMON CORE




111
M42 – Placed downwind inside camp
Maximum of 5 M42 Alarms can be attached to 1 M88.
Maximum distance from M42 to M88 is 400m
When fixed emplacement, M88 is placed 150 meters forward of the FLOT and
300 meters between power sources.
111.21 Explain the three types of CBR surveys and their uses. [ref. h, ch. 5]
 Point Survey
o Get directly to the pointed area (Grid coordinate)
 Route survey
o Routes and specific points may be surveyed if that information is usually found
during recon operations
o If conducted, the survey team goes to a specific point or points along a route and
tests for the presence of liquid contamination with M8 paper or M9 detector tape
 Area survey
o The goal of an area surveillance mission is to provide a tailored detection capability
in those tactical situations where it is impractical to employ remote point samplers,
such as M8A1 system.
111.22 Describe what type of standard decontamination agent reacts violently with liquid
mustard agent? [ref. i, app. D]
 Super Tropical Bleach (STB) reacts violently by igniting spontaneously upon contact with
liquid mustard agent
 STB should not be inhaled or come in contact with the skin. STB gives off toxic vapors
upon contact with G agents.
111.23 Discuss the following as it relates to CBR: [ref. i, ch. 4]
 Chemical
o Pre-attack actions
 Extended wear of protective clothing. (The individual may have to adapt to
wearing protective clothing and equipment for extended periods.)
 M9 Chemical Agent Detector Paper. Attach to clothing. If spots or streaks
on the paper appear pink, red-brown, red-purple or any shad of red, assume
it has been exposed to a chemical agent.
 Individuals must remain alert and constantly aware of the chemical threat.
 Protection of Individual Equipment. Keep equipment and supplies
organized and covered
o Attack
 Stop breathing. Close eyes.
 Don protective mask
 Give the alarm
 Continue the mission and wait for further orders
 Assist others when the situation permits
o After-attack
 Remain in protective gear and continue your mission
 Give first aid to casualties in the immediate vicinity when the situation and
mission permit
 Await the commanders orders for unmasking
 Issue the NBC 1 Report.

139
Nuclear Attack Actions
o Pre-attack actions
 Fighting position
COMMON CORE
111




o
o
The deeper the fighting hole, the more protection it provides
An overhead covering of earth or other material will help reduce the
amount of thermal and initial nuclear radiation and fallout material from
reaching the individual
 Cover must be sturdy enough to withstand the blast wave
Field Shelters
 Tunnels, caves and storm drains provide effective shelter. Vehicles
made of steel provide some protection.
Supplies and Equipment
 Equipment and supplies not being worn should be placed in the
fighting hole to prevent them from becoming missiles.
Attack
 Drop flat on the ground facedown or to the bottom of a fighting hole.
 Close your eyes
 Protect exposed skin from heat by putting your hands and arms near or
under your body. Keep your helmet on.
 Remain down until after the blast has passed and debris has stopped
falling.
 Stay clam, check for injury, check weapons and equipment for damage, and
prepare to continue mission
After-attack
 Begin fallout monitoring
 Bathe and change clothes as soon as possible
 Avoid breathing dust (place handkerchief or similar cloth over mouth)
 Remember run off water is contaminated.
OLD.24 Explain and discuss the following dosimetry equipment: [ref. h, ch. 4]




IM 143
o It is a direct reading instrument capable of detecting and recording a total dose of
up to 600 roentgens. It is termed a pocket dosimeter and is about the size and
shape of a fountain pen.
IM 9
o Pocket dosimeter that measures from 0 to 200 milliroentgens.
PP4276
o Charger for the IM143 and IM9 that also zeros it out.
ANPDQ1
o Multi-function Radiac set. Handheld electronic monitoring device containing an
internal gamma detector and measurement probes for Alpha, Beta, Gamma,
Neutron, and X-ray.
111.25 Discuss the following regarding the M-256 detection kit. [ref. h, ch. 3, p. 3-5]
a. Types of agents detected
 Each sampler/detector detects harmful vapor concentrations of nerve, blister, and
blood agents. It changes color upon contact with chemical agents at concentrations
hazardous to an unmasked person.
b. Time required to complete test
 Full test takes about 15 minutes not counting the time to get the survey team
together as well as convoying, patrolling to test site.
111.26 Explain the proper steps for donning the JSLIST chemical protective ensemble. [ref j, p.
1-183]
140
COMMON CORE
MOPP Level 1. When directed to this level, don the following:
(1) Don trousers.
(a) With toes extended, put leg into trousers (1) and pull trousers
up; repeat for other leg.
(b) Close slide fastener (2) and fasten two fly opening snaps (3).
(c) Pull the suspenders (4) over the shoulders; fasten the snap
couplers (5) and adjust suspenders to ensure the trousers fit
comfortably up into the inseam. Trouser length can be adjusted by
raising or lowering the suspenders. (d) Adjust waistband hook-andpile fastener tapes (6) for snug fit.
(2) Don coat.
(a) Don coat (1); fasten and close slide fastener (2) up as far as
chest.
(b) Secure front closure flap (3) hook-and-pile fastener tape up as
far as chest.
(c) Pull bottom of coat (1) down over trousers (4).
(d) Pull ends of waist elastic coat retention cord (5) through the
front of the coat to obtain a secure fit around the waist and tie the
ends into a bow.
MOPP Level 2. When directed to this level, additionally don the following:
(1) Don MULOs (1) over combat boots. Adjust and secure strap-and-buckle
fasteners (2).
(2) Pull legs of trousers (3) over MULOs (1); secure two hook-and-pile
fastener tapes on each ankle (4) so they fit snugly
around MULOs (1).
MOPP Level 3. When directed to this level, additionally don the following:
(1) Don chemical protective mask (see Appendix A for appropriate
publication); adjust head harness and check for good seal.
(2) Pull hood (1) over chemical protective mask.
(3) Close slide fastener (2) completely and secure closure hook-and-pile
fastener tape (3) up as far as top of slide fastener (2).
(4) Place edge of hood (1) around edge of mask and secure hook-and-pile
fastener tape (4).
(5) Snap barrel locks (5) together under chin. Squeeze barrel lock ends
together. Pull both drawcords (6) at the same
time and slide barrel locks up to hood (1) to maintain hood seal.
(6) Have another person check hood (1) seal around mask to ensure hood
is positioned properly and skin is not exposed. Some discomfort may be
experienced in the neck area of JSLIST coat due to the close fitting in the
neck area.
MOPP Level 4. When directed to this level complete and additionally don
the following:
(1) Untie bow in coat retention cord. Bend over and each between legs and
grasp waist elastic coat retention cord loop (1); bring coat retention cord
loop (1) forward through legs, pulling on it so bottom of coat (2) fits snugly
over trousers (3).
(2) Place waistband coat retention cord loop (1) over webbing strip (4) at
bottom of coat (2); fasten webbing strip snap (5) to keep retention cord
loop (1) in place. Some discomfort may be experienced in the crotch area
due to the coat retention cord.
141
111
COMMON CORE
111
NOTE
Waistband can be readjusted by tying a bow in coat retention cord at front
of waist, if necessary.
(3) Pull sleeves (6) up arm; don butyl rubber gloves (7) with liners and pull
cuffs (8) over gloves.
(4) Secure hook-and-pile fastener tape on each wrist (9) for snug fit around
arm.
MOPP Level Alpha
The mask, gloves and hood are worn but not the protective
overgarment
Called when upwind of a negligible vapor hazard agent or when
inside vehicles or buildings.
112 EMBARKATION FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVEDTRA 14233, Naval Construction Force/Seabee 1 & C
[b] AMCAW 36-101, Vol. I, AMC Affiliations Program Equipment Preparation Course
[c] AMCAW 36-101, Vol. II, AMC Affiliations Program Airlift Planner’s Course
[d] NAVFAC P-1051, Container Operations Manual for the NCF
[e] COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBINST 4627.1, NCF MPF Operations
[f] P-1049, Naval Construction Force Mobilization Manual
[g] NWP 4-04.1, Seabee Operations in the MAGTF
[h] OPNAVINST 4600.26, TCAIMS II______________________________________________
112.1 Define the following as applied to embarkation: [ref. c, Glossary]
 ACL (Allowable Cabin /Cargo load)
o Amount of passengers/cargo that may be transported by a specific aircraft.
 TALCE (Tactical Airlift Control Element)
o Supports airlift missions where command control, mission reporting, and / or
support functions are limited or do not exist.
 Marshalling
o Process by which units move equipment, cargo, and personnel to temporary
staging area near embarkation points.
 AACG (Arrival Airfield Control Group)
o Responsible for receiving all airlifted items and movement from airfield to
deployment site.
 DACG (Departure Airfield Control Group)
o Responsible for controlling the flow of personnel, cargo, and equipment from the
marshalling area to the aircraft.
112.2 Describe the following as it pertains to how equipment and cargo are to be prepared for
air and sea movement.
a. Palletization [ref. b, ch. 3, p. 3-1]
142
COMMON CORE
b. Weighing and Marking [ref. b, ch. 4, p. 4-1]
c. Shoring [ref. b, ch. 6, p. 6-1]
143
112
COMMON CORE
112
d. Joint Inspections [ref. b, ch. 7, p. 7-1]
112.3 State the primary use and mission of the following three types of Air Mobility Command
(AMC) organic aircraft
 C-130 [ref c, ch. 3, p 3-1]
o Tactical aircraft used for in-theater operations
o Planning ACL 25,000 lbs.
o Maximum cargo dimensions
144
COMMON CORE



112
 115” X 105”
o Six 463L pallet positions
o Maximum seating for 90 passengers, but limited to 74 passenger over water
C-141B Starlifter (PHASED OUT)
o Strategic aircraft used for global movement
o Planning ACL 50,000 lbs.
o Maximum cargo dimension
 117” X 105”
o Thirteen 463L pallet positions
o Maximum seating capacity for 200 passenger, but limited to 153 passengers over
water
C-17 Globemaster III
o Strategic/tactical aircraft used for inter-theater and in-theater transportation of
troops and outsized cargo
o ACL 90,000 lbs.
o Maximum cargo dimension
 196”W x 143”H
o Eighteen 463L pallet positions in the logistics restraint rail system
o Eleven 463L pallets in the aerial delivery rail system
o Minimum runway 3,000 ft
o Maximum seating for 102 passengers
C-5A Galaxy
o Global strategic aircraft used for inter-theater transport of troops and outsized
cargo.
o Planning ACL 150,000 lbs.
o Maximum cargo dimensions
 228”W x 162”H
o Thirty six 463L pallet positions
o Maximum seating for 343 passengers, but limited to 329 passengers over water
112.4 Describe the different types of cargo containers that may be used for unit movements.
[ref. d, ch. 12]







145
Kit and mount-out boxes
o 20”W x 48”L
o 250 lbs. per box
TRICONS
o 6 ½’ x 8’ x 8’
Standard 20
o 8’ x 8’ x 20’
Configured 20
o 8’ x 8’ x 20’
o with built-in cabinets
Flatrack
o 8’ x 8’ x 20’
o Open ended
Half Height
o 8’ x 4’ x 20’
SIXCON
o 61/2’ x 8’ x 4’
o used to transport fuel and water
COMMON CORE
112
OLD.1 Describe the organization and makeup of an air detachment and state its required deployable
time frame. [ref. h, ch. 2]
 Air Detachment (P25MCA)
o 89 people
o 34 pieces of CESE
o 250 – 300 short tons of cargo
o Deploy within 48 hours
o Self sufficient for 30 days (except for food, fuel and ammo)
o Repairs war damage and / or construct urgent projects
OLD.2 Explain the operations of the Mount Out Control Center (MOCC). [ref. a, ch. 4]
 Controls, coordinates, and monitors the movement of all personnel, supplies, and
equipment to an embarkation staging area.
OLD.4 Describe how equipment and cargo are to be prepared for air/sea/rail movement. [ref. b, ch. 7]
 CESE
o Cleaned
o Mechanically inspected
o Reduced height (remove ROPs)
o Mobile loaded (if necessary)
o Weighed, and marked with center of balance
o Staged
 Cargo
o Inventoried
o Palletized
o 463L aircraft pallet (AIR)
o 40” X 48” wood pallet (SEA)
o Containerized in appropriate ISO container
o Weighed and marked/staged
 463L Pallet
o Exterior dimension 108” X 88”…Usable dimension 104” X 84”
o Maximum cargo height 96”
o 10,000 lbs. max (netted load)… 7,500 lbs. preferred weight
o Weight: 290 lbs./ Two green nets (sides) and one yellow net (top) 65lbs
o Aluminum shell with a balsa wood interior
o Able to be locked into the aircraft rail system
112.6 Describe what is on the Convoy Commander’s checklist. [ref. f, app. A]
 Mission Requirements
 Reconnaissance
 Route Selection
 Liaison and Coordinate
 Convoy Organization
 Convoy Organization (Continued)
 Movement Plan
 Security Enroute
 Security Enroute (Continued)
 Service Support
 Communications
 Convoy Commander’s After-Action Report
Mission Requirements
146
Movement Plan
Movement Plan (Continued)
COMMON CORE
Current Intelligence/Situation
Vehicles: Type and Quantity
Personnel
Cargo by Type, Class, and Size
Security Vehicles: Type and Qty
Maintenance Vehicles
Materials Handling Equipment
Command and Control Vehicles:
Type and quantity
Lighting/Blackout
Conditions/NVGs
Reconnaissance
Map and Photo
Physical
Route Selection
Road
Bridges and Tunnels
Grades and Curves
Traffic Density
Rqmts for Route Prep or Repair
Liaison and Coordinate
Units along Route
Units Being Moved
Supporting Units
Highway Control Agencies
/Movement Control Centers
Shippers/Cargo Handlers
Engineer/EOD requirements
Convoy Organization
Size of Serials/March Units
Type of Column
Operating Gaps
Serials/March Units
Convoy Organization
Vehicles
Positions of Security and
Supporting Units
Positions of Control
Personnel/Escorts Guides
Organization for Command
Vehicle Marking
Controlled Route
Convoy Clearance/Movement
Credit
Road Movement Table
Special Permits or Authorization
Dist, Time, and Speed
Trip Distance
Required Start Time
Column Length
Slowest Vehicle
Required Delivery Time
Rate of Movement/Speed
(Speedometer Multiplier)
Maximum Catch-up Speed
Loading
Time and Place
Report to
Type/Class Cargo
Outsize Loads
MHE Required
Blocking, Bracing, and Cargo
Restraints
Staging
Location
Vehicle Checks
Cargo Checks
Time to Start Point
Operator Briefing
Start Point
Location/Grid Coordinates
Identification Characteristics
Checkpoints
Locations/Grid Coordinates
Identification Characteristics/
Alphanumeric Designators
Guides and Markers
Positions
Posting and Pickup
Halts
Purpose
Time Duration
Locations
Maintenance
Trail
Enroute Support
Medical Support
Organic Capability
OLD.7 Explain how convoy road routes are classified. [ref. f, app. D]

147
Green: Relatively safe from hostile activity
112
Evacuation
Release Point
Location/Grid Coordinates
Identification Characteristics
Report Requirements
Control of Vehicles and
Operators
Unloading
Time and Place
Report to HHQ at Destination
MHE Required
Backload and Turn Around
Security Enroute
Action in Event of Attack
Security Enroute (Continued)
Air Attack
Artillery Attack
Ground Attack
Sniper
Air Support Procedures
Fire Support Procedures
Use of Lights/Blackout
Restrictions
Service Support
Fuel
Location/Times
Types and Quantity
Accompanying Convoy
Messing/Rations
Locations/Times
Units on Route
Prescribed Loads
Communications
Convoy Control Net
Serial/March Unit Commanders
Parent Unit/Headquarters
Alert/Broadcast Net
Security/Tactical Nets
Fire and Air Support Nets
Medical Evacuation
Visual Signals
Sound Signals
Interpreter Requirements
Convoy Commander’s AfterAction Report
COMMON CORE



112
Yellow: Subject to limited activity
Red: Hostile activity is imminent
Black: Road is closed
OLD.8 What factors determine the speed at which a convoy will move? [ref. f, ch. 4]

Normal speed at the lead of the column in a combat situation is 5 to 10 miles per hour
(mph) below posted speed limits with a maximum speed that allows for regaining lost
distances. The rate of speed is determined by:
o Physical condition and level of training of the vehicle operators.
o Types and mechanical condition of the convoy vehicles.
o Degree of urgency the move requires.
o Condition of the road net (dust, mud, snow, and ice).
o Physical characteristics of the roadway along the route (grades, sharp turns,
congestion).
o Weather conditions
112.4 Describe the different types of cargo containers that may be used for unit movements.
[ref. d, ch. 12]







Kit and mount-out boxes
o 20”W x 48”L
o 250 lbs. per box
TRICONS
o 6 ½’ x 8’ x 8’
Standard 20
o 8’ x 8’ x 20’
Configured 20
o 8’ x 8’ x 20’
o with built-in cabinets
Flatrack
o 8’ x 8’ x 20’
o Open ended
Half Height
o 8’ x 4’ x 20’
SIXCON
o 61/2’ x 8’ x 4’
o used to transport fuel and water
112.5 Discuss the MPF. [ref. e]


148
The maritime pre-positioning concept calls for the ships of the MPSRON to be forwarddeployed with the combat equipment and sustaining supplies for a MAGTF (up to a MEF).
When the MPF operation is ordered, the Marines, Sailors, and Seabees of the MAGTF,
NSE, and NCR are airlifted by the Air Mobility Command (AMC) to the arrival and
assembly area where the MPSRON ships are off-loaded and the combat units are
assembled with their equipment and supplies. Fixed wing aircraft and CH-53E helicopters
(if feasible) are flight ferried/self deployed to a suitable airfield in the designated arrival and
assembly area.
Once the equipment and supplies have been offloaded and issued to the units, command,
control, and communications have been established, and the MAGTF commander has
stated that he is combat ready, the MPF operation will be terminated and operational
COMMON CORE
112
control of the MAGTF will be transferred to the numbered fleet commander, joint/combined
task force commander, or the geographic Commander, Marine Forces (COMMARFOR),
which ever is appropriate, for subsequent operations ashore. A fully capable MEF Forward
sized MAGTF can be combat ready in a maximum of ten days after commencement of the
off-load and, because of the maritime pre-positioning of supplies and equipment, can be
self-sustaining for 30 days in most classes of supply.
112.6 Define the following as applied to Maritime Prepositioning Force (MPF). [ref. e, ch. 1]
149

Survey, Liaison, and Reconnaissance Party (SLRP) NLT O minus 8 (O day is ofload
day)
o The SLRP deploys to the AAA at the direction of the CMPF. The SLRP is a task
organization consisting of survey and liaison personnel to provide/gather
information concerning the AAA for the CMPF and the MEF and deploying MAGTF
commanders. These assessments include, but are not limited to:
 Site reconnaissance of the AAA.
 Development of security requirements.
 Verification of the layout of the AAA.
o The SLRP forms the initial element of the Advance Party and is disestablished
when the Arrival Assembly Operations Group (AAOG) is established and activated
for operations.
o SLRP TOA includes material for 8 PAX for 5 days. Composition is variable but may
include
 OIC
 X3 rep – HNL, treaty obligations, negotiations with HNL
 S2 rep – operations and logistical intelligence Counterintelligence officer,
conduct surveys, line of communications sites
 S3 rep – locations of the operation/exercise, survey project sites
 S4 rep – leasing of public or private property of the AAO, initial logistics
support
 Engineer Officer engineering reconnaissance, traffic routes, bridges, camp
layout
 Medical planner – sites for BAS, test potable water
 S6 rep – communications requirements, host nation communication support
 Interrogators/Translator, helps with interviews and negotiations
 Civil Affairs Team, evaluate civil affairs requirements

Off-load Preparation Party (OPP) NLT O minus 4
o The OPP is a task organization of maintenance and equipment operators from the
MAGTF elements and the NSE. Upon completion of off-load preparations, the OPP
becomes the nucleus of the ship's debarkation teams.. It deploys aboard MPS and
performs off-load preparations (i.e. installs and charges vehicle batteries, conducts
pre-operational checks) while the ship (or MPSRON) is underway. Its function is to
ensure that all MAGTF/NSE vehicles and equipment are prepared for off-load as
well as preparing and testing the ship’s cranes and MHE for offload operations.
o Marine portion of the OPP will designate an OIC. OPP is organized into ship’s
teams.
o Notional make up. 4 Marines, 2 Navy OPP Headquarters element on Flagship
o About 80 Marines per ship to prep their gear, 22 Seabees for their gear.
Rank
Ship 1
Ship 2
Ship 3
NCR Core
NCR Core/Basic
NCR Core/Heavy
CMC
1
CM1
1
COMMON CORE
CM2
CM3 or below
Total


1
4
5
5
6
112
1
9
11
o
Advance Party NLT O minus 4 to O minus 2
o The Advance Party is formed from personnel from the SLRP augmented by
individuals and equipment from the deploying elements of the main body. The
Advance Party establishes the AAOG, the Landing Force Support Party (LFSP)
(including its subordinate organizations and the surge and throughput drivers), and
the Arrival and Assembly Operation Elements (AAOEs).
Main Body O-day through O +9
o The Main Body consists of the remaining forces not involved in the arrival and
assembly operation (e.g. combat forces).
o Arrival of the Main Body too early can create a severe vulnerability for the forces
ashore. Therefore, the Main Body arrival must be carefully timed to allow all
personnel and equipment needed for the Advance Party organizations to arrive in
the AAA before the Main Body begins to deploy and so as not to draw down on the
logistics support for the off-load/throughput operations. For example, adequate
meals, medical support, water production/storage, etc. must be ashore and
available from prepositioned assets prior to the influx of personnel from the Main
Body. If not properly executed, the flow of the Main Body can result in significant
logistics problems for the MAGTF.
o The Main Body will flow in a sequenced priority required to stand up the MAGTF for
subsequent employment.
112.7 Describe the purpose of shipper declaration of hazardous goods. [ref. b, ch. 7]

DD From 1387-2 is the shipper declaration of hazardous goods form and its use ensures
hazardous goods will be properly packaged, marked, and handled in a safe manner. It
also acts a custody receipt for “special handling” materials.
112.8 Discuss the information found on a Time-Phased Force Deployment Data (TPFDD).
[ref. g, app. 3]

The Joint Operation Planning and Execution System data base portion of an operation
plan; it contains time-phased force data, non-unit-related cargo and personnel data, and
movement data for the operation plan, including:
o In-place units
o Units to be deployed to support the operation plan with a priority indicating the
desired sequence for their arrival at the port of debarkation.
o Routing of forces to be deployed.
o Movement data associated with deploying forces.
o Estimates of non-unit-related cargo and personnel movements to be conducted
concurrently with the deployment of forces.
o Estimate of transportation requirements that must be fulfilled by common-user lift
resources as well as those requirements that can be fulfilled by assigned or
attached transportation resources.
112.9 Describe the purpose of TCAIMS II. [ref. h]
TC-AIMS II is a program to assist commanders in their preparation for, and execution of deployment,
sustainment, and redeployment/retrograde operations. It is a joint program that combines current best
of breed transportation tools to provide an integrated transportation management system capability.
150
COMMON CORE
113
113 CIVIL ENGINEER SUPPORT EQUIPMENT (CESE) FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVFAC P-300, Management of Civil Engineering Support Equipment
[b] COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBINST 11100.1, Naval Mobile Construction
Battalion Equipment Management
[c] NAVEDTRA 14081, Equipment Operator, Basic___________________________
113.1 Discuss the following Civil Engineer Support Equipment (CESE). [ref. a]
a. Automotive Equipment [app. a, p. a-1] Equipment for moving personnel and equipment. Line
haul, HMMWV, MTVR
b. Construction Equipment [app. a p. a-2] Equipment used for making construction projects
more efficient. Grader, back hoe, loader.
c. Materials Handling Equipment (MHE) [app. a, p. a-3] Equipment used for handling materials
such as forklifts and conveyers.
d. Weight Handling Equipment (WHE) [app. a, p. a-5] Equipment used for handling weight,
cranes.
e. Civil Engineering End Item (CEEI) [ch. 2, section 2.10, p. 2-29, par. a] Equipment that has a shorter
useful life and tends to be used up at the location where it is first installed/used or permanently installed.
Includes fabric tanks, refrigerator containers, rowpus and tension fabric shelters, Shower Bath
Units, Water Purification Units and SIXCON Pump Units.
113. 2 Explain the importance of the first echelon maintenance. [ref. b, ch. 2, section 1, p. 2-6, par.
d, 1b]

Proper maintenance is the care given and the work performed to keep vehicles and equipment
in safe and serviceable operating condition during their normal service life. Maintenance helps
detect minor deficiencies before they lead to costly repairs.
 The first sign of vehicle trouble should be detected by the operator during one of the three
daily inspections. These inspections occur before, during, and after operations.
o During Operators Inspections- Consists of the operator using knowledge of the
equipment and his or her senses to detect indications needing attention.
o Be aware of the following indications of possible failure:
 The smell of burning rubber, grease or clutches
 The sound of unusual noises
 The unusual fluctuations or readings on instruments and gauges
 The feel of drag, pull, or vibration.
 The loss of tire air pressure or rocks in the tires.
 After operation inspection and service require the operator to first perform
proper shutdown procedures
o After shutdown, operators must perform the following:
 Check equipment cleanliness
 Drain air tanks and cover exhaust stacks
 Close doors, window, and hoods
 Set the brakes and chock the wheels
 Block dump beds for draining
 Top off fuel tanks if the tanks are less than ½ full
 Report any defects on the trouble report.
113.3 Discuss the process for completing the following: [ref. b, ch. 2]
a. Operating checks [section 2, 2201, par. c, p. 2-10]
The operator must identify items needing attention: smell (burning rubber, grease or
clutches), hearing (unusual noises), sight (instruments), and feeling (drag, pull, and vibration).
Tires should be periodically inspected for flats, and rocks between duals, for example. During
151
COMMON CORE
113
operation, lubrication is the responsibility of the operator. If a defect is suspected, stop the
equipment and investigate. Ensure that defects that could damage the equipment or impair
safe operations are repaired before returning the equipment to use.
b. Operator inspection guide trouble report [section 3, 2305, par. a, p. 2-22]
1. The NAVFAC Form 9-11240/13 (Figure 9) is issued with the Pre-start MRC by the Dispatcher
prior to issuing trip tickets. The form is to be completed according to the instructions contained
thereon, and returned to the Yard Boss for review and initials. The NAVFAC Form 9-11240/2
(Figure 10) is completed prior to issuing the DD Form 1970 (Figure 11)
2. The Yard Boss reviews all Trouble Reports (Hard Cards) to determine deficiencies that require
immediate attention. All safety deficiency warrants immediate repairs.
a. If deficiencies or maintenance requirements are determined by the Yard Boss not the
operator's responsibility, the vehicle will be turned in to the shop for repairs/ maintenance
and will not be dispatched until deficiencies are corrected.
b. If deficiencies/maintenance are the operator's responsibility the Yard Boss will instruct the
operator to make the required repairs and or complete Maintenance Requirements. When
repairs/maintenance has been completed and have been inspected by the Yard Boss, the
Yard Boss will initial each deficiency repaired or maintenance completed on the NAVFAC
Form 9-11240/13 (Hard Card) and the vehicle may be dispatched.
c. After repairs/maintenance has been completed, or if no repairs/maintenance requirements
are required, a trip ticket, DD Form 1970, may be issued. The Dispatcher updates SKED,
annotating a PMS “R” check was completed that day. The Dispatcher will also ensure
the 13-week accountability log is signed by the operator.
d. The Dispatcher maintains a Summary Hard Card File in MICROSNAP MOSS of Trouble
Reports (Hard Cards) that have discrepancies. When the vehicle goes into the shop for
scheduled Maintenance, these cards will accompany the vehicle to the Work Center to
insure that the inspector has a history of the vehicle since the last Maintenance Performed.
152
COMMON CORE
113
Figure 9 NAVFAC 9-11240/13 Operators inspection guide (Hard Card)
153
COMMON CORE
113
Figure 10 NAVFAC Form 9-11240/2 ( Dispatcher’s Log)
154
COMMON CORE
113
Figure 11 DD Form 1970, Motor Equipment utilization record
155
COMMON CORE
113
c. Vehicle trip ticket [section 3, 2302, p. 2-15]
a. The DD Form 1970, Motor Vehicle Utilization Record (figure 2-2) or the computergenerated trip ticket will be used for each item of CESE on a daily or trip basis.
b. Under no circumstances will a vehicle or DD Form 1970 be issued to a person
who does not have in their possession a valid U.S. Government Motor Vehicle
Operator's Identification Card, OF 346 (Figure 2-9), that covers the size vehicle
requested or is not 3-M 301 qualified.
c. The following information will be completed by the dispatcher/operator on the DD Form
1970:
(1) Date
(2) Type of vehicle
(3) Registration number/USN number
156
COMMON CORE
113
(4) Organization
(5) Fuel and oil, when obtained from facilities other than parent command
(record in the “remarks” column)
(6) Operator's name and signature
(7) Dispatcher's name and signature
(8) Odometer or hour meter reading "out" and "in"
(9) Such other information as required by command or local regulations
d. The reverse side of the DD Form 1970 (Figure 2-3) contains instructions for
completion of all required blocks.
113.4 Describe the differences and uses of the following: [ref. b, ch. 3]
a. Organizational maintenance [section 2, par. b, p. 3-6]
Organizational maintenance is that maintenance which is the responsibility of, and performed by,
the operator, and scheduled preventive maintenance services performed by trained personnel.
Organizational maintenance consists of proper equipment operation, safety and serviceability
inspections, lubrication, minor adjustments and services in accordance with the MRC.
Organizational maintenance is divided into operator and preventive maintenance as specified
below:
(1) Operator Maintenance. Each operator is required to perform work needed to maintain his or
her vehicle in a clean, safe, and serviceable condition. Operator maintenance includes the daily
inspections before, during, and after operation. It also includes periodic lubrication and
adjustments. These requirements are completed utilizing the pertinent MRC. Operator
maintenance is performed to ensure early detection of deficiencies.
(2) Planned Maintenance. Planned maintenance (PMS) is that maintenance which is scheduled
for the purpose of maximizing equipment availability and to minimize repair costs. PMS consists of
safety and mechanical inspections, lubrication, and services and adjustments beyond an
operator's responsibility. Operators should assist with this work unless directed otherwise.
Maintenance support requiring more extensive services is categorized as Corrective level
maintenance.
b. Corrective maintenance [section 2, par. c, p. 3-6]
Corrective maintenance is that maintenance which is the responsibility of, and performed in, any
designated maintenance shop. The extent of corrective maintenance encompasses the removal,
replacement, repair, alteration, calibration, modification, and the rebuild and overhaul of individual
assemblies, subassemblies and components. Although the rebuild and overhaul of major
assemblies is included, only essential repairs shall be accomplished to ensure safe and
serviceable equipment. Equipment that requires extensive repairs or numerous assembly rebuilds
will not be repaired without prior approval by higher authority. Corrective maintenance requires a
higher degree of skill than organizational maintenance, and a larger assortment of repair parts
and more precision tools and test equipment.
c. Depot maintenance [section 2, par. d, p. 3-7]
Depot maintenance is that maintenance performed on equipment that requires major overhaul or
comprehensive restoration to a degree necessary to restore the entire unit to a like-new condition.
113.6 State the NCF/SOU requirement for government licenses. [ref. a, ch. 3, p. 3-33; ref. b, ch. 2,
sec. 5, p. 2-36]
1. 3M 301 qualified.
2. Training shall include, but not limited to; operator responsibilities, rules, regulations, and traffic
laws, traffic control signs, signals, and markings; mishap prevention through safe driving
practices; mishap report procedures, forms, and reports; functions of major assemblies and
attachments; operator maintenance, and fundamentals of vehicle operation; safety precautions;
road and skill tests.
157
COMMON CORE
3.
4.
5.
6.
113
Training license with a minimum of 16 operating hours
Written Examination
Performance test
Authorized Operation with a OF 346 or NAVFAC Form 11260/2
113.7 Discuss issuing, stowing and types of Collateral Equipage. [ref. b, ch. 2, section 4, p. 2-25
thru 2-29]
Two basic types of collateral equipment are component and tactical.
 Component collateral equipment consists of items such as hoses for pumps and bits
for earth augers.
 Tactical collateral equipment consists of items common to the equipment, such as top
canvas and tarpaulin, bows and side racks, spare tire and rim, jack and lug wrench,
chains with hooks, and chain binders.
Store non mounted or non issued collateral equipment in a secure location.
A 1NCD CB 60 Form shall be filled out for each piece of collateral equipment for controlled
issue, signature, and inventory purposes
113.8 Discuss the responsibilities of the following CESE management positions. [ref. b, ch. 1]
a. Alfa Company Commander - A6. [pg. 1-1] The ALFA Company Commander serves in five
major capacities: Company Commander for the military organization; Staff Equipment Officer; Crane
Certifying Officer; Officer in Charge of Construction (Horizontal); and Department Head in the 3-M
organization.
b. Alfa Company Maintenance Supervisor - A4. [pg. 1-4]
The ALFA Company Maintenance Supervisor/Division Maintenance Chief is normally a
Construction Mechanic Senior Chief (CMCS) and will have successfully completed 3-M PQS up to 304.
The A4 is tasked with ensuring proper 3-M maintenance and repair of all automotive, construction, and
material and weight handling equipment assigned to the NMCB/Unit.
c. Alfa Company Operations Supervisor - A3. [pg. 1-2]
The Operations Supervisor/Division Operations Chief is normally an Equipment Operator Senior
Chief (EOCS), and will have successfully completed the 3-M program PQS 304. The A3 has the
responsibility to coordinate equipment requirements for projects, review plans, specifications and
estimates and is designated as the Crane Test Director.
113.9 Describe the difference between Class A, B and C assigned vehicles. [ref. b, ch. 2, p. 2-4]
Class "A" Dispatch. This category is the full-time assignment of a vehicle to an individual. Class "A"
continuing dispatch can only be authorized by the Chief of Naval Operations (CNO)
OLD.3 Explain the procedures in filling out and submitting an operator’s inspection guide trouble report
and vehicle trip ticket. [ref. b, ch. 2]



158
Motor vehicle utilization record
o Used for each item of automotive equipment and trailers on a daily or trip basis
o Commonly called a trip ticket
o Official authorization to operate a vehicle, whether it is driven by the requester or
driven by a pool operator.
The NAVFAC Form 9-11240/13 is issued by the Dispatcher prior to issuing trip tickets. The
form is to be completed according to the instructions contained thereon, and returned to the
Yard Boss for review and initials. The NAVFAC Form 9-11240/2 is completed prior to issuing
the DD Form 1970 (figure 2-3).
The Yard Boss reviews all Trouble Reports (Hard Cards) to determine deficiencies that require
immediate attention. Any safety deficiency warrants immediate repairs.
COMMON CORE
113
o


If deficiencies are not the operator's responsibility, the vehicle will be turned in to the
shop for repairs and will not be dispatched until deficiencies are corrected.
o If deficiencies are the operator's responsibility the Yard Boss will instruct the operator
to make the required repairs. When repairs have been made and have been inspected
by the Yard Boss, the vehicle may be dispatched.
o After repairs have been made, or if no repairs are required, a trip ticket, DD Form
1970, may be issued.
The Dispatcher maintains a file of Trouble Reports (Hard Cards) that have discrepancies by
PM group. When the vehicle goes into the shop for scheduled PM, these cards will
accompany the vehicle to the inspection stations to insure that the inspector has a history of
the vehicle since the last PM.
Each NAVFAC Form 9-11240/13 contains the following:
o USN number.
o Date.
o Total miles/hours.
o Appropriate items checked.
o Adequate description of trouble.
o Operator's signature.
o Any other items required locally.
OLD.4 Describe the difference between organic and augment CESE beep stickers and how they are
used. [ref. b, ch. 3]

159
The difference between the Organic and Augment CESE BEEP Stickers are:
o The Organic BEEP sticker has a red background with a 2-inch white numbers and the
Augment BEEP sticker has a white background with 2-inch red numbers.
o The Organic CESE is part of the TOA and the Augment CESE is not part of the
Battalion TOA.
COMMON CORE
113
OLD.5 State the purpose of a Standard Forms 91 and DD-518. [ref. c, ch. 6]


The SF 91 is a Motor Vehicle Accident Report.
o Obtain and properly spell names and street addresses of persons involved in the
mishap and all witnesses to the accident.
o Carefully note weather conditions, road conditions, position of the vehicle involved, and
other details.
o Describe all events of the accident in detail to the point that a person although never
having been at the scene, could visualize the accident.
o State visible damage, such as "crushed right rear wheel or crumpled fender."
The DD-518 is an accident identification card.
OLD.6 State the purposes and uses of the following licenses: [ref. b, ch. 2, sec. 5]

160
OF/346
COMMON CORE
o

113
The military driver’s license which lists the vehicles you are authorized to drive. Can
be from 1 ¼ ton pick-up truck to 20 ton tractor. GOOD FOR 3 YEARS.
11260/2
o Heavy construction equipment license. Maintained with your license record in the
license examiners office. It lists all the construction equipment you are authorized to
operate. GOOD FOR 2 YEARS.
EXTRA
Discuss Equipment to Mechanic Ratio 3-5 COMFIRSTNCDINST 11200.2 06 Jan 06
The ratio indicates the number of vehicles compared to the number of mechanic is assigned to a location.
In addition to all the mechanics assigned to the shop, the title “mechanic” in this ratio includes all
administrative and supervisory maintenance personnel and any personnel assigned to work with the
mechanics, such as steelworkers, machinery repairmen, and electricians. The ratio can be used as a
general yardstick to determine if additional mechanics may be required to maintain the unit’s equipment
adequately. Obviously many factors such as training,
experience, environment, and equipment condition shall cause the optimum ratio to vary. However,
experience shows that the ratio should average approximately five pieces of equipment to one mechanic
(5 to 1) at each location. One way to improve the on-site equipment to mechanic ratio is through the use of
the IEM option in 3-M.
161
NMCB SPECIFIC
101
NMCB SPECIFIC
101 SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 3500.39B, Operational Risk Management
[b] OPNAVINST 5100.23G, Navy Safety and Occupational H Occupational Safety and Health
((NAVSOHOSH) Program Manual
101.1 Discuss the concept of Operational Risk Management (ORM). [ref. a, encl. 1, p. 1]

ORM is a decision making process that enhances operational capability. Naval Warfare
Publication 1 states, "Risk management and risk assessment are formal, essential tools of
operational planning. Sound decision making requires the use of these tools both in battle
and in training." ORM, described in enclosure (1), is a method for identifying hazards,
assessing risks and implementing controls to reduce the risk associated with any
operation.
101.2 Explain the following as they apply to ORM: [ref. a, encl. 1, p. 2]




162
Identifying hazards [p. 2]
o Identify Hazards - Begin with an outline or chart of the major steps in the operation
(operational analysis). Next, conduct a Preliminary Hazard Analysis by listing all of
the hazards associated with each step in the operational analysis along with
possible causes for those hazards.
Assessing hazards [p. 2]
o Assess Hazards - For each hazard identified, determine the associated degree of
risk in terms of probability and severity. Although not required, the use of a matrix
may be helpful in assessing hazards described further in paragraph d).
Making risk decisions [p. 2]
o Make Risk Decisions - First, develop risk control options. Start with the most
serious risk first and select controls that will reduce the risk to a minimum
consistent with mission accomplishment. With selected controls in place, decide if
the benefit of the operation outweighs the risk. If risk outweighs benefit or if
assistance is required to implement controls, communicate with higher authority in
the chain of command.
Implementing controls [pp. 2, 3]
o Implement Controls - The following measures can be used to eliminate hazards or
reduce the degree of risk. These are listed by order of preference:
 Administrative Controls - Controls that reduce risks through specific
administrative actions, such as:
 Providing suitable warnings, markings, placards, signs, and notices.
 Establishing written policies, programs instructions and standard
operating procedures (SOP).
 Training personnel to recognize hazards and take appropriate
precautionary measures.
 Limiting the exposure to a hazard (either by reducing the number of
personnel/assets or the length of time they are exposed).
 Engineering Controls - Controls that use engineering methods to reduce
risks by design, material selection or substitution when technically or
economically feasible.
NMCB SPECIFIC


101
Personal Protective Equipment - Serves as a barrier between personnel
and a hazard. It should be used when other controls do not reduce the
hazard to an acceptable level.
Supervising [p. 3]
o Supervise - Conduct follow-up evaluations of the controls to ensure they remain in
place and have the desired effect. Monitor for changes, which may require further
ORM. Take corrective action when necessary.
101.3 Explain in detail how commands shall minimize hazards in the workplace. [ref. b, ch. 5,
pp. 5-1 thru 5-4]
To minimize hazards in the workplace, commands shall identify hazardous conditions through
workplace inspections, employee hazard reports, and industrial hygiene survey reports. They shall
promptly eliminate or control all identified safety and health hazards, subject to priorities based upon
the degree of risk posed by the hazards in accordance with guidance of Hazard Abatement Programs.
The preferred method of hazard abatement is through application of engineering controls or
substitution of less hazardous processes or materials. The next preferred method is the use of
administrative controls, possibly in conjunction with personal protective equipment (PPE). Total
reliance on PPE is acceptable only when all other methods are proven to be technically and/or
economically infeasible. The OSHA Standards controlling workplace use of protective equipment
require that alternative control measures be evaluated as infeasible or not fully protective before
reliance on protective equipment is acceptable. This chapter discusses the basic principles of hazard
control and assigns responsibility for implementing hazard abatement actions.
101.4 Name eight specific individuals or job positions that require CPR qualifications. [ref. b,
ch, 6, pp. 6-4 thru 6-5]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Emergency response teams
Fire department personnel
Security personnel
Medical provider(s)
Safety and industrial hygiene personnel
Electrical power plant, power distribution, electrical and electronics personnel
Supervisors of above personnel or of personnel whose jobs pose comparable risks or risk of
severe injury
8. Personnel whose jobs pose comparable risks to above personnel or who work at remote sites.
163
NMCB SPECIFIC
102
102 ADMINISTRATION/COMMAND AND CONTROL FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NWP 4-04.1, U.S. Navy, Seabee Operations in the MAGTF
[b] NAVEDTRA 14235, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 2
[c] 1 NCD TACTICAL MEMORANDUM (TACMEMO) 4-01.01-08
[d] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
[e] Blue Jackets’ Manual, 23rd Edition_________________________________________
102.1 Discuss the function of the following companies within the battalion:
[ref. d, ch. 1]




Alfa [p. 1-10]
o Responsible for the operation and maintenance of the automotive, construction and
materials-handling equipment assigned to the battalion.
Bravo [p. 1-10]
o Responsible for water, sanitary sewer, and power distribution systems, fuel
systems, and communications projects. Bravo Company serves as a mini public
works department providing for maintenance and operation of the unit’s camp.
Charlie/Delta [p. 1-10]
o The battalion’s general construction company. They are the prime contractors and
occasional subcontractors; normally equal in strength and capabilities; they function
as prime contractors for vertical construction.
Headquarters [pp. 1-10 thru 1-12]
o The administrative and military organization for all enlisted personnel assigned to
the NMCB’s executive and special staffs. They provided support to the line
companies in construction and disaster recovery operations.
102.2 Describe the mission of Convoy Security Element (CSE). [ref. c]
The Convoy Security Platoon will be led by a commissioned officer and senior enlisted platoon chief.
The Convoy Security Platoon will comprise 12 gun trucks, organized into two CSEs of six gun trucks
each. Gun trucks will be manned with no fewer than three personnel who have completed the CSE
course of instruction. Each CSE will have a convoy commander who is E-7 or above, one dedicated
Hospital Corpsman (HM), one Electronics Technician / Information Systems Technician, and a
minimum of one dedicated Construction Mechanic (CM). Every vehicle will have a member trained as
a communicator. Each vehicle commander will be trained to assume the role of assistant convoy
commander.
NMCBs deploying to the Marine Expeditionary Force Area of Operations will train four additional
vehicle teams for a total of 16 gun trucks (to include one additional convoy commander, one additional
HM, and a minimum of one additional CM)
OLD.2 Describe the mission of Seabee Engineer Reconnaissance Teams (SERT). [ref. c]

164
The SERT’s primary mission is to collect and assess engineering intelligence and project
information for the supported or parent unit for design and tasking of constructed work.
The team must be able to perform this mission in a hostile environment, mounted or
dismounted, during day or night, in the full range of projected operational environments,
and must possess long-range voice and data communications capability.
NMCB SPECIFIC
102
102.3 State the purpose of and describe the following:




Combat Operation Center (COC) [ref. b, pp. 1-6 thru 1-16]
o A COC is capable of collecting, processing, displaying, evaluating, and
disseminating tactical information and is manned by watch standers at CBR,
Operations, and Fire Support Coordinator desks. The COC has an organic
communications capability that provides visual and internal/external, tactical and
secure, voice and data communications systems. NMCBs can also implement
OPSEC measures.
Alternate Combat Operation Center (ACOC) [ref. b, p. 1-8]
o Requires the same information and set-up as COC; assumes control of battalion if
COC is destroyed.
Company Command Post (CP) [ref. a, ch. 5]
o The CP is capable of collecting, processing, displaying, evaluating, and
disseminating tactical information that is in its AOR to the COC and is manned by a
watch stander and a member of the Company’s senior leadership.
Air Detachment (AIRDET) [ref. a, pp. 2-10, 2-11]
o The mission of the Air DET, as an advance element of an NMCB, is to repair war
damage and construct urgent projects as required by major operational plans or as
tasked by a MAGTF commander. Although its taskings are mission-dependent, the
Air DET generally spans the scope of possible NMCB construction taskings. Refer
to Appendix B for specific construction capabilities.
o Organization. Typically commanded by a Navy CEC Lieutenant, an NMCB Air
DET is a task-organized, advance element of the NMCB typically organized as
illustrated in Figure 2-2. The personnel and equipment of an Air DET can be
tailored to specific projects. It typically is composed of 89 personnel and 39 items of
CESE and equates to 250 to 300 STs (approximately 14 C-141, 8 C-17, or 5 C-5 lift
equivalents) of strategic airlift. The Air DET may also have its personnel and
equipment TOA tailored to a mission-specific role and configured for deployment on
tactical (e.g., C-130 or C-17) airlift.
o Concept of Employment. The NMCB Air DET can deploy by strategic lift with the
assets listed in Appendix C within 48 hours and may either be employed
independently or with other Seabee elements. The Air DET is an augmentation unit
capable of supporting the short-term engineering requirements of forward-deployed
MEUs on little advance notice. It should be considered as the lead echelon of an
NMCB.
102.4 Identify and explain the purpose of the following ratings in a Naval Mobile Construction
Battalion (NMCB): [ref. e, pp. 23 thru 35]






165
LS: Logistics specialist. , manages the Battalions TOA
RP: Religious Programmer, manages the Battalion’s library on deployment, administrative
assistant to the Battalion Chaplin, and provides defensive protection to the Chaplin in
combat.
BM: Boatswain’s Mate, Typically a Chief who is the CMAA and responsible for the
quarterdeck, security, and drug testing within the command.
SH: Ship’s Serviceman, runs the command barbershop and procures and issues uniforms.
CS: Culinary Specialist, operates the command mess during deployment and works in the
general mess during homeport.
LN: Legalman, the command liaison for military legal matters.
NMCB SPECIFIC











166
102
MR: Machinery Repairman, assigned to A Co for the repair and manufacture of metalwork.
MA: Master at Arms, performs security, quarterdeck watch, and assists CMAA.
NC: Career Counselor, assists Seabees with career goals/decisions.
HT: Hull Technician, certified welder assigned to A Co for the repair of metal work.
HM: Hospital Corpsman, provides basic medical care and administratively assists the
Battalion Medical Officer in the performance of the mission.
PS: Personnelman, maintains the enlisted service records and assists personnel on
administrative issues. Assists Battalion personnel with official military pay issues.
MC: Photographer, photographically records the history of the Battalion and assists the
PAO in developing media coverage of the Battalion.
YN: Yeoman, administrative assistant to senior Officers.
ET: Electronics Technician, repair and maintain communication equipment.
GM: Gunners Mate, Maintains the Battalion Armory and performs weapon repairs.
IT: Information Technician, maintains and operates the Battalion’s computer assets.
NMCB SPECIFIC
103
103 SUPPLY/LOGISTICS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] ABFC View
[b] COMFIRSTNCDINST 4400.3A Seabee Supply Manual (Dec 2007)
[c] NAVFACINST 4423.1H, Navy Expeditionary Table of Allowance (TOA) and Advance Base
Functional Component (ABFC Development and modification policy and processes
103.1 Name the 7 Sub-Components of the NMCB Table of Allowance (TOA) [ref. a]
P25CC – Command and control module
P25 EM – equipment maintenance module
P25 FIE Fly in echelon
P25 SC1, 2, 3 Construction mods
P25 SS sustainment mods.
OLD.1 State the purpose of the NMCB Table of Allowance (TOA) as it relates to the following: [ref. a,
app. 1]






P25MC: Consists of a 125 man Core module, when combined with an MCA provides a
250 man self-sustaining camp, 3 cores per P25, 24 pieces of CESE per core.
P25MCA: Air Det capable pack up (TA41) reinforced to support 125 man camp, 3 cores
per P25, 34 pieces of CESE per core.
P25MH: Used to enhance the capability of a Core. Provides A Co shop tools, 49 pieces
of CESE, and water well capability.
P25MB: Used to enhance main body capabilities. Provides B/C Co shop tools, 42 pieces
of CESE, ABM, and H Co support items.
P25FIE: Fly-in Echelon. Personal fighting gear, weapons, and radios for SLRP, OPP, AP
and MB air movements.
P25AP: NMCB advanced party, 69 personnel, (5 days) self-sufficient.


Requisition processing is given high priority (B)
Required delivery date assigned is before the date deadline is
anticipated.
103.2 Describe the duties and responsibilities of the Material Liaison Officer (MLO) within the
battalion organization. [ref. c, p. 1-9]


The MLO Officer is responsible for procuring, receiving, stowing, issuing, shipping,
transferring, and accounting for all construction project materials
Is also responsible for maintaining related inventory, accountability, financial records, and
files.
103.3 Describe the procedures for issuing project material from the MLO office.
[ref. b, pp. 6-2, 6-3]

167
All material is requisitioned from the MLO on a 1250-1
NMCB SPECIFIC
103

Personnel must give the MLO the 1250s in advance so the MLO can process the
paperwork, draw the materials out of storage, and prepare it for pick-up or delivery to the
job site
103.4 Describe the procedures for conducting physical inventories. [ref. b, pp. 6-3 thru 6-4]
 The inventory procedures contained in the NAVSUP P-485, Chapter 6 are mandatory.
 The inventory validity goal is 95%, except for C.O. designated items and Depot Level
Repairables (DLRs) which have an inventory validity goal of 100%.
103.5 Describe the procedures for requesting changes to approved TOAs. [ref. c, pp. 9 thru 11]
ACR shall be made by submitting ACR Form 12202 as an enclosure to a naval letter with complete
justification for each requested change. Reasons include
Mission capability and modernization improvement
Required operational capability/projected operational environment (ROC/POE) change
Capability development document
Cost effectiveness
Safety
OLD.2 Discuss the purpose of the MicroSNAP SFM Program. [ref. c, p. 1-74]

SFM is the supply/financial component of the MicroSNAP computer program that:
o Manages budgets
o Produces financial reports
o Processes requisitions
o Automatically process stock re-orders
OLD.3 State the purpose of the Non-Operational Ready-Supply/Anticipated Non-Operational ReadySupply (NORS/ANORS) Program. [ref. b, pp. 3-6, 3-7]

When a piece of CESE is deadline or anticipated to be, it is designated as NORS or
ANORS.
o NORS: Not Operationally Ready-Supply (CUCV brakes are out and there are not
replacement parts in stock)
 When a part is designated NORS:
 Requisition processing is given top priority (A)
 Delivery date is expedited (potentially overnight rush)
o ANORS: Anticipated Not Operationally Ready-Supply (tire is extremely worn but
still safe and there are not replacement tires in stock.)
 When a part is designated ANORS:
OLD.5 Explain the procedures for receipt and storage of project material within the MLO office. [ref.
b, pp. 4-1 thru 4-4]



When materials are received, they are separated either by the requisition serial number or
by the supplementary address/project number
Construction material must be protected from the weather, job site damage and theft
Only material that can be used during a 2 week period may be requisitioned from MLO
OLD.7 State the intended purpose of the Camp Maintenance Store Room (CMSR). [ref. b, p. 1-9]

168
CMSR houses repair parts for in-camp preventive maintenance.
NMCB SPECIFIC
103
OLD.8 Explain the uses of the Government Purchase Card Program (GPCP). [ref. d, p. 2]


Government credit card
o Used for local purchase when a requisition cannot be filled through the Navy Stock
System and the purchase cost is less than $2,500.
o Only trained cardholders are authorized to make purchases.
o Must be approved by Approving Official prior to the buy.
Purchase examples:
o Consumables – paper, pencils
o Services- commercial printing, repair contracts.
OLD.9 Discuss how the Operating Target (OPTAR)/budget impacts your unit. [ref. c, pp. 9-5, 9-6]


OPTAR funds are used for operation and maintenance- Navy (OM&N) needs ONLY.
o Cannot buy project materials with this money.
NMCB OPTARs are divided into four categories:
o 01 - Consumables and Services
o 02 - Maintenance Repair Parts (CESE)
o 03 - Camp Maintenance
o 04 - Deployment Per Diem
o NOTE: Funds cannot be transferred between these different “pots” of money.
OLD.10 Discuss the difference between organic and augment tools, equipment, and repair parts. [ref.
b, pp. 2-3, 2-21 thru 2-23]


ORGANIC Tools
o Tools that are included in a basic allowance of tools.
o This basic allowance of tools enables an activity to carry out operational
requirements.
o Allowance items are selected to provide support in a contingency situation.
o Organic allowances are not designed to meet every need.
AUGMENT Tools
o Tools NOT in TOA may be requested when an assigned project requires more
specific tools to accomplish task.
Table 14 Classes of supply
Class I - Subsistence
A - Nonperishable
C - Combat Rations
R - Refrigerated
S - Other
Nonrefrigerated
W - Water
Class II - Clothing, Individual
Equipment, Tools, Admin.
Supplies
A - Air
B - Ground Support
Materiel
E - General Supplies
F - Clothing
G - Electronics
M - Weapons
T - Industrial
Supplies
169
NMCB SPECIFIC
103
Class III - Petroleum, Oils,
Lubricants
A - POL for Aircraft
W - POL for Surface
Vehicles
P - Packaged POL
Class IV - Construction Materials
A - Construction
B - Barrier
Class V - Ammunition
A - Air Delivery
W - Ground
Class VI - Personal Demand
Items
Class VII - Major End Items:
Racks, Pylons, Tracked
Vehicles, Etc.
A - Air
B - Ground Support
Materiel
D - Admin. Vehicles
G - Electronics
J - Racks, Adaptors,
Pylons
K - Tactical Vehicles
L - Missiles
M - Weapons
N - Special Weapons
X - Aircraft Engines
Class VIII - Medical Materials
A - Medical Materiel
B - Blood / Fluids
Class IX - Repair Parts
Class X - Material For
Nonmilitary Programs
170
A - Air
B - Ground Support
Materiel
D - Admin. Vehicles
G - Electronics
K - Tactical Vehicles
L - Missiles
M - Weapons
N - Special Weapons
X - Aircraft Engines
NMCB SPECIFIC
104
104 COMMUNICATIONS/COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY MATERIAL SYSTEM
FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVEDTRA 14234, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 1
[b] TM-11-5820-890-10-8, SINCGARS Ground Combat Net Radio, ICOM
[c] Construction Battle Skills Guide, P-1160, Book 1, All Hands
[d] Motorola 68P81044C05-A, XTS 5000 Operator’s Guide
[e] NAVEDTRA 14235, Seabee Combat Handbook, Vol. 2
[f] Harris Guide 10515-0103-4100 (Rev. A), AN/PRC-150(V)(C), Man Pack Radio
(Operator’s Manual)
[g] TM 11-5805-749-12, Switchboard, Telephone, SB-3614A(V)/TT Operator’s Manual
[h] TM 11-5805-650-12, Telephone Set, T-838/PT Operator’s and Organizational
Maintenance Manual____________________________________________________
104.1 Discuss the general characteristics, operator maintenance, and antenna systems for the
following:
 AN/PRC-119A-E [ref. c, p. 358]
o General Characteristics
 VHF SINGARS Radio
 30 to 87.975 MHz freq
 2320 channels/freq’s
 Sends and receives secure voice and digital data
 6 COMSEC channels/ 6 frequency hopping channels
 8 single channels (SC) for plain text
 Transmits 200 meters to 10 kilometers or more
 Batteries last 4 (BB690) to 30 (BA5590) hrs depending on type & use
o Antenna Systems
 3ft tape – up to 5 miles
 10ft whip- up to 10 miles
 OE-254- up to 36 miles

171
AN/PRC-150 [ref. f, pp. 1-1 thru 1-8]
o General Characteristics
 Long range secure radio
 No external encryption device required
 Requires 2 BA-5590 or 2 BB-690 Batteries
 Smaller and lighter than AN/PRC-104
 Frequency Range: 1.6-59.999 MHz
 Modes of Operation:
NMCB SPECIFIC


o
o
o

172
 Lower Side Band (LSB)
 Upper Side Band (USB)
 Amplitude Modulation Equivalent (AME)
 Continuous Wave (CW) Modulation
 Frequency Modulation (FM)
Power Output:
 1, 5, 20 Watts PEP/avg. HF
 1, 5, 10 Watts PEP/avg. FM
Pre-Set Channels: 200
Data Rate:
 39 tone data to 2400 bps
 Serial tone data to 2400 bps (TX), 75 bps (RX)
 FSK data to 600 bps
Embedded US Type I Encryption
 VINSON (Voice & Data)
 ANDVT/KYV-5 (Voice & Data)
 KG-84C (Data)
Antenna Systems
 10 ft Whip Antenna
 NVIS Antenna- AS 2259
 Dipole Antenna
AN/VRC-90A [ref. b, p. 2-19]
o Vehicle mounted communication
o General Components
 Receiver-Transmitter (RT) (RT-1523/A/B/C/D/E)
 Mounting Base (MB) (MT-6352/A), part of installation kit
 Vehicular Amplifier Adapter (VAA) (AM-7239/A/B/C/D/E)
 Handset (HS) (H-250), part of installation kit
 Loudspeaker (LS) (LS-671), part of installation kit
 Power Amplifier (PA) (AM-7238/A/B)
 Cable (W2), connects RT ANT to PA
 Cable (W4), connects RT to VAA
 Antenna Cable (CG-3856), part of installation kit
 Loudspeaker Cable (CX-13292), part of installation kit
 Power Cable, part of installation kit
o Antenna Systems
 Vehicular Antenna (AS-3900/3916)
 OE-254
104
NMCB SPECIFIC

AN/GRA-39 [ref. a, pp. 11-12, 11-13]
o Radio Set Control Group AN/GRA-39 provides the capability of remotely controlling
a radio set up to a distance of 2 miles, using standard field wire. Remote control
allows us to operate the radio set at the desired installation, yet locate the radio set
in the best position for more efficient communication between the remote and the
local control unit operators. It also provides a buzzer system so the operators may
alert one another. The major components of the AN/GRA-39 are the local control
unit and the remote control unit.
o General Components
 BAG CW-598: Used for storage and transportation of the AN/GRA-39.
 Sling, carrying bag, and case: Used for transportation of the bag.
 Auxiliary sling: Used for carrying either the remote or the local
receiver/exciter unit separately.
 Control Group C-2328: Used to transmit or receive over the remote radio
set.
 Control Group C-2329: Connects to the radio being remoted. Connects to
the radio audio connector.
Figure 12 AN/GRA-39 Local unit (attached to radio)

173
104
Figure 13 AN/GRA-39 as remote unit
AN/VRC-92A [ref. b, p. 2-19]
o Used as a base station
o Longer VHF ranges of 10 km to 40km with a 50 watt output
NMCB SPECIFIC
o
o
o
o
Requires power supply for stationary operations
Capable of retransmit use
General Components
 Two Receiver-Transmitters (RT) (RT-1523/A/B/C/D/E).
 Mounting Base (MB) (MT-6352/A), part of installation kit.
 Vehicular Amplifier Adapter (VAA) (AM-7239/A/B/C/D/E).
 Two Handsets (HS) (H-250), part of installation kit.
 Two Loudspeakers (LS) (LS-671), part of installation kit.
 Two Power Amplifiers (PA) (AM-7238/A/B).
 Power Amplifier Mount (PA Mt) (MT-6353).
 Cable (W2), connects RT ANT to PA.
 Two Cables (W4), connect RTs to VAA.
 Three Cable (CG-3856), 1 connects PA to antenna (5’) (2 are in installation
kit).
 Cable (CX-13291), connects RT-B PA Mt to VAA.
 Cable (CX-13298), connects RT-A to RT-B for RXMT.
 Cable (CX-13303), connects RT-B PA Mt to MB.
 Two Loudspeaker Cables (CX-13292), part of installation kit.
Antennae Systems
 Vehicular Antenna (AS-3900/3916), part of installation kit.
 OE-254
Figure 14 AN/VRC-92A

174
104
VHF handheld SABER 1 fascinator [ref. d, p. 1]
o General Characteristics
 Handheld secure radio
 VHF radio with 2.5 - 6 watts
 Need radio interface box to fill (ZATI)
 VHF - 138 to 174 MHz
 Range - 1 to 3 miles
NMCB SPECIFIC
Figure 15 SABER radio

XTS-5000 portable radio [ref. d]
o General Characteristics
 Handheld secure radio
 VHF radio with 1 - 6 watts
 Crypto fill via cable
 VHF - 136 to 174 MHz
 Range - 1 to 3 miles

Radio Operator Maintenance
o Antennas
 Make sure antennas are clean
 Check antenna elements for damage
 Make sure the (ground strap) is securely installed to the vehicle and
antenna base
o Cables and cable connectors
 Check cables for cuts, cracks, and breaks
 Make sure cable connectors are secure
 Make sure cable connectors are securely attached to cables
o
o
o
o
Controls and switches
 Make sure each control moves smoothly while you operate your radio.
 Make sure all knobs are secure on their shafts.
 If a switch has detents, make sure each position has a solid feel to it.
Mounting and assembly hardware
 Check for loose nuts, bolts, and screws
 Check for corrosion, rust, and deterioration of all metal parts.
Cleaning
 Keep radio as clean as possible
Preparation for movement
 Manpack Radio- If you won’t be using your radio, remove and stow the
antenna and handset
 Vehicular Radio- Make sure the antenna is properly tied down for
movement
104.2 Discuss the general characteristics and operator maintenance of the following
interconnecting wire communication assets:
175
104
NMCB SPECIFIC


176
104
SB-3614A [ref. g]
o The SB-3614A switchboard is a tactical, ruggedized, 30-terminal automatic
switchboard. It provides rapid automatic service to various interfaces. The basic
switchboard may be operated as a 30-terminal single switchboard or may be
connected with additional switchboards to form a 60 or 90 line system. The operator
monitors, answers, initiates, extends, preempts, and releases calls through actuation of
a four-by-four pushbutton keypad and other functional pushbuttons. Any connection
can be broken down manually, through operator intervention and action, or
automatically, by a subscriber going on hook (hanging-up).
o The operator can provide call assistance and one-time call privileges as specified
below without affecting the normal privileges or restrictions of the calling party.
 Call completion assistance.
 Directory and routing information.
 Trouble reporting.
 Call completion to or from outside networks requiring manual interface or with
which the subscriber does not have direct dial access.
 Busy and no answer condition verification.
 Conference call set up.
 One-time precedence/preemption privileges.
 Test tone connection to any line or trunk.
o Up to 18 of the terminals may be connected as 4-wire trunks or E&M dial pulse or
DTMF lines or trunks.
o The switchboard provides fully automatic operation with DTMF touch tone subsets and
2- and 4-wire automatic trunks. It also provides limited automatic operation with rotary
dial pulse subsets. In the case of common battery signaling or ringdown lines and
trunks without DTMF capability, the switchboard provides call extension service
through the operator.
o
TA-312/PT [ref. c, p. 354]
o 2 wire tactical phone
o Talks up to 14 miles wet, up to 22 miles dry
o Operates on 2 “D” cells
o Press to talk handset
o Hand crank to call distant stations
o Talk 4 miles in ear piece with dead batteries
NMCB SPECIFIC

104
TA-838/PT [ref. h]
o The TA-838/PT telephone set is a ruggedized, solid state field telephone. It can be
used as a desk telephone or installed vertically. The telephone set uses 16 pushbutton
keys arranged in a 4 by 4 keyset configuration. A tone ringer (miniature loudspeaker
horn) sounds when an incoming ringing signal is received. The volume is controlled by
the RING VOLUME control. The LED RING indicator lamp can glow when an incoming
ringing signal is received. The lamp is controlled by its ON-OFF switch.
o It can be configured as a subscriber telephone set connected to the switchboard by 2wire or 4-wire lines, or connected directly to another Telephone Set by 4-wire lines, or
used as an extension telephone set. Wire connections to the extension telephone set
must be the same as the wire connections from the subscriber telephone set to the
switchboard.
o General technical information
 Transmission frequency range: 300 to 3,500 Hz.
 Distance ranges with DC supervision: The telephone set is located less than 4
miles from the switchboard.
 Distance ranges with AC supervision: The telephone set can be located more
than 4 miles from the switchboard.
 Battery power for arctic operations: 4 each BA-3042/U.
 Battery power for all other operations: 4 each BA-42 or equivalent (Type C
flashlight cell).
 Dimensions: Packaged (6” high by 10” deep by 6“ wide).
 Weight: 6.5 pounds.
104.3 Discuss the use of the AN/CYZ-10 communications security material system equipment.
[ref. b, pp. 3-1 thru 3-4] OBSOLETE

177
AUTOMATED NET CONTROL DEVICE (ANCD) (AN/CYZ-10) Replaced with AN/PYQ
10.
NMCB SPECIFIC


104
The PYQ-10 provides all the functions currently resident in the CYZ-10 and incorporates new
features that provide streamlined management of COMSEC key, Electronic Protection (EP) data,
and Signal Operating Instructions (SOI).
o
o
o
Capable of receiving, storing, and transferring data from ANCD to ANCD, from ANCD
to SINCGARS radios, and from ANCD to other compatible communications/electronic
equipment. The ANCD is used primarily for handling of COMSEC keys, FH data, sync
time, and signal operating instructions (SOI) information. For SINCGARS applications,
the ANCD replaces COMSEC devices such as KYK- 13, KYX- 15, and KOI- 18 as well
as electronic counter counter-measure (ECCM) fill MX- 18290.
A typical ANCD data load at the operator level consists of two loadsets (COMSEC keys
and FH data for all six radio channels), each good for 30 days of operation, plus 60
days of SOI information, structured in five ten-day editions, containing two 5-day sets
each.
CAPACITIES
 When used for a single or special purpose, an ANCD can store as many as 20
load sets (COMSEC and FH data), and two or more division-wide editions (10
days each). The number of smaller unit SOI editions that can be stored in an
ANCD depends entirely on the size of the SOI extract.
 An ANCD will also store as many as 120 COMSEC keys (traffic encryption key
[TEK] or key encryption key [KEK]), or 280 transmission security keys (TSKs).
104.4 Discuss the tactical employment and purpose of NMCB communication systems.


178
Tactical employment loops:
o Rifleman
o Fire Team leader
o Squad Leader
o Platoon Leader
o Company CP
o COC
o Regiment
o MAGTF
Purpose: Strong coordination between rifleman up to MAGTF and beyond can ensure a
victorious outcome for any combat mission assigned to a Seabee organization.
NMCB SPECIFIC
104
Figure 16 Battalion Comm layout
104.5 Discuss the procedure for installing communications security material system information into
the AN/PRC-119A-E. [ref. b, pp. 5-29 thru 5-32]

179
NEXT PAGE
NMCB SPECIFIC
180
104
NMCB SPECIFIC
181
104
NMCB SPECIFIC
182
104
NMCB SPECIFIC
183
104
NMCB SPECIFIC
Extra
184
104
NMCB SPECIFIC
DAGR (Defense Advanced GPS Receive)r replaced PLGR (Precision Lightweight GPS Receiver)
185
104
NMCB SPECIFIC
105
105 WEAPONS FUNDAMENTALS
OLD.4 Name the four types of positions that might be employed in a defensive posture. [ref. c, p. 4-6]




Primary Fighting Position
o The primary fighting position is the best available position from which the assigned
sector of fire can cover. Individuals, fire teams, squads, and crew-served weapons
are assigned primary positions.
Alternate Fighting Position
o Alternate positions are not normally assigned to individuals or squads within the
platoon. They are used primarily by crew-served weapons. An alternate position is
located so that a crew-served weapon can continue to cover the original assigned
sector of fire when the primary position becomes unsuited for carrying out that
mission.
Supplementary Fighting Position
o Supplementary positions are prepared to guard against attack from directions other
than those from which the main attack is expected. A supplementary position is a
secondary position that does not cover the same sector of fire as the primary
position. Supplementary positions are for security reasons and ensure protection,
when occupied against surprise enemy attack from an unexpected direction.
Movements to supplementary positions and concealed routes are covered to avoid
enemy detection.
Battle Position
o The battle position is where the main effort of defense is concentrated. Companies
and platoons are assigned battle positions. The battle position is made up of a
series of sectors of fire that support and interlock one another. Based on the battle
position of the company, platoon battle positions are assigned a right and left limit
of fire in which gunfire can be delivered.
The following items apply to the 84mm M136 (AT-4):
105.1 Describe the 84mm M136 (AT-4). [ref. a, p. 14-20]



Lightweight, Self contained anti-armor weapon, Man-portable, Right shoulder fired only
Free flight fin stabilized cartridge packed in an expendable launcher
One piece
105.2 Describe the different firing positions. [ref. a, pp. 14-30 thru 14-32]




186
Standing
o Used when firing on moving or stationary targets from behind a protective barrier
such as a wall or barricade. Most unstable and exposed position
Kneeling
o Used for firing on moving or stationary targets. Maximum use of support is essential
for stability
Sitting
o Used for firing on stationary targets. More suitable than kneeling position
Prone
o The least stable position. Affords the most protection
o The danger area extends for 60 meters with a 90 degree angle behind the weapon
o The weapon must not have any obstructions closer than 5 meters to the rear of the
weapon
NMCB SPECIFIC
105
105.3 State the following capabilities/nomenclature: [ref. a]









Length [p. 14-21] – 40”
Weight [p. 14-21] – Fully loaded = 14.8 lbs
Maximum range [p. 14-21] – 2100 Meters
Maximum effective range [p. 14-21] – 300 Meters
Controls [p. 14-22]
o Transport Safety Pin: Blocks the movement of the firing pin and prevents it from
striking the cartridge percussion cap
o Cocking lever: When the cocking lever is in the SAGE position, there is no contact
between the firing rod and the trigger.
o Forward Safety: Prevents the firing rod from striking the firing pin.
Ammunition [p. 14-22]
o Tactical cartridge, 18” long, high explosive, anti-tank (HEAT)
Misfire procedures [pp. 14-26, 14-27]
o Causes
 A complete failure to fire caused by a faulty firing mechanism or faulty
element in the propellant charge.
o Action
 Shout “misfire”
 Maintain sight picture
 Release safety catch
 Re-cock the weapon
 Check back blast area and attempt to fire
 Repeat if necessary
 If still fails, release safety catch and return cocking lever to the safe position
 Reinsert the transport safety pin, lay weapon on the ground and notify chain
of command.
Minimum arming range [p. 14-21] – 10 Meters
Safety [pp.14-32, 14-33]
o Take care in selecting positions for firing. Avoid areas that could cause you to fire
through a screen of brush or trees
o Impact with a twig or branch may deflect the rocket or cause it to detonate
o You must try to obtain concealment, but not at risk of safety
o To prevent the rocket from striking the fore ground and causing serious injury to
personnel, maintain the launcher in the firing position until the rocket has left the
launcher
o Avoid the blast of flame and ejected residue to the rear of the launcher
o Remove flammable material, such as dry vegetation, from the back blast area
o Keep personnel and ammunition clear of the rear danger area unless adequate
shelter protection is provided
o Sand or loose dirt in the back blast area can also reveal your position to the enemy.
o Do not fire rockets at temperatures below 40F or above 140F
o Never fire a damaged weapon
The following items apply to the M4:
105.4 Describe the characteristics of M4 rifle. [ref. b, p. 1-3]
(1) Light weight, (2) Air-cooled, (3) Gas-operated (4) Magazine-fed (5) Semiautomatic or burst fire
105.5 Discuss loading/unloading procedures. [ref. b, p. 4-12]
o Loading
 Ensure weapon is on safe
187
NMCB SPECIFIC
105


o
With the bolt locked to the rear, insert a magazine
Release the bolt catch and allow the bolt to go forward. This chambers a round
from the magazine.
 The weapon is now loaded and in condition one.
Un-loading
 Ensure the rifle is on safe
 After the last shot the bolt should lock to the rear. If so, just remove the
magazine and inspect the chamber.
 If the bolt does not lock to the rear, pull the charging handle rearward and lock
the bolt rearward using the bolt catch.
 Repeat the second step to complete the unloading process
105.6 Describe and identify the parts and major groups within the M4 carbine. [ref. b, pp. 1-4.1
thru 1-5]
a. Length
29.75-33 inches depending on buttstock lenght
b. Weight
6 lb 7 oz unloaded, 7.75 lb loaded
c. Maximum range 3600 meters
d. Maximum effective range point – 500 meters, area 600 meters
e. Safeties single on side.
f. Ammunitions
 5.56 Ball: Standard round
 5.56 Tracer: Used to mark targets or cause incendiary effects
 5.56 Blank: Training round
 5.56 Dummy: Totally inert training
right-hand twist 6 grooves, 1 turn in 7 inches (17.78 cm)
OLD.37 Discuss the effectiveness and employment of early warning devices and pyrotechnics. [ref. a,
pp. 12-11 thru 12-13]



188
Trip Flares
o Used primarily to illuminate and to give warning of attacking or infiltrating enemy
troops
o Place along a likely avenue of approach and activated by the enemy
o Normally not used in any other operation other than defensive
Booby Traps
o Can be explosive or non-explosive. Used primarily to incapacitate, wound, or kill
unsuspecting person when they disturb an apparently harmless object.
o Improvised
 Constructed from standard firing devices, explosives, weapons, missiles or
other material used for other purposes
o Manufactured
 Standard devices made at a factory. Made to look like useful objects
(gooks, pipes, bottled drinks)
Explosive Devices
o Booby traps laid along paths and trails to delay and frustrate patrols and foot troops
o Most are improvised with either pressure release, pull or pull release devices
 Grenade Trap: Setup with a wire to pull pin when tripped over
 Grenade in can: grenade in can with pin removed. Trip wire pulls grenade
from can
 Mud ball mine: grenade packed in mud. Mud dries and cracks grenade
explodes
NMCB SPECIFIC

105
Non-explosive devices
o All are improvised with locally available material. Either pressure release, pull or
pull release devices
o Types
 Punji stakes
 Bamboo spikes placed in the ground protruding just enough to
produce injury.
 Foot Traps
 Small pits combined with spike boards placed along paths or trails
 Deadfalls
 Various devices are suspended above jungle paths and trails.
Designed to fall or swing in an arc and strike victims as they pass
below.
OLD.39 Discuss the various rates of fire: [ref. g, p. 4-2]



Rapid: Greater than 40 rounds per minute, fired in bursts of six to nine rounds, at 5-10
second intervals.
Sustained: The rate at which the weapon could reasonably be fired indefinitely without
failing.
Cyclic: This is the mechanical rate of fire, or how fast the weapon "cycles" (loads, locks,
fires, unlocks, ejects). Measurement of the cyclic rate assumes that the weapon is being
operated as fast as possible and does not consider operator reloading time (magazine
changes etc). When the trigger is squeezed, the rate at which rounds are fired is the cyclic
rate.
105.42 State TOA weapons allotment: [ref. c, app. III-1]
Most weapons are broken up between the 4 Fly in echelon modules.
The break down is in the officer answer booklet. As of 1 March 2012 adding the individual
TOA’s up DOES NOT EQUAL the provided FIE TOA numbers. Below stated numbers are
the FIE total allotment not the added allotment.










189
M2
12
M240B
28
MK19
12
M203
40
M203A1 (for M4) 20
M500
40
M16
420
M9
175
M4
160
NMCB SPECIFIC
106
106 EMBARKATION FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBINST 3122.1, Embarkation Manual
[b] COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBINST 4627.1, Naval Construction Force Maritime
Prepositioning Force Operations Instruction
[c] ABFC View Program, https://ncf.navy.mil/abfcview/abfcviewabout.cfm
[d] MCRP 4-11.3F, Convoy Operations Handbook
[e] AMC Pamphlet 36-101, Vol. I, AMC Affiliation Program Equipment Preparation
Course___________________________________________________________
106.1 Explain the operations of the battalion Mount Out Central Control (MOCC). [ref. a, p. 3-1]


The Mount Out Control Center controls, coordinates, and monitors the movement of all
personnel, supplies, and equipment to the embarkation staging area. The steps for CESE
preparation are as follows:
o Dispatch
o Collateral
o Shop
o Pre-Start/Initial Inspection
o Fuel/de-fuel
o Check Air Certification Letter
 Defines the steps for preparing CESE for loading onto Aircraft
o Reduction (As required)
o Wash
o Final Inspection
Process Tracked in the MOCC
o CESE Prep
o Supply Prep
o Mobile Loading
o Weighing and Marking
o HAZMAT Certification
o Load Planning
o Chalks/Sorties
o AACG/DACG
o JI
106.2 Discuss who is responsible for the operation of the battalion MOCC. [ref. a, p. 3-1]


The XO is responsible for the operations in the MOCC
The S-3 works with the XO to control the MOCC
106.3 State the purpose and the function of Unit Movement Control Center (UMCC). [ref. d, ch.
3, p. 10]
 Each element of the MEF Marine airground task force (MAGTF) will activate a unit
movement control center (UMCC) to manage organic lift requirements and will funnel
external requirements to the LMCC for sourcing. Further, each UMCC will execute zonal
movement control under the direction of the LMCC.
106.4 Describe the elements of an embarkation organization. [ref. a, p. 1-1]

190
The Battalion Embarkation Officer is responsible to the CO for an orderly and efficient
embarkation. Officers who have other primary duties requiring attention during mount-out
should not be designated as the NMCB Embarkation Officer. Embarkation provides a
NMCB SPECIFIC
106
junior officer the opportunity to learn the principles of equipment operation and
maintenance; equipment capabilities and limitations; battalion organization and allowance;
communications procedures; and planning. The Battalion Embarkation Officer and
assistant will be appointed in writing by the CO.



191
The Battalion Embarkation Officer is responsible for the following:
o Knowing the location of all supplies, equipment, and vehicles assigned to the
battalion.
o Maintaining the MOCC files with current data. (See Chapter 3, paragraph 302.)
o Training sufficient personnel outside of the embarkation staff to perform
embarkation functions during the actual mount-out.
o Maintenance of a current turnover file so that in the event the officer is
incapacitated or absent during an embarkation, the assistant may readily assume
the duties with a minimum of lost effort.
o Conducting training for the embarkation staff to increase their proficiency in
embarkation.
o Preparing and maintaining a template file of all current homeport/deployment site
equipment/attachment Tab A equipment attached to the battalion.
o Coordinating through the S3 all requirements associated with battalion movement.
o Validating/updating of the Preliminary Load Plans (PLP) for the deployment of the
Air DET and Air Echelon on C-130, C-141B, C17, KC135, and C-5 type aircraft
within 30 days of arrival at the deployment site. Develop the PLP using the current
CESE Tab A, Equipment List, and TOA Materials and Supplies.
o Validating the CALM/CAEMS System data base as changes are received to the
CESE Tab A.
o Maintaining a current roster with copies of training certificates of completion and
letters of appointment on all battalion embarkation staff members.
o Ensuring that all detachments (to include Deployments-for-Training (DFTs)) are
assigned qualified embarkation personnel; Air/Sea Load Planner(s) and Hazardous
Cargo Certifiers to support redeployment needs per
COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBINST 1500.1A.
o Scheduling and conducting at a minimum one homeport and one deployed
mobilization CPX within the battalion, as stated in Chapter 1, paragraph 103.
o Maintaining a complete embarkation library in accordance with Annex B.
BATTALION EMBARKATION CHIEF
o The Battalion Embarkation Chief will be assigned as a primary duty for a 14-month
period and will be appointed in writing by the CO and is responsible for the
following.
 Assignment and efficient use of battalion assets for deployment and
redeployment by air, land, and sea.
 Advising and assisting the Battalion Embarkation Officer in the execution of
the duties as listed in paragraph 204 above.
 Maintaining close liaison with Regimental and Brigade Embarkation Staffs
to keep current on all embarkation issues.
BATTALION EMBARKATION PETTY OFFICER
o The Battalion Embarkation Petty Officer will be assigned as a primary duty for a 14month period and will be appointed in writing by the CO. This billet should be filled
with a senior first class Equipment Operator or Construction Mechanic. The
Embarkation Petty Officer is responsible for the following:
 Assignment and efficient use of battalion assets for the deployment and
redeployment by air, land, sea, and/or any combination thereof.
NMCB SPECIFIC

106
Assists the Battalion Embarkation Chief in the execution of his duties as
listed in paragraph 205 above.
DUTIES & RESPONSIBILITIES DURING MOUNT-OUT
CO Briefs the staff personal on the mission and gives his intent for completing the mission.
XO is in charge of the MOCC.
S1 ADMIN AND PERSONNEL will write correspondence and handle message traffic
Verify page 2’s, dependent care certificate, and SGLI.
The S1 is the senior assistant to the XO for administrative details and personnel administration.
S2/S7 INTEL AND TRAINING Maintain library of contingency plans and maps, Supporting plans for
combat support and disaster recovery, Operate the armory. Scheduling and monitoring technical and
military training in the NMCB. Schedule classrooms, ranges, and spaces for training.
S3 Operations Office is the alternate for MOCC in the event the XO is not with the command. He has
direct supervisory authority over the utilization of the battalion’s construction resources, personnel,
equipment and materials.
S4 Supply Department responsibilities are to procure, receive, store, issue, ship, transfer and
account for supply items, equipage, repair parts and construction materials. Operates the Enlisted
Dining Facility, disbursing, and accounting for funds for battalion purchases and military pay.
S6 Communication Department will maintain and ensure communication is at the MOCC,
Alpha Co, Pallet building area, Staging area, DACG, and all Security posts.
ALPHA CO will preparation all CESE. Drivers, Ammo/Hazmat drivers, Forklift Operators, Staging
Area, AACG and DACG convoys.
Preparation of Equipment
Dispatch: Issue hard card
Collateral: All collateral is mounted on CESE.
Wash rack: CESE is cleaned for air shipment.
1st Inspection: CESE is given a safety inspection.
Shop: Mount DTO parts and safety items, complete fueling/defueling, complete PM,
Final Inspection: Quality control inspection is done.
Wash rack: If needed after returning from shop.
Dispatch: Trip ticket is issued.
Mobile load: Items are loaded into/onto that can be secured properly.
Weight and Balance: CESE is weighed and center of balance is marked.
Load planners: load the aircraft with the CALM program to priority and size of aircraft.
Staging area: CESE, pallets and chalks is Joint inspected. Frustrated chalks are
moved to holding area and repaired or replaced. After the JI the CESE and Pallets
belong to the AMC REP. Our DACG will assist the Aircrew with loading.
Call forward: CESE and pallets wait for aircraft.
Ready line: the point the aircraft is loaded. Our AACG fly with the aircraft.
192
NMCB SPECIFIC
106
Bravo Co will perform security at all points in the mount out, using access list from S1. Provide at
least 6 personnel per wash rack and 4 personnel at the staging area for cleaning of the CESE.
Charlie Co will build 463L pallets. After pallet building is done the crew goes to the mobile
load staging areas and assists Alpha Co until the JI is done.
HEADQUARTERS Co will assist all S’s codes and provide message writers, communications
personnel, and have watches in Admin and Personal during the Mount out operation. EA’s
will do weight and balance.
AIRDET will plan do rehearsals and inspection.
X-1 Chaplain gives counseling and family support.
X-2 Dental ensures that Air Det is deployable by dental codes.
 Member needs no dental work.
 Member needs minor work; no facility is needed, but is Deployable.
 Member needs work facility is needed and is deployable.
 Member needs surgical/extensive dental work or a T-2 exam. Deployable.
X-3 Legal completes power of attorneys and wills.
X-4 Medical checks and verifies medical records. Gives special Vaccines and medicines as needed
for the location of operations.
193
NMCB SPECIFIC
106
OLD.4 Define the following as applied to Maritime Prepositioning Force (MPF): [ref. b]




SLRP [pp. 5-2 thru 5-13]
o The Survey, Liaison, and Reconnaissance Party (SLRP) is a task organization
comprised of representatives from the staffs of the CMPF, MPF MAGTF, NCR, and
CNSE. The SLRP conducts initial reconnaissance, establishes liaison with in
theater authorities, and initiates preparations for the arrival of the remainder of the
FIE and the MPSRON. The mission of the SLRP is to determine suitability of the
port, beach, airfields, and road/rail networks to support arrival of the MPF MAGTF;
to designate areas for unit arrival and assembly operations in accordance with the
off-load and AA Plan; and to conduct liaison and coordination with US, allied, and
Host Nation authorities in support of the MPF operation.
OPP [pp. 6-2 thru 6-8]
o The Off-load Preparation Party (OPP) is a temporary task organization of
maintenance, embarkation and equipment personnel embarked on each ship to
prepare the ship's cranes and lighterage and embarked Navy and Marine Corps
equipment and supplies for off-load.
AP [pp. 7-2 thru 7-9]
o The Advance Party is made up of various task organizations from each element of
the MAGTF (ACE, GCE, CE, CSSE, NCF, FH, EAF) that arrive in the AAA in
advance of the Main Body. The function of the Advance Party is to command and
control the off-load, throughput, and reception of the equipment, supplies and the
remainder of the FIE.
MB [p. 1-8]
o The Main Body consists of the remaining forces not involved in the arrival and
assembly operation (e.g. combat forces).
o Arrival of the Main Body too early can create a severe vulnerability for the forces
ashore. Therefore, the Main Body arrival must be carefully timed to allow all
personnel and equipment needed for the Advance Party organizations to arrive in
the AAA before the Main Body begins to deploy and so as not to draw down on the
logistics support for the off-load/throughput operations. For example, adequate
meals, medical support, water production/storage, etc. must be ashore and
available from prepositioned assets prior to the influx of personnel from the Main
Body. If not properly executed, the flow of the Main Body can result in significant
logistics problems for the MAGTF.
o The Main Body will flow in a sequenced priority required to stand up the MAGTF for
subsequent employment.
OLD.5 Discuss the organic TOA capability for self-sustainability. [ref. c]

The P25M contains the entire TOA for an NMCB and can be viewed in it’s entirety or by
component using the ABFC View Program accessible via the SOP on ncf.navy.mil.
106.5 Explain the procedures to calculate the center of balance for Civil Engineer Support
Equipment (CESE). [ref. e, pp. 4-6 thru 4-24]
194
NMCB SPECIFIC

195
NEXT PAGE
106
NMCB SPECIFIC
196
106
NMCB SPECIFIC
197
106
NMCB SPECIFIC
198
106
NMCB SPECIFIC
199
106
NMCB SPECIFIC
200
106
NMCB SPECIFIC
201
106
NMCB SPECIFIC
202
106
NMCB SPECIFIC
106
106.6 Explain the four types of shoring used during embarkation operations. [ref. e, ch. 6]

203
Sleeper [pp. 6-6, 6-7]
o Use sleeper shoring under the frame or axles of vehicles that weigh over 20,000
pounds and are equipped with soft, low pressure, balloon-type, off road tires. Use
sleeper shoring to prevent the vehicle from bouncing up and down and possibly
NMCB SPECIFIC



106
pulling the tie-down rings out of the aircraft floor. The base of the sleeper shoring
(area contacting the aircraft floor) must be large enough to support the entire
weight of the vehicle it’s beneath without exceeding the P.S.I. limitation of the
aircraft floor.
Rolling [p. 6-1]
o Use rolling shoring to protect the aircraft parking ramp, and the cargo floor and
loading ramps of cargo airplanes from damage when transporting a vehicle across
it. Most vehicles shipped by air do not exceed weight limitations, and consequently,
do not require rolling shoring. Vehicles with cleats, studs, or other gripping devices
and treads that allow concentrated contact require rolling shoring. Cleated or
lugged wheels can easily cause damage to the aircraft floor or soft surfaces. The
total weight of the vehicle is transferred to the small, concentrated, contact area of
the cleats or lugs. Vehicles that have concentrated contacts require rolling shoring
thick enough to prevent damage to the cargo floor. In all cases, the minimum
thickness is ¾ inch.
Parking [pp. 6-3 thru 6-6]
o Use parking shoring to protect the aircraft floor from damage during flight. Any
vehicle requiring rolling shoring also requires parking shoring. Each aircraft has
specific floor weight limitations that apply to wheeled and non-wheeled items of
cargo. If the vehicle exceeds these weight limitations, you must provide parking
shoring before the item can be transported by air. There is no need for you to learn
the mathematical processes required to calculate shoring requirements. But, here
are some general considerations regarding parking shoring you may want to
remember when planning an airlift movement:
 The minimum thickness of parking shoring is ¾ inch.
 Use parking shoring to protect the aircraft floor or ramps from concentrated
contact such as blades, buckets, fork-lift tines, steel wheels, trailer tongue
supports, etc. All trailers with a tongue that could rest on the aircraft floor
should be shipped with parking shoring, whether connected to or
disconnected from its prime mover.
 Most pneumatic tires do not normally require parking shoring. The ones that
do are usually narrow and/or very heavy. Contact your affiliated TALCE if
you are unsure about shoring requirements.
 Always use parking shoring when rolling shoring is used.
 Always use parking shoring on 463L pallets when you load items that have
sharp edges or protrusions that could damage the pallet’s aluminum
surface. Contact your affiliated TALCE for guidance about specific vehicle
or aircraft limitations.
Approaching [p. 6-8]
o Approach shoring has a specific application. Use approach shoring to decrease
the approach angle of aircraft loading ramps. This is because some items of cargo
will strike the aircraft or ground during loading/offloading operations. Extremely tall
and long items may also contact the top of the aircraft cargo compartment without a
reduced approach angle provided by approach shoring. Although there is no
standard method for the user to calculate when and how much approach shoring to
use, most helicopters, all 40K-loaders, and many long vehicles with limited ground
clearance will require approach shoring.
OLD.8 Explain the purpose of a Joint Inspection (JI). [ref. e, pp. 7-2 thru 7-13]

204
All equipment must be properly prepared and documented before it can be loaded on any
aircraft.
NMCB SPECIFIC
106.7 Describe movement formations and techniques of a convoy
File formation
Staggered formation
Offset formation
Inverted “T” formation
Diamond formation
Changing lanes
205
106
NMCB SPECIFIC
106
Danger areas
106.8 Identify four convoy elements related to the convoy task organization. [ref. d, p. 1-1]




Convoys are task-organized to meet the requirements of the assigned mission. A transport
element, an escort or security element, various support elements, and a command and
control element are generally included. The specific organization is situation dependent.
The tactical situation, enemy capabilities, as well as other planned options should be
assessed in developing the convoy task organization.
March column: Typically consists of 30 vehicles and comprises the entire convoy.
Serial column: Typically used when the March column is very large and allows for greater
command and control by dividing the March column into more manageable components.
Unit column: A subset of the Serial column or March column, depending on the convoy
size and allows for greater command and control by dividing the March or Serial column
into more manageable components.

106.9 Identify planning requirements for vehicle convoys. [ref. d, pp. 1-1 thru 1-13]

206
The following list covers the major planning topics, for detailed information go to ref. d.
o Warning Order
o Movement Order
o Task Organization
NMCB SPECIFIC
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
106
Liaison and Coordination
Route reconnaissance and selection
Movement Control
Logistics Support
Communication
Distance, Time, and Rate of Movement
Convoy Staging
Traffic Control
March Discipline
Movement Execution
Night Movements
106.10 Describe vehicle convoy’s logistics and security requirements. [ref. d, pp. 1-4, 1-11]

Logistics
o

207
The amount of logistic support for a convoy will be affected by the size of the
convoy and the distance to be traveled. Planning corresponds to logistic
procedures in SOPs. Logistic support in the form of vehicle recovery and repair,
fuel, food, road repair, and medical assistance may be coordinated with and
provided by units located in the areas the convoy transverses. Logistic support will
be required at the convoy’s destination for billeting, messing, refueling, minor
equipment repairs, ammunition resupply, cargo transfer, and vehicle security. For
large convoys, advance coordination at the convoy destination must be made to
ensure that logistic support is met. To establish airborne radio relay or
retransmission sites to ensure that adequate communications are maintained at all
times.
Security
o Control capabilities will be reduced at night. At the same time, the convoy’s
vulnerability to ambush or harassing fire will be increased. Compromise between
the need for both security and control. Increasing the size of security forces for
night movement creates a greater noise and control problem. Decreasing the
security forces permits better control and noise discipline. Carefully consider the
requirements for security and control. Regardless of the choice, most vehicles,
including escorts, will be road-bound. If an attack is encountered, the best reaction,
as in daytime operations, is dependent upon the type of attack. Dispersion and
extended intervals offer the best protection from air and artillery attacks. Rapidly
clearing or evading the killing zone, along with a high volume of return fire, is the
best protection from ambush. Night immediate-action drills should be rehearsed
and all convoy members should receive refresher training in night security and
night defensive techniques.
NMCB SPECIFIC
107
107 CONTINGENCY OPERATIONS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBINST 3300.1, Rapid Runway Repair
[b] ABFC View Program, https://ncf.navy.mil/abfcview/abfcviewabout.cfm
[c] NAVEDTRA 14233, Naval Construction Force/Seabee 1 & C
[d] COMCBPAC/COMCBLANTINST 11014.2, Maintenance Management Program for
Naval Construction Force (NCF) Camps
[e] FM 5-277, Bailey Bridge
[f] TM-08676A-23/2, Medium Girder Bridge, Marine Corps
[g] AFMAN 10-219, Vol. 4, Rapid Runway Repair Operations
[h] NAVEDTRA 14081, Equipment Operator, Basic_____________________________
107.1 Describe the duties and responsibilities of the following Rapid Runway Repair (RRR) teams
and state what type of equipment is necessary to perform their mission under Battle Damage Repair
(BDR)/RRR. [ref. a, ch. III]

208
MOS [Annex C]
o MOS SELECTION
 The minimum operating strip is the smallest section of the runway required
for launching and recovering an aircraft. Based upon the damage
assessment data reported after an attack of the air base, the RRR
command center must determine the locations of potential MOSs and
estimate which one would require the least apparent amount of time and
effort to repair. The RRR command center may recommend possible MOS
location alternatives to Station command center, but the Station command
center will determine its final location. Currently, the minimum dimension of
the MOS for fighter aircraft is 50 feet wide by 5,000 feet long, as required by
the Air Force. For cargo aircraft, specifically a C141B and aircraft of the
Civil Reserve Air Fleet (CRAF), the MOS must be at least 90 feet wide by
7,000 feet long. Actual MOS dimensions, which are based on the
requirements of the NATOPS Manual, should be established by Station Air
Operations Departments.
 A MOS may be located on the main runway, on a parallel taxiway, on an
aircraft parking apron, or even on an alternate launch and recovery surface
on or off base. The MOS location affects launch or recovery status by
restricting the flight approach of aircraft or by limiting air traffic control and
access.
o MOS ACCESS ROUTES
 In order to get aircraft to and from an MOS, access routes are required.
Access routes from aircraft shelter or parking areas to the MOS must be
restored and maintained to a minimum width of 25 feet for fighter aircraft.
The access route must be a smooth surface free of debris.
 AM-2 matting, FRP matting, or compacted crushed stone are excellent
expedients which can serve to maintain and repair access routes. Access
routes must be widened to 60 feet when the air base is upgraded to accept
large cargo aircraft.
o MOS DETERMINATION FACTORS. The following should be considered when
determining possible MOS alternatives:
 The number and location of craters. The primary MOS should be selected
in an area with as few bomb craters as possible to minimize the amount of
work and time required to establish the MOS.
NMCB SPECIFIC
107

o

209
The amount, location, and severity of airfield pavement spalling. Again, the
primary MOS should be selected in an area with as few spalls as possible to
minimize the amount of work and time required to establish the MOS.
 The amount and location of UXO. The primary MOS should be selected in
an area with the least amount of UXO. If EOD personnel are limited, UXO
may be a greater problem to the RRR operation than bomb craters or
spalls.
 The amount of bomb crater and spall damage to taxiways and/or access
routes to the MOS. Given several possible MOS locations with equivalent
damage, the one with the least damaged access routes should be selected
to minimize the total repair time of the primary MOS and access routes.
BATTALION MOS SELECTION RESPONSIBILITIES. The Battalion’s primary
responsibility in MOS selection is to assist in the determination of potential MOS
alternatives in the RRR command center and to assist in presenting them to the
Station command center. The Battalion should be prepared to assist in the
determination and plotting of MOSs for the Station. The Station Commanding
Officer, or his designated representative in the Station command center, will select
the primary MOS from the available options.
DAT [Annex B]
o DAMAGE ASSESSMENT PRIORITIES. The Station BDR/RRR plan should
provide the damage assessment priority of the various Station facilities. The
Battalion should integrate those priorities in its RRR plan and DAT assignments. In
general, the priority of the areas to be assessed will most likely be:
 Runways and taxiways, aircraft maintenance facilities, aircraft parking,
loading, and refueling areas. In these areas, all craters, spalls, and UXO
must be reported.
 Station command and control, and communications facilities.
 Key utility substations or facilities.
 Medical and decontamination facilities.
 POL storage and pumping facilities.
o DAT TEAM COMPOSITION
 RRR DAT Composition. The DATs should normally consist of three
Battalion personnel augmented with one EOD technician and one Public
Works or Air Operations representative to aid the assessment, record
information, and communicate data to the Station/Battalion command
center. Each DAT shall have a communicator assigned to it who is trained
in radio procedures and operation. The EOD expertise is necessary to
accurately identify and classify UXO and oversee the activities of the DAT in
the hazardous UXO environment. The ranking Battalion member of the
team will be the team leader. Regardless of rank, however, the EOD
technician takes charge and directs the team’s movement through areas
with UXO.
 Facilities DAT Composition. In general, the facility DATs should have at
least one electrician/utilitiesman and a builder/steelworker. Also, the
presence of UXO and chemical agents may require EOD and disaster
preparedness personnel participation. Manning will probably be limited
during a contingency response, so the minimum number of persons
necessary to evaluate damage should be assigned. The Station should
have the primary responsibility for manning the facility DATs.
 Battalion DAT Team Distribution. At a minimum, the Battalion should be
prepared to provide personnel for the following number of RRR DATs
depending on the site:
NMCB SPECIFIC



107
Battalion Main Body:…………………………..4 DATs
Large NMCB Detail: (>100 Personnel)………3 DATs
Air DET or Medium/Small NMCB DET:……...2 DATs
o RRR DAMAGE ASSESSMENT INFORMATION. During RRR damage
assessment, the DATs gather two types of information: The location and
description of pavement damage caused by bombs or cannon fire and the locations
and descriptions of UXO.
 Pavement Damage Data. Pavement damage to potential MOS
surfaces will also be recorded on the same scaled drawings as the
UXO reports. The following information is included in each report:


o
o

210
Damage type (crater, single spall, spall field, etc.)
Location (by grid coordinates or in relation to known reference
markers)
 Size (crater diameter, spall field dimensions)
 UXO Data. The UXO that may influence aircraft operations must be
accurately located, reported, and recorded in sufficient detail for the RRR
command center to determine the risk to aircraft operations. All UXO within
300 feet of repair operations or aircraft operating surfaces must be
identified. Holes of entry for subsurface UXO must be also reported. Thus,
scaled drawings must show sufficient adjacent area to include the 300-foot,
UXO radius-of-effect is included in the DAT report:
 Location, Quantity, Size, Shape, Color, Distinctive markings, Fuse
type and condition
DAMAGE ASSESSMENT PREATTACK ACTIONS. Existing pavement markings
on the runways/taxiways will most likely be destroyed or covered with debris after
an attack. The Battalion should fabricate a marking system consisting of large
stakes for use as station markers to assist in determining the location of damage
and UXO after the attack. The stakes should be installed prior to an attack and be
placed far enough off the runway and taxiway surfaces so that they will survive an
attack but still be visible from the runway surface. In addition, the stakes should be
placed at 100 feet intervals and have visible station markings.
DATA ASSESSMENT REPORTING PROCEDURES. The DATs will report the
following information on each report:
 Identification call sign of DAT
 Time of report
 Damage assessment data
 The DATs should report this damage data using the standard Air Force
reporting format as outlined in reference (b).
Crater/Spall [Annexes E, F]
o CRATER REPAIR OPERATIONS
 GENERAL. In basic terms, crater repairs consist of clearing debris from the
crater, removing damaged pavement, backfilling the crater and installing
Foreign Object Damage (FOD) cover. The debris clearing, pavement
removal, and backfilling procedures are generally the same regardless of
the FOD cover utilized. The Battalion should plan on using a “menu”
approach to FOD cover installation, i.e., using all available FOD cover at
each site, even if this means using several different types to accomplish the
airfield repairs.
o CRATER PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS. The specific actions which must be
accomplished during the crater preparation phase of the crater repair are:
NMCB SPECIFIC


o
211
107
Clearing debris from the crater diameter perimeter.
Determining the actual crater diameter versus the apparent crater diameter,
i.e., the extent of crater pavement damage/upheaval.
 Removing the upheaved pavement.
 Removing large ejecta from inside the crater, as required.
 Backfilling the crater with ballast rock, fill, or clean ejecta.
 Backfilling the crater with crushed stone.
 Compaction of the crushed stone.
 Installing FOD cover.
 References (a) through (d) give detailed procedural guidance for the
execution of the crate repair procedures listed above. The Battalion shall
ensure that all personnel are familiar with the required procedures for their
specifically assigned RRR tasks.
SPALL REPAIR
 SPALL REPAIR PROCEDURES. Recommended spall repair procedures
are a combination for rapid setting cements and pea grave. The
recommended types of rapid setting cements are either regulated set
cement (such as Ideal Cement Company’s REG SET), or a magnesium
phosphate cement (such as SET 45), or a high early strength type cement
(such as PYRAMENT).
 SPALL REPAIR PRECAUTIONS. The following precautions must be taken
in making spall repairs:
 Ensure that there is no water or ice in the spall cavity prior to filling
the spall. If water or ice exists in the spall cavity, the repair teams
should remove both before proceeding with the spall repair.
However, if small amounts of water or small pieces of ice cannot be
removed from the spall cavity, the repair should be removed and
replaced as soon as weather and operational conditions permit. In
the interim, any such aircraft spalls should be continually monitored
to detect deterioration of the spall repair, with particular emphasis on
checking for the shrinkage or “loosening” of the spall repair and the
presence of FOD. If deterioration occurs, the original repair will
have to be removed and replaced.
 Care must be taken to ensure that the regulated set cement does
not set up prior to installation in the spall cavity.
 The quality of stored regulated set cement should be checked as a
pre-attack action to ensure that it has not set up or deteriorated
while in storage.
 Most of the regulated set cements pose no greater safety hazard
than normal concrete. However, the Battalion personnel should
read the manufacture’s information to determine whether or not any
special safety precautions are required.
 SPALL REPAIR TRAINING. The Battalion should conduct spall repair
training in homeport and on deployment. Particularly on deployment, the
Battalion shall seek opportunities to conduct spall repair training by patching
damaged Station pavement or roadways with a regulated set cement-pea
gravel mixture.
NMCB SPECIFIC
107
107.2 Describe the following methods of RRR:




Folded Fiberglass Matting (FFM) [ref. g, p. 5.8.2]
o This procedure, which is currently the primary MOS repair method, involves the
installation of an anchored FFM over a crater which was prepared with a layer of
well-compacted crushed stone. Crater preparation is essentially identical to that
used with the AM-2 matting system. Again, this is the principle method of RRR
employed for MOS repairs at overseas MOBs (figure 5.4). Procedural details
regarding FFM installation are provided in Technical Manual T.O. 35E2-3-1.
AM-2 aluminum matting [ref. g, p. 5.8.1]
o AM-2 aluminum matting is hand-assembled and anchored over the crater which
was prepared with a layer of crushed stone. This repair surface is the most
manpower intensive of the two primary RRR techniques
Crushed stone repair [ref. a, Annex E, ch. 3]
o See answer to question 107.1.c and omit last step.
Cretemobile [ref. h, pp. 14-3, 14-4]
o The trailer-mounted crete mobile carries the cement, sand, and coarse aggregates
in divided bins, mounted on the unit. The cement is carried in a separate bin,
located across the rear of the unit, and the sand and aggregate are carried on each
side of the unit. Water is carried in a single tank, mounted in front of the aggregate
bins, and is pumped to the mix auger. Sand and aggregates are proportioned
accurately by weight or volume and dropped simultaneously with a mixture of
cement from the material feed system into the charging end of the mix
auger/conveyor at the rear of the unit. At this point, a predetermined amount of
water enters the mix auger. This action of the combined auger and paddle
homogenizer mixes the ingredients and water rapidly, thoroughly, and continuously
to produce a continuous flow of uniformed quality concrete.
o The mixing action is a continuous process that can proceed until the aggregate bins
are empty. On the other hand, mixing and delivery may be stopped at any time and
then started again at the will of the operator. This permits production to be
balanced to the demands of the placing and finishing crews and other job
requirements.
107.3 Explain the fundamentals of a typical battalion tent camp layout. [ref. b, DWG 6027643]
Could not find this drawing but found 6028038 750 man tent camp.

Tactical
o sufficient space for command dispersion
o concealment from ground and air observation
o protection from bombing and strafing attacks
o protection from mechanized attack
 Sanitary
o water supply
o drainage
o shade
o access
o site not occupied by other units in last 2 months
Facility
Title
Qty
12310RD
FILLING STA MOGAS/DIESEL 3000GAL PILLOW TANK
2
44110A
STORAGE GENERAL 25X32FT LME
4
53010MG
MEDICAL/FIRST AID 2-18X36FT MGPTS GRN W/ECU
1
212
NMCB SPECIFIC
107
61010LME
ADMIN/CONFERENCE/TRAINING 25X32FT LME
2
61010MG
ADMINISTRATION OFFICE (1-18X36FT MGPTS GREEN)
6
72210MG
GALLEY TRAILER W/FOOD PREP TENT 18X36FT MGPTS GRN
1
72211MG
GALLEY MESS FIELD 125 PERSONS CORE MODULE
3
72214MG
SANITATION CENTER W/18X36FT MGPTS TENT
1
72216MG
MESS HALL 250 MAN (2) 18X36FT MGPTS TYPE-3 TENTS
1
72320JA
HEAD 4-HOLE BURN OUT WITH SOAKAGE PIT
12
72361MG
SHOWER UNIT 12 HEAD MGPTS-M W/INCAN LIGHTS
6
72510MG
TROOP HOUSING TENT MGPTS 18FTX36FT GRN
60
73040MG
LAUNDRY CONT ISU (EC549801) W/18X36FT MGPTS GRN
3
81110AF
ELEC PWR PLANT 2-30KW GEN W/PILLOW TANK
2
81230N
GROUNDING AND PARALLELING SUPPORT FOR GENERATORS
6
81230PE
ELECT DIST LINE 1000 FT #6 AWG EXPEDITIONARY
3
81230PF
CABLE ELECT #1 AWG 1000 FT EXPEDITIONARY
4
81230PK
DISTRIBUTION CTR PORT 208/120V 30A 3PH
3
81230PL
DISTRIBUTION CENTER 15KVA (480-208Y/120V)
6
83130A
LEACH FIELD FOR WASTE WATER
2
84110S
WATER TREATMENT UNIT 1500 GPH
1
84140G
WATER STORAGE PORT 10000 GAL
3
Priorit
y
o
Item
Security Sweep
Barriers
Bunkers
EPW- Enemy
Prisoner of War
(MAA)
ASP- Ammunition
Supply Point
Armory
Alarms
Water
Health
and
Sanitati
on
Security
ECP Entry Control
Point
Mortars
213
Considerations
Box or Heart Method. Clearing Mines, Booby traps, enemy and
friendlies in area.
Stealth until element of surprise is blown, then move forward
quickly to control area. Proceed to 500m ahead of defensive
perimeter (Security Area).
50 m forward of Defensive Perimeter – Protective Wire. Fast
Avenues of Approach- Alarms, Weapons, Mines, other obstacles
Serpentined entrance, Heavy mounted Crew Serve Bunkered
when possible
Fired from hand held/ conventional mode No more than 400 m
behind Defensive Line. Camouflaged.
ASP, ECP, Comm Switchboards as time permits
Set up near ECP, to ensure that EPWs don’t have ready access to
the camp. And so they can be picked up and removed by HHQ if
necessary.
300 m From any other building!!
Central with rapid access from front lines
Controlled access. Central, with rapid access from front lines
M8A1 Chemical Alarms- Set up Sniffer units (M43) to Alarms M42.
Easy access to front lines and rear.
100 yds (m) from galley, leach fields, garbage, latrines. Water
bulls are not so stringent on location, however be careful of gray
water near any water source.
NMCB SPECIFIC
Heads
Berthing
Laundry
Shower
Leach Field
Galley
Garbarge
COC- Combat
Operations Center
ACOC-Alternate
COC
Generators
Antenna Farm
Mission Support
Comm Tent
LZ
MWR Tent
Alfa
POL Supply
Repair parts storage
MLO
Supply
Security
Security Sweep
Barriers
ECP
EPW
Mortar
Bunkers
Alarms
214
107
100 yds from galley and water supplies
30 m minimum from berthing areas
Types of heads
Four Hole Burnouts- 4 55 Gal drums cut in half Burn every day or
throw lime.
Straddle Trenches- 1:2:3 (w:d:l) +1 foot for each day.
Regular Pit Latrines- 20-30 ft deep (straight sides)
Soakage pit- For Urine and impermeable soils
Or Port-a-Potties 
Troops live near where they work, organized by platoon. Tents are
at least 35m apart to protect from mass casualty in event of artillery
shelling. Tents should be as far toward the rear as practical for
access to galley, showers etc.
Rear area, to limit noise.
Rear area, to limit noise, increase security
Proper drainage and percolation(soil conditions). 100m from
galley and water sources.
Located in the rear (‘ Cuz it’s a LARGE TARGET) Camouflaged as
much as possible
Size varies with need 30 yards from messing facilitiesnot less than
100 yards from water supplies
Wet and Dry (Usually stuff from mess area)
Centrally located with easy access to front lines. Heavily
camouflaged with no direct road access to protect from attack.
(Cammo netting) Strong Back Tent 100m from ACOC and ANT
Farm.
Identical concerns as COC but approximately 100 m from COC and
ANT farm
Bermed ( to limit oil spills) and Baffled (to limit noise), protected
from weather to greatest extent possible. Grounded <= 25 ohms or
three ground rods triangulated.
Max 2 miles from camp (range of ANGR39). High ground but
good cover and concealment. 100m from COC ACOC
Issuing of comm gear (ready access to front) near switch board
Not necessarily in camp- Clear area with decent cover. High
ground . Well marked.
In Rear- near galley
Located in rear of camp with ready access road, tractor trailer turn
around space. Perhaps one way traffic.
Mission Support
COC
ACOC
ANT FARM
COMM TENT
ARMORY
ASP
Health and Sanitation
Heads
Water
Berthing
Galley
Garbage
Laundry
Shower
Leach Field
Support
Alfa Yard
Supply
MLO
LZ
Generators
MWR Tent
Repair parts
POL’s
NMCB SPECIFIC
7
6
8
107
8
107.4 State the purposes of the project safety plans contained in the project package. [ref. c, p. 2-40]

The Quality Control plan
o Provide customer satisfaction with a product that fulfills the requirement for which it
was intended
o Provide craftsperson accountability for quality construction, and economical use of
material within the Naval Construction Force
The Project Safety plans
o The safety plan lists the hazards and corrective action to be taken from the back of
the CAS sheets
o The crew leader must ensure that the crew is properly trained and aware of all safety
conditions present

107.5 Explain the purpose of maintaining operator logs for camp equipment. [ref. d, p. 4-3]

Daily operators logs are kept on some equipment. The main purpose for using operating
logs is to continuously record data of equipment performance.
107.6 Discuss the following transportable bridges:

215
Bailey [ref. e, p. 1-5]
o Through-type metal truss bridge with heavy timber decking, roadway carried
between two main girders
o Highly mobile and versatile bridge, can span a variety of gaps
o Transported in 5-ton dump and 40 ton trailer
o Quickly assembled by manpower, 30 – 40 personnel
o 12’6” wide, can span up to 210’
o Configuration
 Single / Single bridge, 100’
 Double / Single bridge 140’
 Double / Double bridge 180’
o Launched and de-launched via roller system
o Additional bays are added to counter balance during launching and de-launching
o Components
 Truss panel – form girder, 5’ x 10’ panel
 Transom – main support, 10” x 20’ flange beam
 Stringer – 10’ steel beam
 Chess – 2” x 8” x 14’ wood decking
 Rollers – launching & de-launching
 Bearing & base
 Ramps
 Various pins, clamps, braces, tie plates, bolts, jacks, and carrying bars and
tongs
NMCB SPECIFIC
107
Figure 17 Bailey bridge

Medium girder [ref. f, pp. 1-8 thru 1-13]
o MGB is a two girder deck bridge
o Launched and de-launched via roller system and 5 ton dump
o Three types of MGB’s
 Single story MGB
 Double story MGB
 Linked reinforced MGB
o Transported to site via 5 ton dump & 40 ton trailer
o Crew size 24 to 32 personnel
o Bridge is formed with 2 main girders from a number of panels pinned together
o Roadway is formed by hanging deck units between girders and connecting ramps
at each end
o 13’ 2” wide bridge
o used for light vehicle loads
Figure 18 Medium Girder bridge
107.7 Discuss heavy timber construction: [ref. b]

216
Bunker [Assembly 14003] With floor and fence.
NMCB SPECIFIC









217
W 10’ L 24’ H 8’ For reference only not in any TOA, AFBC
14,963 lbs
$16,960
o Total M-Hr = 891
 BU = 340
 SW = 40
 EO = 3
 CN = 508
Bridge [Assembly 13202] 20 ft span 22,272 lbs, $12,247.
o Total M-Hr = 560
 BU = 560
Tower [Assembly 13606] Not in ABFC Viewer
13615 – 15’
13630 – 30’
13640 – 40’
13650 – 55’
o Total M-Hr =191
 BU = 127
 EO = 64
107
NMCB SPECIFIC
108
108 CIVIL ENGINEER SUPPORT EQUIPMENT (CESE) FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVFAC P-300, Management of Civil Engineering Support Equipment
[b] COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBINST 11200, Equipment Management (Red
Book)
[c] NAVFAC P-307, Management of Weight Handling Equipment________________
108.1 State the purpose of the Battalion Equipment Evaluation Program (BEEP) [ref. b, p. 166]




To pass on all special knowledge of CESE maintenance and operations techniques.
To provide the relieving battalion with a realistic and in-depth condition evaluation of CESE
allowance, facilities, tools and materials.
To use the full expertise and efforts of the two equipment forces to provide the relieving
battalion and detachments with the best Alfa Company operation possible.
To provide the Brigade Equipment Office with up to date condition codes for scheduling
timely CESE replacements.
108.2 Discuss the purpose of the following publications and instructions:



P-300 [ref. a, p. iii]
o To assist management at all levels in properly discharging their responsibilities in
the efficient management of the transportation program. The instructions, guides,
procedures, and criteria are provided for exercising both technical and
management controls to attain full and cost effective utilization of funds, personnel,
and equipment.
COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBINST 11200 [ref. b, Signature Page]
o To establish policy, assign actions and give a guidance for the Naval Construction
Force Equipment Management Program (RED BOOK)
P-307 [ref. c, p. 2]
o To maintain the level of safety and reliability built into each unit of applicable
equipment by the original equipment manufacturer (OEM)
o To ensure optimum service life
o To provide training and qualification standards for all personnel involved with
maintenance, inspection, test, certification, engineering, rigging and operation of
WHE
o To ensure the safe lifting and controlling capability of WHE and promote safe
operation practices through the inspection test certification, qualifications and
operation requirements prescribed herein
108.3 State the purposes and uses of the following licenses: [ref. b, ch. 2, pp. 66-69]


218
OF/346
o The military driver’s license, which lists the vehicles you are authorized to drive.
Used for the 1-¼ ton pick-up truck through the 20-ton tractor. GOOD FOR 3
YEARS.
11260/2
o Heavy construction equipment license that is maintained with your license record in
the license examiners office. It lists all the construction equipment you are
authorized to operate. GOOD FOR 2 YEARS.
NMCB SPECIFIC
108
108.4 Describe the term deadline and its effects on availability. [ref. a, ch. 4, sec. 2]

The term "deadline" applies to any item of equipment that, in the opinion of the
Maintenance Supervisor, parts cannot be obtained, or equipment cannot be safely
operated within a period of 72 hours or more without endangering the operator or
equipment performance. Overall availability decreases with equipment on deadline.
108.5 Describe the purpose of equipment layup (3M). [ref. a, app. N]

Place equipment in live storage when there is no foreseeable need for the equipment for a
period of two preventive maintenance (PM) cycles or 80 working days. All cranes,
however, shall be maintained in an active status under control of the crane crew. The
CESE eligible for live storage must be in A4 condition.
108.6 Describe the responsibilities of the following: [ref. b]



219
Equipment yard supervisor [ch. 2, pp. 35, 36]
o The “Yard Boss” manages the equipment yard and the CESE parked in it;
establishes and enforces traffic control through the yard, such as stop signs, speed
limits, and one-way-traffic flow; maintains and establishes parking lines and areas,
such as ready-line and waiting-entry-into-shop line; is in charge of the vehicle
refueling station and equipment wash rack; and ensures that all operator
maintenance procedures are performed correctly to reduce equipment breakdowns.
o The "Yard Boss" determines operator liability because he is familiar with the
equipment and should know what dents and damages are new.
o Working with the Dispatcher, the "Yard Boss" cycles and exercises equipment not
otherwise used during that week in accordance with P-300, appendix J, paragraph
3b. He must ensure accurate entries are entered into the Cycle Log. (The log will
contain these columns at a minimum: Date, USN Number, Beginning and Ending
hours/miles and Total Time Cycled).
o The Equipment Yard Supervisor shall ensure that all operators are performing prestart R checks of CESE prior to dispatching, and shall ensure that all Operators’
Inspection Guide and Trouble Reports (NAVFAC Form 9-11240/13) and post
operational R checks are properly completed prior to returning the trip ticket to
dispatch.
o The Yard Boss and Crew will be responsible to assist the Work Centers and
conduct all other maintenance requirements. The Yard Boss will supervise
operators performing maintenance requirements and provide the Dispatcher/Work
Center Supervisors feedback of completed /not completed requirements.
Cost control supervisor [ch. 3, p. 95]
o The Cost Control Clerk controls the Preventive Maintenance Program as directed
by the Maintenance Supervisor. They should be a senior mechanic, knowledgeable
in their rating and possess proficient administrative skills. They personally
supervise the Preventive Maintenance Clerk and the Direct Turnover Clerk. They
are the administrative link between the Maintenance Supervisor and all forms,
reports and EROs that must be approved/signed.
Preventive maintenance clerk [ch. 3, 95]
o The Preventive Maintenance Clerk controls the PM program directed by the
Maintenance Supervisor. The PM Clerk places all CESE into PM groups, prepares
the PM schedule, and maintains the PM record cards with each vehicle's
preventive maintenance history. The PM Clerk also controls ERO flow, maintains
an ERO log, maintains and updates equipment history jackets, and ensures the
equipment status board in the Maintenance Office mirrors the one in Dispatch. The
NMCB SPECIFIC



220
108
PM Clerk also summarizes the total cost of repair parts and labor expended, and
makes appropriate entries on the ERO. The ERO log and equipment status boards
may be in an approved electronic format.
Direct turnover clerk [ch. 3, 95]
o The Direct Turnover (DTO) Clerk maintains the maintenance program repair parts
status and accountability records, and is the liaison between the Supply Office and
the shop. All requisitions for Not in Stock (NIS) and Not Carried (NC) material must
pass though the DTO Clerk, who maintains the Direct Turnover (DTO) log and the
repair parts summary sheets. The DTO Clerk is responsible for the DTO parts and
storage bins. He also maintains the deadline file and the deadline status board.
Collateral equipment custodian [ch. 2, p. 53]
o To control collateral equipment, the custodian shall do the following:
 Inventory. Maintain an accurate up-to-date location list of the unit's
Collateral equipment using the CB 60 Form.
 Order. Shortages and replacements shall be ordered when required. Ensure
that appropriate records are maintained for each requisition submitted. This
is done through proper use of the CB 60 Form.
 Manage. Sub-custody of component collateral equipment is assigned to the
operator or crew leader by signature on a CB 60 Form on an as needed
basis.
Dispatcher [ch. 2, pp. 34, 35]
o The Dispatcher, normally an EO1, holds a key equipment management position in
the unit, and controls the day to-day equipment assignments and CESE usage. The
Dispatcher's primary duties are to receive and evaluate requests for vehicles and
then dispatch suitable equipment from authorized resources. It is the dispatcher's
responsibility to check the operator's Vehicle Operator’s Identification Card (OF346) and license, when applicable, prior to issuing a trip ticket. Dispatchers must
provide for the most economical use of manpower and equipment while ensuring
equipment safety, security, and proper use.
NMCB SPECIFIC
109
109 CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] Crew Leader Handbook
[b] NAVFAC P-405, Planners and Estimators Handbook
[c] NAVFAC P-445, Construction Quality Management Program
109.1 Explain the use of the following:
a. Construction Management [ref. a, p. 1-1] Construction management in the Seabees is based on a
critical path method (CPM) and is nearly identical to construction management techniques used in
private construction industry. One of the biggest advantages to using CPM methods is training. These
methods give the new project crewleader exposure to the fundamentals of project management
b. Crew Leader Handbook [ref a, p. i] Like its predecessor, this handbook is designed for NCF
crewleaders who want a dependable and comprehensive guide for construction planning and execution.
While it is intended to be the primary tool for construction planning and execution, it is only one of
many references useful to the crewleader. The references noted in this handbook should be reviewed
for more specific direction. The crewleader is expected to insert the most current and relevant
directives to make the handbook more specific to their unit's requirements.
c. NAVFAC P-405 [ref. b, p. iii] The Seabee Planner's and Estimator's Handbook is a technical
GUIDE for planning and estimating construction projects undertaken by the Naval Construction
Force (NCF).
The handbook provides information on estimating construction work elements and material
quantities, including equipment and manpower requirements.
109.2 Discuss project scope. [ref. a, pp. 15-17, 15-18]
Project Scope: Paint a picture so that anyone unfamiliar with the project can visualize what you are
trying to accomplish. Many briefers will have a tendency to lay out all their problems to a visitor as if
the visitor is there to solve them. This is usually not the case. If you present a problem, you shall also
present your plan to resolve the problem. State the ultimate purpose of the project/facility. Stick to
general descriptions and avoid details unless asked specific questions.
• State the progression of work in phases or master activities where possible… i.e.. We plan to place
100 CM of 200 CM concrete in the project, which will complete the first of two basketball courts.
• State the total number of mandays estimated and how much we plan to do
• Manpower: State your crew size and how it may flux as work progresses. State the subcontracting
requirements from other companies.
• State the general status of material. Identify any critical material deficiencies and what is being done
to correct the deficiencies.
• Equipment: State phases that require equipment and any availability issues that would affect them.
221
NMCB SPECIFIC
222
109
NMCB SPECIFIC

109
Project scope is a broad description of what is to be built. It includes the purpose of the
structure, general finishes, general construction, and general utilities descriptions.
109.3 Discuss the following: [ref. b]
a. Direct labor [p. 1-2] includes all labor expended directly on assigned construction tasks, either in
the field or in the shop, which contributes directly to the completion of the end product. Direct labor
must be reported separately for each assigned construction task.
b. Indirect Labor [p. 1-2] is labor required to support construction operations, but does not produce
and end product itself.
c. Overhead Labor [p. 1-2] is not considered to be productive labor because it does not contribute
directly or indirectly to the end product. It includes all labor that must be performed, regardless of the
assigned mission.
109 4. Discuss the following: [ref. a]
a. Delay Factor (DF) [p. 2-8, par. 2.4.2] Before we can adjust our manday estimate, we must convert
our PEF to a DF. The crewleader must calculate a DF for EVERY construction activity. One DF
cannot be applied to the entire job. We can find the DF by dividing the average Seabee PEF (67)
223
NMCB SPECIFIC
109
b. Production Efficiency Factor (PEF) [p. 2-8, par. 2.4.1.8, 2.4.2] are the first step in adjusting the
manday estimates based on our unique circumstances. The PEF is intended to adjust for factors which
will make us more or less productive than the average Seabee. In calculating a PEF consider only those
factors which affect us while we are on the job. The availability factor (AF) will address items which
take us away from the job site. The following delay factor (DF) method is taken from the NAVFAC P405. The table on the next page has eight production elements listed in the left hand column. We are
going to consider the impact of each of these production elements on each activity given a specific
crew, location, equipment condition, etc. Also, we are going to assign a production factor between 25
(low production) and 100 (high production) for each element, with 67 considered average. These eight
factors are then averaged to get the construction activity PEF.
c. Manday Capability Equation (MC) [p. 2-10, par. 2.4.3]
In order to calculate the construction activity durations, the crewleader must first understand the
Manday Capability Equation. We use the equation below to determine our manday capability (MC) for
the mainbody and each detail.
MC = DL x WD x ME x AF
Where DL is the number of direct labor assigned, WD is the number of available workdays, ME is the
number of mandays expended in a typical workday (see below) and AF is the amount of time that a
Seabee is actually on the job (see below). We can use the above equation to determine the direct
labor manning for a detail if we substitute tasked mandays for MC and plug in the availability factor
(AF), the manday equivalent (ME) and the number of available workdays (WD) from our deployment
calendar.
Manday Equivalent (ME) is the actual manhours worked “swinging hammers”on the
job site during a workday. It is the length of the workday, minus lunch, minus breaks, minus
travel time to and from the job site (including lunch), divided by 8 (the number of hours in a
manday).
The Availability Factor (AF) takes into account that Seabees assigned as direct labor
are not available 100% of the time. About twenty percent of the direct labor personnel’s time is
lost to: leave, liberty, paydays, inspections, quarters, medical, dental, haircuts, military drills,
battalion indoc, watches, collateral duties, etc. Availability factors for planning purposes are
provided by higher headquarters. They vary between 60 percent and 90 percent depending on
the deployment site. The typical percentages are .75 for mainbody sites and .85 for detail sites.
The typical percentage for contingency construction is .90. The AF will be adjusted by higher
headquarters when accurate time keeping demonstrates the need.
109.5 Discuss the following levels: [ref. a]
224
NMCB SPECIFIC


109
Level I [p. 1-1]
o Level I construction management is used at the Operations Officer’s (S3) or detail
OIC’s level. The primary concern of S3 is management of the unit’s overall tasking.
The timeline for a Level I bar chart will show months of the deployment and the line
items will be several individual projects.
Level II [p. 3-1]
o Level II construction management is used at the company level. Each company
may have several projects to manage. The easiest way for the company
commander to manage these projects is with a Level II bar chart. The timeline for a
Level II bar chart will show weeks and the line items will be Master Activities for one
individual project.

Level III [pp. 3-5, 3-6]
o Level III construction management is used at the crew leader’s level. The crew
leader’s focus is on his/her particular project. The day-to-day activity of the project
is managed by the crew leader. The timeline for a Level III bar chart will show days
and the line items will be Construction Activities.
109.6 Discuss the Construction Project SITREP [ref a, pp. 9-1 thru 9-4; G-6]
SITREP Input. The battalion sends out a monthly SITREP to higher headquarters to report on the
progress of construction tasking. SITREP accuracy is a reflection on how well the crewleaders have
documented labor expended on the projects and the quality of the input provided by the crewleaders
/companies. The crewleader will forward a SITREP feeder to Ops on a biweekly basis. A sample
SITREP feeder is in Chapter 15 page 15-44. Let’s look at the following completed portion of a
SITREP feeder and describe each part:
Figure 19 Project SITREP Feeder example
225
NMCB SPECIFIC
109
109.7 Discuss the importance of generating and maintaining complete and accurate
Construction Activity Summary Sheets (CASS). [ref. a, p. 2-12]

All of the resource requirements identified during the estimating stage are summarized for
each construction activity on the front of a CAS sheet. In addition to the activity description,
the scheduled dates, duration and manday estimates, PEF, DF, travel time , and ME are
also added. On the back are the safety, quality control and environmental requirements.
Use the space at the bottom of the back page for manday and duration calculations. The
CAS sheets contain all of the information for completing material and equipment plans. It is
imperative that the crew leader documents EVERYTHING (calculations, assumptions,
forming plans, significant events, etc.) about the activity. Additional documents may be
attached to the back of the CAS sheet if necessary.
109.8 Discuss Field Adjustment Requests (FAR)/Design Change Directives (DCD) and who
would submit and approve. [ref. a, p. 12-3]

The Resident Officer-in-Charge of Construction (ROICC) is responsible for inspection and
surveillance of ongoing Seabee projects and for reviewing daily QC reports to ensure
compliance with the plans and specifications. ROICC provides Quality Assurance (QA). It
is ROICC’s responsibility to monitor our QC program. The ROICC will approve our QC plan
before start of any construction. Any discrepancies noted will be corrected before work can
start on the project. The ROICC office also has to approve any battalion recommended
Field Adjustment Requests (FARs) or customer requested changes. Any ROICC directed
changes will be forwarded to the battalion on a Design Change Directive (DCD). Scope
changes require the approval of the customer’s major claimant and changes that require
50 or more mandays of additional direct labor or increase the cost of the project by $500 or
more require approval of higher headquarters. The ROICC also conducts the final
inspection and accepts only those facilities built in accordance with the plans and
specifications. The QC staff provides direct liaison between the battalion and the ROICC
on all matters, such as change requests and project specifications questions. No field
changes can be made without a request being forwarded through QC and being approved
in writing by the ROICC. Change requests must include the same level of detail as the
original specification. The Engineering Division can provide assistance on sketches. A log
of all FARs must be kept in the project package. DCDs must also be kept in the project
package. Clarification of prints or specification may be directed to ROICC on a Request for
Information (RFI) form. A log of all RFIs must be kept in the project package.
109.9 Discuss Request for Information (RFI). [ref. a, pp. 12-4 thru 15-72]

Used for clarification of plans or specifications only. The RFI can be used for any inquiry
concerning the project. Further direction may be given to submit a FAR in response to an
RFI, but does not constitute a change until the FAR is approved.
109.10 Discuss a project scope change. [ref. a, pp. 15-71, 15-72]

Any site condition that differs from the conditions outlined in the project plans and specifications.
This condition is not a FAR or a DCD and when encountered one should immediately submit an RFI
to the ROICC.
109.11 Describe the purpose of the Naval Construction Force (NCF) Quality Control Program
(QCP). [ref. a, p. 12-1]
226
NMCB SPECIFIC
109

The purpose of the NCF Quality Control Program (COMSECONDNCB/
COMTHIRDNCBTINST 4355.1) is to prevent discrepancies where the quality of
workmanship and materials fail to match the requirements in the plans and specifications.
108.12 State the purposes of the project safety plans contained in the project package. [ref. a,
p. 11-3, par.11.4]
For each construction activity, all hazards and corrective actions identified will be listed on the back of
the CAS sheet. The project safety plan (page 15-65) is then drawn up listing the hazards and corrective
action from the back of the CAS sheets. A cover sheet (page 15-63) is made up for the safety plan
summarizing the training and equipment required for review by the chain of command. The Chain of
command will approve a Safety Plan for each project before any work starts. The project safety plan
must be posted on the job site. A daily job site safety inspection (page 15-80) will be performed by
Safety Office personnel
109.13 Describe the 3-phase concept of the Construction Quality Management Program
(CQM). [ref. b, pp. 2-10 thru 2-13]
227

The Three Phases of Control, Preparatory, Initial and Follow up, is the backbone of the
Construction Quality Management Program
o The Three Phases of Control shall adequately cover both on-site and off-site work
and shall include the following for each definable feature of work. A Definable
Feature of Work is a task that is separate and distinct from other tasks and requires
separate quality control requirements. A DFOW is identified by different trades or
disciplines and is an item or activity on the construction schedule. Each
specification section could be considered a definable feature of work. But, there
frequently is more than one definable feature of work under a particular section.

Preparatory Phase (Prior to beginning work on each DFOW)
o The Contractor is required to notify the Contracting Officer at least 2 workdays in
advance of each preparatory phase. This phase shall include a meeting conducted
by the QC Manager and attended by the QC specialists, the superintendent, and
the foreman responsible for the definable feature. The results of the preparatory
phase actions must be documented in the daily CQC Report and/or in the
o Preparatory Phase Checklist. The following functions must be performed prior to
beginning work on each definable feature of work:

e applicable specification sections

Review the Contract drawings

equipment have been submitted and certified by the QC Manager, and
approved. Verify receipt of approved factory test results, when required

provide the required QC testing

iminary work has
been completed

t and sample work to ensure
that they are on hand and conform to the approved shop drawings and
submitted data

standards, and the approach that will be used to provide quality construction
by planning ahead and identifying potential problems for each definable
feature of work
NMCB SPECIFIC
109



ensure that applicable safety requirements are met, and that required
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) are submitted.
Initial Phase (Once work begins for each DFOW)
o The Contractor must also notify the Contracting Officer at least 2 workdays in
advance of each initial phase. The QC Manager conducts the initial phase with the
QC Specialists, the superintendent, and the foreman responsible for that definable
feature of work when construction crews are ready to start work on a definable
feature of work. The QC Manager observes the initial segment of the definable
feature of work to ensure that the work complies with Contract requirements. The
results of the initial phase must be documented in the daily CQC Report and in the
initial phase checklist. The initial phase must be repeated for each new crew to
work on-site, or when acceptable levels of specified quality are not being met.
o Perform the following for each definable feature of work:

quality of workmanship required

Resolve conflicts

ed by the approved laboratory

th the Safety Plan and the
appropriate activity hazard analysis to ensure that applicable safety
requirement are met

and include with the CQC Report.
Follow-up Phase (Performed daily)
o The Follow-Up phase is performed on each activity of work identified on the
schedule for on-going work daily or more frequently as necessary until the
completion of each definable feature of work and documented in the daily CQC
Report.
o The Follow-Up includes checks on the following:

requirements

quality of workmanship required

ed by the approved laboratory

ework items are being corrected

Perform safety inspections

-up phase for each activity
using the CQC Report and the Contractor Production Report.
OLD.9 Explain the purpose and processes of quality control. [ref. a, pp. 12-1 thru 12-5]


228
The purpose of the NCF Quality Control Program
COMSECONDNCB/COMTHIRDNCBTINST 4355.1) is to prevent discrepancies where the
quality of workmanship and materials fail to match the requirements in the plans and
specifications.
Processes
o Ensuring Quality. The crew leader is responsible for developing an aggressive QC
plan for his project to ensure the quality of construction meets the standards in the
plans and specifications.
o Establish Quality Requirements. The crew leader must review the plans and
specifications and identify the quality criteria which must be complied with.
o Select Construction Methods. Proper construction methods are absolutely essential
to safe and quality construction.
o Identify Required Training and Equipment. Many activities require specialized
training or qualifications.
NMCB SPECIFIC
o



229
109
Ensure Personnel Awareness. In order to perform the work satisfactorily the crew
must understand what the QC requirements are.
o Evaluation of Work Completed. A daily QC inspection report is required for all
projects. The purpose of this report is to document that the required checks, tests
and inspections were performed.
o Identify required tests. You must identify the project testing requirements before the
work begins in order to schedule and complete the tests efficiently.
o ROICC Interface. The Resident Officer-in-Charge of Construction (ROICC) is
responsible for inspection and surveillance of ongoing Seabee projects and for
reviewing daily QC reports to ensure compliance with the plans and specifications.
ROICC provides Quality Assurance (QA). It is ROICC’s responsibility to monitor our
QC program. The ROICC will approve our QC plan before start of any construction.
Any discrepancies noted will be corrected before work can start on the project. The
ROICC office also has to approve any battalion recommended Field Adjustment
Requests (FARs) or customer requested changes. Any ROICC directed changes
will be forwarded to the battalion on a Design Change Directive (DCD).
o Biweekly QC Meetings. The battalion will establish biweekly meetings with the
ROICC. The meetings need not be biweekly if situations dictate otherwise. The
attendees at these meetings will be a ROICC representative, the QC organization,
the company commanders or ops chiefs and an S3 representative.
Pre-construction Conferences (PreCon)
o Prior to commencement of work, a preconstruction conference will be arranged by
the ROICC with representatives from the NCF unit. The pre-construction
conference should be attended by the ROICC, the ROICC quality assurance
representative, client representatives and NCF supervisory personnel directly
concerned with the project including QC and safety representatives. Items to be
covered during the conference should include as a minimum:
 Outstanding questions regarding plans and specifications
 Unusual field conditions
 Excavation permits
 Review of QC plan
 Review of safety plan
 Review of construction schedule
 Schedule of required utility outages and procedures for obtaining them
 Procedures for connecting new utilities/ Arrangements for temporary utilities
 Identification of project supervisors, ROICC representatives, and limits of
their respective authorities
 Normal working hours
 Point of contact for both the ROICC and NCF unit for problems occurring
outside normal working hours
 Environmental protection requirements and procedures
 Procedures for resolving problems relating to plans, specifications, field
adjustment requests (modifications) and other items that may arise
 Procedures for reporting job progress
 Procedures for continuing the project in the event the NCF unit is called
away for a contingency
 Historical sites requirements and procedures
Red-line Drawings
o The crew leader is responsible for maintaining a set of drawings on the project site
which have any field changes marked in red.
Material Testing and Inspection
NMCB SPECIFIC
o

230
109
Any material tests which are required by the specifications will be performed by the
Engineering Division. The crew leader should include these tests in the QC plan
and coordinate with Engineering as far as when they are required.
Other QC Forms
o Rebar bending schedules and concrete forming plans need to be prepared by the
crew leader early in the planning process.
OFFICER
101
201 WARFARE MISSION AREA
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 3501.115D, Projected Operational Environment (POE) and Require
Operational Capabilities (ROC) for the Naval Construction Force Series
[b] NWP 4-04.1, U.S. Navy, Seabee Operations in the MAGTF
[c] NAVFAC P-1049, Naval Construction Force Mobilization Manual
[d] OPNAVINST 5450.46K, Naval Construction Force Policy Statement___________
201.1 MISSION STATEMENT
201.1.1 State and discuss the NMCB mission. [ref. b, p. 2-6]

Mission. The mission of the NMCB is to provide responsive military construction support to
Navy, Marine Corps, and other forces in military operations; to construct and maintain base
facilities; to repair battle-damaged facilities, and to conduct limited defensive operations as
required by the circumstances of the deployment situation. It can also accomplish disaster
control and recovery efforts when required. Specifically, mission areas of the NMCB include
the following:
o Performing horizontal and vertical construction simultaneously while defending their
project sites from hostile forces.
o Deploying an Air DET with air-liftable supplies and equipment within 48 hours of
notification. (Refer to paragraph 2.3.8 below for additional information on the NMCB Air
DET.) The remainder of a deployed NMCB can embark within 6 days.
o Conducting active defensive operations against overt or clandestine enemy attacks
directed toward unit personnel, convoys, camps, and facilities under construction.
o Performing intermediate maintenance on organic and assigned augment equipment
simultaneously with construction effort.
MOBILITY (MOB)
201.1.2 Define the term MOB. [ref. c, pp. 7-1, 7-2]


231
Mobilization Process
o Mobilization is the process whereby a nation makes the transition form a normal state
of peacetime preparedness to a war-fighting posture. It involves the assembly,
organization and application of the nation’s resources for national defense. The
mobilization process encompasses all activities necessary to systematically and
selectively prepare for war.
o NMPS process
o Release, Depreservation, and Shipment of Prepositioned War Reserve Material Stock
(PWRMS) and/or Final Title stocks stored at either NCBC Gulfport, MS or Port
Hueneme, CA.
o Outfitting, Readying, and Training of NCF Personnel.
The general planning policies, concepts, and assumptions, which were used in the
development are as follows:
o Unit Table of Allowance (TOA) equipment and material will already be forward
deployed (four TOAs at existing deployment sites), are deployed aboard the MPF(E),
or will be deployed by air, rail, or sea from a supporting NCBC.
o Unit personnel will deploy by air (except ship riders).
o Mobilized unit personnel will stay at NCBC Gulfport, MS and Port Hueneme, CA, until
scheduled to deploy. Personnel will be mobilized as specified in the TPFDD which are
structured to provide adequate activation and training time in order to deliver unit
personnel for deployment on the specified dates.
OFFICER
101
o
o
o
o
o
All unit personnel going through NCBC Gulfport, MS and Port Hueneme, CA, will
receive initial outfitting of selected individual combat and survivability gear from the
homeport NCR/PWRMS and will receive refresher combat/survivability/unit training.
Deployment scheduling will be as required by the OPLAN(s) being executed.
Depending on specific OPLAN requirements, selected mobilizing unit personnel may
be available to assist NCBC Gulfport, MS and Port Hueneme, CA, in the
depreservation, breakout, staging and shipment of TOA equipment/material and in
providing necessary personnel support functions. Logistics Support Mobilization Plans
(LSMPs) will address whether or not selected mobilizing unit personnel (by unit, rate,
number, and time-frame) are required. Such use shall not conflict with OPLAN
deployment schedules or with initial outfitting/refresher training.
All essential services currently being provided to tenant commands by NCBC Gulfport,
MS and Port Hueneme, CA, will continue at a level commensurate with the tenant
command's mobilization mission. New services will not be provided unless premobilization support agreements are in place.
All non-essential work will be deferred as required to meet the mobilization peak
workload. During a full mobilization, NCBC Gulfport, MS and Port Hueneme, CA, will
activate their supporting Augments, Personnel Mobilization Teams
(PERSMOBTEAMS), and in mobilization mode will work two 10-hour shifts, 6 days per
week.
201.1.3 Discuss the role of the NMCB in a MOB mission. [ref. a, encl. 7]

232
NEXT PAGE
OFFICER
233
101
OFFICER
234
101
OFFICER
235
101
OFFICER
101
201.1.4 Discuss the role of an NMCB in support of amphibious operations. [ref. b, p. 4-3]

236
Seabee Support Of Amphibious Operations
o General. The amphibious operation, an attack launched from sea by naval and landing
forces embarked in ships or craft involving a landing on a hostile shore, is one of the
most decisive tools of power projection by naval expeditionary forces. The task
organization for conducting amphibious operations, as determined by the mission, is
the ATF and consists of both a naval force and a landing force with organic aviation
and logistic support. For additional information, refer to NWP 3-02.1/FMFM 1-8, Shipto-Shore Movement.
OFFICER


237
101
Concept of Amphibious Operations
o Naval Force. The Naval Beach Group (NBG) is one of four key components of the
naval force that also includes the transport group, movement groups, and control
groups. The NBG is a permanently organized command that in addition to providing
beach master units (BMUs) and displacement landing craft/LCAC assault craft units,
also provides PHIBCBs to the ATF to support the landing of a MEF. It provides Navy
elements to the CATF and the Commander, Landing Force (CLF) in support of
waterborne ship-to-shore movement and landing force support party (LFSP)
operations. During MPF operations, the NBG commander becomes commander of the
NSE and directs the naval cargo handling and port group element.
o Landing Force. The LF is the highest troop echelon in the ATF and encompasses the
entire MAGTF. Besides the GCE, ACE, and CSSE, a MAGTF involved in amphibious
operations also consists of the tactical logistics group (a temporary LF organization
advising the CATF and CLF of LF requirements during ship-to-shore movement) and
the LFSP (a temporary LF organization established to provide the LF with initial
combat support and CSS during ship-to-shore movement until relieved by the CSSE).
The mission of the LFSP, task-organized from the NBG and other Navy organizations
as directed by CATF, is to:
 Facilitate the landing and movement of troops, equipment, and supplies across
beaches and landing zones, ports, and airfields.
 Facilitate the establishment of the CSSE, ACE, and NBG ashore.
 Assist in the beaching, extraction, and salvage of landing craft and amphibious
vehicles.
 Assist in the evacuation of casualties and EPW personnel.
o MAGTF Movement. Strategic lift constraints and tactical considerations dictate that
some MAGTFs be echeloned into the landing area. While MEU(SOC)s from forwarddeployed amphibious ready groups are employed as single units, MEF is divided into
two echelons: the AE and the AFOE. The AFOE, normally required in the AOA within 5
days after commencement of the assault landing, may arrive on schedule with some
elements required as early as D-day, or may remain in a specified operating area until
called forward by the CLF. A portion of the AFOE may include air-transportable
personnel to assemble with their equipment on MPF ships.
o Engineer Support of Amphibious Operations. Engineer support during the early
phases of the amphibious assault is directly influenced by the ability to land engineer
equipment. Under extreme conditions, the use of landing craft air cushion during the
ship-to-shore movement may be required.
The Seabee Role in Amphibious Operations
o Concept of Employment. Not all component Seabee organizations may be employed
during amphibious operations. Normally employed under OPCON of the CATF,
PHIBCBs and UCTs conduct construction missions that assist with the ship-to-shore
movement of personnel, equipment, and supplies. Those Seabee units normally under
OPCON of the MAGTF commander, such as the NMCB, NCFSU, and elements of a
UCT, may be located in either the AE or the AFOE. The priority given to construction
tasks assigned to Seabee units will determine the echelon in which the NCF will be
employed, to be decided by the CATF and CLF. Additional Seabee organizations may
be assigned to the CATF and employed within the AOA. Examples of tasks requiring
immediate priority are water well drilling and establishing or enhancing forward
operating bases for fixed-wing aircraft.
o Seabee Capabilities. Air-transportable, task-organized Seabee units such as the
NMCB and UCT Air DETs are available for deployment upon 48 hours notice. Although
extensive horizontal construction cannot be efficiently addressed with equipment that is
transported by air, priority construction projects can be initiated by the Air DETs days
prior to the arrival of MSC shipping. Additionally, local contractual acquisition of heavy
OFFICER
101
o
engineer equipment may be possible to augment air-transported Seabee assets in a
secure environment.
Seabee Tasks. As part of their primary mission, PHIBCBs, UCTs, and NMCBs provide
development of the beach support area and beach throughput, and enhance the
reception, staging, onward movement, and integration (RSO&I) to support the AFOE.
Examples of the engineer effort required for the amphibious operation include the
following:
 Advise commanders on suitable locations for pontoon causeway piers and for
beaching amphibious vehicles and landing craft.
 Within the beach support area, facilitate the landing and movement of troops,
equipment, and supplies across beaches and into LZs, ports, and airfields.
 Construct helicopter LZs, FARPs, casualty evacuation stations, and EPW
holding facilities.
 Establish multi-class (e.g., Classes I, III, and V) supply dumps, to include
operation of the AAFS and AABFS.
 Construct and maintain beach lateral and exit roads.
COMMAND, CONTROL, AND COMMUNICATION (CCC)
201.1.5 Discuss battalion command and control within the Marine Air/Ground Task Force (MAGTF). [ref.
b, pp. 1-16 thru 1-19]

238
Concepts Of The Naval Construction Force
o Command and Control. COMSECONDNCB and COMTHIRDNCB, as operational type
commanders under CINCLANTFLT and CINCPACFLT, respectively, serve the fleet
CINCs as the principal advisors for the direct utilization of the Seabee organizations
and capabilities under their command. Headquarters for both NCBs
(COMSECONDNCB is located in Norfolk, VA and COMTHIRDNCB is located in Pearl
Harbor, HI) are situated close to the fleet CINCs. These NCBs exercise operational
and limited administrative control of their assigned Seabee units, both active and
Reserve. They also provide directive policy guidance for subordinate units in such
areas as leadership and discipline, administration; contingency planning and
readiness; military and technical training; unit deployment, employment, and
scheduling; operational effectiveness; development of operational doctrine, tasking and
procedures; equipment management; and logistics support. When SECOND NCB and
THIRD NCB units deploy, their OPCON may shift to the appropriate fleet, joint, or
unified combatant commander. However, COMSECONDNCB and COMTHIRDNCB
always maintain administrative control of their subordinate units.
OFFICER
101
o
OPCON of NCF Units. The USMC/USN Terms of Reference state that OPCON is the
only command and support relationship appropriate and authorized when Seabee units
are employed within the MAGTF organization. ADCON usually remains with the
Seabee unit’s parent NCB. OPCON of Seabee units provides the MAGTF commander
with authority to direct the forces assigned so that the commander may:
 Accomplish specific missions or tasks that are usually limited by function, time,
or location.
 Deploy the Seabee units concerned as appropriate.
 Retain or assign tactical control of those Seabee units.
 OPCON does not include authority to assign separate employment of elements
of the units concerned. Neither does it, by itself, include administrative or
logistic control. OPCON of those Seabee organizations not governed by the
TOR, but employed in theater, may also be exercised by commands other than
those which have ADCON, such as the unified CINCs, CJTFs, or component
commanders.
201.1.6 Discuss battalion command and control during joint operations in peacetime and wartime [ref. d,
pp. 6-8]



239
Combatant Command (COCOM)
o Is the nontransferable command authority over assigned forces vested only in the
commanders of combatant commands by Title 10 U.S.C. Section 164, or as directed
by the President in the Unified Command Plan (UCP). COCOM is the authority to
perform those functions of command involving organizing and employing commands
and forces, assigning tasks, designating objectives, and giving authoritative direction
over all aspects of military operations, joint training, and logistics necessary to
accomplish the missions assigned to the command. Reference (h) provides additional
explanation.
OPCON
o Is the operational control inherent in COCOM and is the authority to perform those
functions of command over subordinate forces involving organizing and employing
commands and forces, assigning tasks, designating objectives, and giving authoritative
direction necessary to accomplish the missions assigned to the command. Only the
COCOM chain of command or National Command Authority (NCA) delegates OPCON.
ADCON
o Is the administrative control over subordinate or other organizations with respect to
administration and support, including organization of naval forces, control of resources
and equipment, personnel management, unit logistics, individual and unit training,
readiness, mobilization, demobilization, and discipline and other matters not included
in the operational missions of the subordinate or other organizations. Specifically
included in ADCON are command of peacetime support and employment of NCF
forces (other than OPCON during theater CINC peacetime exercises and training), and
readiness reporting (SORTS). In accordance with reference (h), the Department of the
Navy is responsible for all logistic and administrative support of NCF forces assigned
to or attached to joint commands and combatant commanders. ADCON of NCF forces
is delegated as described in this Policy Statement:
 All Service forces (except as noted in 10 U.S.C. 162) are assigned to
combatant commands by the Secretary of Defense (SECDEF) “Forces for
Unified Commands” memorandum, reference (i). A force assigned or attached
to a combatant command may be transferred from that command only as
directed by SECDEF and under procedures prescribed by SECDEF and
OFFICER

240
101
approved by the President. Reference (h) provides further explanation for
transferring, reassigning and attaching units to other combatant commands.
Reference (i) assigns the NCBs to the Commanders In Chief, U.S. Atlantic
Command (ACOM) and U.S. Pacific Command (PACOM).
 The Commanders In Chief, U.S. Atlantic and Pacific Fleets (CINCLANTFLT
and CINCPACFLT) are assigned ADCON over all NCF units assigned to and
including their respective NCBs.
o ADCON includes command, control and coordination of peacetime operations and
support performed by forward-deployed units and shall remain under their respective
Fleet CINCs, exercised via their NCBs. Fleet CINCs / NCBs are authorized to delegate
ADCON of assigned units to maximize efficiency of command and control (for
example, an NCR should be delegated ADCON of subordinate NMCBs and assigned
NCF units).
o Specific Seabee resources are forward deployed in accordance with reference (i). The
Fleet CINCs and NCBs shall coordinate OPCON relationships with the associated
theater CINC exercising COCOM over the forward-deployed resources.
o As specified in references (h) and (i), in the event of a major emergency in the
geographic combatant commander’s area of responsibility (AOR), or theater, requiring
the use of all available forces, that geographic combatant commander may assume
direct OPCON of all forces (including forward deployed NCF units) located within the
assigned AOR. Forward deployment of NCF units provides close geographic proximity
to locations where a contingency may occur, minimizing lift requirements and
maximizing prompt logistical support and responsiveness.
Reporting relationships of NMCBs
o Forward deployment requirements for NMCBs are specified in reference (i). Rotation of
NMCBs shall be planned by both NCBs and the Fleet CINCs, and approved by the
CNO (N44). When not deployed, NMCBs are under the ADCON/OPCON of the NCBs
reporting via their NCRs. When forward deployed, NMCBs shall be under the OPCON
of the AOR theater CINC via the Navy service component commander serving that
CINC and OPCON NCR Forward deployed NMCBs remain under the ADCON of the
NCBs reporting via the NCRs.
o NMCBs may be assigned OPCON to a Marine Expeditionary Force (MEF) or a Marine
Air Ground Task Force (MAGTF) in accordance with reference (j).
OFFICER
101
Figure 20 Upperlevel Chain of command
The operating forces commanders and fleet commanders have a dual chain of command.
Administratively, they report to the Chief of Naval Operations and provide, train, and equip naval forces.
241
OFFICER
101
Operationally, they provide naval forces and report to the appropriate Unified Combatant Commanders.
Commander Fleet Forces Command commands and controls fleet assets on both the Atlantic and Pacific
coasts for interdeployment training cycle purposes. As units of the Navy enter the area of responsibility
for a particular Navy area commander, they are operationally assigned to the appropriate numbered
fleet. All Navy units also have an administrative chain of command with the various ships reporting to the
appropriate Type Commander.
All ships are organized into categories by type. Aircraft carriers, aircraft squadrons, and air stations are
under the administrative control of the appropriate Commander Naval Air Force. Submarines come under
the Commander Submarine Force. All other ships fall under Commander Naval Surface Force. Also, you
will note that the Atlantic and Pacific Fleets mirror one another. Normally, the type command controls the
ship during its primary and intermediate training cycles and then it moves under the operational control of
a fleet commander. Some of the blocks in this diagram are hyperlinked to the web site of that command
242
OFFICER
101
Figure 21 NECC Chain of command
CONTINGENCY ENGINEERING
201.1.7 Describe tactical construction. [ref. a, encl. 7]

243
NEXT PAGE
OFFICER
101
201.1.8 Describe the Seabees role in advanced base and camp construction. [ref. c, p. 12-2]


244
Naval Mobile Construction Battalions (NMCBs) construct advance base facilities in support of
the Navy, Marine Corps, and other armed services engaged in military operations. NMCBs are
rapidly deployable, self-sustaining units with the exception of Class IV construction materials
that are provided by supported commander, and are capable of performing vertical, horizontal
and specialized construction. NMCBs construct advance base facilities and are capable of
defensive combat operations, including fire support coordination, passive defensive measures,
convoy defensive tactics, and the ability to defend themselves and their project sites against
personnel and light armor/infantry vehicles. Additional functional capabilities include repair,
maintenance, and capital improvement of shore facilities and lines of communication during
contingency, emergency or disaster recovery operations.
NMCBs may operate in small task organized detachments that are geographically dispersed
throughout the theater, as a single NCF element in support of the area or force commander, or
in coordination with other NMCBs as part of an NCR. NMCBs are organized into one
headquarters and four line companies with full wartime strength of 25 officers and 787
enlisted. Each line company includes a weapons platoon using heavy machine guns and
lightweight antitank weapons. The headquarters company has mortar capability. CESE
includes construction, weight handling, and general-purpose vehicles.
OFFICER

101
There are currently nine active duty NMCBs, three of which are continuously forward deployed
to Okinawa, Guam, Roosevelt Roads, and Rota, Spain. When not deployed or in movement,
remaining active duty NMCBs perform planning and training at their homeports at NCBC
Gulfport, MS or NBVC Port Hueneme, CA. Peacetime manning of active NMCBs is below
wartime strength, and each has a dedicated reserve augment unit that may be activated
through presidential recall during a crisis situation.
NON-COMBAT OPERATIONS (NCO)
201.1.9 Discuss battalion operations during a peacetime deployment. [ref. c, p. 12-3]

When forward deployed during peacetime, the active NMCBs perform project construction
(primarily for skills training and readiness) in support of Fleet CINCs under the coordination
and project management of the NCBs. Deployed NMCBs also support Combatant CINCsponsored Joint Exercises and Deployment for Training (DFT) Programs, as approved by the
Fleet CINCs. There are currently 12 reserve NMCBs. Once fully mobilized, reserve NMCBs
have the same contingency missions and required operational capabilities as active NMCBs.
Because of their rapid deployment, self-sustainment and self-defense capabilities, their task
specific organizational flexibility, and often, their geographic proximity, NMCBs (both active
and reserve) may be tasked with providing emergency assistance, disaster recovery, or
humanitarian relief support. Each NMCB shall be capable of forming, employing, and
exercising command and control of independent detachments, teams or parties of up to 50
percent of the NMCB in size as required in support of tailoring to meet assigned objectives.
Each Detachment shall be under the command of an officer in charge (OIC). Additional
detachments and smaller work details may be required concurrently of the same NMCB.
201.1.10 Discuss Seabees role in humanitarian operations. [ref. a, encl. 7]

245
NEXT PAGE
OFFICER
101
COMMAND AND CONTROL WARFARE (C2W)
201.1.11 Discuss battalion administrative and operational control in homeport. [ref. d, pp. 7, 8]

See reference information for 201.1.6
201.1.12 Discuss NMCB administrative control when forward deployed. [ref. d, p. 8]

See reference information for 201.1.6
201.1.13 Discuss NMCB operational control within the MAGTF and a Naval Construction
Regiment (NCR). [ref. b, pp. 1-17, 2-4]

246
OPCON of NCF Units.
o MAGTF
 The USMC/USN Terms of Reference state that OPCON is the only command
and support relationship appropriate and authorized when Seabee units are
employed within the MAGTF organization. ADCON usually remains with the
Seabee unit’s parent NCB. OPCON of Seabee units provides the MAGTF
OFFICER
101
o

NCR
o
o
o
247
commander with authority to direct the forces assigned so that the commander
may:
 Accomplish specific missions or tasks that are usually limited by
function, time, or location.
 Deploy the Seabee units concerned as appropriate.
 Retain or assign tactical control of those Seabee units.
OPCON does not include authority to assign separate employment of elements of the
units concerned. Neither does it, by itself, include administrative or logistic control.
OPCON of those Seabee organizations not governed by the TOR, but employed in
theater, may also be exercised by commands other than those which have ADCON,
such as the unified CINCs, CJTFs, or component commanders.
Organization. Normally commanded by a Navy CEC Captain, a deployable, operational
NCR CE consists of a staff organized into the following departments: Executive,
Administrative, Intelligence, Operations, Supply, and Readiness. The NCR CE typically
has OPCON over two to four assigned NMCBs and an NCFSU. However, if the
mission and engineering requirements warrant such, one or more Air DETs from a
UCT may also be assigned to augment the NCR task organization.
Concept of Employment. The NCR CE is task-organized and equipped for employment
as an assigned force in support of MEF-sized operations when two or more NMCBs
operating in a specific area are assigned to support the MEF. The NCR CE is
structured to provide air or surface deployable elements in support of a specific military
operation. Generally, the NCR CE:
 Maintains an organic TOA (TA11) capable of sustaining operations planned or
envisioned under contingency or general war conditions for 60 days without
resupply, except that Class I material is limited to 5 days, Class III is limited to 3
days, and Class V is limited to 15 days. Organic Class IV is limited to only
those materials required to construct the command element’s base camp.
Resupply past the timeframes noted is the responsibility of the supported
MAGTF.
 Is capable of performing its mission using basic individual protective measures
in a CBR-contaminated environment for 30 days.
Tasks. The NCR CE is a command and control organization that plans, monitors,
directs, coordinates, and controls construction operations for all subordinate NMCBs,
NCFSUs, and other attached units.
OFFICER
101
OFFICER
101 SAFETY FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] OPNAVINST 3500.39B, Operational Risk Management
[b] EM-385-1-1, Safety and Health Requirements
[c] OPNAVINST 5100.23G, Navy Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Program Manual
[d] 29 CFR, Part 1926, Construction Safety Standards
[e] OSHA
101.1 Discuss the concept of ORM. [ref. a, encl. 1, p. 1] Same as common core 101.19
 ORM is a decision making process that enhances operational capability. Naval Warfare
Publication 1 states, "Risk management and risk assessment are formal, essential tools of
operational planning. Sound decision making requires the use of these tools both in battle and
in training." ORM, described in enclosure (1), is a method for identifying hazards, assessing
risks and implementing controls to reduce the risk associated with any operation.
 Reduction of operational loss.
 Lower compliance/auditing costs.
 Early detection of unlawful activities.
 Reduced exposure to future risks.
 Time critical Risk Management
o A – Assess the situation
o B – Balance resources
o C – Communicate to others
o D – Do and Debrief the even
 Three levels of ORM
 In Depth
o In depth risk management is used before a project is implemented, when there is
plenty of time to plan and prepare. Examples of in depth methods include training,
drafting instructions and requirements, and acquiring personal protective
equipment.
 Deliberate
o Deliberate risk management is used at routine periods through the implementation
of a project or process. Examples include quality assurance, on-the-job training,
safety briefs, performance reviews, and safety checks.
o Time Critical
o Time critical risk management is used during operational exercises or execution of
tasks. It is defined as the effective use of all available resources by individuals,
crews, and teams to safely and effectively accomplish the mission or task using
risk management concepts when time and resources are limited. Examples of tools
used includes execution check-lists and change management. This requires a high
degree of situational awareness.
101.2 Explain the following as they apply to ORM: [ref. a, encl. 1, p. 2] Same as common core
101.20

248
Identifying hazards [p. 2]
o Begin with an outline or chart of the major steps in the operation (operational analysis).
Next, conduct a Preliminary Hazard Analysis by listing all of the hazards associated
OFFICER




101
with each step in the operational analysis along with possible causes for those
hazards.
Assessing hazards [p. 2]
o For each hazard identified, determine the associated degree of risk in terms of
probability and severity. Although not required, the use of a matrix may be helpful in
assessing hazards described further in paragraph d).
Making risk decisions [p. 2]
o First, develop risk control options. Start with the most serious risk first and select
controls that will reduce the risk to a minimum consistent with mission accomplishment.
With selected controls in place, decide if the benefit of the operation outweighs the risk.
If risk outweighs benefit or if assistance is required to implement controls,
communicate with higher authority in the chain of command.
 Reject the risk. If overall risks exceed benefits or value, do not take the risk.
 Avoid the Risk. It may be possible to avoid specific risks by “going around”
them or doing the mission or task in a different way.
 Delay an Action. If there is no time deadline or other benefit or value to speedy
accomplishment of a mission or task, it may be possible to reduce the risk by
delaying the task.
 Transfer the Risk. Risk may be reduced by transferring all or some portion of
that mission or task to another individual, unit, or platform that is better
positioned, more survivable, or more expendable.
 Compensate for the Risk. To ensure the success of critical missions or tasks
and compensate for potential losses assign redundant capabilities.
Implementing controls [pp. 2, 3]
o The following measures can be used to eliminate hazards or reduce the degree of risk.
These are listed by order of preference:
 Administrative Controls - Controls that reduce risks through specific
administrative actions, such as:
 Providing suitable warnings, markings, placards, signs, and notices.
 Establishing written policies, programs instructions and standard
operating procedures (SOP).
 Training personnel to recognize hazards and take appropriate
precautionary measures.
 Limiting the exposure to a hazard (either by reducing the number of
personnel/assets or the length of time they are exposed).
 Engineering Controls - Controls that use engineering methods to reduce risks
by design, material selection or substitution when technically or economically
feasible.
 Physical controls - Personal Protective Equipment - Serves as a barrier
between personnel and a hazard. It should be used when other controls do not
reduce the hazard to an acceptable level.
Supervising [p. 3]
o Conduct follow-up evaluations of the controls to ensure they remain in place and have
the desired effect. Monitor for changes, which may require further ORM. Take
corrective action when necessary.
101.3 Describe the applicability of the following safety standards and programs:
a. OPNAVINST 3500.39B, Operational Risk Management [ref. a]
 To establish policy, guidelines, procedures, and responsibilities per reference (a),
standardize the operational risk management (ORM) process across the Navy, and
establish the ORM training continuum.
249
OFFICER
101
b. EM-385, Safety and Health Requirements [ref. b]
 Purpose. This manual prescribes the safety and health requirements for all Corps of
Engineers activities and operations. This manual applies to Headquarters, US Army Corps
of Engineers (HQUSACE) elements, major subordinate commands, districts, centers,
laboratories, and field operating activities (FOA), as well as USACE and Naval Facilities
(NAVFAC) Engineering Command contracts. Applicability extends to occupational
exposure for missions under the command of the Chief of Engineers, whether
accomplished by military, civilian, or contractor personnel.
c. OPNAVINST 5100.23G, Navy Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Program Manual [ref. c]
 To affirm the Navy Safety and Occupational Health (SOH) Program for all Navy personnel
and implement the following Department of Defense (DOD) instructions:
a. DODI 6055.1 of 19 August 1998, Department of Defense Safety and Occupational
Health (SOH) Program.
b. DODI 6055.5 of 10 January 1989, Industrial Hygiene and Occupational Health.
c. DODI 6055.7 of 3 October 2000, Accident Investigation, Reporting, and Record keeping.
d. DODI 6055.11 of 21 February 1995, Protection of DOD Personnel from Exposure to
Radio frequency Radiation and Military Exempt Lasers (NOTAL).
d. 29 CFR Part 1926, Construction Safety Standards [ref. d]
 United States Department of labor construction safety standards.
 Calls out pretty much everything you can think of related to safety of construction, from
electrical, ladders, demolition, wood working tools, concrete, steel erection, motor vehicles,
welding, tools, MHE, WHE, CESE.
e. OSHA [ref. e]
 With the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, Congress created the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA) to assure safe and healthful working conditions for working
men and women by setting and enforcing standards and by providing training, outreach,
education and assistance.
 OSHA is part of the United States Department of Labor. The administrator for OSHA is
the Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health. OSHA's administrator
answers to the Secretary of Labor, who is a member of the cabinet of the President of the United
States.
250
OFFICER
102
102 DOCTRINE FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] National Defense Strategy
[b] Quadrennial Defense Review
[c] US Code (Jan 2006), Title 10, Subtitle A, Pt, 1, Ch. 6, Sec. 164
[d] JP 0-2 (Jul 01), Unified Action Armed Forces (UNAAF)
[e] JP 3-34 (Feb 07), Engineering Doctrine for Joint Operations
[f] JP 4-01.6 (Aug 05), Joint Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Joint Logistics Over the Shore
(JLOTS)
[g] NWP 4-04 (Dec 07), Naval Civil Engineering Operations
[h] NTTP 3-02.3M (Jan 04), Maritime Prepositioning Force (MPF) Operations
[i] NTTP 4-04.1M (Feb 08), Seabee Operations in the MAGTF
[j] OPNAVINST 3501.115E, ROC and POE for Naval Construction Force
[k] OPNAVINST 3501.93D, ROC and POE for NBG and Their Elements
[l] OPNAVINST 3500.38B (Jan 07), Universal Navy Task List (UNTL)
[m] MCWP 3-17 (Feb 00), Engineering Operations
102.1 Explain the purpose of the National Defense Strategy. [ref. a, pg. 1]
The NDS outlines the DoD's goals and strategy to act on and support the objectives of the National
Security Strategy. It provides a framework for further DoD strategic guidance. The NDS incorporates the
QDR and other lessons learned.
102.2 Explain the purpose of the Quadrennial Defense Review. [ref. b, pp. 1-8]
A legislatively-mandated review of DoD strategy and priorities
legislatively-mandated review of DoD strategy and priorities.
Will set a long-term course for DoD as it assesses the threats and challenges that the nation faces and
re-balances DoD's strategies, capabilities, and forces to address today's conflicts and tomorrow's threats.
Completed every 4 years, 20 year plan, 2010, 2014
102.3 Describe and discuss Combatant Commander tasking and force sourcing. [refs. c, ch. 6,
sec. 164, d, pp 1-8 to 1-9]
The Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff transmits to the Combatant Commanders the orders given by
the National Command Authority (NCA). The combatant commander exercises COCOM over forces
assigned or reassigned by the NCA. The majority of forces are apportioned to support the missions of
more than one combatant commander, thus requiring that combatant commanders continuously
coordinate with others to fully prepare for mission success.
102.1 Define and discuss Unified, Region and Functional Commander's roles, responsibilities and
chain of command. [ref. c, ch. 6, sec. 164, d, 1-8 to 1-9]
Unified Combatant Commands (six geographical commands and four functional commands)
USNORTHCOM, USSOUTHCOM, USEUCOM, USAFRICOM, USCENTCOM, USPACOM
USJFCOM, USSOCOM, USSTRATCOM, USTRANSCOM
The commanders of combatant commands exercise COCOM of assigned forces and are directly
responsible to the NCA for the performance of assigned missions and the preparedness of their
commands. Combatant commanders prescribe the chain of command within their combatant commands
and designate the appropriate command authority to be exercised by subordinate commanders.
102.2 Discuss the different units and capabilities of the following Army engineering categories:
[ref. e]
251
OFFICER
102
The U.S. Army maintains engineer forces that have the capability to perform most combat, general,
and geospatial engineering operations. Engineer units at the Brigade Combat Team (BCT) level and
below focus on combat engineering, and engineering units at the division level and above possess
general engineering capabilities.
Levels: Engineer Command (ENCOM), engineer brigade, BCTs, engineer battalion (w/ companies).
Core Engineer Units: Combat Engineer Units (sapper, mobility, and clearance companies) and
General Engineer Units (engineer support, bridge, horizontal and vertical companies).

Combat Engineer [pp. I-5 thru I-7, fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex A]
Focused on support to combat maneuver organizations at the tactical level and are designed to
participate in close combat as necessary

General Engineer (Construction Engineering) [pp. I-5 thru I-7, fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex A]
Comprised of bridging, support, and construction capabilities. Capable of constructing,
rehabilitating, repairing, maintaining, and modifying infrastructure. Through augmentation
baseline construction units can perform specialized task.

USACE [pp. I-5 thru I-7, fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex A]
United States Army Corps of Engineers. Provides for technical and contract engineering support,
integrating its organic capabilities with those of other Services, civil engineering, and all other
sources of engineering-related reachback support.
 Field Force Engineering, Forward Engineer Support Teams (FESTs):
i. FEST-A – planning/design, real estate acquisition and disposal, and contracting
ii. FEST-M – C2 for USACE teams, technical expertise (LNOs)

Specialized [p. IV-6, fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex A]
Provides for general and geospatial engineering capabilities at the operational and strategic levels
and for specific augmentation to the tactical level. Smaller than the core engineer units. Includes:
 Explosive Hazards Support
 Construction Support
 Infrastructure Support
 Geospatial Support
 United States Army Corps of Engineers-related Support
102.6 Discuss the different capabilities of the following Air Force engineering units: [ref. e, Fig. BE-1, app. B, Annex C]
U.S. Air Force engineers primary tasking is to enable rapid global mobility for airlift, bombers, fighters,
and to support other manned and unmanned aerial weapon systems. They are trained and equipped
to support all aspects of airfield operations. Air Force engineers are focused on general engineering,
but have limited combat engineering capabilities centered on the defense of deployed forces.
Deployable unit – Air and Space Expeditionary Task Force (AETF)
Both RED HORSE and Prime BEEF units are organized according to unit type codes (UTCs).
252
OFFICER
102
a. RED HORSE --- Rapid Engineer Deployable Heavy Operational Repair Squadron, Engineer.
Organized and deployed for austere, independent operation to execute heavy horizontal and
vertical construction. Deploys the entire squadron to a single area with the capability of its C2 hub
supporting multiple detachments.
b. Prime BEEF --- Prime Base Engineer Emergency Force. Site surveys; bare-base construction;
utility installation and maintenance; geospatial evaluations for airfield and bed-down facilities.
c. Specialized --- Air Force Civil Engineer Support Agency (AFCESA). Provides engineering
technical and contract support and training. Specialized airfield assessment and maintenance
teams; airfield damage repair; CBRN operations; EOD support.
102.7 Discuss the different capabilities of the following Marine Corps engineering units: [ref. e,
Fig. B-E-1, app. B, Annex D]
U.S. Marine Corps engineers’ primary tasking is combat engineering and general engineering in
support of Marine Air-Ground Task Forces (MAGTFs). This includes limited geospatial engineering
capabilities.
The U.S. Navy also provides engineering support, mainly via a NMCB, to enhance and complement
MAGTF general engineering support.
a. ESB --- Engineer Support Battalion. Organic to the MAGTF logistics combat element (LCE)
and provides combat engineering and general engineering support. Combat engineering support;
standard & non-standard bridging; EOD; bulk water and fuel systems; water purification; engineer
surveys; construction and maintenance of base camps; laundry and shower services; mobile
electric power; road construction; obstacle emplacement; breaching operations; and expeditionary
airfield construction.
b. MWSS --- Marine Wing Support Squadron. Organic to the aviation combat element (ACE) and
each Marine Air Wing (MAW). Internal airfield communications; weather services; expeditionary
airfield services; aircraft rescue and fire fighting; EOD; motor transport; field messing; medical
services; CBRN defense; and security. These functions allow the ACE to project its assets
ashore and generate sorties at a rate beyond that capable from sea-based platforms.
c. CEB --- Combat Engineer Battalion. Organic to the ground combat element (GCE) and
enhances the mobility, countermobility, and survivability of the division through combat and limited
general engineering support. Engineering recon; placing obstacle systems; breaching operations;
mine & countermine operations; demolitions; assault bridging; bridge construction and repair;
limited roadway construction and maintenance; temporary vertical & horizontal construction; and a
provisional infantry unit.
102.8 Discuss the purpose of the following documents in relation to NCF Doctrine:
a. JP 0-2, Unified Action Armed Forces --- provides basic doctrine and policy for unified action
and, together with Joint Publication 1, Joint Warfare of the Armed Forces of the United States,
serves as the capstone for all US joint doctrine. Specifies the authorized command relationships
and authority that military commanders can use, provides policy for the exercise of that military
authority, provides doctrine and principles for command and control, prescribes guidance for
organizing joint forces, and describes policy for selected joint activities.
b. JP 3-34, Engineering Doctrine for Joint Operations --- sets forth joint engineer doctrine to
govern the activities and performance of the Armed Forces of the United States in operations and
provides the doctrinal basis for interagency coordination and for U.S. military involvement in
multinational operations.
c. JP 4-01.6, Joint Tactics Techniques and Procedures for Joint Logistics Over the Shore --establishes joint doctrine for the conduct of joint logistics over-the-shore (JLOTS) operations
253
OFFICER
102
across the range of military operations. Includes procedures concerning the transition from
amphibious operations to a JLOTS operation.
d. NWP 4-04, Naval Civil Engineering Operations --- provides a single-source basic planning
document detailing doctrine, operational concepts, procedures for planning, and executing
engineering operations between U.S. Naval civil engineering forces and joint task forces. This
document also describes the employment and tasking of naval civil engineering forces conducting
contingency operations for a combatant commander.
e. NTTP 3-02.3M, Maritime Prepositioning Force Operations --- provides doctrine, tactics,
techniques, and procedures to plan and execute an MPF operation.
f. NTTP 4-04.1M, Seabee Operations in the MAGTF --- a single-source planning document
detailing doctrine; operational concepts; and tactics, techniques, and procedures (TTP) for
planning and executing naval construction force (NCF) engineering operations with the MAGTF.
g. MCWP 3-17, Engineering Operations --- provides doctrine and supporting tactics, techniques,
and procedures (TTP) for the planning and execution of engineer support to the MAGTF. This
document also provides general information on the numerous capabilities engineers bring to the
battle, from planning through to the execution of an operation.
102.9 Discuss the Naval Construction Force’s (NCF) role in support of JLOTS. [ref. f, p. II-4]
Support the primary responsibilities of U.S. Navy forces in LOTS and JLOTS operations, to include:
provide the appropriate forces and equipment, as required by the joint force commander; provide
forces w/ trained operators for use in JLOTS operations; provide potable water systems when
required; assist with causeway and pier construction in support of dry cargo discharge operations;
assist in beach party disembarkation efforts; and construct expeditionary facilities to support beach
operations.
102.10 Discuss the Naval Construction Force’s (NCF) role in support of a Joint Task Force (JTF).
[ref. g, pp. 4-1 thru 4-3]
Naval civil engineering forces provide joint engineering planning and operations execution across the
range of military operations for JTFs and supported commanders.
102.11 Define and discuss mission, capabilities, organization and concept of operations of the
following: [ref. g]
a. 1NCD/NCFC [pp. 2-1 thru 2-3] The 1NCD has been established to exercise command and
administrative control over assigned Regiments and Seabee Readiness Groups and reports to
COMLANTFLT/COMUSFLTFOR, COMPACFLT, and USEURCOM.
b. NCR [pp. 2-3 thru 2-4] Exercises administrative and operational control of two or more
NMCB’s or other NCF units. The NCR assists the NMCBs in achieving the highest possible
state of readiness to meet their disaster recovery, contingency, and wartime missions of
military construction support of the armed forces
c. SRG [p. 2-3] The SRG provides NMCB’s, while at home port, training to achieve the highest
possible state of readiness to meet their disaster recovery, contingency, and wartime missions
of military construction support of the armed forces.
d. ACB [pp. 2-17 thru 2-18] Commissioned naval units whose main function is to provide military
and amphibious construction support to the armed forces in military operations. Provides ship
to shore transport of fuel, materials, and equipment ISO amphibious ready group, MEF, and
MPF operations.
e. CBMU [pp. 2-8 thru 2-9] CBMU 202 and CBMU 303 are active duty commands with Command
Elements (CE) and active and reserve detachments located in several fleet concentration
areas.
Provide camp setup and camp maintenance support to Navy and Marine Corps forces ashore.
Continue CBU Fleet Hospital Mission.
254
OFFICER
102
Conduct construction readiness training (CRT) and Disaster Recovery/Consequence
Management (DR/CM) in support of Navy activities ashore.
Provide Forward Operating Base (FOB) facility and logistics support to designated Marine
Expeditionary Force (MEF), and MEF Engineer Group (MEG) Command Elements, and Naval
Special Warfare (NSW) Squadrons.
f. NMCB [pp. 2-4 thru 2-6] Primarily designed for construction and military support operations to
build advance base facilities in support of the armed forces. Functions include projects or repair
and operations of facilities and lines of communications during emergencies or under
conditions that demand immediate action.
g. UCT [p. 2-7] Specially trained units that construct, maintain, and repair underwater facilities.
Each UCT is capable of performing underwater construction tasks and surveying the sea
bottom to select the site for an underwater facility.
102.12 Discuss the primary and secondary mission tasks as they relate to Combat Engineering
(MOB, CMOB and Survivability) and Combat Service Support (General and Geospatial
Engineering). [ref. g, app. A-2-1 thru A-2-6]
Units across 1NCD are rated across combat support (CS) and combat service support (CSS)
functions. Unit capabilities are classified as a primary or secondary task and a subjective rating of the
unit’s capability is given.
i.
ii.
Combat Support (CS) (i.e. Combat Engineering Capabilities)
i.
General Tasks
ii.
Mobility Tasks
iii.
Countermobility Tasks
iv.
Survivability Tasks
Combat Service Support (CSS) (i.e. General and Geospatial Engineering Capabilities)
i.
General Tasks
ii.
Airfield Tasks
iii.
Base Camp Tasks
iv.
Infrastructure and Lines of Communication Tasks
v.
Seaport Tasks
vi.
Specialized Construction Tasks
102.13 Discuss the Naval Construction Force’s (NCF) role in support of MPF. [ref. h, pp. 3-2 thru 34, 8-15]
Provide the MAGTF a standardized and interoperable construction capability via a NMCB. NMCB
can move on-order with their FIE TOA and meet MPS off-load parties on-site to fully outfit and
become tasking ready.
Provide underwater engineering, construction, repair, and inspection via an UCT. UCT can also
arrive before MPS off-load to inspect piers, beaches, and anchorages for suitability, battle damage,
and obstructions before arrival and assembly operations.
102.14 Define the following terms and discuss how they apply to NCF operations within the
MAGTF and Navy ashore operations:
a. MEF --- Marine Expeditionary Force; Major war fighting element.
b. MEB --- Marine Expeditionary Brigade; Small-scale contingency response.
c. MEU --- Marine Expeditionary Unit, Special Operations Capable (SOC); Forward deployed crisis
response.
255
OFFICER
102
d. CE --- MAGTF Command Element; HQ – exercise C2 of ground, aviation & combat service
support forces.
e. GCE --- MAGTF Ground Combat Element; ground combat power – infantry, tanks, artillery,
engineers & recon.
f. ACE --- MAGTF Aviation Combat Element; composite aviation force – helicopters, jets, air
defense & support.
g. LCE --- MAGTF Logistics Combat Element; provides MAGTF with mission-essential support.
h. MSC --- Military Sealift Command; transportation provider for the DoD provides strategic sealift
movements.
i. MPF --- Maritime Prepositioning Force; task organization meant to introduce a MAGTF into an
area.
j. ESG --- Expeditionary Strike Group; amphibious ready task organization.
k. NBG --- Naval Beach Group; naval amphibious force command which includes an ACB.
l. NSE --- Naval Support Element; part of MPF operations – ACB a part of NSE; off-load and shipto-shore moves.
Figure 22 Corelation of Naval Construction elements to MAGTF's
102.15 Define the following mission areas:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
256
MOB – Mobility.
AMW – Amphibious Warfare.
CCC – Command, Control and Communications.
CON – Construction.
MOS – Missions of State.
FSO – Fleet Support Operations.
NCO – Noncombat Operations.
C2W – Command & Control Warfare.
EXW – Expeditionary Warfare.
FHP – Force Health Protection.
IO – Information Operations.
LOG – Logistics.
OFFICER
102
102.16 Describe and discuss what Operation Plans are and how they relate to your unit. [ref. i, pp.
5-1 to 5-5]
OPLAN. Any plan for the conduct of military operations prepared in response to actual and potential
contingencies. In the context of joint operation planning level 4 planning detail, a complete and
detailed joint plan containing a full description of the concept of operations, all annexes applicable to
the plan, and a timephased force and deployment data. It identifies the specific forces, functional
support, and resources required to execute the plan and provide closure estimates for their flow into
the theater. Deliberate planning for a potential mission – HHQ business.
102.17 Describe and discuss NMETL/JMETL. [ref. l, pp. 1-1 thru 1-3]
Navy Mission Essential Tasks List and Joint Mission Essential Tasks List. Single source documents that
provide a common language that commanders can use to document their command warfighting
requirements based as mission essential tasks (METs). The Universal Naval Task List’s (UNTL) tactical
level of war tasks are a compilation of Navy, Marine Corps, and Coast Guard tasks, written utilizing the
common language and task hierarchy of the Universal Joint Task List (UJTL). The UNTL is architecturally
linked to the UJTL, which includes
strategic-national (SN), strategic-theater (ST), and operational
(OP) levels of war tasks.
257
OFFICER
104
103 READINESS
References:
[a] NTTP 1-03.3 (Rev A), Status of Resources and Training System Joint Report-Navy (SORTS)
[b] COMUSFLTFORCOMINST/COMPACFLTINST 3501.3B, Fleet Training Continuum
[c] COMNECCINST 3501.1, Readiness and Cost Reporting Program (RCRP)
[d] COMFIRSTNCDINST 3501.3, NCF Status of Resources and Training System Joint Report – Navy
(SORTS) Readiness Reporting Guidance
[e] COMFIRSTNCDINST 3501.4 NCFC Fleet Response Training Plan
[f] PISTOL User Manual (https://sop.ahf.nmci.navy.mil)
103.1 Discuss the Status of Resources and Training System (SORTS) as it applies to the
following:
a. Primary Mission Areas [ref. a, p. 4-4]
Naval Warfare Mission Areas (primary & secondary). Unit primary mission areas are mission areas
which a unit must be fully capable of performing in order to carry out the wartime mission for which it
is organized and designed. SORTS provides a unit status assessment and primary mission areas are
accounted for/'measured' in SORTS. Assigned unit mission areas are broken down into specific
operational capabilities know as ROCs...NMCBs have four primary mission areas...Command,
Control and Communications (CCC); Mobility (MOB); Fleet Support Operations (FSO); and
Construction (CON)]
b. Resource Categories [ref. a, p. 4-4]
Used in SORTS to account for a unit's ability to perform the primary mission areas assigned. The
principal components are: personnel, supplies on hand, equipment status, and training.
c. Commander’s Assessment [ref. a, p. 4-45]
In addition to the objective overall SORTS rating reported, commanding officers will provide a
subjective assessment of their unit's ability to perform its currently assigned mission(s). The
commander's assessment of Percentage Effective (PCTEF) is a one digit rating of 1 through 4. CO's
will report a PCTEF and provide remarks to explain the basis for PCTEF status determination.
103.2 List and discuss the C-Ratings and M-Ratings. [ref. a, p. 4-2 thru 4-3]
C-Ratings (overall status category & resource status categories) --- the degree to which a unit is
capable of undertaking its assigned wartime mission(s); solely based on the organic resources under
the operational control of the unit; C1 ('fully ready') to C5 ('not prepared')
M-Ratings (mission area rating) --- indicates the degree to which a unit is capable of performing a
specific assigned primary naval warfare mission; M1 (possess resources & training to undertake a
specific primary mission area) to M5 (unprepared for a specific primary mission area)
103.3 Discuss the phases of the FRTP cycle for each NCF unit and the milestones within each
phase. [ref. b, pp. 3-1 thru 3-5, e, pp. 1-2 thru 1-4].
The Fleet Response Training Plan (FRTP) is a flexible and scalable training plan designed to meet
the requirements of the Fleet Response Plan. Every NCF unit FRTP consists of four phases --maintenance, basic, integrated and sustainment. [1] Maintenance - NCF units focus on
individual/team training, manning of personnel w/ right number of NECs, and establishing the base
org. [2] Basic - complete Unit Level Training (ULT) requirements, specialized schools,
team/construction training, FTX, qualifications and certifications - upon completion of basic units
designated Independent Unit Ready for Tasking (RFT) or Unit Ready for Mobilization (RFM). [3]
Integrated - combine unit staff actions into integrated operations with other forces - upon completion
of the integration phase units may be classified as Expeditionary Surge Ready (ESR) or Major
Combat Operations Ready (MCO-R). [4] Sustainment - Deployment period and post-deployment until
the maintenance phase begins again. Execute operations to carry out assigned tasking and maintain
proficiency.
258
OFFICER
104
Active Component NMCB specific FRTP milestones:
[1] Maintenance - re-org, individual prep
[2] Basic - 'C' schools complete, unit training complete (i.e. Bridge DET, etc.), unit exercises complete
(i.e. Embark 'meat hook', etc.), FTX, Ultra-C inspection and FEP assessment
[3] Integrated - RFT; integrated planning and training
[4] Sustainment - ESR/MCO-R; Ultra-S assessment, unit deployment, CART (Commanders
assessment readiness training) self-assessment and post-deployment
103.4 Discuss the purpose of the Readiness Cost Reporting Program (RCRP) and list the five
readiness indicators. [ref. c, p. 1-2]
Assess Navy unit readiness and through the use of DRRS-N comply fully with DoD reporting
requirements. RCRP displays and reports the readiness status of readiness indicators based on
Navy Mission Essential Tasks (METs). With DRRS-N units and HHQ are able to visualize the
readiness of subordinate units.
Readiness Indicators - PESTO - Personnel, Equipment, Supplies, Training and Ordinance
103.5 List and discuss the frequency of SORTS submission. [ref. d, encl. 1, p. 2-2]
NCF reporting units (NCRs, NMCBs, UCTs, CBMUs, NCFSUs) report monthly to their ISIC (Atlantic
Seabee units = 20th SRG) (Pacific = 31st SRG)
103.6 Discuss the purpose of PISTOL and its capabilities. [ref. f]
Personnel and Readiness Management System. Allows 1NCD units to track, manage and report
on personnel and readiness numbers through an online portal. Comprised of six components: Personnel,
Training Administration, Unit Organization, Logistics, Reports and System Administration. Admin and
Training departments can add and edit unit personnel into the system, manage skill attainment and
schedule classes, manage inventory items and report on unit numbers, qualifications or across a
timeframe.
259
OFFICER
104
104
104 ADMINISTRATION/LOGISTICS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] JAGINST 5800.7E (Jun 07), Judge Advocate General (JAG) Manual
[b] BUPERSINST 1001.39F, Administrative Procedures for Navy Reservists
[c] OPNAVINST 1001.20C (Mar 08), Standardized Policy and Procedures for the Active Duty for Special
Work (ADSW) Program
[d] The Fleet Training Management and Planning System (FLTMPS), Web Based System
<http://www.ntmps.navy.mil>
[e] BUPERSINST 1080.53 (May 09), Enlisted Distribution and Verification Report Users’ Manual
(EDVRMAN)
[f] NTTP 4-01.1 (May 07), Navy Advanced Base Logistics Operations
[g] NTRP 4-04.2.1 (Jan 07), Doctrinal Reference for the Naval Construction Force
[h] OPNAVINST 5450.46K, Naval Construction Force Policy
[i] NAVFAC P-2010, Naval Construction Force and Maritime Prepositioning Force
[j] NTTP 3-02.3M (Jan 04), Maritime Prepositioning Force (MPF) Operations
[k] JP 1-06 (Mar 08), Financial Management During Joint Operations
[l] A Handbook for Practical Financial Management Topics for the DoD Financial Manager (May 05)
[m] CJCSI 3511.01A (Oct 07), CJCS Joint Exercise Transportation Program
[n] NAVFAC Advanced Based Functional Component (ABFCVIEW), <https://abfcview.navfac.navy.mil/>
104.1 Discuss the main elements contained in a Judge Advocate General (JAG) investigation and
when to conduct an investigation. [ref. a, pp. 2-9 thru 2-22]
Preliminary Inquiry --- carry out on incidents occurring within, or involving personnel of, the command.
Then commanders should consult with a judge advocate when determining whether additional
investigation is necessary.
Administrative Investigations --- Command Investigation, Litigation-Report Investigation and Courts &
Boards of Inquiry.
For all admin investigations there must be written convening orders from the cognizant authority to the
investigative body. [1] Command Investigation - convened in writing; conducted by one or more DoN
persons; collects evidence by personal interviews, telephone inquiries, or written correspondence;
documented in writing; no hearing; may contain sworn statements. [2] Litigation-Report Investigation
- like [1], except; conducted under the direction and supervision of the cognizant judge advocate and
may not contain signed statements. [3] Courts and Boards of Inquiry - Convened by a GCMCA and
involves a hearing.
104.2 Describe the types of IG investigations [ref. a, 2-13 thru 2-22]
The purpose of an IG investigation is to obtain facts sufficient to enable responsible authority to
(1) determine whether allegations are substantiated and (2) decide what action, if any, should be
taken in response to substantiated allegations. Conceptually, responsive action may be divided
into three broad categories:
Corrective Action, steps to “fix the system”
Remedial Action
Disciplinary Action
104.3 Discuss the following terms as they pertain to the reserve component:
a. Active Training (AT) [ref. b, ch. 13, pp. 13-1 thru 13-3]
Annual training; limited periods of active duty (back to ID when complete); 12 to 14 days per FY;
scheduled by the CO. Authorized up to 17 days per FY, up to 29 depending on available funding.
b. Active Duty Training (ADT) [ref. b, pp. 13-1 thru 13-3]
Period of Active Duty to support specific training requirements (funded orders)
260
OFFICER
104
c. Active Duty Special Work (ADSW) [ref. c, pp. 1 thru 5]
Authorized tour of active duty; supports special projects, exercises and unplanned requirements
d. Individual Duty Training (IDT) [ref. b, pp. 12-1 thru 12-4]
Inactive duty training; drills; operational support and enhanced readiness; scheduled by the CO. 48
authorized drills per year.
e. Mobilization Orders [ref. c, pp. 1 thru 5, ref. d, pp. 22-1 thru 22-2]
Provides manpower to the active component for requirements above and beyond normal peacetime
operations
104.4 Discuss the purpose and capability of FLTMPS [ref. d]
Fleet Training, Management and Planning System. A web-based platform that integrates manpower,
personnel, training and education (MPT&E) information into a single reporting system. Units are able
to monitor and manage training requirements and manning, personnel and training status. Provides
instant access to the previously described information, so leadership can make sound management
decisions.
104.5 Discuss the purpose of the Enlisted Distribution and Verification Report (EDVR), including
the information which can be obtained from the following subjects: [ref. e]
a. Prospective Gains [p. 1-1]
Seabees who are under orders to report to your battalion for the next 10-month deployment (EDVR
section 1)
b. Prospective Losses [p. 2-1]
Seabee losses for your battalion; looks ahead 10-months (to coincide w/ your deployment) (EDVR
section 2)
c. Rating/Navy Enlisted Classification (NEC) Structure [p. 4-1]
Seabees by rate; NECs data listed as well (EDVR section 4)
d. EAOS [pp. 2-1 thru 2-2]
Lists expiration of active obligated service; command actions go from there...extension, reenlistment,
separate, retire...(EDVR section 2)
e. BA/NMP [pp. 5-1 thru 5-2]
Billets Authorized/Navy Manning Plan; another summary of unit personnel by big Navy numbers (EDVR
section 5)
104.6 Describe the elements of the RSO&I process. [ref. f, p. 3-5]
RSO&I --- the process of receiving forces in theater/forward deployed and shaping the arriving unit
into a ready and sustainable force; making an arriving unit a capable force ready for tactical
employment (get to work); meeting the tactical CDR or supported CDR's requirement for forces with
as little delay as possible; Reception, Staging, Onward movement and Integration (more than
anything else, a logistics process)
104.7 Describe and discuss the following terms as they apply to the NCF. [ref. g, pp. 1-2 thru 1-5]
a. TYCOM
Administrative, personnel, and operational training functions for a "type" of system within a fleet
(USFFC - NECC - 1NCD)
261
OFFICER
104
b. SYSCOM
Naval Facilities Engineering Command; sustainable support for Seabee units (& others) for
expeditionary capabilities and contingency response assistance; NFELC and NFESC
104.8 Discuss the Prepositioned War Reserve Management System (PWRMS) and how it is
utilized within the Naval Construction Force (NCF). [ref. h, sec. d, ref. i, ch. 3, ref. j, app. f]
TOA for reserve NCF units is managed under the PWRMS program. NCFSUs manage, maintain,
and inventory transportation, and construction equipment auxiliary assets, for both active and reserve
units, the latter under the Prepositioned War Reserve Material Stocks (PWRMS) program. NCF MPF
TOAs are PWRMS.
104.9 Discuss the Maritime Preposition Force (MPF) principles of strategy and their relationship in
support of the Marine Air-Ground Task Force (MAGTF). [ref. j, pp 1-1 thru 1-5]
Marine Air-Ground Task Force (MAGTF).
Directly supports national maritime strategy of protecting key naval checkpoints and sea lines of
communications. MPF MAGTF operation involves the airlift of MAGTF and Navy units with selected
equipment into an arrival and assembly area to join with equipment and supplies carried aboard
maritime prepositioning ships. MPF provides COCOMs with deployment flexibility through economy
of force (a forward-deployed MEU joining up with one maritime prepositioned ship or a MEF falling in
on all three MPSRONs). MPF allows for a rapid response to a crisis or contingency with a credible
operating force.
i.
Three Maritime Prepositioning Ships Squadrons (MPSRONs)
i.
MPSRON One – Mediterranean Sea – MEF II (North and South Carolina)
ii.
MPSRONs Two – Diego Garcia – MEF I (California and Arizona)
iii.
MPSRONs Three – Guam – MEF III (Hawaii and Japan)
104.10 Describe the following funding sources that can support NCF operations.
a. MILCON [ref. k, app. e, pp. e1-2] --- Military Construction. 5 yrs. Major (>$1.5M) & Minor (up to
$1.5M). Base facilities and land.
b. OM&N [ref. l, p. 170 --- Operations and Maintenance, Navy. 1 yr. Daily operations and expenses.
c. OPN [ref. l, p. 170] --- Other Procurement, Navy. 3 yrs. Purchasing equipment or conducting
modernization >$250K.
d. OMNR [ref. l, p. 170] --- Operations and Maintenance, Navy Reserve. 1 yr.
e. OPTAR [ref. l, p. 170--- Operating Target. Planning estimate per FY for unit afloat or department
ashore.
f. ERC [ref. m, encl. e] --- Exercise Related Construction. Unspecified minor construction outside the
U.S. (MILCON appropriation).
g. HA [ref. k, app. e, pp. e3-4] --- Humanitarian Assistance. Promote security interests of U.S. and HN.
h. HCA [ref. k, app. e, pp. e4] --- Humanitarian and Civic Assistance. Enhance operational skills of
U.S. armed forces (O&MN funds).
i. PH and IT [ref. m, app. c to encl. c] --- Port Handling, includes commercial contract expenses
to receive or dispatch cargo for an exercise at Port of Embarkation (POE) and Port of Debarkation
(POD) associated with Military Sealift Command (MSC). Inland Transportation funds purchase
approved point-to-point transportation service associated with the movement of exercise participants
and cargo,
j. CTP --- [ref. m, app. d to encl. c] Commercial Ticket Program I and j are parts of Combatant
Commander Exercise and Engagement (CE2) Account. supports individual commercial air travel
during exercise execution when military airlift or commercial air charter cannot satisfy the sponsoring
command’s transportation requirements
262
OFFICER
104
104.11 List the different echelons and the characteristics of the Table of Allowances (TOA) within
the NCF. [ref. n]
a. P-29, NCR Table of Allowance
Level 1 Sub Components (3)
i. Combat Operations Center – NCR COC
ii. Fly In Echelon – NCR FIE
iii. Support Module – NCR SPTM
b. P-25, NMCB Table of Allowance
NMCB (SMART) Level 1 Sub Components (7)
i. Command/Control Module – C2M
ii. Equipment Maintenance Module – EMM
iii. Fly In Echelon – FIE
iv. Seabee Construction Module – SCM (x3)
v. Seabee Sustainment Module – SSM
c. P-01A, PHIBCB Table of Allowance
a. Level 1 Sub Components (6)
i. ACB Command and Control
ii. ACB Equipment Maintenance
iii. ACB Medical
iv. ACB Assault Echelon (PGI)
v. ACB Sealift Support
vi. ACB Tent Camp Maint/Self Sustainment
d. TA-55, PHIBCB Table of Allowance
a. MPF Support of Naval Support Element and NBG Level 1 Sub Components (7)
i. MPF Container Ship
ii. MPF Fly-In-Echelon (x2)
iii. MPF Squadron One
iv. MPF Squadron Two
v. MPF Squadron Three
vi. MPF Tanker Ship (Bulk Fluids)
e. P-05, CBMU Table of Allowance
a. Standalone Component Type (No Sub Components/Echelons)
f.
P-35, UCT Table of Allowance
a. Level 1 Sub Components (4)
i. UCT Air DET Alfa
ii. UCT Air DET Bravo
iii. UCT Air DET Charlie
iv. UCT Sea Echelon
P-30 1NCD
E09 Combat camera
P47 Mob/training
TA57 MPF NMCB/NCR
263
OFFICER
107
105
105 COMMUNICATIONS/COMMUNICATIONS SECURITY (COMSEC) FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVFAC Advanced Based Functional Component (ABFCVIEW), <https://abfcview.navfac.navy.mil/>
[b] EKMS -1A, Communications Security Material Guide
[c] COMFIRSTNCDINST 2000.2, Communications Information Systems Policy and Procedures (CISAP)
[d] OPNAVINST 2400.20F, Electronic Environmental Effects and Spectrum Supportability Policy and
Procedures
[e] CJCSM 3122.03C, Joint Operations Planning and Execution System Vol. II, Planning Formats and
Guidance
[f] FM 11-6 (MAY 96), Talk-II SINCGARS
[g] Unit TAC SOP
105.1 List the communication gear in your unit's Table of Allowance (TOA). [ref. a]
105.2 Describe the following reporting requirements for COMSEC violations: [ref. b, pp. 274 thru
306]
a. Notifications --i.
Three categories of COMSEC incidents
i. Cryptographic
ii. Personnel
iii. Physical
ii.
Practices Dangerous to Security (PDSs) – PDSs, while not reportable to the national level
(NSA), are practices, which have the potential to jeopardize the security of COMSEC
material, if allowed to perpetuate.
iii.
Notification outside of the command must be given for the PDSs listed in ‘EKMS 1 Phase 4
CMS Policy and Procedures for Navy Electronic Key Management System Tiers 2 & 3’
Chapter 10.
b. Reports --i.
National COMSEC Incident Reporting and Evaluation System (NCIRES)
ii.
COMSEC incident reporting applicability:
i. Classified and unclassified COMSEC keying material marked or designated
CRYPTO or STU-III operational and seed key.
ii. Controlled Cryptographic Item (CCI) equipment.
iii. Removable media containing key or other EKMS information.
iv. Malicious codes/viruses on the EKMS system.
v. Classified COMSEC-accountable maintenance manuals, operating instructions,
and publications.
iii.
Types of COMSEC incident reports:
i. Initial – Submit this report for each COMSEC Incident. If all facts regarding the
incident are included in the initial report, it may be accepted as a final report by the
appropriate Closing Action Authority (CAA).
ii. Amplifying – Submit this report whenever significant new information is discovered
or is requested by the evaluating authority. This report may also serve as a final
report, if so accepted by the appropriate CAA.
iii. Final – Submit this report only if specifically requested by the appropriate CAA.
iv. Interim – If a final letter report is required but submission must be delayed because
local inquiries/investigations are ongoing, an interim report must be submitted
every 30 days until the final letter report is submitted.
iv.
Report precedence and timeframes are listed in ‘EKMS 1 Phase 4 CMS Policy and
Procedures for Navy Electronic Key Management System Tiers 2 & 3’ Chapter 9.
264
OFFICER
107
105.3 Describe the steps to obtain frequency assignments for your unit's communication gear.
[ref. c, pp. 7-1 thru 7-3; ref. d, pp. 1 thru 4]
Navy and Marine Corps activities use radio frequencies within the United States and Possessions
(US&P) per assignments made by the National Telecommunications and Information Administration
(NTIA). NETWARCOM obtains frequency assignments for Navy and Marine Corps operations in the
United States and Possessions (US&P) from the NTIA. For Navy and Marine Corps operations
outside the US&P, NETWARCOM obtains frequency assignments from each of the Combatant
Command (COCOM) Joint Frequency Management Offices (JFMOs). Frequency assignment
requests shall be initiated by system developers or testers, via the Systems Commands (SYSCOMs)
as soon as experimental (Stage 2) or developmental (Stage 3) spectrum certification is obtained and
test site data is known. Frequency assignments for operational (Stage 4) and/or training use will be
requested by operational personnel as operational mission location or exercise location dictates. C-E
transmitting equipment shall not be activated for any purpose without obtaining both spectrum
certification and an approved frequency assignment.
105.4 Describe and discuss the process to develop a unit level Communication Plan to include the
following: [ref. c, pp. 6-1 thru 6-6; ref. e, Annex K-1 thru K-4; ref. f, App. C; ref. g,]
a. CEOI --- Communications Electronic Operating Instructions. A single, comprehensive document
that contains frequencies, nets, Single-channel Ground and Airborne Radio System (SINCGARS)
information, and call signs/words for all participants. Station call signs and net frequencies will
provided by HHQ in the Basic Operation Order CEOI.
b. Frequency assignment --- Explained above. Request through HHQ.
c. Identifying all players --- Communications with HAS. Listing in the CEOI Guard Chart.
d. Crypto requirements --- Identify specific INFOSEC keying material and crypto systems to be
employed in support of the overall operation. Provide for control and reporting of compromises of
crypto material and Controlled Crypto-Graphic Items (CCI) incidents.
e. Equipment selection --- Based on what nets you are required to monitor and use per the
OPORD Annex K.
f. Maintenance requirement --- Check radio, handset, and crypto for proper set up. FITCAL: Feel,
Inspect, Tighten, Clean, Adjust and Lubricate.
g. Communicating with higher and adjacent --- Questions to address in the communications plan:
Who is Higher, Adjacent and Supporting? Location? How will you establish comms (TDN, VHF
voice, etc…)?
h. Ground Chart --- Not sure. Electronic equipment grounded (i.e. antennae).
265
OFFICER
107
106
106 GENERAL MILITARY TACTICS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NWP 3-07.2 (Mar 04), Navy Doctrine for Anti-Terrorism-Force Protection
[b] NTTP 3-07.2.1(Sep 06), Antiterrorism-Force Protection Program
[c] JP 3-10 (Aug 06), Joint Security Operations in Theater
[d] MCWP 3-16 (Nov 01), Fire Support Coordination in the Ground Combat Element
[e] MCRP 3-11.1A (Jul 98), Commander’s Tactical Handbook
[f] P-1162 (Oct 05), Construction Battalion Battle Skills Guide, Book 3, E7 and Above
[g] Unit TAC SOP
106.1 Discuss the topics addressed as part of a unit Anti-Terrorism Force Protection Plan. [ref. a,
p. 5-6]
CONOPS, preplanned responses, tactics, crisis management procedures, consequence management
procedures, baseline security posture, measures to increase security posture, reporting procedures and
C2 procedures.
106.2 Define the purpose of a force protection plan. [ref. b, p. 1-3]
Force protection plans should establish ATFP programs/practices that deter, detect, defend, mitigate and
recover from terrorist attacks; a baseline SOP.
106.3 List and discuss possible planning considerations in the development of a force protection
plan. [ref. b, pp. 2-6 thru 2-7]
Location, space limitations, SOFA/HN concerns, cultural matters, security needs, personnel
requirements, installation access, impact to mission operations, facility requirements, redundancy,
emergency action plans, cost, time to replace, crisis response, etc...
106.4 List and discuss the different factors that determine threat levels and how they relate to force
protection. [ref. c, pp. I-2 thru I-3, III-6]
THREAT LEVEL I
Examples: Agents, saboteurs, sympathizers, terrorists
Response: Unit, base, and base cluster self-defense measures.
THREAT LEVEL 2
Examples: Small tactical units, unconventional warfare forces, guerrillas.
Response: Self-defense measures and response force(s) with supporting fires. base mobile security
force or area security force
THREAT LEVEL III
Examples: Large tactical force operations, including airborne, heliborne, amphibious, infiltration
Response: May require timely commitment of tactical combat force,
Factors --- enemy activity, civilian support, weapons capabilities, threat organization, cultural
perspectives, technology availability, local police presence, local criminal activity, etc...
266
OFFICER
107
106.5 Discuss the role of the NCF engineer as a member of the Fire Support Coordination Center.
[ref. d, pp. 1-4 thru 1-10]
Special staff officers assigned to the FSCC - engineers provide battlefield analysis. This input aids in
terrain and route reconnaissance and gives guidance for targeting on bridges and structures. Assist in
Intelligence Preparation of the Battlespace (IPB) to aid in decision making
106.6 Explain and discuss passage of lines and relief in place. [ref. e, pp. 111 thru 119]
Relief in place --- (2 parties; Relieving Unit = NMCB 7 = suckers; Unit to be Relieved = NMCB 3 =
chumps = 0 man-days earned on a 1634 MD PEB project in 6 months) [1] Relieving Unit --- recon,
timeline of relief ops, location of command posts and services, liaison personnel/interaction, make
appropriate arrangements for turnover (defensive line, etc.) [2] Unit to be Relieved --- leadership
remains in-place and available, guides and liaisons provided, incoming brief/situation presented.
Passage of lines --- (2 parties; Passing Unit; Stationary Unit) [1] Passing Unit --- bypass when
possible, enemy situation, tactical employment of the friendly unit you're passing, comms with friendly
unit, security and fire plan support, conduct ops quickly, notify adjacent units [2] Stationary Unit --provide tactical situation, provide intel, link-up coordination.
106.7 Describe and discuss a unit level Fire Plan. [ref. f, task 3-6, pp. 3-21 thru 3-22]
Moving in on a new position = SAFE, remember comms as well. Use KOCOA for planning
considerations. Defense in depth!; tie in fire plan with adjacent units; barrier plan (including tactical,
protective & supplementary wire); primary, alternate & supplementary positions (establish good fire
positions and always improve); interlocking sectors of fire; plan FPLs or PDFs for machine guns and
build from there; cover dead space with indirect fire; fire support from HHQ or adjacent unit (on call
targets / CAS); use of LP/OPs; CBR detection system if needed.
106.8 Discuss the fundamentals of preparing an operation overlay and use of military symbols.
[ref. f, task 3-10, pp. 3-29 thru 3-43]
- Use an overlay - don't draw on the map, use a protractor and straight edge, mark two grid
intersections on the overlay and label, fine-tip markers, include a legend, write ops info (like check
points for a patrol, fighting positions for a defense, scheme of maneuvers for offensive mission, etc.)
- Use standard topographical and military symbols to indicate details on an overlay.
106.9 List the COC watch stations and describe the information contained in each. [ref. g]
- COC Watch Stations --- S1/S4 board, S2 board, S3 board, CBR board, WO/WC station, Comms
section, UMCC, briefing area and that ridiculous 'video wall' set-up is also a possibility (maybe a S3 /
CO desk or 'office')
- Board Info --- S1/S4 = HHQ & CO intent, standing orders, CCIRs, COC access list, battalion roster,
PERSTAT, CESE status, POL status, Resupply requests/status, Ammo status, CEOI, camp layout,
reports matrix, SOP, COC & ACOC watch bills, officer seniority list, POC contact list, Messages In &
Out /// S2 = weather data, incident wheel/list, Messages In & Out, Challenge and Password, reports
matrix, scaled map with enemy & friendly positions and actions, Significant Events tracker/data /// S3
= Project info, FRAGOs, battalion Level I, Project OPS and grid locations, watch stander SOP, Watch
Bill, TAC SOP, area map with details, HAS info, Convoy Manifests, Convoy & Patrol Overlays,
symbols/legend, patrol check points, Messages In & Out, reports matrix /// CBR = current CDM, NBC
messages, scale area map, plotting cones, symbols/legend, MOPP status, Messages In & Out.
267
OFFICER
107
107
107 CONTINGENCY OPERATIONS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NWP 4-04 (Dec 07), Naval Civil Engineering Operations
[b] JP 3-34 (Feb 07), Joint Engineering Operations
[c] NTTP 4-04.3 (Dec 08), Naval Contingency Engineering Operations
[d] MCWP 2-3 (Jul 04), MAGTF Intelligence Production and Analysis
[e] MCWP 5-1 (Sep 01), Marine Corp Planning Process
107.1 Discuss the function of the Liaison Officer (LNO) in a contingency environment. [ref. a, p. 310]
Contribute to a successful integrated operation. Provide NCF expertise and fill the role of a naval civil
engineering representative for planning, coordination and execution. Advise the sending (requesting) and
receiving (tasked) CDRs and assists the requesting CDR in determining requirements and priorities.
He/she fills the receiving CDR in on the sending commands capabilities and tactics.
Communicate!...passes information between commands.
107.2 Describe and discuss the role of the joint engineer throughout the following range of
military operations: [ref. b, pp. IV-7 thru IV-14]
a. Major operations and campaigns --- ensure theater access, sustain operations and forces, protect
forces, facilitate maneuver of forces
b. Crisis response and limited contingency operations --- Level of effort may be very high at the onset and
decrease as the operation continues. Tailor initial engineer assets and supporting follow-on engineer
operations. Includes: military support of homeland security, civil support, foreign humanitarian assistance,
noncombatant evacuation ops
c. Military engagement, security cooperation and deterrence --- support base defense, force protection,
and battle damage repair....general engineers may be required to perform selected combat engineering
tasks; deterrence - project power forward (a primary task of this is to establish advanced bases)
107.3 Discuss the role of the NCF in contingency engineer support to the Navy and Marine Corps,
other services and JTF’s. [ref. c, p. 1-24]
Reinforce and augment engineer capabilities (e.g. construct temporary and permanent base camps)
Augment supported commander with specialized capabilities as well (water well, construction diving ops,
design engineering reach back, etc...).
107.4 Describe Intelligence Preparation of the Battlespace (IPB) and the steps in the process. [ref.
d, pp. 5-1 thru 5-29]
IPB --- an analytical process utilized during military operations to identify, assess and reduce the effects
of uncertainties in the battlespace. IPB examines the threats and environment in the geographic area
where the mission will occur. The process supports the staff planning process and gives essential info to
the decision makers (the CDR). Operations and Intel should have a common focus when employing the
IPB process. Staffs should tailor the IPB process and the products produced (not every operation is a
combat conflict). With all planning...time is a factor...use an abbreviated IPB process if needed.
IPB Steps --- steps remain constant regardless of mission type & unit size...the application of the steps
vary with the operation.
[1] Define the Battlespace Environment - ID the physical space and features of the environment
[2] Describe the Battlespace Effects - determine how the environment affects enemy and friendly
operations (ex. terrain)
[3] Evaluate the Threat - determine the enemies current capabilities and its historic principles and TT&Ps
(ex. their weapons)
[4] Determine Threat Courses of Action - ID and develop likely enemy COAs that will impact mission
accomplishment
268
OFFICER
107
107.5 Describe the Marine Corp Planning Process. [ref. e, pp. 1-3 thru 1-4]
A planning effort that organizes the mission planning process into six logical steps. [1] Mission Analysis
[2] Course of Action Development [3] Course of Action War Game [4] Course of Action Comparison and
Decision [5] Orders Development [6] Transition. The MCPP provides the CO and his staff/unit, at all
levels, a method for planning actions, to develop a common mission understanding and communicate the
CDR's intent to the unit and/or subordinate units. MCPP allows for a concurrent, coordinated effort that
can be adapted to the situation at hand.
107.6 Describe and discuss a Command level OPORDER. [ref. e, pp. G-1 thru G-17]
Should follow the proper format...based on a CJCS manual...maintains a 'common' layout at all levels.
Set guidance on paragraph titling, paragraph subdivision outline format, paragraph break-up (SMEAC
order), page numbering, classification markings, order acknowledgement instructions,
Annexes/Appendices, CDR's authorization, etc.
269
OFFICER
108
108
108 EMBARKATION FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NTTP 4-01.5 (Aug 2008) Strategic Mobility and Unit Movement Operations
[b] CJCSM 3122.03C, Joint Operations Planning and Execution System Vol. II, Planning Formats and
Guidance
[c] COMFIRSTNCDINST 3100.1 (Aug 08), Movement Control Center
108.1 Define TPFDD and discuss its purpose when utilized in programming a strategic lift. [ref. a,
p. 2-6]
Time-Phased Force (&) Deployment Data
Purpose = to let everyone know that i want out of Romania and 'this' is when and what i intend to bring
with me --- includes unit information, PAX #, apprx weights, cargo to move (equipment/containers), cargo
weight, dimensions, cube, POC info, movement data/dates, POE/POD = origin/destination, waves/chalks
When utilized = 'request' doc to plan out and eventually execute a unit deployment/movement
108.2 Define JOPES and its role in the Embark process [ref. a, pp. 2-5 thru 2-6, b]
Joint Operations Planning and Execution System
Role = JOPES is the system used by DoD to conduct joint ops planning & execution --- in our case 1NCD
works with the regiment and our embark office to 'build' our movement requirement, assign tasks and
carry out --- management of force movements
108.3 Discuss what is found in the TUCHA data/files. [ref. a, p. 4-6]
Type Unit Characteristics, The file contains passenger and cargo information for generic types of units
108.4 Discuss the differences between a Special Assignment Airlift Mission (SAAM) and lifts of
opportunity. [ref. a, p. 6-13]
SAAM - movement requirement that needs special consideration (location, cargo, etc.)
Entire plane is dedicated to the load.
lift of opportunity - b/c of location, tasking, changes, etc. AMC or service air wing is available and able
to meets the movement needs of other unit.
Ability to put parts of loads onto a plane that isn’t completely full.
108.5 Discuss the Embarkation Officer duties within your unit. [ref. a, p. 1-11]
Responsible to the CO for the orderly and efficient embarkation of the Battalion...Know the location and
condition of supplies and CESE...Coordinate with the S3/Operations all Battalion movement
requirements...Ensure Embark organization is properly staffed and trained to carry out their
duties...Coordinate and manage the Battalion MOCC during homeport and
deployment...Prepare/Validate/Update all load plans and supervise movement loading
operations...Maintain MOCC and Embark files...Ensure that all DETs/DFTs that require embark support
are assigned a qualified embark staff member...Work with UMCC to coordinate and supervise all
Battalion movements...Should work closely with the A6 and S4 [if you are lucky fellow JO's, who are
working as MOCC watch officers, will cover you and run interference with the command element when
the Battalion's '48 hr' mount-out evolution to Haiti has stretched to 4 days]
108.6 Discuss the different types of strategic lift capabilities for sea, land, and air. [ref. a, ch. 6
thru 8]
For a NMCB --Sea (MSC / MPF) - for bulk loads (TOA) not dependent on rapid timelines; prepositioned elements
provide for rapid contingency response (MPF = MAGTF)
Land (USTRANSCOM; roadways and rail) - Almost all embark evolution includes some land transport
(convoys organic to NMCB!)
270
OFFICER
108
Air (AMC) - primary means of moving PAX to & from deployment sites; PAX, CESE and non-CESE TOA
movements
All depend on embark locations, movement timeline, cargo load. (
108.7 Explain the Movement Control Center (MCC) responsibilities [ref. c, encl. 3]
UMCC (SRG) controls and coordinates organic, DoD and commercial transportation, scheduling and
other logistics support for assigned units (NMCBs) during marshalling and embarkation. Tasked by the
Force Movement Control Center (1NCD).
108.8 Explain the Unit Movement Control Process [ref. c, pp. 1-13 thru 1-16]
Over simplified = Establish need (unit request / deployment) - formulate requirement (TPFDD / UDL) approval chain blessing (operational need, etc.) - obtain funding (parent command HHQ or other) - assign
tasking (i.e. SDDC drafts movement plan to execute) - execute plan (redeployment)
271
OFFICER
109
109
109 CIVIL ENGINEER SUPPORT EQUIPMENT (CESE) FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVFAC Advanced Based Functional Component (ABFCVIEW), <https://abfcview.navfac.navy.mil/>
[b] NAVFAC P-307 (Jun 06), Management of Weight Handling Equipment Maintenance and Certification
[c] COMFIRSTNCDINST 11200.2, Naval Construction Force Equipment Management Instruction (Red Book)
109.1 Discuss the primary capabilities of each principle end item of CESE in your unit's TOA. [ref. a]
Table 15 TOA Vehicles. FOR REFERENCE ONLY, numbers current as of Jan 2012, by March they had changed
HMMWV
M1097A2
HMMWV
M1043A2
HMMWV M1151
HMMWV M1152
cargo
HMMWV M1165
4 seat
272
2 seat Cargo
Armament
Carrier
Armament
carrier
Truck Cargo
4X4
Command and
control
Truck
Maintenance
Utility 4X4
2
2
1
1
1
MC
X3
SC
TOA
MCA
X3
Aut
o
Picture
MH
Weight
FIE
Cost
AP
Details
SLRP
ABFC Name
1
1
1
1
1
$65,385
$81,284
9000 lb
$159,724
7500 lb
$146,257
7500 lb
$153570
$65,104
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
OFFICER
109
HMMWV AMB
Heavy
1
1
1
1
1
1
$70,000
MTVR MK28
Truck Fuel MTVR
MK28CA1
Truck Cargo 7T
MTVR MK28A1
Truck, Dump 7
ton MTVR MK
30A1
Truck Tractor
MTVR MK31A1 7
ton
2
7 ton Field
service MTVR
MK28C
7 ton 2000 gal
fuel
$307,144
Cargo
$315,023
Dump truck
7 TON MTVR
MK30
W/WINCH
2
.
33940 lb
$346,650
1
30955
lbs
31000
lbs
4
1
2
3
4
1
$304,004
28000
Tractor W/O
Winch
2
$365,926
MTVR MK 36
1
7 ton MTVR
Wrecker
273
2
$662,869.
1
4
OFFICER
Lowboy
109
55ton semi
trailer
20870 lb
1
$64,635.00
2
2
4
1
2
2800 lb
Dolly
Dolly trailer
conversions
1
$11,750.00
14040 lb
Semitrailer Stake
Trailer Bolster
Trailer tank
Construction
Truck, asphalt
distributor
1
Semi Stake 34
T
13 ton
$75,456.00
$37,732.00
400 gallon
stainless steel
$22,251
2000 gal 7 ton
MTVR
$398,324
2
1
1
1
1
MTVR Cargo with Non Oshkosh
Add on kit.
7000 gal water
dist
2
2
1
1
1
$420,000
Distributor Water
MTVR MK28CA1
2000 gallon
1
2000 gal 7 ton
MTVR
750 CFM air
compressor
274
$283,144
$55,830.00
.
1
1
OFFICER
109
250 CFM air
compressor
1
$19,756.00
$217,839.0
0
Ditching macine
Excavator
crawler
mounted
1
1
1
1
1
$271,166.0
0
track loader
1
2.5 cubic yard
1
$276,731.0
0
29135
lbs
Loader, Scoop
Wheel 2.5 CY
1
2.5 cubic
yards
$178,870.0
0
Loader Scoop
1
5 Cubic yard
275
2
$215,859.0
0
OFFICER
109
roller
1
1
3
3
1
2
1
$92,634.00
scraper
14-20 cubic
yard 330 hp
$566,357.0
0
tractor crawler
bulldozer 200
hp, winch, cab
D7 size
$346,080.0
0
tractor crawler
1
Bulldozer 125
HP
D6 Size
$226,704.0
0
Backhoe
Service truck
276
1
2
loader
backhoe 1.3
CYD 93 HP 4X2
Lubricator,
servicing
1
$136,702.0
0
$41,150.00
1
OFFICER
Pumper
Pumper
pumper
sweeper
109
pump, water
33,000 GPH
10,000 GPM
10 ft lift
reciprocating
100 GPM
Magnetic,
wheel, towed
Waterwell rig
Grader Road
6X4 open
canopy
Grader Road 6X4
12 ft Blade
Scarifier
1
$22,675.00
1
2
$35,750.00
1
$11,943.00
1
$8,700.00
$720,830.0
0
1
1
1
$78,880.00
30700 lbs
2
$246,618
Crane
1
40 ton 2
engine winch
$509,101.0
0
910 lbs
Concrete Mixer
Welder
1
11 cubic foot
300 Amps
$8,921.00
$35,834.00
Generator set
1
15 KW
1
$26,340.00
Generator set
2
30 KW
277
2
$25,565.00
2
OFFICER
109
Floodlight set
2
2
$10,626.00
Auger Earth
Truck
mounted
MTVR
$215,000.0
0
2
Saw radial
woodworking
$40,000.00
$242,581.0
0
Shop semitrailer
1
1
MH
E
Truck forklift
4000 lb
1
1
1
4K forklift
0
1
12 K forklift
278
2
1
OFFICER
279
109
OFFICER
109
109.2 Discuss the following aspects of the crane program: [ref. b]
a. Maintenance [sec. 2]
Maintenance inspections shall be performed at the frequencies and in the detail specified
in this section. Personnel performing maintenance inspections shall be trained and
qualified as inspectors per section 13. In general, inspections shall consist of observing
the functioning of the specified components and parts before, during, and after operation.
Examination shall be by sight, sound, touch, and, as necessary, instrumentation,
nondestructive testing, and disassembly.
b. Certification process [sec. 3]
The Commanding Officer is responsible for ensuring safety within the activity. He/She
shall designate the certifying official(s) who shall ensure the activity's cranes are
inspected, tested, and certified in accordance with this section. Certifications shall be
based on the condition inspection and load test as prescribed herein. It is the purpose of
the condition inspection to ensure that the overall structural, mechanical, and electrical
components of the equipment have been maintained in a safe and serviceable condition
and are functioning properly. It is the purpose of the load test to ensure by controlled
operation with prescribed test loads that the equipment is capable of safely lifting and
moving the rated load through all design motions. These inspections and tests shall be
performed by technically competent inspection and test personnel under the direction of a
designated test director. Upon successful completion of the condition inspection and load
test, a Certification of Load Test and Condition Inspection shall be signed by the test
director, inspection personnel, and the certifying official.
c.
Operator qualification and testing [sec. 7]
A physical examination by a licensed health care professional is required, completion of
Crane Safety Course with written examination, Specific crane written examinations,
Performance tests. Testing shall occur in a simulated work environment, but never a
d. Lifting operations [sec. 10.4]
Lifting operations shall be classified into two basic categories, complex lifts and non-complex
lifts.
10.4.1 Complex Lifts. These are lifts with a moderate to high level of risk involving: a.
Hazardous materials, e.g., poisons, corrosives, highly volatile substances, etc. This does not
include materials such as oxygen, acetylene, propane, diesel fuel, or gasoline in cans, or
tanks that are properly secured in racks or stands designed for lifting and transporting by
crane.
Note: Lifting of ammunition and explosives shall be in accordance with NAVSEA OP-5 in lieu
of this publication.
b. Large and complex geometric shapes.
c. Lifts of personnel.
d. Lifts exceeding 80 percent of the capacity of the crane's hoist (e.g., main hoist, whip hoist)
planned for use (lifts exceeding 50 percent of the hoist capacity for a mobile crane mounted
on a barge). For variable rated cranes, this shall be at the maximum anticipated radius
planned for use. (Lifts with jib cranes, pillar jib cranes, fixed overhead hoists, and monorails
are excluded. Lifts of test weights during
a. maintenance or testing when directed by a qualified load test director are excluded.)
e. Investigation and reporting or crane and rigging accidents [sec. 12]
In addition to the investigation and reporting requirements of OPNAV Instructions 5102.1 and
5100.23, activities shall investigate and report accidents in accordance with this section.
There are two general categories of accidents as defined below. Crane accidents are those
that occur during operation of a category 1, 2, 3, or 4 crane. Rigging gear accidents are those
280
OFFICER
109
that occur when gear covered by section 14 is used by itself in weight handling operation i.e.,
without category 1 through 4 cranes. Accidents involving the operation of material handling
equipment or equipment covered by NAVFAC P-300 are not included
f.
281
Training and qualification [sec. 13]
OFFICER
109
109.3 List and discuss the components of the MONTHLY CESE REPORT. [ref. c, pp. 1-23 thru 128]
All 1NCD units need to submit a monthly CESE/MHE by COB on the fifth day of the following month.
Components --- Deadlined CESE - date, part, JSN, order status. Availability percentage (and change
from last report). CESE pending disposition and disposed. Organic & Augment number. IEM numbers.
PMS numbers and supply system orders (and change from last report). Maintenance/ part costs and fuel
numbers w/ cost. Equipment utilization and MHE usage number. Mishap information and comments.
109.4 Discuss CESE condition codes. [ref. d, app. c]
A - Serviceable (issue w/out qualification)
F - Unserviceable (Repairable)
G - Unserviceable (Incomplete)
S - Unserviceable (Scrap)
1 - Unused-Good
2 - Unused-Fair
3 - Unused-Poor
4 - Used-Good
5 - Used-Fair
6 - Used-Poor
7 - Repairs Required-Good
8 - Repairs Required-Fair
9 - Repairs Required-Poor
X - Salvage
S - Scrap
Full condition code definitions are listed in the COMFIRSTNCDINST 11200.2.
Example: DET Romania's 15 ton tractor truck (involved in CESE mishap earlier this month).With a little
effort on our part we've helped turn this outdated International 15T marvel into a truck frame with a
snapped intermediate axle, bent chassis and cracked engine block equal to the "SS" condition code,
which is just above 'worthless'. For official purposes, "SS" equals 'Material that has no value except for
its basic material content.'
282
OFFICER
110
110 WEAPONS FUNDAMENTALS
References:
[a] NAVFAC Advanced Based Functional Component (ABFCVIEW), <https://abfcview.navfac.navy.mil/>
[b] COMFIRSTNCDINST 8370.1A (May 08) Standard Small Arms and Crew-Served Weapons Maintenance and Mgt Procedures For the NCF
[c] OPNAVINST 5530.13C (Sep 03), Department of the Navy Physical Security Instruction for Conventional Arms, Ammunition, and
Explosives
[d] NAVSEAINST 8370.2A (May 03), Small Arms and Weapons Management Policy and Guidance Manual
[e] NAVSEA OP5 Vol. 1 Seventh Revision, Ammunitions and Explosives Safety Ashore
110.1 List the weapons systems found in your units Table of Allowance (TOA). [ref. a]
Name
Number
Unit
FIE
P-25
SLRP
P-25
OPP
M16 A3
M4
8
M-203
1
283
27
X3
P-25
AP
P-25
MP
P-25
MB
Basic
P-25
FIE
67
548
420
160
6
41
40
P-25
MH
Heavy
P25
MCA
125 AD
X3
P-25
MC
125
Core
OFFICER
110
M-203A1
20
M-9
4
M-500
M-240B
M2
284
6
20
145
175
1
3
20
40
2
6
8
28
2
4
12
4
4
2
OFFICER
MK-19
AT-4
M18A1
Claymore
285
110
2
4
12
2
OFFICER
110
110.2 Describe the control and accountability of the following:
a. Weapons --- [ref. b, pp. 5-1- 5-10, ref. l, pp. 5-2 thru 5-3] Full monthly inventory by count and full
quarterly inventory by serial number.
b. Ammunition and Explosives [ref. c, pp. 5-3 thru 5.4] AA&E --- Reporting through Conventional
Ammunition Integrated Management System (CAIMS). Full monthly counts and at turnover.
Activities that possess arms and/or AA&E need to have properly trained personnel and a training program
in-place. Receipt, dispatch, inventory, adjustments and reporting shall be taught and reviewed. CO's will
designate Weapons Officers and AA&E managers in writing. Such individuals will oversee and ensure
accountability of allowances and management of requisitions. Must also follow through with proper
disposal and demilitarization procedures.
110.3 Describe the transportation requirements for the organic and unit movements of arms,
ammunition and explosives. [ref. c, pp. 6-7 thru 6-8]]
Level of physical security protection varies with the FPCON status at the movement origin, along the
route and at the destination...Explosive drivers are required for all off-station AA&E movements...said
explosive drivers must maintain 2-way comms with origin & destination installations and law
enforcement/emergency response along the route...Armed guard surveillance is subject to local
command policy...EOD & MWD off-station explosive transport is g2g...CO's may authorize transport of
small arms and ammunition for training (or other cases)...Weapons and ammunition must be in the
custody of a designated individual...POVs are acceptable if allowed by the CO (properly locked and
stowed)...OPREP-3 Navy Blue incident report (within 48 hrs.).
110.4 Discuss physical security considerations for storing arms, ammunition and explosives. [ref.
c, pp. F1-F12]
Screening of persons with AA&E duties...proper storage space...separate private and government
AA&E...security patrols adjust to FP level...contingency plans in-place...intrusion detection system
(maintenance)...logs used and maintained...back-up power (redundancy)...periodic tests/training...guard
checks...physical locks...patrol security SOPs up-to-date...react force to alarm...security personnel
properly trained at their job...emergency actions practiced...comms at AA&E locations...facility key
control...facility surveys completed on a scheduled basis...exterior fences...random inspections...escorts.
110.5 Describe and discuss special reporting requirements for missing, lost, or stolen arms,
ammunition or explosives. [ref. c, pp. 7-1 thru 7-3, ref. d, p. 7]
Missing, lost or stolen AA&E requires a thorough investigation to determine the case circumstances and
fix the resulting issues...Before any loss can be attributed to an inventory or accountability discrepancy, it
must be determined through investigation that the loss was not the result of theft or
misappropriation...AA&E theft or suspected theft will be relayed to the local NCIS office...if NCIS declines
to investigate a missing AA&E case the command security officer will investigate...investigation findings
must be reported in writing
Common core questions not in the 74 PQS
101.4 Explain when different types of eye protection are required and where you can find the standards
for design, construction, testing and use. [ref. a, ch. 20, pp. 19-2 thru 20-2]
286